Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

© Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.

Part Number: 65900010
 Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
Part Number: 65900010-10

Publication Revision: B
Software Version : 7.0

Before using the equipment, please read this manual.

© 2015 Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.

This publication and the information contained herein is and remains the intellectual
property of Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. Northrop Grumman Sperry
Marine B.V. provide a limited licence for the user to reproduce this material for their
own internal purpose and use, but not for distribution to third parties. Reproduction
of this material for resale or commercial gain is expressly prohibited. Northrop
Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. are not responsible for any loss or damage of any
nature or kind whatsoever that may arise from either the use of this publication or its
reproduction.
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Intentionally Blank

65900010 ii
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Warnings and Cautions

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The features, functionality and capability which are described in this
manual are not necessarily present in all versions or configurations of the
VisionMaster FT system.

WARNING: Lethal Voltage Hazard

WHEN ACCESS COVERS ARE REMOVED, LETHAL VOLTAGES MAY BE

EXPOSED. SOME CAPACITORS USED IN THE EQUIPMENT TAKE
SEVERAL MINUTES TO DISCHARGE THEIR STORED VOLTAGES AFTER
SWITCH OFF; THIS IS A LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. ALWAYS SET THE
SUPPLY SWITCH-FUSE TO OFF AND REMOVE THE FUSES, BEFORE
REMOVING THE ACCESS COVERS OF THE EQUIPMENT.

WARNING: Health Hazard

WHEN CLEANING THE INSIDE OF THE EQUIPMENT, TAKE CARE NOT

TO INHALE DUST. THE DUST IS A TEMPORARY HEALTH HAZARD,
DEPENDING ON INDIVIDUAL ALLERGIES.

WARNING: Radiation Hazard

KEEP OUTSIDE THE HAZARD ZONE AROUND AN ANTENNA OR OPEN

WAVEGUIDE RADIATING POWER. REFER TO THE TABLE BELOW FOR
HAZARD ZONES. WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO WORK ON THE SCANNER
UNIT, MAKE SURE THAT RADAR IS SWITCHED OFF, AND THAT BOTH
THE MAINS ISOLATOR AND THE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT ARE
TURNED TO THE OFF POSITION.
NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY INTO AN OPEN WAVEGUIDE.
RADAR AND OTHER FORMS OF RF RADIATION CAN CAUSE CARDIAC
PACEMAKERS TO MALFUNCTION. IF YOU USE A CARDIAC
PACEMAKER AND SUSPECT A MALFUNCTION, LEAVE THE VICINITY OF
THE RADAR SYSTEM IMMEDIATELY AND SEEK MEDICAL ADVICE.

Most countries accept that there is no significant radiation hazard at RF

power density levels of up to 100W/m2 (10mW/cm2).

65900010 iii
Warnings and Cautions Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Hazard Zones
2
Antenna Length 100 W/m 50 W/m2 10 W/m2
1.2 m X-Band 1.7 m 8.5 m 17 m

1.8 m X-Band 1.05 m 5.25 m 10.5 m

2.4 m X Band 0.75 m 3.75 m 7.5 m
2.7 m S-Band 0.73 m 3.65 m 7.3 m
3.7 m S-Band 0.55 m 2.75 m 5.5 m

CAUTION: Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESSDs)

This equipment contains ESSDs. Take care not to damage these devices
by discharge of electrostatic voltages.

CAUTION: Anti-Virus Protection

Before connecting an external device such as a USB memory

stick, or external media such as a CD or DVD to the VisionMaster
PC it is important that the external device/media should first be
scanned with a recognised virus and malware scanning program
that includes up-to-date virus definitions. Also, the external
device/media should be reserved for use with VisionMaster PCs,
with use on other computers kept to an absolute minimum.
Care should be taken to ensure that any PCs (e.g. laptops) that
have been previously connected to other networks are subject to
the same checks as external media prior to being connected to the
network on which VisionMaster PCs are connected.

iv 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Preface

PREFACE
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
The structure of this manual and the design of the pages can help you to
find the information that you need. Consistent presentation techniques are
used throughout the manual, to make it easy to use.

Depending on the composition and configuration of your

installation, not all of the facilities presented in this User Guide may
be applicable to your system.

This manual is intended to be used by the VisionMaster FT operator and is

divided into the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1 - Overview
Chapter 2 - Getting Started with Radar
Chapter 3 - Basic Operation of Radar
Appendix A - Operational Functions specific to
Multi-node and Client/Server Systems
Chapter 4 - Sensor Management
Chapter 5 - Presentation, Motion, Vector and Trail Modes
Chapter 6 - Navigation Tools
Chapter 7 - Alerts
Chapter 8 - Routes
Chapter 9 - Electronic Range and Bearing Lines
Chapter 10 - Targets
Chapter 11 - Radar
Chapter 12 - Charts
Appendix A - Chart Datum Codes
Chapter 13 - Brilliance
Chapter 14 - System

Annex A - SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer Detection

on X-Band Radar

Annex B - Static Site

Glossary

Your system may include optional features or purchased features that are not
described in this manual. For information on these optional features, refer to
Supplementary Features User Guide, 65900014.

65900010 v
Preface Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

NOTICE
Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. have a policy of continuous development.
This may lead to the equipment described in this manual being at variance with
equipment manufactured after its publication.

vi 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table of Contents

Table of Contents
PREFACE ................................................................................................ v

Chapter 1 Overview
Hardware Configurations ........................................................................... 1-1
Interswitched System................................................................................. 1-4
Multi-Node System .................................................................................... 1-6
Dual Radar – Single System ..................................................................... 1-7
Dual Radar – Interswitched System .......................................................... 1-8
Dual Radar Features ................................................................................. 1-9
Client Server Radar System .................................................................... 1-10
Product Types.......................................................................................... 1-11
Applicable Features ............................................................................ 1-12
Features common to all Product Types.............................................. 1-13
Features available to CAT 1 Radar/Chart Radar and
CAT 2 Enhanced Radar/Chart Radar................................................. 1-16
Features available to Chart Radar (CAT1C & Enhanced CAT2C) .... 1-17
Total Watch.............................................................................................. 1-18
Information on Sensor Inputs to the System ........................................... 1-19
Compass Input ................................................................................... 1-19
Log Input ............................................................................................. 1-19
Position Input ...................................................................................... 1-19

Chapter 2 Getting Started with Radar

System Controls ........................................................................................ 2-2
Control Panel ........................................................................................ 2-2
Monitor Controls ................................................................................... 2-4
Power On/Off ........................................................................................ 2-4
System Start-Up ........................................................................................ 2-5
Switching on the System ...................................................................... 2-5
Software Start-Up ................................................................................. 2-6
Setup Procedures ................................................................................. 2-7
System Security ......................................................................................... 2-8
Standby Mode............................................................................................ 2-9
Transmit Mode ......................................................................................... 2-10
Standby/Transmit Mode in Dual Radar ................................................... 2-10

65900010 vii
Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Screen Layout for Widescreen Display ................................................... 2-11

Using the Cursor ...................................................................................... 2-12
Cursor Graphics.................................................................................. 2-12
Online Help .............................................................................................. 2-14
Accessing Context Sensitive Help ...................................................... 2-14
Accessing the Help Guide .................................................................. 2-14
On-Screen Keyboard .......................................................................... 2-15
Accessing Tool Tips ................................................................................. 2-16
Operator Messages ................................................................................. 2-17
Action Required Messages ................................................................. 2-17
Operator Messages ............................................................................ 2-17
System Shut Down .................................................................................. 2-18

Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Radar

Selecting Transmit Mode ........................................................................... 3-2
Selecting Transmit Mode in an Interswitched System.......................... 3-2
Selecting Transmit Mode in a Client Server Radar System ................. 3-3
Returning to Standby Mode .................................................................. 3-3
Dual Radar – Transmit and Video Mode Selection ................................... 3-4
Selecting Transmit Mode ...................................................................... 3-4
Video On/Off Control ............................................................................ 3-4
Status Area ................................................................................................ 3-5
Accessing Main Menu and Sub Menu Functions ...................................... 3-6
Sub Menu Selection and Navigation Bar ................................................... 3-7
Navigating to previous sub menus ....................................................... 3-7
Cursor Readout.......................................................................................... 3-8
Position .................................................................................................... 3-10
Range Scales........................................................................................... 3-13
Range Rings ............................................................................................ 3-14
Sensor Data Display ................................................................................ 3-15
Caption ............................................................................................... 3-15
Readout .............................................................................................. 3-15
Data Source ........................................................................................ 3-16
Stabilisation Options ........................................................................... 3-16
Multi-node System .............................................................................. 3-16
Off Centre, Pan and Goto ........................................................................ 3-17

viii 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents

Off Centring Own Ship........................................................................ 3-17

Panning .............................................................................................. 3-18
Goto .................................................................................................... 3-19
Centre & Maximum View Options............................................................ 3-21
Centring the Video Display ................................................................. 3-21
Positioning the picture for Maximum View ......................................... 3-21
Heading Line, Beam Line and Stern Line ................................................ 3-22
Own Ship Symbols .................................................................................. 3-24
Minimised Symbol .............................................................................. 3-24
Outline Symbol ................................................................................... 3-24
Custom Symbol .................................................................................. 3-25
Own Ship Vector................................................................................. 3-25
Predicted Vector ................................................................................. 3-26
Radar Settings ......................................................................................... 3-27
Dual Radar Interswitch Settings ......................................................... 3-27
Radar Settings on Client/Server .............................................................. 3-28
Radar Transmission Pulse Length .......................................................... 3-29
Radar Transmission Pulse Length on Dual Radar ............................. 3-29
Chart/Radar Maps View & Chart Database Selection ............................. 3-30
AIS Input and Filter Button ...................................................................... 3-31
CPA Button .............................................................................................. 3-31
Video Processing Controls ...................................................................... 3-32
Manually Adjusting Video Gain and Anti-Clutter Controls .................. 3-32
Enhanced Video Mode ....................................................................... 3-34
Dual Radar Video Processing Controls ................................................... 3-35
Radar Fine Tuning ................................................................................... 3-36
Manual Fine Tuning Adjustment ......................................................... 3-37
Radar Fine Tuning on a Dual Radar........................................................ 3-38
Synthetics Button ..................................................................................... 3-39
Coast Button ............................................................................................ 3-39
Trial Manoeuvre ....................................................................................... 3-40
Adjusting Trial Manoeuvre Parameters .............................................. 3-40
Delay Countdown ............................................................................... 3-42
Displaying the Trial Manoeuvre .......................................................... 3-42
Display of Vectors............................................................................... 3-42
Trial Manoeuvre Vector ...................................................................... 3-43

65900010 ix
Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Trial CPA and TCPA ........................................................................... 3-43

Watch Mode ............................................................................................. 3-44
Total Watch Features ......................................................................... 3-45
Safety Checking ....................................................................................... 3-46
Multi-node Support ............................................................................. 3-48
Alternate Bow........................................................................................... 3-49
Russian River Register Selection ............................................................ 3-50

Appendix A - Operational Functions specific to Multi-node and

Client/Server Systems
Station In Control ...................................................................................... A-1
Automatic Transfer of Control.............................................................. A-2
Database Synchronization ........................................................................ A-3

Chapter 4 Sensor Management

Sensors Menu ............................................................................................ 4-1
Sensor Data Source ............................................................................. 4-2
Primary Sensors on Radar Systems.......................................................... 4-3
Sensor Data Sources ................................................................................. 4-4
Heading Source Values ........................................................................ 4-4
STW Source Values ............................................................................. 4-5
COG Source Values ............................................................................. 4-6
SOG Source Values ............................................................................. 4-7
Position Values ..................................................................................... 4-8
Depth Source Values .......................................................................... 4-12
Set and Drift Values ............................................................................ 4-12
Rate of Turn Values ............................................................................ 4-14
Date and Time .................................................................................... 4-14
Wind Values........................................................................................ 4-14

Chapter 5 Presentation, Motion, Vector and Trail Modes

Presentation Modes ................................................................................... 5-2
Dual Radar Presentation ........................................................................... 5-6
Channel 1 Video Origin ........................................................................ 5-6
Suppression of Channel 2 Video .......................................................... 5-6
Motion Modes ............................................................................................ 5-7
Relative Motion ..................................................................................... 5-7

x 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents

True Motion .......................................................................................... 5-7

Vector Modes............................................................................................. 5-9
Selecting the Vector Mode ................................................................... 5-9
Vector Time ........................................................................................ 5-11
Trails Mode .............................................................................................. 5-12
Trail Length Time................................................................................ 5-13

Chapter 6 Navigation Tools

Parallel Index Lines ................................................................................... 6-2
Multi-node Support ............................................................................... 6-2
Edit Parallel Index Lines ............................................................................ 6-3
Creating a new set of PI Lines ............................................................. 6-3
Adding PI Lines or deleting Sets .......................................................... 6-4
Realigning PI Lines and Sets ............................................................... 6-5
Copying or Renaming PI Line Sets ...................................................... 6-6
Editing PI Lines..................................................................................... 6-7
Display Parallel Index Lines .................................................................... 6-10
Importing and Exporting PI Lines ............................................................ 6-11
Clearing Lines .......................................................................................... 6-12
Editing Clearing Lines......................................................................... 6-12
Monitoring Clearing Lines ................................................................... 6-19
Import/Export Clearing Lines .............................................................. 6-20
Mapping Features .................................................................................... 6-22
Mapping .............................................................................................. 6-22
Multi-Node Support............................................................................. 6-22
Maps ................................................................................................... 6-23
Editing Maps ............................................................................................ 6-25
Create Radar Maps ............................................................................ 6-25
Viewing and Editing Radar Maps ....................................................... 6-30
Deleting Radar Maps .......................................................................... 6-33
Maps Display Settings ............................................................................. 6-34
Displayed Maps and Types ................................................................ 6-34
Radar Map Offset ............................................................................... 6-34
Importing and Exporting Objects ............................................................. 6-35
Importing Objects ............................................................................... 6-35
Exporting Objects ............................................................................... 6-36
Multi-node Support ............................................................................. 6-36

65900010 xi
Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Line of Position ........................................................................................ 6-37

Creating LOPs .................................................................................... 6-37
LOP Fixes ........................................................................................... 6-39
Editing LOPs ....................................................................................... 6-41
Using a LOP Position Sensor ............................................................. 6-42
Ownship History ....................................................................................... 6-43
Primary History Track ......................................................................... 6-43
Secondary History Tracks .................................................................. 6-44
Changing History Settings .................................................................. 6-44
Event Marks ........................................................................................ 6-45
Parallel Cursor ......................................................................................... 6-46
Display Settings Features ........................................................................ 6-48
Display Settings .................................................................................. 6-48
Ownship .............................................................................................. 6-48
Next Turn EBL .................................................................................... 6-53
Grid ..................................................................................................... 6-54
Anchoring ................................................................................................. 6-55
Anchoring Description ........................................................................ 6-55
Anchoring Planning............................................................................. 6-56
Display ................................................................................................ 6-60
Status .................................................................................................. 6-62
Man Overboard ........................................................................................ 6-64
Navigation Marks ..................................................................................... 6-68

Chapter 7 Alerts
Alerts ..................................................................................................... 7-1
Prompts ................................................................................................ 7-2
Alert Status Indicator ................................................................................. 7-3
Alert Status ................................................................................................ 7-4
Alert Display ............................................................................................... 7-5
Viewing Alert Details ............................................................................. 7-6
Hide Acknowledged .............................................................................. 7-6
Sort by Group ....................................................................................... 7-6
Alert Buzzer ............................................................................................... 7-7
Alerts on a Multi-node System.............................................................. 7-8
Alerts on a Client/Server Radar System .................................................... 7-8
Alert Behaviour specific to Radar .............................................................. 7-9

xii 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents

Prompts ................................................................................................... 7-10

Permanent prompts ............................................................................ 7-10
Temporary Prompts ............................................................................ 7-10
Prompts Window ................................................................................ 7-10
Mute Settings ........................................................................................... 7-11
Central Alert Management ....................................................................... 7-12
Picture Freeze ......................................................................................... 7-13
List of Alarms, Warnings and Cautions ................................................... 7-14

Chapter 8 Routes
Routes ....................................................................................................... 8-3
Multi-node Support ............................................................................... 8-4
Creating a Route........................................................................................ 8-5
Adding a Waypoint ............................................................................... 8-5
Changing a Waypoint's Position ........................................................... 8-7
Delete a Waypoint ................................................................................ 8-8
Changing a Waypoint's Turn Radius .................................................... 8-8
Editing a Route .......................................................................................... 8-9
Edit Route ............................................................................................. 8-9
Route Tab Folder................................................................................ 8-10
Waypoints Tab Folder ........................................................................ 8-15
Dangers .............................................................................................. 8-21
Critical Points ...................................................................................... 8-23
Editor Table ........................................................................................ 8-26
Monitoring a Route .................................................................................. 8-30
Monitor Route ..................................................................................... 8-30
Route .................................................................................................. 8-31
Dangers .............................................................................................. 8-36
Critical Points ...................................................................................... 8-37
ETA Calculator......................................................................................... 8-38
Route ETA ............................................................................................... 8-40
Required Speed ....................................................................................... 8-41
Speed Planning ....................................................................................... 8-42
Speed Planning Setup ........................................................................ 8-42
Monitoring Speed Planning ................................................................ 8-47
Temporary Route Plans ........................................................................... 8-48
Creating and Editing a Temporary Route ........................................... 8-48

65900010 xiii
Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Monitoring a Temporary Route ........................................................... 8-49

Transitioning a Temporary Route to a Monitored Route .................... 8-50
Search and Rescue ................................................................................. 8-51
Creating SAR Patterns ....................................................................... 8-52
External Routes ....................................................................................... 8-55
Multi-node Support ............................................................................. 8-56
Importing and Exporting a Route ............................................................. 8-57
Importing Routes ................................................................................ 8-57
Exporting Routes ................................................................................ 8-58
Route Display Settings ............................................................................ 8-59

Chapter 9 Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Electronic Range and Bearing Lines (ERBLs)........................................... 9-1
Off-Centring, Carrying and Dropping an ERBL .................................... 9-2
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL).................................................................... 9-3
Changing the EBL Bearing ................................................................... 9-3
Changing the EBL Position ................................................................... 9-4
Variable Range Marker (VRM) .................................................................. 9-6
Changing the VRM and EBL range ...................................................... 9-6
Changing the VRM and EBL position ................................................... 9-7

Chapter 10 Targets
Tracking Targets ...................................................................................... 10-2
Target Data received from TLB Sentence .......................................... 10-3
Tracking Targets on a Multi-Node System ......................................... 10-3
Tracking Targets on a Dual Radar System ........................................ 10-3
Tracked Targets Capacity .................................................................. 10-4
AIS Targets .............................................................................................. 10-5
AIS Rendering Conditions .................................................................. 10-5
AIS Target States ............................................................................... 10-5
AIS Target Display Capacity ............................................................... 10-7
Active AIS Target Capacity ................................................................. 10-8
Target Alert States .............................................................................. 10-9
AIS Safety Messages ....................................................................... 10-10
Multi-Node Support for AIS Targets ................................................. 10-10
Classes and Types of AIS ..................................................................... 10-11
Target Monitoring ................................................................................... 10-12

xiv 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents

Lost Target ....................................................................................... 10-12

CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT Infringement Conditions ........................ 10-12
Target Monitoring Symbols .............................................................. 10-13
Multi-Node Support........................................................................... 10-14
Echo Reference Target ......................................................................... 10-15
Selected Target Functions ..................................................................... 10-18
Selected Target ................................................................................ 10-18
Target Data ....................................................................................... 10-19
AIS Info ............................................................................................. 10-21
Multiple Targets ..................................................................................... 10-25
Automatic Sorting of Targets ............................................................ 10-26
Selecting Targets for the User Folder .............................................. 10-26
Viewing Target Data from Multiple Targets ...................................... 10-26
Target Display........................................................................................ 10-27
Target Display .................................................................................. 10-27
Identification ..................................................................................... 10-28
Past Position Dots ............................................................................ 10-28
Auto Drop Targets ............................................................................ 10-28
Other ................................................................................................. 10-28
Cancel All Targets ............................................................................ 10-28
Number of Targets............................................................................ 10-28
Past Position Dots ............................................................................ 10-29
Auto Drop Targets ............................................................................ 10-30
Cancelling Tracked Targets ............................................................. 10-32
Target Repair ......................................................................................... 10-33
AIS Display ............................................................................................ 10-34
Settings All Nodes ............................................................................ 10-34
Filter Settings .................................................................................... 10-35
Other ................................................................................................. 10-36
Set All AIS Targets to Sleeping ........................................................ 10-36
Target Count All Nodes .................................................................... 10-36
Test Targets........................................................................................... 10-37
Fixed Test Targets............................................................................ 10-37
Moveable Test Targets ..................................................................... 10-38
Using Test Targets ........................................................................... 10-39
Using Test Targets as a Training Exercise ...................................... 10-40
Test Targets on Dual Radar .................................................................. 10-41
Test Targets on Client/Server Radar ..................................................... 10-42

65900010 xv
Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Acquisition Zones................................................................................... 10-43

Annular Acquisition Zones ................................................................ 10-44
Polygonal Acquisition Zones ............................................................ 10-46
Own Ship AIS......................................................................................... 10-47
Own Ship .......................................................................................... 10-47
Own Ship AIS Messages .................................................................. 10-49
Limits and Settings ................................................................................ 10-52
Closest Point of Approach & Bow Crossing Limits ........................... 10-52
Target Association ............................................................................ 10-53
Lost Target Alerts ............................................................................. 10-53
Collision Avoidance Criteria .............................................................. 10-54
PADs ...................................................................................................... 10-55

Chapter 11 Radar
Transceiver .............................................................................................. 11-2
Operational Mode ............................................................................... 11-2
Pulse Length ....................................................................................... 11-3
Tune .................................................................................................... 11-3
Dual Radar - Transceiver ......................................................................... 11-3
Video ........................................................................................................ 11-4
Dual Radar – Video ................................................................................. 11-4
Interswitch ................................................................................................ 11-5
Request for Display ............................................................................ 11-5
Status .................................................................................................. 11-5
Interswitch on Dual Radar ....................................................................... 11-6
Interswitch on Client/Server Radar .......................................................... 11-7
Disconnecting and Reconnecting a Client .......................................... 11-7
Radar Alerts ............................................................................................. 11-8
Video Alerts ........................................................................................ 11-8
Communications Alerts ....................................................................... 11-8
Transceiver Alerts ............................................................................... 11-9
Sector Blanking ...................................................................................... 11-10
Sector Blanking on Dual Radar ........................................................ 11-10

Chapter 12 Charts
About Charts ............................................................................................ 12-2

xvi 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents

Chart Types ........................................................................................ 12-2

Chart Data on a Radar Display .......................................................... 12-2
Chart Rendering ................................................................................. 12-3
Factors affecting Chart Accuracy ....................................................... 12-3
Chart Overscale.................................................................................. 12-4
Larger Scale Available Prompt ........................................................... 12-5
Chart Safety Information..................................................................... 12-5
Chart Tools .............................................................................................. 12-6
Chart Match ........................................................................................ 12-7
Chart Updates Summary .................................................................... 12-8
Chart Update Error Messages .......................................................... 12-10
Chart Installation............................................................................... 12-12
Permissions / User Permits .............................................................. 12-24
Chart Index ....................................................................................... 12-27
Chart Settings ........................................................................................ 12-30
Chart Display Suppression ............................................................... 12-30
Features ........................................................................................... 12-31
Symbology ........................................................................................ 12-33
Chart Projections ................................................................................... 12-37
Chart Depths/Heights ............................................................................ 12-38
Safety Depth and Height .................................................................. 12-38
Shallow and Deep Contours ............................................................. 12-39
Changing Chart Depth/Height Values .............................................. 12-39
Chart Databases.................................................................................... 12-40
Enabling and Disabling Chart Databases......................................... 12-40
Supported Chart Engines and Databases ........................................ 12-41
Official and Unofficial Chart Data ..................................................... 12-42
Chart Legend ......................................................................................... 12-43
Legend Select ................................................................................... 12-43
Legend Detail ................................................................................... 12-44
Legend Updates ............................................................................... 12-47
Manual Chart Update............................................................................. 12-48
Multi-node Support ........................................................................... 12-48
Manual Chart Update Functions ............................................................ 12-49
Chart Layers ..................................................................................... 12-49
Edit Chart Update ............................................................................. 12-50
Create Chart Update ........................................................................ 12-50
Modify Chart Update......................................................................... 12-54

65900010 xvii
Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Display Chart Updates ...................................................................... 12-56

Importing or Exporting Chart Updates .............................................. 12-57
Chart Query ........................................................................................... 12-59
Query Features ...................................................................................... 12-60
Query Results ................................................................................... 12-60
Query Options................................................................................... 12-62
Chart Query on AIO Data ................................................................. 12-62
Chart Dangers ....................................................................................... 12-64
Chart Dangers Information ............................................................... 12-65
Danger Settings ................................................................................ 12-66
Chart 1 ................................................................................................... 12-68
Chart 1 Catalog................................................................................. 12-68
Color Diagram................................................................................... 12-69

Appendix A Chart Datum Codes

Chapter 13 Brilliance
Brilliance Menu ........................................................................................ 13-1
Day and Night Modes .............................................................................. 13-2
Multi-node Settings ............................................................................. 13-2
Brilliance Groups...................................................................................... 13-3
Chart Symbols ......................................................................................... 13-4
Brightness Check ..................................................................................... 13-5

Chapter 14 System
User Profiles ............................................................................................ 14-2
Multi-Node Functionality ..................................................................... 14-2
Create New Profile.............................................................................. 14-3
Available Profiles ................................................................................ 14-4
View/Edit Profiles ..................................................................................... 14-5
View/Edit Profile – Selection ............................................................... 14-5
View/Edit Profile – Editing .................................................................. 14-7
Standard Settings .................................................................................... 14-8
Options................................................................................................... 14-11
Diagnostic Functions ............................................................................. 14-12
Diagnostics ....................................................................................... 14-12
Performance Monitor ........................................................................ 14-13

xviii 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents

Report ............................................................................................... 14-15

DataLog ............................................................................................ 14-17
Sensor Status ................................................................................... 14-20
Connection Status on a Multi-Node System .................................... 14-24
Connection Status on a Client/Server Radar System ...................... 14-25
Buzzer............................................................................................... 14-26
Database .......................................................................................... 14-26
Dual Radar – Diagnostic Functions ....................................................... 14-27
Commissioning ...................................................................................... 14-28
Authorization ..................................................................................... 14-29
Config Update................................................................................... 14-31
Characteristics .................................................................................. 14-33
Service .............................................................................................. 14-34
Dual Radar – Commissioning Functions .......................................... 14-37
Local Offset ...................................................................................... 14-38
Shutdown ............................................................................................... 14-39

Annex A SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer Detection on X-Band

Radar
Search and Rescue Detection .................................................................. A-1
Introduction .......................................................................................... A-1
Radar Range Scale ............................................................................. A-2
SART Range Errors............................................................................. A-2
Radar Bandwidth ................................................................................. A-3
Radar Side Lobes ................................................................................ A-3
Detuning the Radar ............................................................................. A-3
Video Gain ........................................................................................... A-4
Anti-Clutter Sea Control....................................................................... A-4
Anti-clutter Rain Control ...................................................................... A-4
Radar Beacons ......................................................................................... A-5
Target Enhancer Detection ....................................................................... A-6

Annex B Static Site

Static Site Description............................................................................... B-1
Static Site Features .................................................................................. B-2
Features specific to a Static Site ......................................................... B-2
Features not available to a Static Site ................................................. B-2
Static Heading .......................................................................................... B-4
Heading Line ....................................................................................... B-4

65900010 xix
Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Static Position ........................................................................................... B-5

Target Anchor Watch ................................................................................ B-6
Target Based Range and Bearing ............................................................ B-7

Glossary

xx 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Chapter 1 Overview
Hardware Configurations
A VisionMaster FT system consists of the following hardware
configurations:
 A single node system, comprising one console connected to a
transceiver, antenna and turning unit (collectively known as a
Scanner Unit), see Single System.
 An interswitched system, with each console connected via an
Interswitch to separate Scanner Units, see Interswitched System.
 A multi-node system, where consoles, configured to specific
product types, are connected via a LAN, see Multi-Node System.
 A single node dual radar system comprising one console
connected to two Scanner Units, see Dual Radar Single System.
 An interswitched system, with a combination of dual radars and
single radars, connected via a six way Interswitch to Scanner Units,
see Dual Radar Interswitched System.
 A Client /Server Radar (CSR) system where one or more servers
provide radar video over a network for display at Client nodes, see
Client Server Radar System.
On conventional radar systems radar video and other radar/chart radar
sensor data is output directly from the PCIO to the console (monitor and
PC)1. On a CSR system data is output from the PCIO to the Server unit
before the data is supplied on request to Client nodes via an Ethernet
network.
Traditional bridge equipment and most navigation sensors can be
interfaced to a VM FT system. On a CSR system Client nodes can provide
master or slave displays at any required location.

1
On VM FT systems that require no radar (for example, ECDIS without radar overlay or
Conning Info Display) a PCIO is not required. Data can be received over a network
connection.

65900010 1-1
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Single System

1-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Scanner Assembly2. Comprises an Antenna unit, a Turning unit and an

optional Performance Monitor. If the system includes an integral transceiver
then this also forms part of the Scanner Assembly. If the system uses a
bulkhead transceiver then the transceiver unit is not included in the
Scanner assembly.
Antenna Unit. 10cm S-band (9 or 12ft aperture) or 3cm X-band (4,
6 or 8 ft aperture).
Performance Monitor. If fitted, the performance Monitor Antenna is
mounted on the Turning Unit.
Transceiver. Masthead (mounted as an integral part of the Scanner
assembly) or Bulkhead (mounted as a separate unit below decks).
Scanner Control Unit – for switching the scanner on and off – are
supplied for S-band radars only.
Console Assembly - supplied as a standalone 250 tabletop and 340
tabletop/deck mounted console (including pedestal); or a kit version for
installation into an existing console suite. The 250/340 console assembly
includes the following modules:
Input/Output (PCIO) Unit - receives data inputs from the
transceiver and external sensors; outputs data to the processor unit.
Processor Unit - a single PC running Windows XP operating
system.
Display Unit. includes a flat panel monitor
Control Panel - There are two types of control panel: Basic and
Enhanced. The basic control panel only includes a trackball with left
and right keys. The enhanced control panel includes the following
additional group of controls: Rotary controls and Adjustment &
Acknowledgement buttons.
The console assembly may also be supplied as a 19" Integrated Tabletop,
where the Monitor, PCIO, Processor and control panel are all contained in
a single mechanical housing.

2
A Scanner assembly may also be referred to as a `Top Unit'.

65900010 1-3
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Interswitched System
The basic, single-scanner/single-console configuration can be expanded by
the introduction of an Interswitch Unit, plus additional scanners and display
configurations. The arrangement below shows two scanners (S band or X
band), two transceivers (A and B) with a two-way interswitch unit
connected to two consoles. A 6-way interswitch unit is available for
systems with a maximum of six scanners and six consoles.
A console can be connected via the interswitch to any one of the scanner
units, and can be selected as the master display, or as a slave display.

1-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

A console selected as a master display has full control of the connected

scanner. The controls available at a master display but NOT at a slave
display are as follows:
 switching the transceiver between standby and transmit mode
 selection of transmission pulse-length
 tuning the transceiver
 selecting Manual or AFC mode for tuning
 tuning the performance monitor.

65900010 1-5
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Multi-Node System
A multi-node system may include a number of consoles which have been
configured as specific product types, see Watch Mode.
Each console is linked via a LAN so that data input to one console is
available to all. Consoles providing radar video data will be connected via
the interswitch to one or more scanner units, and can be selected as the
master display, or as a slave display.

1-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Dual Radar – Single System

A dual radar system can connect to two scanner units at the same time,
enabling the overlay of radar video from both scanners to form a composite
display. Each radar video source is known as a `Channel’.
A dual radar system includes an additional scan converter card and an
auxiliary PCIO unit.
For an overview on features specific to dual radar, see Dual Radar
Features

65900010 1-7
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Dual Radar – Interswitched System

On an interswitched system a display radar channel can be associated with
any one of the scanner units in the system. A scanner unit can be selected
from its associated display as a Master radar channel for controlling that
scanner, or as a Slave radar channel if another display radar channel has
been selected as the Master.
The Master/Slave status of all display radar channels, and their specific
scanner couplings, can be monitored from any display unit in the system.
The figure below shows two dual channel displays with two standard
displays, connected to a 6-Way Interswitch unit.

1-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Dual Radar Features

The following specific features are available if your VisionMaster FT system
is configured as dual channel radar:
 Targets can be tracked on one channel through the blind arc of the
other channel.
 Output of targets on the Track Table Output irrespective of the
channel they are being tracked on.
 Both scanner units may be X band or S band, or an X and S band
may be superimposed.
 Displays origin symbol for Channel 1.
 Enable test targets to be controlled on channel 1, channel 2 or
both.
The following specific Transceiver features are available:
 Independent display of transceiver video.
 Individual control of the Standby/Transmit status of each
transceiver.
 Individual Video Display On/Off control.
 Individual control of the other video related parameters (e.g. Gain
and clutter controls).

65900010 1-9
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Client Server Radar System

In a Client Server Radar (CSR) system, a Server unit is connected to each
Transceiver on the system. Servers and Clients are linked via an Ethernet
network, with each Server supplying data to a maximum of eight Clients.
Each Client can request a specific service from any one of the Servers.
When all Clients request a connection to a different Transceiver, those
Clients can all be set as Master of the requested Transceiver through the
associated Server, and will then have full control of that Transceiver. If two
or more Clients need to use the same Transceiver, one must be set as
Master, with the other Clients set as Slaves. A Client may request a change
to which Transceiver it is connected. This process is controlled by
negotiation between the Servers and is known as Virtual Interswitching.
The Client nodes, whether acting as Master or Slave, retain the same
independent control of video presentation capability as a conventional
VisionMaster FT system.

1-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Product Types
The following table lists the VisionMaster FT Radar and Chart Radar
product types available:
Max. number
Product Type Monitor of tracked
targets
CAT 1 Radar CAT1 23”, 25.5” or 27” 100

CAT 1 Chart Radar CAT1C 23”, 25.5” or 27” 100

CAT 2 Radar CAT2 19” 60

Enhanced CAT 2 Radar CAT2 19” 100

Enhanced CAT 2 Chart Radar CAT2C 19” 100

High speed craft variants for each of the above products are
available and will include a suffix H (for example CAT1H).
If your system is a stationary installation, the VisionMaster product will be
configured as a Static Site. For information on the Static Site system refer
to Annex B - Static Site.
In addition to the CAT1/CAT2 Radar/Chart Radar product types listed in the
above table, the following related VisionMaster products are available:
 ECDIS (with or without radar overlay)
 Conning Information Display (CID)
 Central Alert Management (CAM)
 Total Watch (a multi-function workstation that enables switching
between watch modes; for example, Chart Radar to ECDIS).
 Radar Video Server - In a Client/Server Radar system only Servers
are configured as a Radar Video Server. All other Client nodes may
be configured as any of the product types listed (with the exception
of a CAT 2 Radar).
For information on the CID refer to the Supplementary Features User
Guide 65900014.

65900010 1-11
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Applicable Features
Features applicable to the product types listed are given in the following
tables:
 Features common to all Product Types, see page 1-13.
 Features available to CAT 1 Radar/Chart Radar and CAT 2
Enhanced Radar/Chart Radar, see page 1-16.
 Features available to Chart Radar (CAT1C & Enhanced CAT2C),
see page 1-17.
For a description of features specific to an ECDIS product
configuration, see ECDIS User Guide, Part Number 65900012.

1-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Features common to all Product Types

The following table lists the features which are common to all VisionMaster
Radar/Chart Radar product types.
Feature Additional details
Selection and set up.
Transceiver control
Manual/automatic tuning.

Video gain.
Video processing controls Manual/automatic anti-clutter sea/rain control.
Enhanced video mode.

Picture brilliance (day/night selection).

Brightness check
Display controls
Displaying/hiding heading line and synthetics.
Centring and off-centring (max view) the picture.

Own ship’s position.

Defining and displaying
Waypoint data.
user specified data
Wind and depth data.

Scale selection Range scale in nautical miles from 0.125 to 96

Range rings on or off. Ring interval dependent on

Range Rings
scale.

Compass alignment.
Ship’s heading and speed Selection of speed mode (through water or over
display ground).
Selection of water or ground stabilisation

Selection of Sensor Selection of sensor source for data type (heading,

Source STW, position etc.)

Selection of presentation Stabilised Head Up and Unstabilised Head Up

mode North-up or Course-up (stabilised)
Selection of motion mode Relative Motion (RM) or True Motion (TM).

Selection of true (T) or relative (R) vectors.

Selection of vector mode
Selection of vector time.

Selection of True or Relative Trails

True and Relative Trails
Selection of different types of trail modes.

65900010 1-13
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Feature Additional details

Two electronic bearing lines – EBL 1 & EBL 2.
Defining and displaying Two variable range markers – VRM 1 & VRM 2.
EBLs, VRMS & ERBLs Each EBL/VRM pair can be displayed as a
combined ERBL – ERBL 1 and/or ERBL 2.

Position as derived from navigational sensors or

Navigation facilities
an estimated position.

Enables targets to be selected, tracked and

information displayed, including local targets and
Target facilities
AIS targets. Provides different types of target alert
states.

Monitor and display internal, external and

Routes facilities temporary route data.
Import or export route plans

Create, edit and delete different types of

Navigation Tools
commissioned navigation tools.

Import, export and display specific mapping

Mapping Facilities object symbols. Create, edit or delete objects and
assign mapping objects to defined groups.

Selection of Display Display of own ship display settings, including:

Settings True Scale Ship, Beam Line, Vector Tick marks.
Define system time and set a time zone offset
Display information on unit groups.
System tools
Enables optional features such as NAVTEX and
Weather Fax to be displayed.
Displaying the current unacknowledged alert with
highest priority.
Facility for acknowledging alerts in a status
Alerts indicator.
(Alarms, Warnings and
Display all alerts, listed in groups of alarms,
Cautions)
warnings and cautions, or sorted by group.
Alert buzzer facility.
Watch alert facility.
Temporary and Both Temporary and Permanent prompts are
Permanent prompts displayed below alerts.

1-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Feature Additional details

Extensive monitoring and
Built in self tests (BIST).
test facilities
Monitor the performance of the system or the
receiver
Generate a report and export the report file.
View Datalog files and export the datalog as a zip
Diagnostic facilities
file.
View the status of the sensor data from the
sensor source.
Test the Alarm buzzer.
Enables user login.
Commissioning facilities Display of TxRx settings, Video and Authorization
information

Online Help Guide.

Help facility
Context sensitive Help.

65900010 1-15
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Features available to CAT 1 Radar/Chart Radar and CAT 2

Enhanced Radar/Chart Radar
The following table lists additional features to those listed in the previous
table, which are available to CAT 1 Radar/Chart Radar and enhanced CAT
2 Radar/Chart Radar product types.

Feature Additional details

A facility that allows the effect of a proposed
Trial Manoeuvre manoeuvre, based on rate of turn for own ship, to be
displayed.

Route Planning Creating and editing user-defined routes

ETA calculator Calculates the time, speed and distance between

waypoints on a monitored route.

Display of Predicted Ship and Predicted Path for own

Display Settings
ship, Next Turn EBL and LAT/LON Grid

Allows an anchorage to be planned and monitored,

Anchoring control the anchorage parameters, and monitor anchor
drag after the ship is anchored.

Enables management of a MOB emergency. When

Man Overboard MOB is active, a symbol is displayed representing the
man in the water.

Enables the operator to create, delete, apply, save,

User profiles view and update profiles that contain node specific
chart, route, and other display settings.

PADs are outlines drawn to mark an area that needs

Predicted Areas of
to be avoided in order to prevent a CPA violation by a
Danger (PAD)
tracked target or active AIS target.

Enables VisionMaster data to be recorded and viewed

Visual Playback
as a series of one second screen captures.

Search and Rescue SAR patterns are specialized routes that can be used
(SAR) Patterns to patrol a given area.

Allows two bows to be used, the `normal bow’ at the

Double Ended Ferry front of the ship and the ‘alternate bow’, usually at the
rear of the ship.

1-16 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Features available to Chart Radar (CAT1C & Enhanced CAT2C)

The following table lists the additional features to those listed in the
previous two tables, which are available to CAT 1 and enhanced CAT 2
Chart Radar product types.
These features are available on the Chart Radar watch mode of a Total
Watch system.

Feature Additional details

Enables vector charts installed from an installer
facility to be displayed within the video circle.
Charts facilities
Chart sets can be customised and manually
updated by the operator.

The Charts button enables the following

selections:
 Chart Filled - displays chart presentation with
Chart Presentation button land and sea shown as different colours.
 Chart Unfilled - displays chart presentation
showing land and sea as the same colour with
land outline only shown.

Ensures any adjustments made to brightness and

contrast settings will enable SENC data, such as
SENC Colour Diagram
coastlines, safety contour and other objects to be
adequately displayed.

Suppresses all chart synthetics, with the exception

Coast button
of the coast outline.

65900010 1-17
Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Total Watch
If your VisionMaster FT system is configured as a Total Watch, in addition
to the Radar/Chart Radar variants, the following product types may be
available from the Watch Mode button:
 Chart Radar
 ECDIS
 Playback
 Conning Info Display
 Central Alert Management
 Third Party Applications
The availability of the presentation options listed above is dependent on the
product type and security device installed at initialisation, see System
Security.
This User Guide describes the Radar/Chart Radar product type.
The Central Alert Management (CAM) presentation option is described in
Chapter 7 Alerts, `Central Alert Management’.
For information on the ECDIS product type, refer to the VisionMaster
ECDIS User's Guide, 65900012.
For information on Playback, Conning Info Display and Third Party
Applications, refer to the Supplementary Features User Guide, 65900014.

1-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview

Information on Sensor Inputs to the System

The VisionMaster Radar system is Type Approved using 19", 23.1", 25.5"
and 27" displays with X-Band and S-Band top units. To function correctly
the system requires sensor input from external devices. Any limitations
associated with the method of sensor input are stated below.

Compass Input
The approved method of compass input is via an analogue input, either
through a Synchro or Stepper motor interface. If an analogue input is
unavailable then a serial input may be used with data conforming to IEC
61162-2 at 38400 baud rate and a message update rate of approximately
50Hz. If serial input data at 4800 baud rate, or a lower message update
rate is used then the tracking data will be compromised.
The primary compass data should be used in all circumstances. For
example, re-constituting serial data as analogue data via a converter is
inferior to using the serial data direct.

Log Input
The speed log input used must be compliant to IMO resolution A 824(19).
When a ground speed log is in use, true video trails and target tracking
data will be ground stabilised, using both longitudinal and transverse data if
available from the log. However, a ground speed log may have
inaccuracies in deep waters, depending on the actual depth of the sea.
Additionally, if a single axis log is used it will not take into account
transverse effects due to leeway, tides and currents. The magnitude of
these effects will depend on their strength and direction.
When a water speed log is in use true video trails and target tracking data
will be water stabilised, using both longitudinal and transverse data if
available from the log. The accuracy of tracked target trails and vector data
using a single axis log is only degraded when in True trails; in Relative
trails the data is not affected.

Position Input
The EFPS connected to the system must be compliant with IMO resolution
MSC.112(73) and MSC.114(73). However, there are areas of the world
where coverage is limited and these areas may cause inaccuracies on the
tracking and positioning data.

65900010 1-19
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

Chapter 2 Getting Started with Radar

This section shows you how to start up the system and how to use the
controls. The following topics are covered:
 Switching on and starting up the radar
 a description of the radar controls
 a description of System Security
 a description of Standby Mode and Transmit Mode
 various types of screen cursor
 using Online Help
 Accessing Tool Tips
 Operator Messages
 shutting down the system

65900010 2-1
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

System Controls
The operator controls the VisionMaster FT system via a control panel
assembly, monitor controls and a power On/Off switch.

Control Panel
The Control Panel consists of the following group of controls:
 Trackball assembly
 Rotary controls
 Adjustment and Acknowledgement buttons.

2-2 65900010
Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Trackball Assembly
The trackball assembly comprises a trackball and two associated keys (left
and right). The trackball controls the position of the screen cursor.
Selections are made by positioning the cursor over a menu caption or
control button on the video circle and clicking (press and release) on the
left key. The right key is used to provide additional functionality such as
accessing drop down menus applicable to the function.

Throughout this manual, instructions to ‘left click’ or ‘right click’

relate to a press-and-release of either the left key or right key.

Rotary Controls
The rotary controls include the following:
 Turning the EBL control automatically switches on EBL1. Turning the
control in a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction adjusts the EBL1
bearing, see Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) in Chapter 9 Electronic
Range and Bearing Lines.
 Turning the VRM control automatically switches on VRM1. Turning
the control in a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction adjusts the VRM
range, see Variable Range Marker (VRM) Chapter 9 Electronic
Range and Bearing Lines.
 The GAIN control adjusts the video gain setting for the currently
selected anti-clutter mode, see Video in Chapter 11 Radar.
 The RAIN control adjusts the anti-clutter rain setting, see Video in
Chapter 11 Radar.
 The SEA control adjusts the anti-clutter rain setting, see Video in
Chapter 11 Radar.
Adjustment and Acknowledgement Buttons
The RANGE buttons increase or decrease the currently selected range
scale by one level, see Range Scales.
The BRILL (brilliance) buttons change the day/night modes by one level,
see Day and Night Modes in Chapter 13 Brilliance.
Pressing the ACK ALARM button acknowledges the currently displayed
alert announcement, see Alert Status Indicator in Chapter 3 Basic
Operation of Radar.

65900010 2-3
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

Monitor Controls
The monitor controls include an On/Off button and a brightness adjustment
button.
The On/Off button controls the monitor only; it does NOT control the radar
system.
The brightness adjustment control has an indexed position, marked as a
white line. This indexed position sets the default brightness and calibrated
operation.

WARNING!

THE USE OF THE MONITOR BRIGHTNESS CONTROL MAY

INHIBIT VISIBILITY AT NIGHT.

Monitor on Screen Display Controls

The monitors used in VisionMaster systems include On-Screen Display
(OSD) controls. These controls enable access and adjustments to be made
to monitor settings, including the image position, scaling and image quality.
The OSD functionality available may vary dependent on the type of monitor
your system uses.
Under normal circumstances the OSD controls should not require operator
adjustment. However, if information on the monitor OSD controls is
required refer to section 2.2 `Monitor Unit’, in Chapter 5 `Fault Reporting
and First Line Servicing’, VisionMaster Ships Manual Volume 1
(65900011V1).

Power On/Off
The radar system is switched on at the Power On/Off switch located on the
underside of the control panel, see System Start-Up.
The system must be powered down as described in System Shutdown. Do
NOT switch the power off until the system has fully powered down.

2-4 65900010
Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

System Start-Up
Switching on the System
The VisionMaster workstation is designed such that one switch at the
workstation typically applies power to that workstation’s computer and
monitor.
In a multi-node system, as the system is started, the software automatically
establishes communication with other workstations that may already be
running.
To start up the system press the On/Off rocker switch, located on the
underside of the control panel. When this switch is turned On the system
powers up.

The On/Off switch is the only system control accessible to the

operator. Do NOT remove the front panel.

CAUTION:

When starting up the system always leave at least one minute

after the system has powered down before switching the On/Off
switch to On.

65900010 2-5
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

Software Start-Up
Each VisionMaster workstation is equipped with a device called a Security
Block (sometimes called a `dongle') which is attached to a USB port on the
PC. On start-up, the system compares permit codes and the product type
identifier (e.g. Chart Radar or ECDIS) stored in the dongle to the
corresponding data in the system configuration file. If the data does not
match, the system will not be authorized and will run in a degraded state.
For further information, see System Security.
In a multi-node system the dongle will also contain security data which
defines the number of nodes in the system with each product type (e.g. two
Radars, two Chart Radars and one ECDIS).
Starting up the software takes approximately 2 to 3 minutes. Soon after the
system is powered up the VisionMaster FT Start Up window appears on the
screen, this window shows the current system software version number,
copyright information and a status bar displaying the system loading status.

After system initialisation has completed the start up window is replaced by

the radar display. By default the system opens with ownship symbol shown
in the centre of the video circle. On start up the system is always in
Standby mode.

2-6 65900010
Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Setup Procedures
After the VisionMaster software has loaded, some setup procedures may
be necessary. To verify proper setup, make the following checks:
 On the sensor data display at the top left of the screen, the
indicators for HDG (Heading), COG (Course Over Ground), SOG
(Speed Over Ground), and STW (Speed Through Water) should all
be green. Red data indicates a loss of valid data from the selected
source. The sensor data display indicates the current stabilisation
mode: water or ground based, with the HDG/STW field block
highlighted in water stabilisation and the COG/SOG field block
highlighted in ground stabilisation. The current stabilisation mode
can be toggled in a field below the motion mode and presentation
mode buttons, refer to Sensor Data Display for more information.
 The heading sensor may require alignment when the system has
started. If alignment is required the HDG values in the Sensor Data
Display show flashing red dashes and Heading folder of the
Sensors menu automatically opens with the Sensor also showing
red dashes and the Alignment state as `Unaligned', see below. To
align the heading refer to Heading Source Values.

 The currently active sensor sources for navigation data are

indicated to the right of the displayed sensor data. Verify that the
desired sensor devices are selected. For information on sensor
source selection, see Sensors Menu Chapter 4 Sensor
Management. On the video circle, the colour of the Ownship
symbol or outline is red if the software determines that the data
sources for Position and Heading are not providing valid data (see
Chapter 5, Presentation Motion, Vector and Trail Modes).
 If any alert conditions are active the Alert Status Indicator will flash
red or amber and the buzzer will sound. To acknowledge alerts left
click on the alert status indicator, or right click to open the Alert
Display and view information on the alerts. See Chapter 7, Alerts
for more information on using the Alert Display window.

65900010 2-7
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

System Security
System security is maintained by comparing identification codes contained
in the Security Block device attached to the VisionMaster PC (see System
Start-up) with the codes contained in the software configuration file.
The following rules govern system security:
 In order for the VisionMaster FT to operate effectively, a Security
Block device must be properly programmed by Sperry Marine and
attached to the workstation PC.
 On a multi-node system each node has a Security Block attached.
The system also compares the allowed number of workstations
(nodes), to the actual number of nodes in the system. If the number
of nodes exceeds the limit set in the Security String an
Authorization Failure alert is given.
 If the Security Block becomes damaged or detached while the
VisionMaster FT is running, an Authorization Failure alert is given.
The system will continue to operate but will revert to a degraded
state after a period of 7 days. If the Security Block is damaged the
operator should contact Sperry Marine to apply for a replacement.
 If on start-up an invalid system identification code is found in the
configuration file, the system will shut down. No grace period is
provided.
 While the Security Block is broken or detached, installation of
charts is prohibited. This is true even if the user has obtained a
temporary security password.

2-8 65900010
Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Standby Mode
After the system has powered up the radar is always in Standby mode, with
own ship's symbol shown centred in the video circle (see Own Ship
Symbols). In Standby mode the video circle displays the message Radar
Standby.

If the VisionMaster Transceiver has been previously powered

down the Standby/Transmit field displays a warm up count down
before Standby is displayed.

The transceiver identity is displayed in the field

above the Standby/Transmit field. The TX/RX n
(X) or (S) caption relates to the type of transceiver
the system is using, for information on Transceiver selection see
Interswitch Control.
The Master or Slave caption indicates the type of display.
In Standby mode you can access the following functions which allow the
display to be set up for operation:
 Radar Settings
 Alerts
 Cursor data
 Range selection
 Range Rings
 Chart View
 Video Processing Controls (Manual/Auto and Enhance On/Off only)
 Sensors Indicator and Sensors menu
 Presentation, Motion, Vector and Trails modes
 EBL, ERBL and VRM settings
 Trial Manoeuvre settings
 Route Plans
 Navigation Tools
 Chart settings
 System Settings
To switch from Standby mode to Transmit mode click on the
Standby/Transmit button, the radar switches to Transmit mode.

65900010 2-9
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

Transmit Mode
The following functions are only available when the
radar is in Transmit mode:
 Pulse Length
 Display and selection of target data
 Video Processing Controls (video Gain, Rain and Sea anti clutter
control)
 Radar Fine Tuning
If you are not familiar with using the radar system, it is strongly
recommended that you read `System Controls’ on page 2.2. This describes
how to use the external controls in order to operate the system.
If you are already familiar with the system controls and want to start
transmitting, go straight to Chapter 3 `Basic Operation of Radar’.

Standby/Transmit Mode in Dual Radar

In a dual radar system the transceivers for each channel may be
individually switched between Standby and Transmit.
Each channel includes a video indicator button. The video button for
Channel 1 is always on the upper line and Channel 2 is on the lower line.

For information on Standby and Transmit mode and video On/Off control
for a Dual Channel Radar, refer to `Dual Radar – Transmit and Video Mode
Selection’ Chapter 3 `Basic Operation of Radar’.

2-10 65900010
Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Screen Layout for Widescreen Display

If your VisionMaster system includes a widescreen, the area to the left of
the main display will be available for CID (Conning Information Display)
pages. For information on configuring and creating CID pages, see Chapter
4 ‘Conning Information Display’ in Volume 2 of VisionMaster Ship’s Manual.
All other controls and functions on a widescreen are the same as a
standard screen display.

65900010 2-11
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

Using the Cursor

Whenever the cursor is displayed, a dialog box in the bottom right of the
display gives a readout of the cursor’s position within the video circle. By
default the Cursor window gives cursor range and bearing (from own ship)
and cursor latitude/longitude, see Cursor Readout.

Cursor Graphics
When the cursor is over the system control areas and
background area of the radar it is displayed as a small
white arrow, referred to as the screen cursor.
As the cursor passes from the control area into the
video circle it changes to an orange cross, referred to
as the video cursor.
If an adjustable parameter is selected within a control
window, the cursor is displayed as a text entry cursor.

When Select Points is selected from Charts menu the

letters CM are added to the cursor, see Chart Match.

When Query On is selected from Chart Query menu, or

Add Annotation Mark is selected from Manual Chart
Update a ? is added to the cursor, see Chart Query

When a Return Plan is to be added, the letters ADD

RTP appear below the cursor, see Routes.

When a Polygonal acquisition zone is created, the

letters Add appear below the cursor, see Acquisition
Zones.
When a map offset is to be applied graphically, the
cursor changes to the following symbol, see Maps
Display Settings
When a Temporary Route Plan is created or edited, the
letters TMP WYPT appear below the cursor, see
Temporary Route Plans.

2-12 65900010
Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

When a mapping object is created or edited, the letters

MO EDIT appear below the cursor, see Mapping.

When the cursor moves over an object to be deleted

the letters DEL appear below the cursor.

When Delete Radar Maps is selected and the video

cursor moves over a mapping object, the cursor lines
change to diagonal and the letters DEL appear below
the cursor, see Editing Maps
When the iHelp button is selected and the cursor
moves over screen functions it changes to the following
symbol.
When the cursor moves over an Electronic Bearing
Line (EBL) or Parallel Index line it changes to the
following symbol.
When the range of a Variable Range Marker (VRM) or
Parallel Index line is adjusted the cursor changes to the
following symbol.
When the video cursor moves over an Electronic
Range and Bearing Line (ERBL) it changes to the
following symbol.

65900010 2-13
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

Online Help
The VisionMaster FT system includes an online Help Guide that provides
information and procedures necessary to operate the system.
A context-sensitive help facility is also provided. This type of help is called
"context-sensitive" because it enables the user to quickly access
information relevant to the major functions displayed on the VisionMaster
FT screen.

Accessing Context Sensitive Help

1. Click on the iHelp button at the top right of the
screen.
2. With the cursor displaying the ? icon
click on the required function button, the
Help information relevant to that function
appears in the features area of the
screen.

Accessing the Help Guide

The Help Guide can be accessed when the
system is in Standby mode by clicking on the
Launch Explorer button at the bottom of the
Help window. This window is accessed either via
the iHelp button, as described above, or by
clicking on the Help button in the main menu
list, and then clicking on the Help sub menu
button.
The online Help Guide appears as a moveable
window and can be resized to occupy as much
of the screen as required.

2-14 65900010
Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

On-Screen Keyboard
The Help Guide includes a screen keyboard that allows the operator to
enter textual and numerical data.

To access the keyboard click the On-Screen Keyboard button at the

bottom of the VisionMaster Help window. A keyboard window appears
below the Help Guide, replicating a standard computer keyboard. The
keyboard window may be minimised or closed by clicking the respective
buttons at the top right of the window.

65900010 2-15
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

Accessing Tool Tips

As the screen cursor moves over the system
function buttons the text in the highlighted
button changes from white to yellow and a
tool tip for that function is briefly displayed in a
popup window.

2-16 65900010
Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Operator Messages
The system generates messages that appear in order to either confirm an
action to proceed that the operator has requested, for example, when
switching from Transmit to Standby. Or a message to confirm an action that
the system is about to make, for example to acknowledge a change of own
ship's course on a monitored route.

Action Required Messages

If an Action Required message is confirming an
operator action the window will include an OK
button and a Cancel button. The action is
confirmed by clicking the OK button, or if the
action is to be cancelled the Cancel button is
clicked.
If the action requested by the operator cannot be
done, the system displays the reason for not
proceeding with the action and a confirmation (OK)
button.
While an Action Required is active the system
periodically sounds an audible indicator, which
may be muted by the operator, see Alert Buzzer.

Operator Messages
Operator messages are used to notify the users at all nodes about course
changes on a monitored route (see Monitor Route).
When an operator message is displayed, the buzzer is sounded briefly to
alert the operator to their presence. All Operator
Messages include an Acknowledge button.
If a message is not acknowledged after a period
of 30 seconds it is then escalated to an Alert.

65900010 2-17
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar

System Shut Down

To shut down a standalone node, or your particular node on a multi-node
system, select Shutdown System in the System menu (see Shutdown)
and wait for the VisionMaster FT application and the Windows operating
system to power down. When the software has fully powered down then
switch the On/Off switch to off.

CAUTION:

Do NOT switch the On/Off switch to Off before the VisionMaster

software has fully powered down.

To shut down all the nodes on the system select Shutdown All Systems.
For a multi-node system a prompt appears requesting a confirmation of the
shutdown to be entered, see Shutdown for details.

CAUTION:

In a multi-node system, each node may be configured to provide a

connection to a sensor device or other peripheral equipment that
is also providing data to other nodes on the system. Therefore it
is important to change to alternate data sources before shutting
down a node that is providing navigational data to the system. If
an active sensor is lost, an alert is generated, and the colour of
data displayed for that sensor will change to red, on the nodes
that are still running.

2-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Radar

This section describes the basic operation of the radar. The following topics
are covered:
 Accessing the main menu and sub-menu functions
 A description of transmit mode and returning to standby mode.
 Transmit and Video mode selection on dual radar
 Selecting the radar range.
 Positioning own ship in the video circle.
 Accessing main menu functions.
 Setting the AIS target display options.
 Accessing target's Limits and Settings, via the CPA button
 Using the video processing controls.
 Setting the pulse length of radar transmission.
 Selecting and changing the Radar settings.
 Own ship's symbol and own ship's vector.
 Viewing chart information.
 Selecting Trial Manoeuvre.
 Safety Checking
 Selecting the watch mode.
 Alternate Bow functionality
 Russian River Register Selection

Appendix A describes operational functions specific to Multi-node and

Client/Server systems.

65900010 3-1
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Selecting Transmit Mode

When Transmit is selected from Standby, the system is switched to
Transmit mode.
To switch to Transmit mode do the following:
1. With the system in Standby, position the screen cursor over the
Standby toggle button.
2. Left click to select Transmit. The message
Radar Standby disappears from the video
circle and the toggle button displays
Transmit.
In Transmit mode the transceiver starts transmitting radar pulses and the
video circle shows own ship's heading line to indicate ship's direction, see
Heading Line. If there is a fault in the transmission of radar video data to
the console the video circle shows the message Video Failed.
The sensor devices that have been configured for the system will begin
acquiring navigation data to be made available to the operator, see Sensor
Management.
When in Transmit the transmission pulse length button (to the right of the
Transmit/Standby button) becomes active (for Master displays), see Radar
Transmission Pulse Length.
If the system is configured for Chart Radar then charts will be displayed
with land/sea, safety contours and other objects in outline only (Chart
Unfilled default mode), see Chart/Radar Maps View & Chart Database
Selection.

Selecting Transmit Mode in an Interswitched System

In an Interswitched system switching to transmit is only possible at a
display selected as a Master, or if the display is a Slave and the Master
display that is connected to the same transceiver is in transmit.
If the Master display is in Standby the Slave display cannot switch to
transmit.

3-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Selecting Transmit Mode in a Client Server Radar System

In a Client/Server Radar (CSR) system switching to transmit is only
possible if that Client is selected as a Master, or if the Client is a Slave and
the Master Client connected to the same Transceiver/Server (TRServer) is
in transmit. If the Master Client is in Standby the Slave Client cannot switch
to transmit.
A Client that is currently a Slave display can switch to being the Master
display of a TRServer from the Interswitch menu. For more information, see
`Radar Settings on a Client/Server’ in this Chapter.
If a Client has no connection to a transceiver via a Server the message
TxRx Disconnected appears on the video circle. The node can be
reconnected from the Interswitch menu.

Returning to Standby Mode

To return to Standby mode left click on the
Transmit toggle button. The screen prompts to
confirm the switch to Standby. To confirm click
the OK button, or to return to Transmit mode
click the Cancel button.
When the switch to Standby is made the
transceiver stops transmission, the system
returns to Standby and the text Radar Standby
re-appears on the video circle.

65900010 3-3
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Dual Radar – Transmit and Video Mode Selection

A Dual Radar system allows the overlay of video from two separate
transceivers on one display. The Standby/Transmit status of each
transceiver may be independently selected, and the video display for each
transceiver channel switched on and off.

Selecting Transmit Mode

A dual radar system enables each transceiver to be individually switched
from Standby to Transmit and back again. When either channel is
switched to Standby, a confirmation prompt is generated (see Returning to
Standby Mode).

Video On/Off Control

The video for each transceiver channel may be switched on and off
independently of the transceiver’s Standby/Transmit status.
To switch off the video at channel 1 or channel 2 click on the video button.
If video is switched off at channel 2 (with channel 2 still in Transmit), or the
video is automatically suppressed if channel 2 video origin is too far from
the centre of the display area, the video is automatically switched back on if
channel 1 is switched to or forced into Standby, or the video at channel 1 is
switched off.
When video is switched off for a channel and
the channel’s transceiver is in Transmit, the
video button is displayed with a red diagonal
line through the icon. Video will continue to be transmitted via the other
channel.
If the origin of channel 2 video is automatically suppressed while channel 1
is in Standby the message VIDEO OFF is displayed in red at the bottom of
the video circle. The message is removed when either channel 2 video re-
appears or channel 1 is switched to Transmit.

3-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Status Area
At the bottom right of the screen is a status
area containing four tab pages; each page is
accessed by clicking on the tab. The four
pages display the following information:
 Curs - provides a continuous indication
of data related to the cursor position, for
more details see Cursor Readout.
 Posn - provides current
latitude/longitude, depth below keel
(DBK) for own ship, and date/time data,
for more details see Position.
 Route - provides summary data on the currently monitored route,
for more details see Monitoring Routes in the Routes chapter.
 Trial - provides access and data relating to Trial Manoeuvres, for
more details see Trial Manoeuvre.

65900010 3-5
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Accessing Main Menu and Sub Menu Functions

The Main Menu functions are hidden at start
up, to access these functions move the cursor
over the Show Menu button at the bottom right
of the screen. This button appears when the
cursor is moved and is replaced by the
company logo when the cursor has been
stationary for a few seconds. The Main Menu
buttons are superimposed over the status
area.
To view each item's sub menu functions click a
Main Menu button, all sub menu functions
associated with the selected item are
displayed above the Main Menu list. To access
an function click on the appropriate sub-menu
button.
The most recently selected sub-menu is
remembered for each main menu button.
Additionally it is possible to cycle round the
sub-menus of a main menu by repeatedly
clicking on the main menu button.
To hide the main menu and sub-menu functions move the cursor outside
the area containing the menu buttons, the Status Area re-appears. To
retain the Main Menu functions on the screen, keep the cursor inside the
area containing the menu buttons.
Sub menu functions can also be accessed via the sub-menu selection bar
at the top of the menu area of the screen, see Sub Menu Selection and
Navigation Bar.

3-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Sub Menu Selection and Navigation Bar

A sub menu selection and navigation bar is
included at the top of the Features area of the
screen.
The bar displays the currently selected sub
menu. Left click on the selection bar to cycle to
the next sub-menu function within the currently
selected main menu. To display all the sub-
menu functions within the currently selected
main menu right click on the bar, a drop down
list of all sub menus is displayed. To select,
move the trackball to the required function and
left click.

Navigating to previous sub menus

The sub menu selection bar includes forward and back navigation buttons.
This feature enables you to quickly navigate to previously selected sub
menu functions, including functions that are not part of the currently
selected main menu.

To navigate back to a previously selected sub-menu click on the

button.
To navigate forward through the previously selected sub menus click on the
button.
If no sub menu navigation option is available the arrow is shown as a
dotted line.

65900010 3-7
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Cursor Readout
The cursor readout data is located in Status
Area at the bottom right of the screen. To
access the cursor readout click on the Curs
tab.
The readout displays the location of the cursor
position relative to the CCRP of own ship.
Readout data appears when the cursor is
within any area of the video circle.
The Cursor readout includes the following:
 Latitude (LAT) corresponding to the current cursor position.
 Longitude (LON) corresponding to the current cursor position.
 Range - the distance between the CCRP and the cursor position as
measured in nautical miles (NM).
 Bearing from the CCRP to the cursor position, displayed as true or
relative by clicking on the T or R toggle button.
 Reciprocal bearing, defined as bearing from the cursor position to
the CCRP, displayed as true or relative by clicking on the T or R
toggle button.
 Time To Go (TTG) - the geographical distance, displayed as hours,
minutes and seconds, between the CCRP and the cursor position
divided by speed over ground (when in ground stabilised mode) or
speed through water (when in water stabilised mode) . For
information on stabilisation options, refer to Sensor Data Display
Indicator Display in Sensor Management.
Cursor data may be calculated based on Rhumb line route or Great Circle
route, the default is Rhumb. To change the calculation of cursor data to
Great Circle click on the button, the button text changes to GC.
For more information on rhumb line and great circle, see the footnote
descriptions on page 8-18.
The LAT/LON readings are replaced by dashes if the following happen:
 the cursor passes over popup windows or toolbars
 own ship’s position is lost
 the compass is unaligned
 there is a compass error.

3-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Where the LAT/LON and bearing data is acquired from a valid sensor data
source the values are displayed in green, if the position data is degraded
then the values are displayed in orange, if the position data is considered
invalid and unusable the data is shown in red. For further information on
sensor data sources see Sensors Menu.

65900010 3-9
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Position
Summary data on own ship's Lat/Lon position
is displayed in the Status Area at the bottom
right of the screen. .
To access the Position data click on the Posn
tab
The Position window includes the following
data:
 The latitude/longitude (LAT/LON)
position of the CCRP, as reported by the Position sensor. Where
the LAT/LON data is acquired from a valid sensor data source the
values are displayed in green, if the position data is degraded then
the values are displayed in orange, if the position data is
considered invalid and unusable the data is shown in red. For
further information on sensor data sources see Sensors Menu.
 The sensor source of the position data. The connected position
sensor will in most cases be a GPS receiver and should be
configured to send position data using the GGA sentence3. When
position data is sent using the GGA sentence, the quality is
indicated as shown in the table below.
GGA - GPS Quality indicator
Indicator Description Field Acronym
0 Fix not available or invalid -
1 GPS SPS Normal
2 differential GPS Differential
3 GPS Precise Prcs
4 Real Time Kinematic RTK
5 Real Time Kinematic Float FRTK
6 Estimated dead reckoning DR
7 Manual Manual
8 Simulated -
Indicator values 0 and 8 are degraded values. No acronym
appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded
colour (orange).

3
NMEA sentence which provides the GPS current fix data. A sentence is a self contained line
of data.

3-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

A Loran-C device or an older GPS device may not provide position using
the GGA sentence. In this case the GLL sentence may be used. Quality
indicators when using the GLL sentence are shown in the table below.
GLL - system mode indicator
Indicator Description Field Acronym
A Autonomous Normal
D Differential Differential
E Estimated dead reckoning DR
M Manual Manual
S Simulated -
N Not valid -

Indicator values S and N are degraded values. No acronym

appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded
colour (orange).
If a GLONASS device is providing position data it is likely to be configured
to send the data using the GNS sentence. Quality indicators when using
GNS are shown in the table below.
GNS - system mode indicator
Indicator Description Field Acronym
A Autonomous Normal
D Differential Differential
E Estimated dead reckoning DR
F Real Time Kinematic Float FRTK
M Manual Manual
N Not valid -
P GNS Precise Prcs
R Real Time Kinematic RTK
S Simulated -

Indicator values N and S are degraded values. No acronym

appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded
colour (orange).

65900010 3-11
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

 The field to the right of the quality indicator denotes the datum used
for position data (defaults to WGS84). For information on WGS-84
4
datum see `Factors affecting Chart Accuracy' in Chart Facility.
 The depth value as reported by the depth sensor. If no sensor data
is available a series of red dashes are shown in the field. The field
to the right of the depth value denotes the depth source sensor, i.e.
depth below keel (DBK), depth below transducer (DBT) or depth
below waterline (DBW).
 The system time shown as the current date and time in hours,
minutes and seconds. This can be either UTC or Local (local time
may have a time offset applied), depending on the selection of
system time made in Time Management. The current selection is
shown next to the time.

4
World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) is a chart datum model used by chart makers to
map the earth’s surface.

3-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Range Scales
A set of pre-defined range scales are provided. The range scale varies
from 0.125 NM to 96 NM.

The current range is shown on the range scale button, between the < and >
buttons. Range scales can be chosen in both standby and transmit modes.
To change the radar range, do the following:
1. Click the < button to decrease the range scale, or the > button to
increase the range scale.
Or;
1. Left or right click on the range scale button. A list of available
ranges will be shown in a drop down menu.

2. Left click on the range you want to use.

65900010 3-13
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Range Rings
The Range Ring button enables you to toggle the
display of range rings on or off. When range rings
are switched on the button shows the current scale in nautical miles (NM).
The range rings are centred on own ships CCRP and are equally spaced.
Range rings are drawn out to the edge of the display, irrespective of the
range scale or any offsetting of the CCRP.
The range ring interval is dependent on the currently selected range scale.
The table below lists when the range ring interval changes at a particular
range scale.

Range Scale Range Ring Interval

(NM) (NM)
0.125 0.025
0.25 0.05
0.5 0.1
0.75 0.25
1.5 0.25
3 0.5
6 1
12 2
24 4
48 8
96 16

3-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Sensor Data Display

The information shown in the sensor data display is transmitted via
navigation sensors. This information is available in both Standby and
Transmit modes.
Each sensor is identified by the following data types:
 HDG (Heading)
 STW (Speed Through Water)
 COG (Course Over Ground)
 SOG (Speed Over Ground)
For each data type, a sensor source must be selected to provide the
required data. The selected sensor source for each data type can be
viewed, or where necessary changed, from the Sensors menu.

The sensor data display is divided into three columns:

Caption
The captions are always the abbreviated data types listed above.

Readout
Shows the current heading direction (as indicated by the Heading Line),
course and speed (through water and over ground) as indicated by the
selected sensor.
A readout of true heading is always displayed, unless compass alignment
is being prompted, or a compass error5 has occurred.

5
A compass error will cause the heading readout to change from green to red and a compass
alarm will be raised. If a stabilised picture presentation is in use, and the error is still present,
then after 1 minute, the picture will revert to Head-UP. For certain types of compass input, it
will be necessary to align the heading readout by manually entering the current heading after
the radar display is switched-on. The need for alignment is indicated by the heading readout
flashing green.

65900010 3-15
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Valid sensor data is shown in green. If the data is currently invalid it is

shown in red.

Data Source
The currently selected sensor from which the readout is taken.

Stabilisation Options
There are two stabilisation modes for target tracking, ground and water
referenced. The HDG and STW field block indicates water stabilisation and
the COG/SOG field block indicates ground stabilisation.
To toggle between the two stabilisation modes either click anywhere within
the two field blocks on the sensor data display, or click on the stabilization
field, directly below the presentation and
motion mode buttons. The block is highlighted
and sensor data is extracted based on the
stabilisation mode selected.

Multi-node System
In a multi-node system, all nodes on the system provide the same
indication of selected sensor source for each data type, regardless of the
node from which the operator makes selections.

3-16 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Off Centre, Pan and Goto

The following positioning options are available from a semi-transparent
window when you right click within the video circle.
 Off-centre Own Ship - moves own ship to a selected position, with
all chart and target positions also moved in accordance.
 Pan - moves a selected chart position (navigation marker or object)
to the centre of the video circle. Own ship's position, chart data and
target positions are all moved in accordance.
 Goto... - moves a specified location to the centre of the video circle
by using the location's LAT/LON coordinates, or by selecting a
previously saved location.

Off-centre Own Ship is available in both Transmit and Standby.

The Pan and Goto.. options are only available in Standby.

Off Centring Own Ship

The Off-centre Own Ship function is not available at a range scale of 96
NM.
To off centre own ship do the following:
1. Move the cursor to a position
within the video circle where you
want the off centre position to be
and right click. A semi-transparent
window appears at the selected
position.
2. Select Off-centre Own Ship from the window. Own ship's CCRP is
moved to the position selected, (see note below). All chart and
target positions are also moved in accordance.

If the position selected is outside the 70% range scale of the video
circle the Off centre option will still appear in the window but the
placement of the CCRP will be within the 70% area, at a point
nearest to the selected position.

3. To cancel the operation and remove the window from the screen
select Close Menu.

65900010 3-17
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Panning
The Pan function enables you to pan the display to view neighbouring
areas by positioning a selected point at the centre of the video circle.
If the current motion mode is Relative Motion (RM) the system
automatically changes the motion mode to True Motion (TM) when Pan is
selected.
Where the current presentation mode is Head Up (Stabilised or
Unstabilised) the system automatically changes the presentation mode to
Course Up (C Up) when Pan is selected.
To pan the picture do the following:
1. Move the cursor to either a specific
point on the chart (for example, a
mariner object or a chart location), or
to a selected position within the
video circle and right click. A semi-
transparent window appears at the
selected point.
2. Select Pan from the window. The selected position is moved to the
centre of the video circle. Own ship and all other chart and target
positions are also moved in accordance.
3. To cancel the operation and remove the window from the screen
select Close Menu.
Panning mode is automatically turned off when the following are selected:
 Off Centre, Centre or Max View
 changing motion mode
 changing presentation mode to Head Up (Stabilised or
Unstabilised)
 Transmit mode
When the system turns panning mode off and the CCRP (radar video origin
if video is displayed) is currently outside the offset limits, the system
automatically centres own ship.

3-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Goto
The Goto.. function enables the centre of the video circle to be moved to
known locations or a specific location on the chart. Any geographic
location can be designated by its LAT/LON coordinates. Locations that may
be used repeatedly can be saved by name, and then selected from a drop-
down list, which is sorted alphabetically. When a designated position is
accepted, the video circle shifts to show the desired location.
To create a new location do the following:
1. Right click at a selected position within the video circle and select
Goto.. from the popup window.
2. The Goto control window displays the LAT/LON position selected.
To display the list of previously saved locations click on the drop
down arrow to the right of the Locations field.
3. To create a new location based on the LAT/LON position click on
the Create.. button, the new location name field shows { Auto-
Generate Name }.To generate a location name based on the
current date and time click the OK button.
4. To generate the location under another name click in the new
location name field, a keypad appears below the location field.
Enter a location name using the keypad, and when complete click
the OK button.
5. The Goto.. control window reappears
with the saved location name in the
Location drop down list.
6. To enter revised coordinates for the new
location click in the LAT/LON fields, a
numerical keypad appears on the menu
area from where you can enter the new
LAT/LON coordinates.
7. To assign the coordinates to the
location click the Update button.
8. To move LAT/LON position to the centre of the video circle click the
Go button. Own ship along with all other chart and target positions
are moved in accordance.

65900010 3-19
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To rename or delete a location do the following:

To delete a saved location:
1. Select the location name to be deleted
by clicking on the Locations drop down
arrow.
2. With the location shown in the field,
click the Delete button. The location
and its coordinates are deleted from the
list.
To rename an existing location:
1. Select the location name to be renamed
by clicking on the Locations drop down arrow.
2. With the location shown in the field, click the Rename button.
3. The Goto.. window prompts to rename the current location's name
and includes the option of automatically generating a name based
on the current date and time {Auto-Generate Name}.
4. To auto generate the name click the OK button, or to create
another name click in the field and enter a name using the screen
keypad. When the location has been renamed the new name
appears in the location drop down list.

3-20 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Centre & Maximum View Options

Centring the Video Display
If the picture has been off centred or panned
(see Panning and Off Centring) the display
can be redrawn with own ship's CCRP at the centre of the video circle by
clicking on the Centre button. All other chart data and target positions are
also moved in accordance.

Positioning the picture for Maximum View

Clicking on the Max button off centres the video display at approximately
70% of the range scale radius so that a line drawn from it in the direction of
the current course passes through the centre of the video circle.
Maximum view is not available at a range scale of 96 NM.
In unstabilised presentation mode (Head Up), the direction is reciprocal to
the heading marker.
In a stabilised presentation mode (Stabilised Head Up, North Up or Course
Up), the direction is reciprocal to the course over ground (COG), or heading
marker if COG is unavailable.
For a description of presentation modes available, see Presentation Modes

65900010 3-21
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Heading Line, Beam Line and Stern Line

The Heading Line (HL) and Stern Line (SL) are lines drawn parallel to the
ship’s fore/aft axis indicating the current own ship heading (HL) or the
reciprocal of the current own ship heading (SL). The HL and SL begin at
the CCRP6 of own ship and are drawn to the edge of the video circle. The
Beam Line is drawn perpendicular to the HL and SL at the CCRP.
The HL is always displayed. The SL may be selected for display, in addition
to the HL, from the Display Settings in the Nav Tools menu. The SL is
shown as a dotted line. The figure below shows own ship with HL and SL
displayed.

The bearing of the HL or SL is dependent on the presentation mode.

 In Head Up (H UP) modes the lines are always drawn vertically.
 In Course Up (C UP) mode the lines are initially drawn vertically
and then change dependent on the current heading bearing.
In North Up (N UP) mode the lines are drawn at the current
compass heading.
When own ship is off-centred, the heading line bearing is automatically
adjusted so that the scale is always referenced correctly.

6
The position of the heading line and beam line within own ship's outline symbol is dependent
on the distance values applied to the CCRP in the Configuration tool (see VMFT Ship's
Manual, Volume 2, Chapter 1 `Configuration’). To position the CCRP in the centre of the ship's
outline the distance from bow must be half the configured value for ship's length. If no value is
applied, the heading and beam line will appear at the bow of ship's outline symbol.

3-22 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

For further information on how the presentation mode affects own ship's
heading line, see Presentation Modes.
Beam Line
The beam line is a short line drawn at right angles to the heading line and
extending to each side of own ship's CCRP, the default (minimum) length is
10mm.
The beam line length can be increased from the 10mm default from the
Display Settings sub-menu in the Nav Tools menu.

65900010 3-23
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Own Ship Symbols

There are three types of symbol that may be used to display own ship’s
position and heading:
 Minimised Symbol
 Outline Symbol
 Custom Symbol

Minimised Symbol
The minimised symbol is drawn where the scaled outline symbol cannot be
resolved at the given range scale. The minimised symbol may be drawn in
one of two ways, depending on the current view selected in Chart/Radar
Maps.
 Circle Symbol - the circle symbol is drawn when the system is in
Charts view (Filled or Unfilled). It has a 6mm diameter for the outer
circle and a 3mm diameter for the inner circle, in addition to the
heading line and beam line.

 Heading and Beam Line Symbol - this symbol appears when the
system is in Radar Maps or Charts Off view. The symbol consists
of the heading line and beam line only.

Outline Symbol
The outline symbol is displayed when Default Symbol is selected in
Ownship Display Settings and the greatest dimension of the ship is larger
than 6mm on the display.
The outline symbol is displayed in addition to own ship minimised symbol
(heading line and beam line).

3-24 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

The position of the minimised symbol wrt the outline symbol is

dependent on CCRP location offsets applied at commissioning.

Custom Symbol
This symbol represents ownship drawn to the actual outline of the ship. The
custom symbol is displayed when Custom Symbol is selected in Ownship
Display Settings and the beam of the ship is larger than 3mm on the
display.
Note that Custom Symbol will only be enabled if an outline definition for
own ship has been defined in the Configuration tool by entering line
segments, which are defined as x,y coordinates for the start and end point
of each segment. If no custom symbol has been defined then this symbol
will be unavailable for display.
The custom symbol is displayed in addition to own ship minimised symbol
(heading line and beam line).

Faults in Heading and Position Data affecting Own Ship Symbol

If the position data becomes invalid, ship's outline and circle symbol are
shown in red and the system switches to water stabilised mode, (see
Sensor Data). The heading line and beam line remain in green.
If the heading data becomes invalid, ship's outline or circle symbol are not
displayed and the heading line/beam line is shown in red. After a short
period of time the presentation mode changes to Unstabilised Head Up
(see Presentation Modes). In Unstabilised Head Up the ship's heading line
and beam line are then shown in green.

Own Ship Vector

The own ship vector symbol is a line indicating ship’s direction and speed.
The end of the line is shown with a double arrowhead when in ground
stabilisation mode, and a single arrowhead when in water stabilisation
mode, if enabled in ownship Display Settings. For a description of the
stabilisation modes see Indicator Display.
The vector line begins at own ship’s CCRP and is drawn with a length
corresponding to the distance on the video circle that own ship will cover,
given its current speed, in the vector time chosen, see Vector Modes.

65900010 3-25
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

When in ground stabilised mode, the vector line is drawn to reflect the COG
shown on the sensor data display. When in water stabilised mode, the
vector line is drawn to reflect the course through the water based on the
current heading shown on the sensor data display.
Own ship vector is not drawn if Predicted Vector is enabled (see Display
Settings, Ownship) and the stabilisation mode is ground based7.
In water stabilised mode own ship vector is drawn in addition to the
predicted vector.
If own ship vector's end point is not on the available area of the video circle,
a semicircle is drawn, centred at the point that the vector intersects the
edge of the available area.
Own ship vector is shown in red when the data received from the sensors
used to draw the vector (water or ground stabilised) is invalid or degraded.
If enabled, tick marks will be displayed along the vector length at one
minute intervals, with every sixth tick mark shown with double thickness.
The tick marks can be switched on or off, and the tick mark interval time
adjusted from the Display Settings sub-menu in the Nav Tools menu.

Predicted Vector
Predicted vector is a tool to indicate where the ship will go based on current
speed, course, and rate of turn. Predicted Vector is turned on and off from
Ownship tab in Display Settings, Nav Tools menu.

7
This is the default presentation, set at commissioning. Ownship vector and predicted vector
may be selected for simultaneous display, but this is NOT the recommended setting.

3-26 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Radar Settings
Your display may be configured to operate with one of six transceivers
(labelled A to F) located at different positions on the ship. Each transceiver
may be either an X-Band or S-Band.
The display can be a master display or a slave display. Master displays
have full control over a transceiver; therefore only one display can be set
as the master of a transceiver at any one time. Also, a display can only be
connected to one transceiver at a time.
The Transceiver (TX/RX) field at bottom left of
the screen shows the following transceiver
information:
 label (A to F)
 transceiver type (X or S)
 display status (Master or Slave)
To view and set the transceiver options left click
on the Transceiver field. If an Interswitch is fitted
the menu displays a list of available transceivers
for your display.
For more information on transceiver settings, see
Interswitch in Chapter 11 `Radar’.

Dual Radar Interswitch Settings

On a dual radar system with an Interswitch fitted,
any transceivers that are available for Channel 1
and Channel 2 may be selected.
The selection of transceivers is independent
between channels.

65900010 3-27
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Radar Settings on Client/Server

On a Client/Server Radar (CSR) system a physical interswitch is not used.
Client nodes connect to Server nodes via a network of Ethernet switches.
The Clients are virtually interswitched to the requested Server, with each
Server connected to a transceiver.
A Client’s request for transceiver control is sent to the transceiver via the
associated Server unit. If two or more Clients request control of the same
transceiver, one must be set as Master and have control of that transceiver,
the other Clients are set as Slave and will have no control over the
transceiver. The process of selecting the Master Client is controlled by the
Server units. Each Server can supply individually controlled radar data for a
maximum of eight Clients. For information on connecting a ninth Client to
the same transceiver, refer to `Interswitch on Client/Server Radar’ in
Chapter 11 – Radar.
To view or change the transceiver connections
for your Client node, and view the connection
status for all other Clients on the system open
the Interswitch sub menu in the Radar menu.
The Request for Client# area (where #
represents your Client number) enables the
Master/Slave status of your Client node to be
changed.
The Status area list the status of all Clients
connected to the selected Transceiver, e.g.
Master to Transceiver A, Disconnected or
Not Available.
For more information on transceiver settings,
see `Interswitch on Client Server Radar’ in
Chapter 11 `Radar’.

3-28 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Radar Transmission Pulse Length

The current selection of pulse length is indicated in the pulse
length toggle button. The caption is an abbreviation of the
current pulse length selection (SP, MP or LP).
The pulse length can only be changed on a master display and in Transmit.
On a Slave display, or when in Standby, the pulse length is greyed out.
There are three pulse lengths:
 Short Pulses (SP) are used at close range to improve the
discrimination and range accuracy of received echoes.
 Long Pulses (LP) are used at long range to improve the ability of
the radar to pick out targets at distance.
 Medium Pulse (MP) is a pulse length used as an optimum between
discrimination and long range detection.
Pulse lengths are restricted to the following ranges:
 SP is available on the 3NM range and below.
 MP is available in the 0.5NM to 24NM ranges.
 LP is available at 3NM range and above.
If the pulse length is changed when the current range scale is outside the
permitted pulse length range listed above a temporary prompt: Invalid
Range for Pulse Length appears.
If the range scale is changed to a value outside the currently selected pulse
length parameters listed above, the pulse length automatically changes.
To change the pulse length, do the following:
1. Left click on the pulse length button. This will toggle through the
available choices for the pulse length, depending on range.
Or
1. Right click on the pulse length button. A list of
available pulse lengths will be shown in a drop
down menu.
2. Left click on the pulse length you want to use.

Radar Transmission Pulse Length on Dual Radar

On a dual radar system channels 1 and 2 may
have a different pulse length selected, providing
both transceivers are in Transmit mode.

65900010 3-29
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart/Radar Maps View & Chart Database Selection

Where the system is enabled for Chart Radar the
following viewing options may be selected from the
Chart and Radar Maps button:
 Chart Filled - displays a complete chart presentation, with land
and sea shown as different colours.
 Chart Unfilled - displays a chart presentation showing land and
sea as the same colour with land outline only shown.
 Radar Maps - displays a defined collection of geographic objects
(points areas and lines) known as radar maps.
 Charts Off - shows no maps or chart information.

If the system is enabled for Radar only then only the Radar Maps
and Charts Off options are available.

Charts are suppressed if the range scale is greater than 3 nautical miles
(NM) when the presentation mode is Stabilised Head Up or Unstabilised
Head Up (see Presentation Modes). Charts are redrawn in Stabilised or
Unstabilised Head Up if the range scale is 3 NM or lower. Charts are
shown at all range scales when the presentation mode is North Up or
Course Up.
In the event of a malfunction in the source of chart data, this malfunction
will not adversely affect the operation of the radar and AIS system, or
restrict the use of unrelated system functionality.
To access the chart presentation and radar maps
options either click on the button until the option
appears, or right click on the button and select from
the drop down list. Left clicking on the button toggles
between Charts Off and the last selected option.
Right clicking on the Chart and Radar Maps button
also displays a list of enabled chart databases (e.g.
SevenCs - S-57 or C-Map-ENC). If charts are
displayed the currently selected chart database is
indicated by a tick mark.
The chart databases available in the system are defined by which chart
engines are configured and what chart data has been installed.
For information on configuring chart engines, see Chapter 1 `Configuration’
in Volume 2 of VMFT Ship's Manual.

3-30 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

All variations of SevenCs charts are installed from the SevenCs

ChartHandler utility, which runs without requiring the VMFT node to be
shutdown. For information refer to Installing SevenCs Charts.
C-Map charts are installed from the Sperry Chart Installer utility. This
process requires shutting down the VMFT application and is therefore
described in the Supplementary Features User Guide, 65900014, Chapter
1, `Chart Installation'.
To select another chart database click on the chart database line in the
drop down list. The screen briefly refreshes and changes to the selected
chart database.
For details on the selected chart database, see Chart Legend in Chapter
12, Charts.
For more information on creating radar maps, see Mapping in Chapter 6,
Nav Tools.

AIS Input and Filter Button

The AIS On and Filter Section button is located at the top
right of the main screen.
When AIS Input is enabled the button shows the message AIS On, when
AIS input is switched off the button shows the message AIS Off.
To access the AIS Input and Filter settings left click on the button, the AIS
Display window appears.
The Enable Input check box enables the AIS input and display to be
switched on or off.
For information on AIS filter settings, see AIS Display in Chapter 10
`Targets’.

CPA Button
The CPA (Closest Point of Approach) button is located at
the top right of the main screen. The button enables you to
quickly access the Limits and Settings window, which
defines the CPA/TCPA, bow crossing (BCR/BCT) and target association
settings.
To access, left click on CPA. For information on target limits and settings,
see Limits and Settings.

65900010 3-31
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Video Processing Controls

The video processing controls are located in the
bottom left hand corner of the display. The
current level is indicated by the shaded bar
adjacent to the video control caption.
All the video processing levels are shown in grey
colour (non-editable) in Standby. In Transmit
mode the Gain level is shown as green. The
Rain/Sea anti clutter levels appear green (editable) when the Auto/Manual
control is set to Manual.
In open sea conditions, select Auto to suppress rain and sea clutter. This
normally provides optimum detection by adapting the amount of clutter
suppression applied to the varying characteristics of clutter returns.
To select Manual or Automatic Anti-Clutter Control:
1. Position the screen cursor over the Manual/Auto selection button
(the button displays the current mode).
2. Left click to toggle control between Manual and Auto. The Rain
and Sea levels are displayed as green (editable) when Manual is
selected.

Manually Adjusting Video Gain and Anti-Clutter Controls

The following video processing controls can be adjusted independently.
The Video Gain may be adjusted when the Auto/Manual control is in Auto.
The anti-clutter (Rain and Sea) controls can only be adjusted when the
control button is set to Manual.
 Video GAIN
Always adjust the Gain setting while on the longer range scales of
12 or 24 NM. A light background speckle should be present to
achieve the best target detection and long range performance. A
temporary reduction in gain can be beneficial when searching for
targets in rain or snow conditions. Video gain is independently
adjustable for Auto and Manual anti-clutter modes.
 Anti Clutter (RAIN)
Use the Anti-Clutter Rain control to optimise suppression of rain
clutter, i.e. balance the detection of targets within the clutter region
(under the rain) with detection of those outside the clutter region.

3-32 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Always use the control with great care. Excessive suppression can
cause loss of small targets. It is often advantageous to use this
control to search for targets in the clutter region, returning the
control to zero after the search.
 Anti Clutter (SEA)
Use the Anti-Clutter Sea control to reduce sea clutter to an
operational level where some residual clutter speckle is present.
The setting must permit small targets, often of similar signal
strength to the sea clutter returns to be detected.
Always use the control with great care. Avoid setting the control to
completely remove all sea clutter, as this will reduce the detection
of small targets. The setting should be periodically checked as
prevailing sea conditions change.
Each control is adjusted using the shaded bar behind its associated caption
which indicates the level in percentage terms with 0% on the left, 100% on
the right.

To manually adjust the Video GAIN, RAIN and SEA settings, do the
following:
The Gain and anti-clutter settings may be adjusted either from the control
panel, or by using the trackball.

IMPORTANT NOTE – There are different stored values of Gain

setting for Auto and Manual, you will need different settings for
each mode.

To adjust the Gain and anti-clutter settings using the trackball:

1. Position the screen cursor over the Gain
value and left click to make the control bar
active. The bar colour will appear blue.
Or:
1. With the Auto/Manual control set to Manual, position the screen
cursor over the anti-clutter control (Rain or Sea) you wish to
change and left click to make control bar active. The bar colour will
appear blue.
2. Move the trackball left or right to move
the bar to the gain/suppression level
required, as the bar is adjusted the
current percentage figure appears in the
centre of the field. You can exit the adjustment and return to the
previous setting by right clicking.

65900010 3-33
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

3. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar adjustment. The
bar will return to its green shaded state and the percentage figure
disappears.
When Auto Anti-Clutter check box is ticked after adjustment the Rain and
Sea anti clutter settings appear grey.
To adjust the settings using the control panel:
Turn the required video rotary control clockwise to increase the gain or anti-
clutter level, or anti-clockwise to suppress the gain or anti-clutter level.

The Video rotary controls only adjust the gain/suppression levels.

The adjusted level is set and the bar deactivated after a 10 second
period of inactivity.

Enhanced Video Mode

A substantial improvement in the presentation of small and/or short range
targets, especially when operating at range scales of 3 NM and above, can
normally be achieved by selecting the enhanced video mode. This facility
is available on range scales 0.75 NM and above.
Using the Enhanced Video Mode
In estuary and open sea conditions, always use the enhanced video mode
for best target detection. This will enhance small targets; significantly
improving their perceptibility on the display at all ranges, especially on
range scales of 3 NM and above.

CAUTION:

Use the Enhance Control with caution. If used on short range

scales it will degrade target discrimination.

To turn the Enhanced Video Control On or Off:

1. Position the screen cursor over the Enhance
button, above the Gain setting.
2. Left click to toggle the Enhance control On or Off.

3-34 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Dual Radar Video Processing Controls

On a dual radar system the Gain and anti-
clutter controls (Rain and Sea) can be
independently adjusted for each channel.
For example, the Auto/Manual control on
Channel 1 may be set to manual (Man 1)
with Channel 2 remaining in Auto (Auto 2).
The Gain and anti-clutter settings are split horizontally for the two channels,
with the upper bar representing Channel 1 and the lower bar representing
Channel 2.
To aid the visual differentiation between the two
channels the Channel 2 video settings are
displayed in a slightly darker shade than the
Channel 1 video settings. This shade difference
applies when both channels are set to Manual
and the Gain/anti-clutter levels are displayed in green, and when adjusting
the settings with the bar colour displayed in blue.
There is an additional method of manually adjusting the Gain, Rain and
Sea settings for each channel on a dual radar system.
1. With both channels in Transmit, right click
in the required field. The selected Gain or
anti-clutter control is shown in the features
area of the display with channel 1 and
channel 2 fields separated.

The dual radar control form is usually

displayed for about 10 seconds, after which the control form is
replaced with the previously displayed menu.

2. Left click in Channel 1 or Channel 2 fields to make the control bar

active. The bar colour will appear blue.
3. Move the trackball left or right to move the bar to the
gain/suppression level required. As the bar is adjusted the current
percentage figure appears in the centre of the field.
4. Click the OK button to accept the revised levels and exit the control
form.

65900010 3-35
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Radar Fine Tuning

The radar tuning indicator is located in the
bottom left hand of the display, below the video
processing controls.
The current level of tuning is indicated by the
shaded bar adjacent to the Tune caption and is
continuously updated. This bar indicates the level in percentage terms with
0% on the left, 100% on the right. The tuning indicator can only be
adjusted manually if the system is configured as a Master radar.
The two tuning modes are AFC and Manual, with the default mode as
AFC. The tuning mode may only be adjusted when the system is in
Transmit.
For a Master display there are three tuning controls:
 AFC on/off
 Manual fine tune
 Coarse tune (Diagnostics)
The tuning indicator may also be accessed from the Transceiver window,
see Chapter 11, Radar.
In a multi-node system the coarse and fine tune levels are distributed and
used by other nodes on the system.
For accurate tuning to be achievable, coarse tuning must have been
correctly adjusted during initialisation. Refer Chapter 2 ` Diagnostics and
Commissioning’ in Volume 2 of VMFT Ship's Manual.

To select between Manual or AFC tuning.

1. Position the screen cursor over the AFC/Manual selection field.
2. Left click to toggle the tuning control
to Manual or AFC.

3-36 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Manual Fine Tuning Adjustment

For manual fine tuning, long pulse (LP) must be selected, ideally using the
highest range scale that shows a known target near to the edge of the
radar circle. The tuning mode should be set to Manual.

To manually fine tune do the following.

1. With Manual selected left click in the
Tune bar to activate the control. The tune
bar divides into two, the upper bar is the tuning indicator, and the
lower bar is the tuning control level indicator (which indicates how
well the receiver is tuned).
2. Move the trackball left or right to adjust the tuning control (lower
bar) until the maximum level is reached on the tuning indicator
(upper bar). If distant radar targets are visible, use these for the
final adjustment.
3. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar. The bar will return
to its green state. A right click will de-activate the bar but not set
the new level.

65900010 3-37
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Radar Fine Tuning on a Dual Radar

On dual radar both radar channels may
be separately tuned, providing each
transceiver is set as a Master.
On dual radar a Tune control is accessed from the features area of the
display, similar to the controls described previously for adjusting dual radar
video processing.
1. With Man 1 or Man 2 selected (either individually for each channel
or for both channels), right click in the Tune field. The radar tune
control is shown in the features area of the display with channel 1
and channel 2 fields separated.
2. If channels 1 and 2 are set to manual the
Tune control shows both indicators
available for tuning with the identification of
the transceivers shown in white lettering.

The dual radar Tune control form is usually

displayed for about 10 seconds, after which the control form is
replaced with the previously displayed menu.

3. If one channel is set to manual and the

other channel set to AFC the Tune control
enables tuning on the channel set to
manual mode. The channel in AFC mode
will display the updated tuning in
percentage terms as read only values.
4. Both channels are tuned in the same way
as described previously for manual fine
tuning for single channel radar.
5. Click the OK button to accept the revised
tuning levels and exit the Tune control
form.

3-38 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Synthetics Button
The Synthetics button enables all synthetics on the
screen to be temporarily suppressed. Radar video and
trails are not suppressed.

To suppress synthetics:
1. Left click and hold the left key down on the Synth On button. The
button changes to Synth Off and the screen displays radar video
only. All synthetic data is suppressed.
2. To restore all synthetics release the left key on the Synth button.

Coast Button
The Coast button suppresses chart synthetics, but retains the
coast outline. Radar video and navigation synthetics are not
suppressed when the Coast button is pressed.

To suppress synthetics but display the coast outline:

1. Left click and hold the left key down on the Coast button. All chart
synthetics on the screen are suppressed with the exception of any
coast outline which may be in the vicinity of the video circle.
2. To restore all synthetics release the left key on the Coast button.

65900010 3-39
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Trial Manoeuvre
Trial Manoeuvre is a facility that allows the effect of a proposed
manoeuvre, based on rate of turn for own ship, to be displayed, both
graphically and alpha-numerically. This gives the operator the ability to
evaluate the possibility of collisions, by observing the theoretical relative
target vectors that would be produced.
Trial Manoeuvre is located in the Status Area
at the bottom right of the screen. To access
click on the Trial tab.
The manoeuvre course and speed can be
either ground referenced or water referenced,
depending on the currently selected stabilised
mode, see Sensor Data Display.
However it is recommended for Trial
manoeuvres that water speed (STW) is
selected. When current speed is over ground
(COG) a warning is given when the Manoeuvre
On check box is ticked that the trial course, speed
and vectors will be ground referenced.

Adjusting Trial Manoeuvre Parameters

The following parameters can be specified to
define the proposed manoeuvre:
 A true course to follow after the
manoeuvre.
 A true speed to be maintained during and after the manoeuvre.
 A delay time (time to turn) before the manoeuvre is to start.
 A rate of turn for the manoeuvre.

3-40 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

The ranges and default values for trial manoeuvres are shown in the table
below.

Parameter Ranges Power on Default

Final True
0 to 359.9°, in 0.1° increments 000.0°
Course

Manoeuvre
0.0 kn to 75 kn 15 kn
Speed

Time to 0 to 30 minutes in 0.1 minute

0.0min
Turn increments

Own ship's
1°/min. to maximum set rate of
Rate of Turn commissioned
turn in initialisation.
standard rate of turn

To enter trial manoeuvre values do the following:

The following trial manoeuvre values may be edited:
 Trial (STW or SOG) - the proposed speed of own ship to be
maintained during and after the manoeuvre.
 Final (CSE or COG) - the proposed course of own ship to be
followed after the manoeuvre.
 Time to Turn - the figure representing the time in minutes between
switching the trial manoeuvre on and actually starting the
manoeuvre.
 Rate of Turn - the value in degrees per minute to be maintained
during the manoeuvre.
To change or enter a value:
1. Left click on the current value to activate, the text turns green
(editable).
2. Move the trackball left or right to set the required speed.
3. Left click to accept and exit edit mode.
To change or enter a value for Final CTW/COG:
1. Left click on the Final CTW/COG button. An
Action Required dialog opens prompting to
enter a bearing.
2. Enter the required final true course (from 0º
to 359.9º) and click the OK button. The
dialog is removed and the entered value
appears on the Final CTW/COG button.

65900010 3-41
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Turn Radius
The turn radius figure is generated from the manoeuvre speed and the rate
of turn and is therefore not editable.

Delay Countdown
To start the manoeuvre delay countdown tick the Timer check box, the
time value previously entered in the Time to Turn field starts to count down
to zero in real time, whether or not Manoeuvre On is enabled.
When the Time to Turn countdown reaches 30 seconds a Manoeuvre
Display warning is displayed.
When the delay countdown reaches zero the Timer check box is
automatically unticked.

Displaying the Trial Manoeuvre

Tick the Manoeuvre On check box to display the trial manoeuvre.
Whenever Manoeuvre On is ticked the display shows a large flashing T in
the lower half of the screen.
The manoeuvre vectors are displayed until the manoeuvre is switched off
by unticking the Manoeuvre On check box.
The manoeuvre speed, course, rate of turn, time to turn, vector type and
length can be changed at any time during the trial.
If true (T) vectors are selected, the trial vector shows own ships proposed
true course during the manoeuvre.
The Rate of Turn and the manoeuvre speed determine the radius of the
turn based on data entered. Effects due to tidal stream and leeway are not
taken into account.
If relative (R) vectors are selected, the trial vectors are applied to every
tracked target or activated AIS target, with own ship’s vector suppressed,
and show the course and speed of the targets relative to own ship.

Display of Vectors
Trial manoeuvre vectors are displayed in all presentation modes and all
motion modes when the following conditions are satisfied:
 the Manoeuvre On check box is ticked.
 the heading is valid.
 the scale is valid for the display of target synthetics.

3-42 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

The display of True or Relative vectors for trial

manoeuvre is determined by the Vector mode
selection button.
Enter the proposed vector time by left clicking in the value field and moving
the joystick left or right to increase or decrease the vector time.

The trial manoeuvre vector lengths displayed are dictated by the

selected vector time. Entering a longer vector time will allow you to
see further into the trial manoeuvre. If the vector time is not long
enough to cover the entire manoeuvre then only a part of a trial
manoeuvre vector will be displayed.

Trial Manoeuvre Vector

Own ship’s trial manoeuvre vector consists of
the following three sections:
 The first section is a straight line
continuing on the own ship's current
course and speed. The vector length is
calculated using the own ship’s current
speed and the trial manoeuvre delay
time.
 The second section consists of a circular arc between the end of
the first section and start of the third section. The arc radius is
determined by the manoeuvre rate of turn and the manoeuvre
speed.
 The third section is a straight line showing the final course of the
own ship at the manoeuvre speed.

Trial CPA and TCPA

It is possible to display target trial CPA and TCPA values predicted using
the trial manoeuvre parameters.
Any trial CPA and TCPA data is labelled TRIAL CPA and TRIAL TCPA
respectively and does not obscure the actual target data.
Trial CPA and TCPA data is displayed for selected target in the Target
Data window, see Target Data in Chapter 10, Targets.

65900010 3-43
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Watch Mode
If your system is configured as a Total Watch, the Watch Mode button at
the top right of the screen enables the console view to be changed.
To view or change the watch mode click on
the button. The drop down list shows the
watch modes available with the currently
selected watch mode ticked.
Watch modes unavailable for selection are
listed in orange lettering.
The following Watch Modes are supported:
 Chart Radar
 ECDIS
 Playback8
 Conning Info Display8
 Central Alert Management
 If a Third Party Application8 has been configured as a watch mode
this application will be available for selection from the Watch Mode
button.
The availability of the product presentations listed above is dependent on
the product type installed at initialisation.
Products not available from the Watch Mode list can be purchased from
your VisionMaster FT supplier.

8
For user information on the Conning Information Display (CID), Playback mode and Third
Party Applications refer to the Supplementary Features User Guide, 65900014.
For information on configuring the watch mode options, refer to Chapter 1 `Configuration' in
Volume 2 of the VisionMaster Ship's Manual 65900011V2.

3-44 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Total Watch Features

When a watch mode is changed on a Total Watch product, certain settings
made that are common to Radar/Chart Radar and ECDIS are retained
across modes. These common settings include:
 Transmit/Standby
 Target Display and Target Tracking
 AIS On/Off
 Acquisition Zones
 EBLs and VRMs
Functional aspects that are specifically not shared across watch modes
include stabilisation mode (water/ground based) and presentation settings,
including presentation mode, motion mode, centre and max view.
When Conning Info Display or Central Alert Management watch modes are
selected the display retains the Alert Status and Prompts indicators, the
Alert buzzer and Watch Mode button.
When a Third Party Application watch mode is selected the display retains
the Alert Status indicator and Watch Mode button.
When Playback mode is selected the display retains the Watch Mode
button only.

65900010 3-45
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Safety Checking
The safety checking facility provides the
operator with advanced warning that own
ship may be headed towards objects that
could endanger the safety of own ship,
as indicated in the ENC9 or mariner
object database.
The system periodically searches the
chart database and mariner objects
10
database for objects that could endanger the safety of own ship.
Contours, prohibited areas, and areas with special conditions are
considered dangerous if their depth is less than own ship’s safety depth or
no depth is defined for that object.
All objects above the water are considered dangerous if their clearance is
less than own ship safety height. When an object currently not in the list of
dangerous objects intersects own ship's safety region, the object is added
to the dangerous objects list, which defines dangerous objects as either
`Chart Dangers' or `Chart Cautions', see Dangers.
The safety depth and height for each object are checked against the default
depth, height and contour settings in the Chart Depths/Heights window, see
Chart Depths/Heights.
The proximity of dangers to own ship is indicated by the safety
check icon at the top right of the screen. When there are no
dangerous objects in the Dangers list the background colour of the icon is
shown in the system colour; when one or more items are added to the
Dangers list the icon colour changes to red (for Chart Dangers) or yellow
(for Chart Cautions).
In addition to the safety check icon, when items are added to the Dangers
list the Alerts button shows the message Chart Dangers on a red flashing
background colour (see Alert Status Indicator) if the items are defined as
dangers. If the Dangers list defines the items only as cautions the Alert
Status Indicator will not raise an alert unless the Alerts On Cautions check

9
Electronic Nautical Chart. Chart data conforming to specification published in IHO Special
Publication No. 57 (S57). Charts complying with this specification are available from various
suppliers.
10
Mariner object s are selected from a list of pre-defined object types (point, line and/or area)
which have data assigned to them, such as category, type, description and position.
Mariner objects are then saved and retrieved from a database and can be displayed on the
chart, assigned to a chart layer or exported to an external system. For details refer to Chapter
12 `Charts’, Manual Chart Update

3-46 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

box has been ticked in the Dangers sub menu, see Dangers in Chapter 12,
Charts.

WARNING!

THE ABILITY TO DETECT CHART DANGERS IS RELIANT ON THE

QUALITY OF THE DATA CONTAINED IN THE LOADED AND
ENABLED CHART DATABASE AND THE QUALITY OF THE
VECTOR CHART COVERAGE. THE OPERATOR NEEDS TO BE
AWARE OF THE QUALITY OF THE DATABASE PRESENTLY
LOADED AND ENABLED FOR THE OPERATING AREA, AND
ALWAYS KEEP THE DATABASE UPDATED. IN ADDITION THE
OPERATOR MUST ALWAYS SET THE LOOK AHEAD RANGE (TIME
OR DISTANCE) TO AN APPROPRIATE VALUE CONSIDERING
OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS SUCH AS SHIP'S SPEED,
STOPPING DISTANCE AND GENERAL ABILITY TO MANOEUVRE,
SEE CHART DANGERS. IN ADDITION TO THE OWN SHIP BASED
SAFETY CHECKING THE OPERATOR SHOULD REVIEW THE
DANGERS LIST PROVIDED ON THE DANGERS TAB OF THE
MONITOR ROUTE MENU WHENEVER A NEW ROUTE IS LOADED,
AND PERIODICALLY DURING THE ROUTE WHEN PROGRESSING
TO NEW LEGS, SEE MONITOR ROUTE - DANGERS. THE ROUTE-
BASED REGION CHECKED USES THE XTE ALERT LIMIT WHICH
IS TYPICALLY MUCH WIDER THAN THE OWNSHIP SAFETY
REGION, AND THEREFORE CAN INDICATE THE AVAILABLE
CORRIDOR FOR SAFE DEVIATION FROM THE ROUTE ON EITHER
SIDE OF THE TRACK LINE.
IT IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT THAT THE OPERATOR BE
AWARE THAT:
1. THE OWNSHIP BASED SAFETY CHECKING IS THE ONLY
SAFETY CHECKING PROVIDED WHEN MAKING A DEVIATION
ON A TEMPORARY ROUTE. THE TEMP ROUTE DOES NOT
APPLY A SAFETY CHECKING REGION BASED ON THE XTE
LIMIT AS THE SAVED/NAMED ROUTE DOES. THE DANGERS
LIST PROVIDED ON THE ROUTE MONITOR 'DANGERS' TAB
ARE FOR THE PERMANENT ROUTE ONLY.
2. SAFETY CHECKING IS DONE PERIODICALLY, WITH AS MUCH
AS 30 SECONDS BETWEEN SEARCHES. THE OPERATOR
SHOULD THEREFORE BE AWARE THAT THERE MIGHT BE A
SLIGHT DELAY IN UPDATING THE LIST OF CHART DANGERS
TO REFLECT THE CURRENT CONDITIONS.

65900010 3-47
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Multi-node Support
All nodes on a multi-node system perform safety checking. Each node in
the system will list the objects of concern detected by own ship safety
checking the charts on that particular node.
The periodic own ship safety checking is triggered on all nodes at the same
time.
Only one alert is raised for all chart dangers found on all nodes during the
safety checking operation. One node on the system is designated as an
arbiter for Chart Dangers alerts.
Chart Dangers alerts will appear on all nodes, irrespective of whether a
particular node has the necessary chart installed (for example, Radar only
node or a node with only raster charts installed).
If the following safety checking parameters are changed at any node, these
changes automatically go into effect on all nodes:
 Safety depth (see Chart Depths/Heights)
 Safety height (see Chart Depths/Heights)
 Look ahead time (see Dangers)

3-48 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Alternate Bow
If an alternate bow in use has been configured the system assumes that
there are two bows that may be used, the `normal bow’ at the front of the
ship and the ‘alternate bow’, usually at the rear of the ship.
The system should also be configured to include two CCRPs, one
applicable for each bow direction.
A switch may provide a discrete signal, which is also used by gyros and
speed logs to indicate whether the normal bow or alternate bow is acting as
the current bow of the ship.
If no external discrete signal is available an alternate bow menu can be
selected in the Configuration tool that enables the operator to tick an
Alternate Bow in Use check box. This is found in the Characteristics tab of
the Commissioning menu.
When alternate bow is enabled and the bow is switched from normal to
alternate the following changes take place:
 All external sensors will update their signal to reflect the alternate
bow, i.e. the heading gyro will add 180º and speed logs will change
the sign of the speed value. If the system is using a stepper
interface (see `Information on Sensor Inputs to the System’ in
Chapter 1 `Overview’) then the stepper may be re-aligned to reflect
the alternate bow heading. VM FT will not automatically adjust any
sensor input; however no inappropriate sensor alerts should be
generated as a result of alternate bow enablement.
 Ownship symbol may change where the ‘bow’ of the outline is 180°
opposite of the heading being supplied.
 All other synthetics (CCRP, radar positions, ownship vector origin)
are re-drawn to correctly reflect positions based on configured
offsets.
 Corrections are performed to all sensor data (e.g. positions and
velocities) based on interpretation of configured positions.
 Radar video is re-drawn such that it is centred on the correct
position origin, based on configured offsets (e.g. if the marker is a
heading marker in normal bow, it will be considered a stern marker
when switched to alternate bow).
 Radars remain in transmit without adverse effects, other than
needing to rebuild trails or re-acquire targets.

65900010 3-49
Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Russian River Register Selection

This is an optional feature that allows the system to satisfy the differing
requirements of vessels that must confirm to IMO regulations whilst at sea,
and Russian River Register (RRR) regulations when navigating rivers.
When the feature is configured the operator can switch
between IMO mode (default mode), and RRR mode by
clicking on a selection button that displays the current
mode. The selection button is positioned at the top right of the display,
below the range rings button.
Switching between modes changes the following units:
 In Sea mode all long distance units are shown as nautical miles
(NM), and speed units are shown in knots.
 In River mode all long distance units are shown in kilometres, and
speed units are shown in kilometres per hour.
To switch between Sea mode and River mode:
1. Left click on the selection button. An Action Required popup
window appears requesting confirmation to change from the
existing presentation mode.
2. Click the Yes button to proceed with the
change of presentation mode. When the
mode is changed all the controls in the
system use the corresponding units to
display long distances and speeds.

In a multi-node system the selection of Sea or

River mode can be made from any Radar or
ECDIS node. When selected from one node all
other nodes will be in the same Sea/River mode.
When the Station in Control option is enabled a restricted node will not be
able to change the current Sea/River mode.

3-50 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Appendix A - Operational Functions specific to

Multi-node and Client/Server Systems
The following operational function is specific to a multi-node system.
 System In Control
The following operational function applies to a multi-node system and
Client/Server Radar (CSR) system.
 Database Synchronization

Station In Control
Station In Control (SIC) is an optional feature, enabled at commissioning,
where a more secure system of control is required on a multi-node system.
The feature enables critical system control functions to be accessed only
from one or more designated nodes.
When SIC is configured, each node is assigned to one of the following
groups:
 Always in Control
 Never in Control
Nodes that are configured to be in the Never in Control group are never in
control unless every node from the other group is unavailable, see
`Automatic Transfer of Control' below.
A SIC node may take control over any of the following SIC functions:
 Acknowledge alerts.
 Turn on/off the track control feature or make changes to track
control parameters.
 Change the look-ahead range, safety depth, and safety height.
 Control whether safety checking Cautions can raise an alert.
 Change manual sensor values.
 Change the sensor source for any sensor.
 Turn on/off the speed control or make changes to speed control
parameters.
 Start or stop the execution of all types of route plans.
 Change the current active chart database.
 Change the active Mariner Object layer, or modify the Mariner
Objects that are tied only to geographic locations.

65900010 Appendix A-1

Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

If any of the functions listed above are accessed

from a node assigned as `Never In Control’, the
function's values are greyed out and a temporary
prompt appears confirming that SIC has restricted
access to this feature.

Automatic Transfer of Control

SIC functions may be granted to nodes that have been configured to be
Never In Control when the system lacks a SIC node for a configurable
period of time. The SIC functions are automatically removed from the
restricted nodes when the system detects a valid SIC node.

Appendix A-2 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Database Synchronization
In a multi-node system and/or Client/Server Radar (CSR) system
VisionMaster uses a database to record and share certain information. This
information includes Routes, PI Lines, GoTo locations, Radar Maps,
Manual Chart Updates and User Profiles.
In both multi-node and CSR systems one node is assigned to be the
master copy of this database (the master node is displayed on the
Database tab in the System Diagnostics menu). If a node is switched off or
disconnected from the network then any changes made to the functions
listed above may not be properly saved. If this happens a Database Node
Missing warning is raised describing the potential results and listing the
missing nodes, see List of Alerts, Warnings and Cautions in Chapter 7
Alerts.
When the node is switched on or reconnected an Operator Message is
displayed prompting to select the source node to synchronize the database
to.
CAUTION:
Always select the node where the last set of changes were made,
otherwise data entered on one or more nodes will be lost.

With the source node selected click the

Synchronize button. A Database Initializing
warning is displayed informing the operator
that updates to the functions listed above are
not allowed during the initialization progress.

65900010 Appendix A - 3
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management

Chapter 4 Sensor Management

Sensors Menu
The Sensors menu allows the operator to select the sensor source to be
used for each type of data (e.g. heading, water speed, position etc.). In
addition to the selection of a sensor source, adjustments to the heading
alignment can be made at the Heading sensor, and an offset position can
be applied to a Position sensor.
In a multi-node system, in order to apply a consistent common reference
system, all nodes use the same sensor for each type of sensor data
(position, heading, water speed, ground speed, etc.), regardless of the
node from which the operator makes the selection. As an example, if the
operator selects position from GPS1 on one node, GPS1 is selected as the
source of position on all nodes.
All Radar systems include the same set of primary sensors; these are listed
in `Primary Sensors on Radar Systems’.
If for any reason a sensor is not providing usable data an alert will be
raised and the data displayed in red.
If automatic sensor data is unavailable manually entered values may
sometimes be used in place, subject to certain restrictions.

CAUTION: MANUAL SENSOR DATA

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A sensor
device should be selected as soon as valid data is available.
To access the sensor source for the data types on the Sensor Data Display
right click on one of the four fields and left click on the Select nnn source
line. A window for the selected data type appears
below the data display listing the available sensor
data sources with the currently active sensor
source and its value in highlight.
To access the Sensors menu from the main menu
list:
1. Left click on the Sensors field in the main
menu list.
2. With the Sensors menu displayed, click on
the specific sensor source button.

65900010 4-1
Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Sensor Data Source

The name of each available sensor data source is listed. The sensor
source currently used and its current value are highlighted in bold and the
sensor's radio button selected.
Heading Sensor
To change the current sensor source for heading, see Heading Source
Values.
Speed Through Water Sensor
To change the current sensor source for speed through water, see STW
Source Values.
Course Over Ground Sensor
To change the current sensor source for course over ground, see COG
Source Values.
Speed Over Ground Sensor
To change the current sensor source for speed over ground, see SOG
Source Values.
Position Sensor
To change the current sensor source for position, see Position Values.
Depth Below Keel Sensor
To change the current sensor source for depth below keel, see Depth
Source Values.
Set and Drift Sensor
To change the current sensor source for set and drift, see Set and Drift
values.
Rate of Turn Sensor
To change the current sensor source for rate of turn, see Rate of Turn
Values.
Date and Time Sensor
Shows the current date and time and its source (usually GPS), see Date
and Time.
Wind Sensor
To view the current sensor source for wind, see Wind Values.

4-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management

Primary Sensors on Radar Systems

The following is a list of primary sensors applicable to a Radar system:
 True Heading
 Speed Through Water
 Position
 Course Over Ground
 Speed Over Ground
 Magnetic Heading
 Time
 Date and Time
 Depth Below Keel
 Depth Below Transducer
 Depth Below Waterline
If a primary sensor becomes unusable an alert is generated. The type of
alert generated is dependent on the current selection of sensor, and other
sub systems in use on the VMFT. For details on alert behaviour for primary
sensors on radar systems refer `Alert Behaviour specific to Radar’ in
Chapter 7 `Alerts’.
For a list of primary sensors on an ECDIS refer to `Primary Sensors on
ECDIS Systems’ in Chapter 9 `Sensor Management’ ECDIS User Guide,
65900012.

65900010 4-3
Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Sensor Data Sources

Heading Source Values
The Heading folder is divided into two areas;
Sensors and Alignment.
The Sensors area lists the available heading
sensor sources with the active sensor source
and its current value in highlight.
The Alignment area shows alignment
information applicable to each of the
alignable heading sensors in the system. The
Value field enables the operator to align a
heading sensor prior to selecting it.
Sensors
The system supports the acquisition of analogue heading data via synchro
and stepper interfaces and serial heading data via a serial port on the
PCIO. The Sensors area may display the analogue data (Gyro) and the
serial data (HDT - true heading) and will allow selection between the two
data values.
If the heading data becomes invalid, the presentation mode will switch to
Unstabilised Head Up after 30 seconds.
To change the Heading sensor source, do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the existing sensor
source and value click the No button.
3. Where the sensor is changed the heading values shown against
the selected sensor source are applied. The HDG readout shown in
the Indicator Display and the ship's heading marker also change to
reflect the new sensor value.
Alignment
Synchro and stepper compass values require alignment unless the ratio is
1:1. If alignment is required a prompt to enter the compass angle appears
when the system is powered on and the system will automatically open the
Heading folder of the Sensors menu. The power up default angle is 000.0°
and the heading readout flashes until aligned.
1. To change the alignment click in the Value field, the text turns
green (editable).

4-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management

2. Move the trackball left or right to alter the value. The heading
readout changes when the alignment value changes even if the
compass is unaligned.

STW Source Values

The STW folder lists the available STW
sensor data sources with the currently active
sensor source and its value in highlight.
If Computed is selected for the sensor data
source for STW the system continually
computes the values based on other active
types of sensor data received.
To change the STW sensor source and values, do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available you may enter manual data.

CAUTION: MANUAL SENSOR DATA

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A sensor
device should be selected as soon as valid data is available.

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to enter
the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the
selected data source are applied. If manual data is entered the
STW readout shown in the Indicator Display is displayed in yellow.

65900010 4-5
Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

COG Source Values

The COG sensor provides information about
own ship course based on actual position
history (when a position sensor such as GPS
is providing the data). The COG folder lists the
available COG sensor data sources with the
currently active sensor source and its value in
highlight.
When Computed is selected for the sensor
data source for COG the system continually computes the values based on
other active types of sensor data received.
To change the COG sensor source or values do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available you may enter manual data.

CAUTION: MANUAL SENSOR DATA

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A sensor

device should be selected as soon as valid data is available.
Manual data cannot be entered for COG if AIS input is enabled.
Before entering data turn off the AIS input, see AIS Display in
Chapter 10 `Targets’

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to enter
the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. When the sensor being selected for COG also provides other data
types (e.g. SOG and Position), a window appears prompting to
select which of these other data types should also be taken from
manual data, with the data type's current sensor source
displayed. To update all click the Apply button, or untick the boxes
next to the data source where the update should not apply. To
cancel all changes and revert to the previous sensor source click
Cancel.

4-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management

4. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the

selected sensor source are applied. If manual data is entered the
COG readout shown in the Indicator Display is displayed in yellow
and the ship's vector line displayed in red.

If your SOG goes below 0.5 knots the COG value will show as a
series of green dashes. The COG will return to display an active
course bearing when the SOG is at 0.5 knots or higher.

SOG Source Values

The SOG folder lists the available SOG
sensor data sources with the currently active
sensor source and its value in highlight.
When Computed is selected for the sensor
data source for SOG the system continually
computes the values based on other active
types of sensor data received.
To change the SOG sensor source or
values do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual data.

CAUTION: MANUAL SENSOR DATA

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A sensor

device should be selected as soon as valid data is available.
Manual data cannot be entered for SOG if AIS input is enabled.
Before entering data turn off the AIS input, see AIS Display in
Chapter 10 `Targets’

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to enter
the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.

65900010 4-7
Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

3. When the sensor being selected for SOG also provides other data
types (e.g. COG and Position), a window appears prompting to
select which of these other data types should also be taken from
manual data, with the data type's current sensor source
displayed. To update all click the Apply button, or untick the boxes
next to the data types where the update should not apply. To
cancel all changes and revert to the previous sensor source click
the Cancel button.
4. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the
selected sensor source are applied. If manual data is entered the
SOG readout shown in the Indicator Display is displayed in yellow
and the ship's vector line displayed in red.

Position Values
The Position folder shows geodetic position
data of own ship. The current position and
sensor source are also shown in the Position
tab of the Status area at the bottom of the
screen, see Basic Operation of Radar,
Position.

The position displayed for CCRP is

accurate, providing that the correct
offsets for the position sensors are set
during commissioning.

The folder is divided into two areas; Sensors

and Position Offset.
Sensors
The Sensors area lists the available position
sensor data sources with the currently active
sensor source and its latitude/longitude values
in highlight.
The area also provides computed sensor data
that supplies geodetic position based on dead reckoning (DR) from the last
valid position received.
If position data becomes invalid the system will automatically switch to
water stabilised mode.

4-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management

Dead Reckoning values

If valid position data for own ship is not received within a short period of
time from the sensor interface the system establishes a computed position
by dead reckoning from the last valid position received using own ship’s
direction and speed.
The timeout limit applied to valid dead reckoning values defaults to 30
seconds.
The system considers position data to be invalid if the most recent usable
sample data received from a position sensor is older than the timeout limit.
LOP Values
The geographic location of own ship, determined by using Lines of Position
(LOP), may be used as the active data source for the position sensor. For
information on LOPs, see Line Of Position in Nav Tools.

CAUTION: LOP SENSOR

The amount of time that a LOP position sensor will be considered

usable is limited. Note that LOP position sensor data is dead
reckoned, and this data will become degraded after a period of
time.

To change the Position sensor source do the following:

1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual data.

CAUTION: MANUAL SENSOR DATA

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A sensor

device should be selected as soon as valid data is available.
Manual data cannot be entered if AIS input is enabled. Before
entering data turn off the AIS input, see AIS Display in Chapter 10
`Targets’

65900010 4-9
Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to enter
the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the
selected data source are applied. The STW readout shown in the
Indicator Display and the ship's STW marker also change to reflect
the new sensor value.
To change the sensor source from the current automatic source (usually
GPS):
1. Tick the DR or Man sensor button. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.

Manual sensor data cannot be entered if the system has AIS input.

2. To enter manual data click in the Man field, the text changes to
green (editable) and the screen keypad appears.
3. Enter position data from the keypad, click the OK key to exit edit
mode.
4. Click the Man button to enter the value.
5. When the sensor being selected also provides other data types
(e.g. COG, SOG, UTC), a window appears prompting to select
which of these other data types should also be taken from manual
data, with the data type's current sensor source displayed. To
update all click the Apply button, or untick the boxes next to the
sensors where the update should not apply. To cancel all changes
and revert to the previous sensor source click the Cancel button.
6. Where the sensor is changed the values shown in the Posn tab
change and the sensor source changes to Manual. Own ships
symbol (scaled outline or circle symbol) will be displayed in red
while manual position data is being used.

4-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management

Position Offset
The Position Offset area shows the current sensor and enables the
operator to enter a position on the chart known to correspond with own
ship’s position and enter an offset bearing value.
Offset values are applied to all data received from the applicable position
sensor.
To enter offset values do the following:
To specify offset range and bearing values:
1. If there is more than one position sensor configured, select the
relevant position sensor by clicking on the drop down arrow. If only
one position sensor has been configured e.g. GPS, then this field is
read-only.
2. Click in the respective fields, the text becomes green (editable).
Move the trackball left or right to change data, or right click in the
field and enter values using the on-screen keypad.
To select an offset position on the video circle using the cursor:
1. Click on the Set Offset by Cursor button and move the cursor
over the video circle, the cursor changes to an offset arrow graphic.
2. Click in the position on the video circle where you want the offset to
be applied. The range and bearing values selected on the chart are
shown in the Offset fields.
To apply the entered offset values to own ship tick the Offset Applied
check box.

Offset values are not applied to the

chart until this check box is ticked.

When offset values are applied the entry is

highlighted in the Posn tab with Offset shown
in orange text below the sensor source.
Position.

65900010 4-11
Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Depth Source Values

The Depth sensor provides information on the
current depth values:
 depth below keel (DBK)
 depth below transducer (DBT)
 depth below waterline (DBW)
The specific sensor information available will depend upon installed and
configured sensor devices.

Set and Drift Values

The data for Set is shown in degrees; the data
for Drift is shown in knots (kn).
When Computed is selected for the sensor
data source for Set and Drift the system
continually computes the values based on
other active types of sensor data received
conventionally (via an interface).
When incorrect computed values are
suspected they can be manually set to zero or to an estimated manual
value. The system will re-calculate accurate Set and Drift values after
accurate sensor data has been restored.
To change the Set and Drift sensor source or values do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual data.

CAUTION: MANUAL SENSOR DATA

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A sensor
device should be selected as soon as valid data is available.

4-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Manual Set and Drift
fields, the text changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left
or right to enter the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. A window appears prompting to select
the data type (COG/SOG and STW) that
will be computed from the manual set
and drift sensor, with the data type's
current sensor source displayed. To
update all click the Apply button, or
untick the boxes next to the data type
where the update should not apply. To
cancel all changes and revert to the
previous sensor source click the Cancel
button.

65900010 4-13
Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Rate of Turn Values

The Rate of Turn (ROT) folder lists the available ROT sensor data sources
with the currently active sensor source and its value in highlight.
When Computed is selected for the sensor
data source for ROT the system continually
computes the values based on other active
types of sensor data received conventionally
(via an interface).
The ROT is indicated as unavailable if the
Heading from the selected source is
unavailable or invalid.

Date and Time

The Date and Time folder shows the system
date and time with the currently active date
and time source and its value in highlight.
The default selection for date/time source is
from a GPS sensor. If the time data is valid
the values are shown in green.

Wind Values
The Wind sensor provides information on the
current wind direction and velocity.
The specific sensor information available will
depend upon installed and configured sensor
devices.

4-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation, Motion, Vector
and Trail Modes

Chapter 5 Presentation, Motion, Vector

and Trail Modes
The following topics are covered in this chapter:
 Selecting a presentation mode and how this affects the video
display.
 Selecting a motion mode and how this affects the display of own
ship and other targets on the display.
 Displaying the velocity of own ship and other targets as vectors on
the video display.
 Displaying the history of a target's movements as a trail on the
video display.

65900010 5-1
Presentation, Motion, Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
and Trail Modes

Presentation Modes
Data from the compass can be processed to produce a correct ‘stabilised11’
display. There are three types of stabilised mode available: Stabilised
Head Up, North-Up and Course-Up. A valid source of heading data must
be selected to use a stabilised mode. Without a compass input, the display
is 'unstabilised’ 12and is shown in Unstabilised Head-Up mode.
The currently selected presentation mode is shown
on the presentation mode button. The following
modes may be available for selection:
 Unstabilised Head-Up (H Up unstab)
This is the power up presentation mode for vector charts.
Unstabilised Head Up is a relative display (motion mode and trails
mode are both relative and own ship vector is not displayed) with
the ship’s heading marker always shown vertically upwards
indicating straight ahead movement, irrespective of own ship's
current bearing. The bearing scale is always drawn with 000° at the
top of the video circle.
A permanent prompt indicating unstabilised radar video will be
displayed when the presentation mode is Unstabilised Head Up.
In Unstabilised Head Up ownship circle symbol is not displayed if
the range scale is greater than 3 NM. The circle symbol is restored
if the range scale is 3NM or lower.

11
In a stabilised presentation mode radar video and trails are maintained relative to a fixed
true bearing. A valid source of heading data must be selected to use stabilised mode.
12
In an unstabilised mode radar video and trails are maintained relative to the ship's fore/aft
axis.

5-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation, Motion, Vector
and Trail Modes

 Stabilised Head-Up (H Up stab)

In this mode (as in Unstabilised Head Up) the ship’s heading
marker is always shown vertically upwards indicating straight
ahead movement, irrespective of own ship's current bearing. The
bearing scale shows ship's current heading at the top of the video
circle.
Motion mode is always relative but Trails and Vector modes may
be Relative or True. If the vector mode is True then own ship vector
is displayed.
In Stabilised Head Up ownship circle symbol is not displayed if the
range scale is greater than 3 NM. The circle symbol is restored if
the range scale is 3NM or lower.

65900010 5-3
Presentation, Motion, Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
and Trail Modes

 North-Up (N Up)
The bearing scale shows 000° at the top of the video circle
(assumed to be true north). The ship’s heading marker is shown at
the appropriate bearing.
If the vector mode is True then own ship's vector is displayed.

 Course-Up (C Up)
In Course Up the bearing scale is drawn with own ship's heading
positioned vertically at the time the mode was selected. A small
indication is shown at the top of the bearing scale, just outside the
video circle indicating the heading value at the time Course Up was
selected. The heading line will be shown at the appropriate bearing
as ship's course changes.

5-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation, Motion, Vector
and Trail Modes

To change the presentation mode, do the following:

1. Click the presentation mode button. This will cycle through N Up
and C Up presentation modes only.
Or, to select a Head Up presentation mode:
1. Right click on the presentation mode
button. The presentation modes will be
shown in a drop down list with the
currently selected presentation mode
ticked.
2. Left click on the presentation mode you
want to use.
A presentation mode can be automatically changed as a side effect of
another action. For example, changing the Motion Mode from Relative to
True in both Stabilised Head Up and Unstabilised Head Up will result in the
presentation mode changing to North Up. The presentation mode may also
change as a result of an invalid heading. When this happens a temporary
prompt indicating that the presentation mode has changed is displayed,
see Prompts in Chapter 7 Alerts.
In both Stabilised Head Up and Unstabilised Head Up modes the chart
display is suppressed if the range scale is greater than 3 nautical miles.
When the system is switched to transmit and the radar video centre is
outside the allowable offset limits, the radar video is automatically centred
in the video circle. This can occur when a smaller range scale is selected.
When the C Up mode is in operation, if the ship alters course the bearing
scale does not realign automatically. A Course-Up reset should then be
performed by re-selecting the mode. This realigns the bearing scale to
bring the new course to the top of the video circle.

65900010 5-5
Presentation, Motion, Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
and Trail Modes

Dual Radar Presentation

On a dual radar system Channel 1 and Channel 2 video origin can be at
different locations, depending on transceiver offsets made in
commissioning.

Channel 1 Video Origin

A small + symbol is displayed centred on the channel 1 video origin. This
ensures that the screen location for off-centring the video is clearly
indicated, even when channel 1 video is switched off.

Suppression of Channel 2 Video

Channel 2 video origin does not include a position symbol. If required, the
video origin for channel 2 may be located by switching off channel 1 video
and increasing the Gain setting for channel 2.
Sometimes the origin of channel 2 video becomes too far away for display
when the following actions are performed:
 Centring or Off-centring
 Max view ahead
 Selecting a lower range scale
 Course up reset
 Changing presentation mode
 Panning
The origin of channel 2 video is also considered too far away if it is outside
the 70% range scale from the centre of the video circle.
If the origin of channel 2 is too far away for the display, the video from
channel 2 is automatically suppressed, and the Video On/Off control is
displayed in amber.
If the origin of channel 2 is automatically suppressed when channel 1 is in
Standby, no video is displayed on the screen and the text ‘VIDEO OFF’ is
displayed in amber at the bottom of the video circle.

5-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation, Motion, Vector
and Trail Modes

Motion Modes
The currently selected Motion Mode is displayed at the
top right of the screen. There are two motion modes
available:
 True Motion (TM)
 Relative Motion (RM)
The motion mode determines how chart information is updated; in TM own
ship moves over the chart, in RM the chart moves under own ship. Motion
modes can be altered in both Standby and Transmit mode.

Relative Motion
Own ship is shown at a selected point or fixed point in the video circle
(normally the centre) with all target trails displayed. How moving and
stationary target trails are displayed is dependent on the trails mode
selected (True or Relative), see Trails Mode.
The advantage of this mode over true motion is that a constant range
ahead of own ship is always shown, so there is no need to reset the
display.

True Motion
In True Motion (TM) own ship moves across the video circle at the selected
ground or water based velocity (see Sensor Management). In this mode all
moving target trails are displayed, whereas stationary targets trails are not
generated.
Motion Mode Changing Automatically
A motion mode may be automatically changed as a side effect of another
action (e.g. changing the range scale or presentation mode) or as a result
of an invalid heading. When this happens a temporary prompt indicating
that the motion mode has changed is displayed, see Prompts.
Presentation Modes affecting Motion Modes
If the display is 'unstabilised’ (e.g. the heading is invalid), the presentation
mode is Unstabilised Head Up (see Presentation Modes) and only RM
mode can be selected.
If the display becomes `stabilised’ then TM may be selected, except where
the presentation mode is Stabilised Head Up, in this case the motion
mode is always relative.

65900010 5-7
Presentation, Motion, Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
and Trail Modes

Range Scales affecting Motion Modes

RM is available at all range scales. TM is available on range scales 0.5 NM
to 48 NM. If the range scale is outside these limits, the motion mode will
temporarily revert to RM, with the RM lettering displayed in a warning
colour (amber). On selecting a valid range scale the system will revert to
TM.

On the 96 NM range scale own ship will be automatically centred.

To change the Motion Mode, do the following:

There are two methods of selecting the motion mode, either:
1. Click on the motion mode button. This will switch between TM and
RM.
Or:
1. Right click on the motion mode button. The two
motion modes are shown in a drop down list with
the currently selected motion mode ticked.

If the presentation mode or range scale is not

valid for true motion (as described above),
then TM will be unavailable for selection.

2. Left click on the motion mode you want to use.

5-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation, Motion, Vector
and Trail Modes

Vector Modes
Vectors are shown on the radar display to indicate the velocity (speed and
direction) of own ship and moving targets. All vectors are shown as a
dashed line beginning at own ship CCRP or the target origin. The length of
the vector indicates speed and its bearing indicates direction.
Vectors are only displayed when the system is in Transmit mode.
Target vectors are drawn using the same colour as the target symbol,
based on the following conditions:
 Target with no alert condition : Non-flashing green
 Target with unacknowledged alert : Flashing red
 Non-dangerous target with
acknowledged alert : Non-flashing green
 Dangerous target with
acknowledged alert : Non-flashing red

For information on own ship vectors, see `Own Ship Symbols’ in Chapter 3,
Basic Operation of Radar.

Selecting the Vector Mode

The vector mode determines whether the vectors represent the true
velocity of targets or the target velocity relative to own ship. The vector
mode is either True (T) or Relative (R) and is aligned with the Trails mode
(relative or true).
 True Vectors
All moving targets and own ship
have a vector representing their
movement (speed and direction)
over the water/ground. Stationary
targets do not have a vector.

65900010 5-9
Presentation, Motion, Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
and Trail Modes

 Relative Vectors
If own ship is moving, all targets, both
moving and stationary, have a vector
representing their movement (speed
and direction) relative to own ship.
Own ship will not have a vector in this
mode.

To select a Vector Mode, do the following:

A true (T) or relative (R) Vector mode can be selected as follows,
1. Position the screen cursor over the Vector mode selection field.
2. Consecutive left clicks will toggle the mode
between True (T) and Relative (R) vectors.
3. Or right click on the current vector mode and
select from True or Relative from the drop
down menu.

If the selected vector mode is not the same as the current Trails
mode, the vector text is shown in the warning colour (amber). The
vector mode will revert to the same as the Trails mode (relative or
true) after 30 seconds if the Vector Timeout check box is selected
in Target Display. If it is not selected the vector text will remain in
amber.

5-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation, Motion, Vector
and Trail Modes

Vector Time
The Vector Time selected will determine the length of the vectors shown on
the radar display. The length of a vector represents the distance the ship or
target will travel in the vector time. For example:
 Vector Time 5 minutes
 Speed (of ship or target) 12kn
 Length of vector 1nm
The optimum vector time will depend upon the range scale that is in use.
Extending the vector time will help you predict closest point of approach
(CPA) of targets to own ship and other targets.
To change Vector Time, do the following:
Either:
1. Position the screen cursor over the vector time field.
2. Left click to edit. The text becomes green (editable).

3. Move the trackball left to decrease or right to increase the time.

4. Left click to accept the re-entered time.
Or:
1. Right click over the vector time field. The
numeric keypad appears.
2. Enter the revised vector time field using the
keypad's numeric keys. If a value entered is
incorrect press the Back key. With the required
values enter click the OK key.
3. The keypad is removed from the screen and the
revised value is entered at the vector time field.

Extending the vector time lets you visually check on CPAs of

targets by projecting their movements further into the future.

65900010 5-11
Presentation, Motion, Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
and Trail Modes

Trails Mode
In addition to a target's vector the radar shows decaying video trails,
showing the history of a target’s movements.
Video trails may be displayed in True or Relative mode:
 In Relative Trails the trails indicate the movement of the targets
relative to own ship. This means that stationary targets will have trails
if own ship is moving. Own ship is shown at a selected point in the
video circle (normally the centre), with all target trails displayed.
 In True Trails the target trails have own ship's speed applied (ground
based or water based). Unlike relative trails, stationary targets trails
are not generated.
When switching between Relative and True, target trails are maintained.
The selection of True or Relative trails will be reflected in the vector mode
selection, i.e. when switching between Relative and True the corresponding
vector mode will be maintained.
If the range scale is switched to a scale lower than 0.5 NM in True Trails
then the trail mode will change to Relative. The Trails button text will be
displayed in a warning colour (amber) until the range is switched to a
higher scale. If the display becomes 'unstabilised’ only Relative Trails is
available.
The following Trails Modes are available:
 SHORT
High rate of decay giving a short trail. Actual trail length will depend
on the range in use. See table below.
The trail time defaults to SHORT after power up.
 LONG
Low rate of decay giving a long trail. Actual trail length will depend
on the range in use. See table below.
 PERM
Permanent trail which does not decay. When the trail length
exceeds 60 minutes >60min 0s is displayed.
 OFF
Trails are removed from display.
 RESET
Resets the Trails time to zero and clears all existing trails from the
video circle.

5-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation, Motion, Vector
and Trail Modes

The Trails button is displayed at the top right of the screen. True or relative
mode is denoted by the letter T or R. The trail mode listed above is also
shown on the button. If trails have been switched off, or the system is in
Standby, the button shows Trails Off.

Trail Length Time

The trail time shows the length of the trails in minutes and seconds. If the
trails are still below their maximum length, a count-up time is shown,
indicating how long they have been building up.

The selection of Long or Short Trails changes the trail time and is also
dependent on the range scale in use, see the table below.
If the range scale is changed by one increment the trail time adjusts to the
value relative to the selected range scale, although the time appears in the
warning colour (amber) for the trial time period. For example, changing the
range scale from 3 NM to 1.5 NM on Short trails will result in the trail time
showing as amber for 30 seconds. When the range scale is changed by
more than one increment, the trail time restarts at zero before building up to
the maximum time for the range scale and trail type selected. If Permanent
Trails mode is selected the trails do not decay.

65900010 5-13
Presentation, Motion, Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
and Trail Modes

When switching between trails length, it takes as long as the new time
selection for the trail time to be representative. For example, changing from
30 seconds on Short to 90 seconds on Long will take 60 seconds for the
trails to represent how far the targets have moved. During this period the
trails displayed are not representative of the displayed trail time and so the
trail time is shown in the warning colour (amber).
The table below lists the long and short maximum trail times, relative to the
range scale.
Range Scale Short Trail Long Trail
(nm) time time
0.125 10 sec 30 sec
0.25 10 sec 30 sec
0.5 15 sec 45 sec
0.75 15 sec 45 sec
1.5 30 sec 90 sec
3.0 30 sec 90 sec
6.0 and above 2 min 6 min

To select True or Relative trails, or to change the Trails Mode, do the

following:
To switch between True and Relative trails:
1. Position the screen cursor over the Trails Mode button.
2. Consecutive left clicks will toggle between True and Relative Trails.
Or:
1. Position the screen cursor over the Trails
Mode button and right click. Relative and
True Trails and the trails modes options
listed above appear in a drop down list.
2. Select the Trails mode option from the
window.
3. To reset the Trails time select Reset. The
time shown to the right of the trails mode is
momentarily reset to 0min 0s before re-
counting, and all existing trails are removed from the video circle.

5-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Chapter 6 Navigation Tools

This section covers the creating, editing and
deleting of the following navigation tools:
 Parallel Index Lines
 Clearing Lines
 Mapping Objects
 Line of Position
 Ownship History
 Parallel Cursor
 Display Settings
 Anchoring
 Man Overboard (if configured)
It also includes a description of how to create and edit Navigation Marks.

65900010 6-1
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Parallel Index Lines

The Parallel Index (PI) Lines facility
allows multiple sets of parallel index lines
to be displayed simultaneously. Each set
may include up to fifteen lines. The lines
span the entire video circle, irrespective of
the range scale in use.
PI lines are available in all presentation
and motion modes.
Each PI line is defined by the range of its
closest point to own ship, its bearing, line
type and which side of the ship the line is
on.
To access PI lines left click on the Parallel Index Lines field from the Nav
Tools menu list. The PI Lines window includes the following three tab
folders:
 Edit - where all PI line and PI set editing functions are done,
including adding a set or line, copying, deleting or renaming a set of
lines, or realigning a line or set of lines to own ship’s current heading.
 Display - enables selection of one or more PI sets to be displayed on
the video circle.
 I/O - where import and export of PI Line sets is done.

Multi-node Support
Sets of parallel index lines are saved and retrieved in a database, shared
between all nodes. The set of parallel index lines displayed on a particular
node may be specified independently for each node.

6-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Edit Parallel Index Lines

The Edit tab folder opens as default when
Parallel Index Lines is selected, and the
Selected Set shows <Default Set>.
Information on PI lines associated with the
default set is displayed in the Line Data
section of the folder.

The <Default Set> of PI Lines cannot be

deleted or renamed.

To select a previously created set of PI lines click on the drop down arrow
to the right of the Selected Set field and select from the list. The selected
set is displayed on the screen and is available for editing.

Creating a new set of PI Lines

To create and name a new set of PI lines do the following:
1. Click on the Add Set button. The screen prompts to enter a name
for the new set of PI lines with the
current date and time highlighted in the
set field name.
2. To enter the current date and time as
the PI name click the OK button, or to
edit the name click in the field, the text
changes to green (editable) and the
screen keypad is displayed immediately
below the field.
3. Enter a new name using the screen keypad, press the Back button
to delete characters or the space button to create a space. With
the required name entered press the OK button.
4. When a new set is created the set name is entered in the system
and displayed in the Selected Set drop down list.
5. You can now add PI lines to the set name, see Adding PI Lines or
deleting Sets.

65900010 6-3
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Adding PI Lines or deleting Sets

To add a PI line or delete a set do the following:
1. With the PI set name entered click the
Add Line button. A line is created and
the default line values are shown in the
Line Data area. A PI line is always
initially created with its axis through
own ship’s CCRP and the bearing
angle the same as the current heading
line of own ship.
2. To create further PI Lines click on the
Add Line button. On the screen the
previously created line is displayed as
orange and the new line shown as
magenta. A further set of Line Data values are displayed with
default values and the last line created is highlighted in Line Data.
3. You can edit the display of PI lines by unchecking the tick boxes
next to each Line button. When a tick box is unchecked the line's
values remain but the line is removed from the screen.
4. To delete a line set select the set name by clicking on the Selected
Set drop down list and with the set displayed click on the Delete
Set button. A window appears prompting to confirm the deletion.
Click OK to confirm, the set is deleted and the PI Lines window
reappears with <Default Set> in the set field.

6-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Realigning PI Lines and Sets

A set of PI Lines may be realigned so that all lines are redrawn to own
ship's current heading. This feature applies to the Default Set as well as
operator defined sets of PI lines.
Individual PI lines may also be realigned parallel to ship's heading.
PI lines may only be realigned when there is a valid heading for own ship.
To realign PI lines do the following:
To realign a set
1. Select the PI line set from the drop down list.
2. Click on the Realign Set button. An `Action Required' prompt
appears requesting confirmation of the realignment.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm. The bearing of each line changes
to ships current bearing and the PI lines are redrawn on the display
parallel to ships heading line.
There are two ways of realigning a PI line to ship's heading.
To realign using the PI Lines menu:
1. Select the line from the Line Data
area by clicking on the line's
reference number (when selected
the numbered box is highlighted).
2. Click the Realign Line button at the bottom of the Parallel Index
Lines window. The line bearing changes to ship's current bearing
and the line is redrawn parallel to the heading line.
To realign a PI line from the screen:
1. Move the cursor over the PL line until the cursor symbol changes to
the following
2. Right click on the line and from the
context menu select Realign PI
Line Parallel to Own Ship. The line
is redrawn parallel to ship's heading
line and the line's bearing is adjusted.

65900010 6-5
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Copying or Renaming PI Line Sets

To copy or rename a PI line set do the following:
To copy a PI Line set:
1. Highlight the set name from the Selected
Set drop down list and click on the Copy
Set button. The window prompts to enter a
name for the newly copied Pl line set with
the current date and time highlighted in the
set field name.
2. To enter the current date and time as the
PI name click the OK button, or to edit the
name click in the field, the text changes to green (editable) and the
on-screen keypad is displayed immediately below the field.
3. Enter a new name using the keypad, press the Back button to
delete characters or the space button to create a space. With the
required name entered press the OK button.
4. When a new set name is created the set name is entered in the
system and displayed in the Selected Set drop down list.
To rename an existing PI line set:
1. Highlight the set name from the Selected Set drop down list and
click on the Rename Set button. The window prompts to rename
the selected Pl line set with the current date and time highlighted in
the set field name.
2. To enter the current date and time as the PI name click the OK
button, or to edit the name click in the field, the text changes to
green (editable) and the on-screen keypad is displayed
immediately below the field.
3. Enter a new name using the keypad, press the Back button to
delete characters or the space button to create a space. With the
required name entered press the OK button.
4. The PI line set is renamed in the Selected Set list

6-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Editing PI Lines
To edit a PI line do the following:
A different line style for each PI line may be selected, or a line style may be
applied to all lines in the set.
To select a line style for each PI line:
1. Click on the drop down list next to the
current line style (defaults to Solid), the
PI line is automatically selected and a list
of line styles are displayed as numerical
indicators.
2. Select the preferred line style from the list,
each style is a variation of line dashes.
3. The line's style is changed to the selected option on screen.
To apply a line style to all PI lines in the set:
1. Click on the drop down arrow next to the
Apply for Set button, the same list of line
styles appears as described above.
2. Select the line style to be applied to all
lines in the set and click the Apply for Set
button. Any individual line styles previously selected are overridden
by this command.
You can edit the line bearing and range in either of the following ways:
1. Move the cursor over the PI line, the cursor changes to the
following symbol
2. Hold down the left key and use the trackball to pivot
the line around own ship’s CCRP, the bearing angle
value in Line Data automatically changes as the line
bearing is moved.
3. To adjust the line range move the cursor over the
middle of the line where a small centre line bisects at the CCRP.
The cursor changes to the following symbol
4. Hold down the left key and move the trackball left or right to adjust
the range of the line to either side of the CCRP. Or:
5. Click on the line bearing and range fields in the Line Data area, the
values change to green (editable). Move the trackball to change the
data values, the NM range value denotes the distance of the line to
the CCRP (defaults to 0.0) and the bearing values denote the angle
from 000°.

65900010 6-7
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To change which side of the ship a PI line is displayed:

1. From the Line Data area click on the Toggle Side of Ship button to

the right of the line bearing

2. The selected PI line changes to the other side of own ship, without
changing its bearing value.
Truncating and Deleting a PI Line
Each PI line may have its forward endpoint and back endpoint graphically
adjusted.
To adjust the end points of a PI line do the following:
There are two ways of truncating a PI line. To truncate a line using the PI
Lines menu:
1. Select the PI line to be truncated, either by clicking on the line in
the display, or by clicking on the line button (Line 1 etc.) in the Line
Data section. When a line is selected the Truncate Front and
Truncate Back check boxes become active.
2. To adjust the line's end points tick
the Truncate Front and Truncate
Back check boxes. The Truncate
Front and Back values both default
to a distance of 2.0 NM either side
of the line's centre point.
3. Click in the fields, the text becomes editable (green), move the
trackball left or right to decrease or increase the truncated values.
The front and back endpoints may be different values.
To truncate a PI line from the screen:
1. Either click on the line's end point, hold down the left key and drag
the end point to the required position.
2. Or, to truncate a line at a cursor position, move the cursor over the
line and right click.
3. From the context window select
Truncate PI Line at Cursor. The
line is truncated to the cursor
location

6-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

When a truncated PI line is selected a short line is drawn perpendicular to

the PI line's axis at the truncated end.

To delete a PI line, select the line as described above and click the Delete
Line button. The line is removed from the video circle and its data removed
from the Line Data section.

65900010 6-9
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Display Parallel Index Lines

The Display tab folder enables the selection of
one or more sets of Parallel Index Lines to be
displayed on the video circle. When Display is
initially accessed no PI Line Sets are selected
for display.
The tab folder lists all the current PI Line Sets
created in the Edit tab folder. To select a set for
display click on the set name, the set's check
box is ticked and the PI lines are displayed.
Continue to select line sets for display as
required.
To remove a line set from the display click on
the set, the tick is removed from the check box.
To turn the display of all sets off, click the Turn
Off All box, all PI line sets are removed from
the video circle.
To display information for a specific PI line,
hover the cursor over the line. The current
range and bearing for that line are displayed on the
screen.

6-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Importing and Exporting PI Lines

A set of named PI lines can be saved to an external device and imported or
exported via the import/export (I/O) tab
To import or export a set of PI lines do the following.
To export PI lines:
1. Choose whether to export the
currently edited set, (i.e. the set
selected in the Edit tab folder), or all
sets as listed in the Display list, by
clicking on the Export drop down arrow and selecting from the two
options.
2. Navigate to the directory folder where you want to export the files
to (this is usually an external device such as a USB memory stick).
3. Enter a filename for the PI lines in the
Filename field using the screen
keypad.
4. Click on the Export button. The
filename entered appears in the field
below the directory tree as a .piline file
and a temporary prompt appears
confirming the exported file and folder
name.
To import PI lines:
1. Navigate to the file in the directory tree,
the selected file appears in the field
below the directory tree.
2. Click on the Import button, the file is
imported and a temporary prompt
appears confirming the imported file and folder name.
If the PI lines have been imported or exported from an external memory
stick click on the Eject button before removing the device.

65900010 6-11
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Clearing Lines
Clearing lines are bearing lines or range
lines used to approximate a position where
a danger to own ship lies.
The clearing line bearing or range value is
used to navigate around the dangerous
area such that the mariner would want
ownship to remain no less than or no
greater than the range or bearing of the
clearing lines.
The Clearing Lines sub menu includes the following tab folders:
 Editor
 Monitor
 I/O
The Editor tab enables you to create, save, open, edit and delete one or
more sets of clearing lines.
The Monitor tab enables you to select a previously saved set of clearing
lines for monitoring against own ship's course.
The I/O tab enables you to import or export sets of clearing lines to and
from an external device such as a USB memory stick.

Editing Clearing Lines

There are two types of Clearing Line available:
 Bearing Line
 Range Line
Bearing lines are drawn as a single solid line with an arrowhead towards
the line's bearing. Range lines are drawn as a single arc with arrowheads
on both the start point and end point of the arc line.
The clearing line bearing or range value is shown in the same colour
beneath the line. The clearing line may also include a label defined by the
operator.
A clearing line may be selected as a Not More Than (NMT) or Not Less
Than (NLT) value. For example, in the figure below the mariner would want
to keep the ship's bearing no less than 294.2º and no more than 315.2º to
stay in safe water.

6-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

In the figure below the mariner would want to keep the ship's range to be
not more than 1.0 nautical miles to stay in safe water.

To create clearing lines, do the following:

To create clearing lines, either click the Add
Bearing button or the Add Range button in the
Cursor Options area. The button of the selected
option is highlighted.
There are two ways to define the geographic origin of a clearing line:
1. Move the cursor to the required position on the display (the letters
ADD are shown below the cursor symbol) and left click. A dot is
drawn at the selected position. If a bearing line has been added a
dashed line is drawn to the edge of the chart display along the
defined bearing (which defaults to 315º) in addition to a solid line
terminating with an arrow near to the line origin point. If a range line
has been added a half circle radius of 1 nautical mile (NM) is drawn
with an arrow at each end of the line.

65900010 6-13
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Or:
2. To define a specific Lat/Lon position click in
the Origin fields, the current Lat/Lon values
change to green (editable) and a drop down
keypad appears. There are a number of
ways of defining the origin's Lat/Lon
position.
i. Manually enter a Lat/Lon position by
using the numbers and navigation
buttons on the keypad and click OK.
The origin is moved to the entered
position.
ii. To place the origin at a specific
geographic object select Query. Move
the cursor to the display (a ? is added to the cursor) and left
click, a Chart Query window appears with a list of objects in
the immediate area (see Chart Query). Select the object from
the list, the origin is repositioned over the chart object. Click
OK on the Chart Query window to fix the origin at the chart
object position.
iii. To place the origin at own ship's CCRP select Ownship.
iv. To place the origin at a selected location on the chart display
video circle select From Chart. Move the cursor to the display
(a ? is added to the cursor) and left click at the required
location, the origin is repositioned to that location.
v. To specify a range or bearing for the origin select Offset. An
Offset window appears where you can set a range and
bearing offset from the current position.
To move a line's origin, either:
1. Move the cursor over the origin on the display until the cursor
symbol changes to the following graphic
2. Hold down the left key on the trackball and move the trackball to
move the origin position around the display.
To change a line's bearing, either:
1. Move the cursor over the line's arrow head on the display until the
cursor symbol changes to the following graphic
2. Hold down the left key on the trackball and move the trackball to
swivel the line around the origin position.
3. Release the left key when the required position is displayed.

6-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Or:
1. Click in the Brg field, the current bearing
value changes to green (editable). Move the
trackball left or right to decrease or increase
the value, left click to accept and exit edit mode.
2. To change the range of a line click in the Rad
field and move the trackball left or right to
decrease or increase the radius.
To define a start distance and end distance from the bearing origin to the
end of a bearing line:
1. On the display move the cursor over the tip of the line's arrow head
until the cursor symbol changes to the following graphic
2. Hold down the left key on the trackball and use the trackball to
move the bearing line along the dashed line.
3. Release the left key when the required position is displayed.
To create or edit clearing lines from the context window, do the
following:
1. Right click on the display where you want
the clearing line to begin and select either
Add Clearing Bearing Line Here or Add
Clearing Range Line Here from the
context popup window. The origin of the
clearing line is added at the point on the
display where the right click action was
done.

2. To reposition the last created clearing line move the

cursor to the area on the display where you want the
clearing line moved to and right click.
3. From the popup window select Move
Selected Clearing Line Here. The
clearing line origin is moved to the
selected position.
4. To change the start or end point of a
clearing line move the cursor over the
line, right click and select Set Clearing Line Start/End Pt Here.
The nearest start or end point of the line is trimmed to the defined
position on the display.

65900010 6-15
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To change the NMT or NLT value click the respective radio button, the
abbreviation below the line will change to reflect the selection.
A description of a Clearing Line set and a label for
each clearing line may be entered:
1. To enter a description of a clearing line set
click in the Description field and enter
required text using the on-screen keypad.
2. To enter a label for each clearing line click
in the Label field and enter required text
using the on-screen keypad. The label
given will be displayed below the clearing
line.
To delete clearing lines, do the following:
From the Clearing Lines Menu:
1. Click the Delete button, in delete mode the button is highlighted
and the letters DEL are added to the cursor.
2. Move the cursor over the line's origin point. When the cursor is in
the correct location the cross lines change to diagonal lines.
3. Click the left key on the trackball. The clearing line is deleted.
From the Context window:
1. Right click on the clearing line to
be deleted and select Delete
Clearing Line from the context
popup window.
2. The clearing line is deleted from
the display.
To auto-join clearing lines, do the following:
Auto-Join is used to make the presentation of lines clearer in cases where
many clearing lines are created in close proximity.
The Auto Join feature can be applied where two or more bearing lines or
range lines bisect. For example, if two clearing lines are created in the
same set, the length of the 2nd line will be automatically trimmed at the
intersection point with the 1st clearing line.
1. To enable automatic joining of two or more clearing lines click the
Auto Join button. When Auto Join is enabled the button is
highlighted until the feature is disabled by clicking the button again.

6-16 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

2. Add the type of clearing line to auto join by clicking the Add
Bearing or Add Range button, the selected button is highlighted,
in addition to the Auto Join button.
3. Create a clearing line on the chart display as described previously.
4. Move the cursor over the clearing line (2nd line) to be trimmed until
the cursor changes to the following graphic .
5. Hold down the left key and drag the line to the 1st clearing line.
When the selected line bisects the 1st clearing line the arrow at the
end of the 2nd line's origin point is trimmed at the intersection point
of the 1st line.
The figure below shows a range line and bearing line auto joined to an
existing bearing line.

To save, open or delete a set of Clearing Lines, do the following:

When one or more clearing lines have been
generated, the lines may be saved, opened,
cleared or deleted.
1. If the set of clearing lines are new, click
the Save As button. An Action
Required popup window appears
prompting to enter a name for the line
set.
2. Enter a name using the on-screen keypad and click the OK button.
The set is saved and the given name appears in the Clearing Lines
field. Saved clearing line sets are distributed among system nodes.

65900010 6-17
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

3. To open a saved set of clearing lines click the

Open button. An Action Required popup
window appears listing the previously saved
clearing lines sets.
4. Select a set from the list to open and click the
OK button. The selected clearing line set is
drawn on the display.
5. If a set has been edited since it was opened
the title of the set will be displayed with an *.
To save the set with the same name click the
Save button.
6. To remove a set of clearing lines from the
display click the Clear / New button. If any
changes have been made to the set a
window prompts to save the changes before
clearing the lines from the screen.

When a set of clearing lines is open in the editor the lines are
automatically enabled for display (at all nodes in a multi-node
system), before they are saved. However the clearing lines are not
monitored for safety checking until they are saved. When clearing a
saved set from the editor the set remains displayed until the set is
de-selected on the Monitor tab. This may be required on each node
depending on system configuration.

7. To delete a set of clearing lines An Action Required popup

window appears listing the previously saved clearing lines sets.
8. Select the set from the list to delete and click the OK button. A
window appears prompting to confirm the deletion. Click the OK
button to confirm, the clearing line set is deleted from the system.

6-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Monitoring Clearing Lines

A saved set of clearing lines may be loaded for monitoring. To monitor a
set of clearing lines:
1. Click the Monitor tab on the Clearing
Lines sub menu. The window lists the
saved sets available for monitoring.
2. You can either select an individual set
for monitoring by ticking its check box,
or select all sets by clicking the Select
All button. All clearing lines are drawn
in red while loaded for monitoring.
3. To stop monitoring either untick the
set's check box, or click the Select
None button.
To edit a clearing line set that is currently loaded for monitoring:
1. Open the set from the Editor tab. The system creates a duplicate
set for editing over the monitored set in the editable colour (amber).
2. Make the required edits to the set. As the set is changed the
screen shows the monitored set in the original position.
3. Save the changes made to the set. The monitored set is redrawn to
reflect the changes made in the edited set.

Safety Checking Clearing Lines

Monitored clearing lines will trigger a chart
danger (see Safety Checking) if own ship's
safety region intersects a clearing line. For
information on accessing and acknowledging
chart dangers, see Dangers.
Monitored clearing lines can also detected as
dangers when a route is being monitored (see
Monitor Route - Dangers), or by safety checking on a route opened for
editing, see Edit Route - Dangers.

65900010 6-19
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Import/Export Clearing Lines

A set of named clearing lines can be saved to an external device and
imported or exported via the import/export (I/O) tab.
To import or export a set of Clearing Lines, do the following:
To export one or more sets of clearing lines:
1. Insert an external device such as a USB memory stick into the
VisionMaster PC. The name of the external device appears in the
middle field of the I/O tab folder.
2. From the `Select CLs to Export' field
either select individual sets by ticking
their check boxes, or to export all sets
click the Select All button.
3. Navigate to the directory folder on the
external device where you want to
export the files to.
4. Enter a filename for the clearing lines
in the Filename field using the screen
keypad.
5. Click on the Export button. The
filename entered appears in the field
below the directory tree as a .clse file
and a temporary prompt appears
confirming the exported file and folder
name.
To import one or more sets of clearing lines:
1. Navigate to the files to be imported on the external device, the
selected file appears as a .clse file in the field below the external
device directory tree.
2. Click on the Import button. If the imported clearing line sets
already exist on the node an `Action Required' popup window
appears listing the sets to be imported and prompting to select how
the duplicate files should be handled.
3. The following actions can be made,
either to selected files, or to all
imported files, by clicking on the drop
down arrow in the lower part of the
window: Rename, Merge, Overwrite
and Ignore.

6-20 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

4. Select the required action and either click the Apply To Selected
button to a selected set, or to apply the action to all imported sets,
click the Save button.
5. When an import action is selected the file (or files) are imported
and a temporary prompt appears confirming the import and folder
name.
If clearing lines have been imported or exported from an external device
click on the Eject button before removing the device.

65900010 6-21
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Mapping Features
Mapping
The Mapping facility includes the ability to display, edit, group or
import/export mapping object symbols from a database library anywhere
within the video circle. Mapping objects are displayed in either Standby or
Transmit mode.

Apart from Navigation Marks, all other

mapping objects can only be created and
edited when Radar Maps is selected from the Charts/Radar Maps
button.

The Mapping menu includes the following tab folders:

 Display
 Edit
 Maps
 I/O (Import/Export)
All mapping objects are initially created from the Edit folder. For
information on creating, editing and deleting mapping objects, see Editing
Maps
Other mapping objects, or groups of objects, can be imported or exported
from one workstation to another via the Import / Export folder. For
information on importing or exporting mapping objects see Importing and
Exporting Mapping Objects.
Objects can be saved in a group called a Map, which is then named by the
operator. Maps can be added, deleted or renamed via the Maps folder. For
information see Maps.
The display of mapping groups and object types are controlled via the
Display folder. For information see Maps Display Settings.

Multi-Node Support
Mapping Objects can be saved and retrieved from a shared database.
A mapping object can be edited by the operator when the object is in use
on another workstation. When the mapping object is saved after editing it is
updated on all other nodes, including nodes where the object is currently
being displayed.

6-22 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Maps
The Maps tab folder displays all the object
maps created on the workstation. If no maps
have been created then the window is blank.
The folder includes the options to name and
add a new map, and delete or rename a
previously created map.
To add a new map do the following:
1. Click in the Map Name field, the screen
keypad appears.
2. Enter a name for the mapping group
using the keypad. When a name has
been entered click the OK button, the
keypad disappears from the screen.

3. Click the Add New Map button. The name entered is added to the
Maps list.
To delete an existing map from the list do the following:

Deleting a mapping group will result in all the objects in the map
also being deleted.

1. Highlight the map to be deleted and click on the Delete Selected

Map button.
2. The screen prompts to confirm the deletion. Select Yes to confirm.
3. The selected map is removed from the list.

65900010 6-23
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To rename a selected map do the following:

1. Highlight the map to be renamed from the Maps list.
2. Click in the Map Name: field, the screen keypad appears.
3. Enter a new name for the map using the keypad, when a name has
been entered click the OK button, the keypad disappears from the
screen.
4. Click the Rename Selected Map button, the screen prompts for
confirmation of the rename. Click the Yes button to confirm.
5. The map name selected in the Maps list is changed to the revised
name.

6-24 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Editing Maps
All the creating, editing and deleting functions of
Radar Maps are done in the Edit tab folder.

Create Radar Maps

All mapping objects are created by clicking on the
Create Radar Maps button. When the Create
Radar Maps button is clicked a Radar Map Creation window appears.
To create a mapping object do the following:
1. Click on the Map drop down list and select the map to which
subsequently created objects will be assigned. If no map has been
created then <Default Map> only appears.
2. Click on the Type drop down list and
select the mapping object type. All
mapping symbols are assigned to the
following types:
 Areas
 Beacons
 Buoys
 Danger Points
 Geo Shapes
 Lines
 Nav Marks
 Other points
The following sections give specific information on the creation of the listed
mapping types:
 Creating Geo Shapes
 Creating Beacons, Buoys and Danger Points
 Creating Areas and Lines
 Creating Other Points

65900010 6-25
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Creating Geo Shapes

Geo shapes include a number of geometric objects such as arcs, circles,
lines, squares etc. that may be created.
To create a geo shape and specify its parameters, do the following:
1. With Geo Shapes selected in the Type drop down list, select the
type of geo shape from the Symbol/Description drop down list.
2. Click the Manually Create button, a
window prompts to specify a Lat/Lon
position for the object point. Either enter a
Lat/Lon position and click OK, or click the
OK button and move the cursor into the
video circle. The screen cursor displays
MO EDIT.
3. Click in the area of the screen where you
want the symbol positioned. If the shape is
closed (circle, square etc.) the object
appears on the video circle and the
Settings tab displays the shape’s Lat/Lon
position and default parameters. If the
shape is a line or polygon click at the first
point position, click in the video circle to
generate other line or polygon points.
4. To move the shape to another position left
click in the Lat/Lon position fields and edit
the co-ordinates using the screen keypad.
5. To change the shape details (rotation,
range, radius, segment type etc.) enter
data in the Settings tab.
6. If required, enter notes on the shape in the Notes and Labels tab.
If a name is entered in the Display Label field,
the name will be displayed underneath the origin
point of the shape.
7. To create new types of geo shapes repeat the
above process.

6-26 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Creating Beacons, Buoys and Danger Points

The creation of beacons, buoys and danger point symbols is the same
procedure.
To create beacons, buoys and danger points, do the following:
1. Select the mapping type (Beacons, Buoys or Danger Points) from
the Type drop down list.
2. With the mapping type selected click on the
Symbol/Description drop down list and
select the object symbol. The field directly
underneath the Symbol/Description drop
down list includes a brief description of the
selected symbol.
3. Move the cursor into the video circle, the
screen cursor displays MO EDIT.
4. Click in the area of the video circle where you
want the symbol positioned. The symbol
appears with a bold white box around
it and the following fields appear for
the created object: Position,
Rotation (if applicable) and Notes.
5. To change the object's position, rotation or to
add notes click in the respective fields.
6. To create the same symbol in a different
position move the cursor to another area of
the screen and left click. Each left click in the
video circle results in a new symbol of the
selected type being created
7. To create a new object with a manually specified position, click on
the Manually Create... button. The screen prompts for a LAT /
LON position
8. Click in the LAT/LON fields, enter a position using the screen
keypad, and click the OK button. A symbol is created in the
position specified.
9. To exit the Create Radar Maps mode click the Done button, the
symbols created are fixed in position and the view returns to the
Edit folder.

65900010 6-27
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Creating Mapping Lines and Areas

In the creation of line and area objects you must specify the multiple
geographic positions that form the line or area.
To create a line or area do the following:
1. From the Radar Map Creation window click on the Type drop down
arrow and select either Line or Area.
2. Click on the Symbol/Description drop down list and select the
symbol you want to create.
3. Move the cursor into the video circle and
click in the area of the circle where you
want the first point of the line or area
positioned. The first point is created as a
small red circle and its LAT/LON position
is shown, you can edit the position by
changing the LAT/LON values.
4. To enter further points left
click in the video circle.
The points previously
created appear as white
circles and the last created
point appears as a red
circle. The system automatically
connects each point with direct lines,
and areas created are automatically
shaded.

Lines require two points or more

and areas require three or more
points to be correctly specified.

5. To save the current mapping object and start a new line or area
click on the Start New Line/Area button. A new line or area can
now be created on the video circle.
6. To append a new point to a line or area click on the Manually
Create button. The screen prompts for a LAT / LON position.
7. Click in the LAT/LON fields, enter a position using the screen
keypad, and click the OK button. The symbol is created in the
position specified.

6-28 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

8. The line segment type defaults to Rhumb Line. To change the line
type to Great Circle click on the drop down arrow and select from
the list.
9. To exit the Create Radar Maps mode click the Done button, the
symbols created are fixed in position and the view returns to the
Edit folder.
Creating Other Points
The creation of `Other Points' requires a slightly different procedure to other
mapping symbols.
To create other points symbols do the following:
1. Select Other Points from the Type drop down list.
2. Click on the Symbol/Description drop down list and select the
required object symbol. The field directly underneath the
Symbol/Description list includes a brief description of the selected
symbol.
3. Move the cursor into the video circle, the screen cursor displays
MO EDIT.
4. Click in the area of the video circle where
you want the symbol positioned. The
symbol appears with a bold white box
around it and a time label, shown as a
four digit number. In addition to the
mapping fields described previously, the
window shows Time Label and Display
Label fields. If the symbol is a Tidal
Stream a Rotation field is also
displayed.
5. The time label denotes the time, in hours
and minutes, when the symbol was
created. To change the time label click in
the Hour and Min fields and move the
trackball left or right to change the
values.
6. The Tidal Stream symbols may be
rotated. To rotate the symbol click in the
Rotation field and move the trackball left or right to the required
angle is shown. Only the symbol rotates; the time label and any
display label remain horizontal.

65900010 6-29
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

7. The display label for tidal streams denotes the

approximate speed of the tide in kilometres, with a
range from 0 to 498 kn. To enter a value click in the
Display Label field and move the trackball left or
right until the required speed is shown. The display
label appears to the lower left of the symbol.
8. The display label for a Position Fix is
selected from a drop down list. When
selected the label is shown with
abbreviated letters only e.g. EP for
Estimated position.
9. To exit the Create Radar Maps mode click
the Done button, the symbols created are
fixed in position and the view returns to
the Edit folder.

Viewing and Editing Radar Maps

Previously created radar map objects may be edited from the View/Edit
window. Certain objects, such as arcs, or lines and areas may be edited
directly on the video circle, by right clicking on the object.
Editing Objects from the View/Edit Window
To edit a previously created map object from the View/Edit window do
the following:
1. Click on the View/Edit Radar Maps button. The window prompts to
left click the object to view or edit.
2. Move the cursor over the object to be viewed or edited, the cursor
changes from a cross hair to a bidirectional arrow indicator.
3. Click on the symbol, the selected object is highlighted with a white
box and the Radar Map View/Edit window displays the symbol's
description and positioning information.

The View/Edit window displayed is dependent on the object

selected and is similar to the Radar Map Creation window. Refer to
Creating Radar Maps for information on editing the mapping
object's specific parameters.

4. To exit the View/Edit Radar Maps mode click the Done button, the
folder returns to the Edit folder.
If the mapping object to be edited is a line or area the Radar Map
View/Edit window includes a Left Click Action drop down list.

6-30 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

The Left Click Action drop down list allows other

types of edit actions to be made for the selected line
or area object. Changing the selection in this drop
down list modifies the behaviour of subsequent left
clicks inside the video circle. The following
describes the available modes:
 Select (Default Mode) – Left clicks select points within a line or
area. Editing via dragging of points can only be done while in
this mode.
 Add Point to End – Left clicks add new points on to the end of
the currently selected line or area.
 Add Point to Start – Left clicks add new points on to the start
of the currently selected line or area object.
 Delete Point – Left clicks delete individual points that make up
the currently selected line or area object.
Editing Objects from the Video Circle
To edit an arc from the video circle do the following:
An arc object may have its details edited directly from the video circle.
To edit the arc start and end angles:
1. With the object selected move the cursor over the
arc's editing point (a white circle at the top of the
radius), the cursor changes to the following
symbol
2. Hold down the left key and drag the start and end angles apart by
moving the trackball. To fix the start and end angles at the position
displayed release the left key.
When the start and end angles have been split the arc's range may be
changed directly on the video circle.
To change the range move the cursor over the start angle circle,
the cursor changes to the following symbol. Hold down the left
key and move the trackball, the arc's range and start angle may
be adjusted on the display simultaneously. The values shown in Arc Details
will be also adjusted accordingly.

65900010 6-31
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To view or edit a line or area object from the video circle do the
following:
The following editing actions are available by
right clicking on the line or area in the video
circle.
 Insert Point – Right-clicking between
two existing points in a selected line or
area objects provides an Insert Point
option. Selecting this option will insert a
new point into the line or area object at
the location of the right click.
 Delete Point – Right-clicking on an existing point in a line area
object provides a Delete Point option. Selecting this option will
delete the point that was right clicked.
 Add Point – Right clicking within the video circle while a line or
area mapping is selected adds a point at the position. Selecting
this option will add a new point on to the end of the selected line or
area object.
 Add Point to Beginning - Right clicking within the video circle
while a line or area mapping is selected adds a new point on to the
start of the selected line or area object.

6-32 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Deleting Radar Maps

You can delete previously created mapping objects, either from the Radar
Map Deletion folder, or directly from the video circle, by right clicking on the
object.
To delete a mapping object from the Radar Map Deletion folder do the
following:
1. Click on the Delete Radar Maps button. The
Radar Map Deletion folder prompts to left click
on the object you wish to delete with a Confirm
on Delete check box. To receive system
prompts to confirm deletion before any object is
deleted tick the check box. If the box is unticked
then objects are deleted without confirmation.
2. The cursor displays DEL when moved into the video circle. Move
the cursor over the object to be deleted, the cursor lines change
from horizontal and vertical cross hairs to diagonal cross hairs,
indicating a delete action can now be performed.
3. Click on the object to delete it. If the Confirm On Delete check box
is ticked then the screen will prompt you to confirm the deletion. If
the Confirm check box is unticked the object is immediately deleted
from the screen.
To delete a mapping object from the video circle do the following:
1. Right click on the object in the video
circle, a Delete <Symbol Name>
option is displayed.
2. Selecting this option will delete the
object without confirmation. Note that
right click deletion will delete a line or
area object in its entirety. Deletion of individual points within a line
or area object can be done using the Delete Point option
described in the preceding section.

The option of deleting a mapping object by right clicking on it is

available independent of the Mapping Edit mode.

65900010 6-33
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Maps Display Settings

The Display tab folder lists all available maps
and object types. If no maps have been
generated then the Displayed Maps window
shows <Default Map> only.
From the Display folder you can also apply an
offset to a specified location for all the radar
maps in the video circle.

Displayed Maps and Types

Maps and object types that are ticked are
enabled for display in the video circle. Unticked
maps and types are not displayed.
To select or deselect all maps and/or displayed
types click the Select All or Deselect All
buttons below each list. Or, to select or
deselect specific maps or object types tick or
untick the map or type check box.

Radar Map Offset

The radar maps displayed on the video circle
can be graphically offset by using the cursor to
select a particular map object point and then a
radar return point on the video circle.
To offset radar maps do the following:
1. Click the Offset Graphically button, the button changes to prompt:
Click Radar Map Object.
2. Move the cursor into the video circle, the cursor changes to the
Position offset graphic. Using a particular map object point as a
reference click on the point, the window prompts to Click Radar
Return.
3. Click on the position in the video circle where you want the object
point moved to. The mapping object moves to the selected
location, which is defined in the range (offset distance) and bearing
values, and the Apply Offset check box is automatically ticked.
4. To move the radar maps and object types back to their default
position untick the Apply Offset check box.

6-34 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Importing and Exporting Objects

The I/O (Import/Export) tab folder enables you to import or export radar
map objects. Mapping objects not currently on a workstation can be
imported from an external drive, such as a USB memory stick. Mapping
objects that have been produced on a workstation can be exported to other
workstations via the external drive.

Importing Objects
To import objects do the following:
1. Insert a USB memory stick into the PC. If no external device has
been inserted the window prompts to `insert removable media'.
2. Navigate to the external drive where the
mapping objects reside. The field below
the directory tree will show any valid object
files in the selected folder.
3. Select the file to import.
4. Click the Import button to import the
selected file's contents to your Workstation
and a temporary prompt appears
confirming that the import was successful.
5. If the mapping object has been imported
from an external drive, click on the Eject
before removing the USB.

65900010 6-35
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Exporting Objects
To export objects do the following:
1. Select the external drive to export the objects to.
2. Click on the drop arrow in the Export field,
the export options available are:
 All Objects - all mapping objects on
your workstation.
 Objects in Map - objects assigned to a specific map.
 Objects in Area - objects within a specified geographic area.
3. If Objects in Map is selected a Map drop
down list appears. Select the map to
export by clicking on the drop down arrow.
4. If Objects in Area is selected, the
LAT/LON fields for Southwest and
Northeast corners appear. Define the geographic area you want to
export from by editing these LAT/LON position fields.
5. When the export options have been selected name the file to be
exported in the Filename field and click the Export button. A
temporary prompt appears confirming that the operation was
successful.

Multi-node Support
On a multi-node system a set of mapping objects are distributed and
available among all nodes.

6-36 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Line of Position
The geographic location of own ship can be determined by using Lines of
Position (LOP), which are created by taking bearings and/or radar
measurements from own ship to suitable objects. Visual bearings taken on
fixed aids to navigation or landmarks such as smokestacks or towers are
typically used for bearing LOPs, while the distance to a distinct shoreline or
point of land measured by radar may be used for a range LOP. When two
or more LOPs are created a fix of own ship’s position may be obtained.
An active point symbol will be displayed at each of the operator-defined
LOP positions. Each symbol includes a reference number i.e. LOP 1, LOP
2 etc. When the range of bearing data is entered, the time of entry is
indicated beside the symbol. The symbol remains fixed at the selected
location or charted object, but the time stamp moves with the line or circle,
based on the speed and course of the vessel.
Up to six LOPs may be drawn on the chart display.

Creating LOPs
To generate one or more LOPs, do the following:
1. Click on Nav Tools in the main menu, and then select Line Of
Position in the Nav Tools menu list. If no LOPs have been
previously created, the window opens prompting to right click on
the display to select a LOP position. Or, if
LOPs have been left over from a previous
LOP fix, click the Clear button.
2. Right click on the display at the desired
LOP reference point and click Add Line of
Position (LOP) in the semi-transparent context menu that appears.
The Line Of Position menu will show the Lat/Long of
the clicked location and a list of charted objects
detected near the clicked location. Normally one of
the objects in the list represents the desired object
that the range or bearing will be measured to,
although clicked location, or a specified lat/lon may
also be used.
3. Either select the object/location from the list;
or, specify a Lat/Long position. Manually
Specified Below is automatically
highlighted when Lat/Long data is entered.

65900010 6-37
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The location, or selected object, is highlighted with a red circle

symbol, and a red shaded background colour inside the circle.
The circle symbol represents the active point used as a bearing
object for calculating the LOP fix.
4. When the location, object or position has been
selected click the OK button. The LOP is added to the
Lines Of Position (LOPs) list and the object or location
on the chart display now includes an active point
symbol with reference number.
The point symbol will be a triangle if a bearing LOP is used, or a circle if a
range LOP is used. A triangle inside a circle will be shown if both range and
bearing are measured to the same object.
5. When all the desired LOP locations have been added, enter the
bearing or range data for each object/location as measured
visually, or by radar. The LOP associated with each object will
appear at the time the data is entered, and that time remains
indicated in the menu. The line advances, based on best available
data for vessel course and speed. When data is entered for the
desired number of LOPs click Accept Fix to establish a LOP.
Range and bearing to the objects can be updated and new fixes can be
accepted. Or the data can be cleared when the ship travels far enough that
new LOP objects need to be designated for the next LOP fix.
Each active point symbol is represented as one of the following:
 A triangle for a bearing active point
 A circle for a range active point
A triangle inscribed in a circle for a composite (range/bearing)
active point
The same location or mariner object may be used for multiple bearing
and/or range observations at different times. When this is done each
selection is added to the Line Of Position list with the LOP reference
numbers superimposed over each other.

6-38 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

LOP Fixes
When two or more LOPs are drawn and intersect, a temporary position fix
is created. A LOP temporary fix symbol is drawn at the intersection point to
indicate the position of the fix.
When three or more LOPs are created with no
intersection point, the temporary position fix is
drawn at a calculated position, defined as the
magnitude of the difference between the calculated
fix and the GPS fix. The figure to the right shows
two bearing lines and one range ring.

When a fix has been accepted by clicking the Accept Fix button, a
temporary prompt `LOP Sensor - updated' appears and a LOP permanent
fix symbol is drawn at the same position as the temporary fix symbol.
The table below shows the temporary and permanent LOP fix symbols,
together with a brief description.

Symbol Description
The Temporary Fix symbol is created when two or more
LOPs intersect. The symbol moves across the display in
conjunction with the bearing lines/range rings.
A temporary fix symbol is removed if:
 the LOPs are deleted
 the temporary fix expires (expiration time configured
during commissioning)
 a new temporary fix calculation fails
When the operator accepts a position fix, a permanent fix
symbol is created. The symbol includes the current system
time above the symbol and the fix type, e.g. VR to the lower
right of the symbol and EP in the lower left of the symbol.
See the table below for a list of fix types.
A permanent fix symbol remains at the fix position, and is
displayed in addition to a temporary fix symbol.

The following are defined as LOP fix types:

 Estimated Position Fix (EP)
 Visual Fix (V)
 Range Fix (R)
 Composite Type Fix (VR)

65900010 6-39
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

A minimum of three LOPs are required for a Visual, Range, or Composite

type fix. Only two LOPs are required for an EP Fix.
The table below gives a description of each LOP fix label.
Label Description
EP Position was obtained using two points.
V Position was obtained by making only bearing observations.
R Position was obtained by making only range observations.

VR Position was obtained by making both bearing and range

observations.

3. Right click on the display to create the first LOP, this could be a
mariner object, the clicked location, or a specified Lat/Long
location. From the semi-transparent context menu select Add Line
Of Position (LOP).
The location, or selected object, is highlighted with a red circle
symbol, with a red shaded background colour inside the circle. The
circle symbol represents the active point used as a bearing object
for calculating the LOP fix.
4. The Line Of Position window appears with a list of potential
locations to select, with the most valid object/location underneath
Clicked Location. Either select the object/location from the list; or,
to specify a Lat/Long position, select Manually Specified Below
and enter the Lat/Long coordinates.

6-40 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Editing LOPs
To edit LOPs, do the following:
When one or more LOPs are created, the list of
LOPs is displayed in the Line Of Position
window. The time displayed with each LOP is
the system time that the LOP was created.
From the Lines Of Position window the following
actions may be implemented:
 Turn the display of LOPs on or off
 Highlight a LOP
 Change from bearing to range
 Change from bearing angle or range radius
 Change from True bearing to Relative
bearing
 Delete a LOP
 Accept a position fix
 Delete all LOPs from the system
1. To turn all the LOPs off (the default is on) untick the Display Lines
of Position check box. All LOPs in the list retain their values when
the LOPs display is switched off.
2. To highlight a LOP, click its number button, the active point
reference of the LOP and the line are displayed as purple.
3. All LOPs default to true bearing at 0.00. To change from Bearing to
range click the Range radio button. The range defaults to 0.00 NM.
4. To change the bearing angle or range radius click in the respective
field, hold down the left button and move the trackball left to
decrease, or right to increase the bearing/range. When a
bearing/range is entered the bearing line or range radius line
appears on the chart display as a thin solid purple line. The bearing
line or range ring moves across the display, based on own ship's
course and speed over ground.
5. To change from True bearing to Relative bearing, click the T
button, the button toggles between T (true) and R (relative).
6. To delete a specific LOP from the list click on the Delete button
immediately below the number. The LOP is deleted from the list
and the chart display, with the existing LOPs retaining their
numbering.

65900010 6-41
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

7. To accept a position fix, click the Accept Fix button. A permanent

fix symbol is created, see the LOP Fixes section below.
8. To delete all LOPs from the system click the Clear button. All LOPs
are removed from the display and the Line Of Position window. A
permanent fix symbol remains on the display after the Clear button
has been clicked.

Using a LOP Position Sensor

A LOP fix may be used as the active data source
for the position sensor, see Position Values in
Sensor Management.
The LOP Position Sensor displays the Lat/Lon
coordinates of the permanent fix.
If the LOP Position sensor is selected, own ship
is re-positioned so that its CCRP is at the centre
of the permanent fix symbol.

The amount of time that the LOP position sensor will be considered
usable after a fix is set in the configuration tool (default time 300
seconds). Note that LOP position sensor data is dead reckoned
between each fix, and this data will become degraded after a
period of time.

6-42 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Ownship History
Ownship history tracks are a series of lines
indicating the past locations of ownship as
defined by position sources. There are two
types of history track:
 Primary - a line indicating the past
location of ownship as defined by the
configured position sensor (usually
GPS).
 Secondary - lines indicating the past
locations as defined by other position
data sources, see Position Values.
Primary and Secondary history tracks may be
displayed simultaneously by clicking the
Selected Sensor History check box and
selecting a history track from the Sensors
History list. The history tracks are
differentiated by line style and displayed in the
same colour as the heading line. Past position
dots are displayed on the history tracks,
spaced at operator selected intervals.
Event marks may be added at any time to
ownship's history track.
Details of past position dots and event marks may be displayed.

Primary History Track

To turn the primary history track on tick the primary position sensor (e.g.
GPS) check box from the Sensor Histories area. When the Connect Past
Positions check box is ticked the screen shows a solid line with a series of
past position dots. The number of dots shown will be based on the
maximum length of the track and the spacing of the position dots.
To remove the line and display the position dots only untick the Connect
Past Positions check box.

65900010 6-43
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Secondary History Tracks

Secondary history tracks include other available position sensor data
sources as defined in the Position Sensor, these may include the following:
 dead reckoned sensor.
 LOP Sensor
 manual position sensor
To select a position source for a secondary history track tick the sensor
source check box.
When a position source is changed, the primary history track transitions to
the newly selected position source while maintaining a smooth continuous
line.
Position sources for secondary tracks can be
individually selected and turned off. Tracks for
each position source will have different line styles,
as shown in the Sensors Histories window.

Changing History Settings

Maximum Length
The maximum length value is the amount of time that the history track will
be displayed on the screen. The history track period is variable from 1.0
minute to 24.0 hours. For example, if the length is set to 1 hour then
ownship's position history for the past hour only will be displayed.
To change the maximum length click in the field and when the current value
changes to green move the trackball to increase or decrease the value,
click again to accept the selected time.
Earliest Time to Show
The Earliest Time To Show defaults to the current date and time indicated
in UTC or local time, as defined in Time Management.
To display ownship history starting at a specific time period, do the
following:
1. Click in the field, the current value
changes to green and a navigation keypad
appears beneath the field.
2. Click on the left or right arrows to navigate
to the data to be changed. For example, if
you want to display the history track starting from 30 minutes
before the current time, highlight the minutes value.
3. Click on the up/down arrows to change the values.

6-44 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

4. When the required time value is shown, click OK to complete.

Position Spacing
The spacing of positions controls the gap between the past position dots.
The minimum is 1 minute and the maximum is 120 minutes.
To change the position spacing click in the Desired field and when the
current value changes to green move the trackball to increase or decrease
the value, click again to accept the selected time. When a time is selected
the Displayed time will change to match the desired time.
Position Details
To view details on past position dots or event
marks click the Position Details check box and
move the cursor over the symbol. A transparent
popup window will appear showing details of the
symbol, including date/time of creation and its
Lat/Lon position.

Event Marks
Event marks may be applied at any time to ownship's history track. These
are displayed as an event mark symbol.
To generate an event click the Add Event button. An orange outline box
with a diagonal line through it is shown on the history track at the current
CCRP position.
The display of events can be toggled on and off by ticking the Display
Events check box. When an event is added to a history track the marker
will appear at its original position whenever Display Events is switched on.

65900010 6-45
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Parallel Cursor
The Parallel Cursor facility enables a rotating
parallel cursor centred on own ship's CCRP to
be displayed.
The parallel cursor graphics consist of two
dashed orthogonal lines (axes) extending to the
edge of the video circle with their axis crossing
point at CCRP, the end points of each line are
marked with a semi-circular marker at the edge
of the video circle. A series of equally spaced
dashed parallel lines, spaced at the currently set
range ring interval, are shown on either both
sides of the CCRP (full mode) or one side of the CCRP (half mode).

To access the facility click on the Parallel Cursor field from the Nav Tools
menu list. The Parallel Cursor window is displayed.
To turn on the Parallel Cursor and change settings do the following:
1. To turn the parallel cursor on tick the Display On check box. The
first time the parallel cursor is displayed, one cross axis runs
parallel to ship’s heading and the display mode is in full.
2. When the parallel cursor is displayed the Interval field changes
from Cursor Off to displaying the line interval in nautical miles
(NM). To increase or decrease the NM interval change the range
scale.
3. To toggle between Full and Half mode click on the Display Mode
drop down arrow.

6-46 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

4. From the Bearing Type drop down arrow select between Relative
and True. When True is selected the parallel cursor is azimuth
stabilised (i.e. maintains a constant orientation with respect to
north). When Relative is selected the parallel cursor is unstabilised
(i.e. maintains a constant orientation with respect to ship’s
heading). When True is selected and the heading becomes invalid
the parallel cursor is not displayed.
5. To rotate the parallel cursor either click on one of the four semi-
circular markers, hold down the left key and move the trackball left
or right to change bearing.
Or:
6. Click in the Bearing field, the text becomes green (editable). Move
the trackball left or right to change the bearing degree, the parallel
cursors move dependent on the values entered.
7. To realign the parallel cursor along ship's heading click on the
Reset to Ship Heading button.

65900010 6-47
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Display Settings Features

Display Settings
The Display Settings menu includes the following tab folders:
 Ownship
 EBL (if configured)
 Grid

Ownship
The Ownship tab folder enables the display of
synthetics data for own ship to be controlled.
The folder includes the following options:
 Beam Line Length adjustment
 True Scale Ship - own ship display
settings, including:
 Off
 Default Symbol
 Custom Symbol
 Stern Line
 Antenna Position
 Own ship vector settings, including:
 Vector tick marks display
 Vector tick marks interval time
 Vector arrowheads display
 Ground Stabilized Vectors, including:
 Predicted Vector display
 Ownship Vector display
 Predicted Outlines, including:
 Predicted Ship display
 Predicted Path display

6-48 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Beam Line Length

The length of the beam line defaults to 10mm, this is the minimum length
the line extends each side of own ship's CCRP.
To lengthen the beam line left click in the Beam Line
Length field, the value figure changes to green
(editable). Move the trackball right to increase the length
(maximum 99.9mm), or if the length has been increased
previously, left to decrease. Left click again to exit the
editing process.
True Scale Ship
When the Off check box is ticked the screen shows own ship drawn as a
minimised symbol, irrespective of range scale.
When the Default Symbol check box is ticked the screen shows a true
scale outline of own ship based on the configured length and beam of the
ship (as entered in the Configuration tool). The true scale outline may be
displayed if the greatest dimension of the ship is larger than 6mm on the
display.
When the Custom Symbol check box is ticked the screen shows ownship
drawn to represent the actual outline of the ship. Note that Custom Symbol
will only be enabled if an outline definition for own ship has been defined in
the Configuration tool. If no custom symbol has been defined then this
setting is disabled.
The default symbol and custom symbol are displayed in addition to the
heading line and beam line.
For information on the symbols available for own ship see Own Ship
Symbols.
Stern Line
When the Display Stern Line check box is ticked the
screen shows own ship's stern line, in addition to the
heading line. The stern line is drawn from the CCRP, i.e.
where the heading line joins the beam line.
The stern line is drawn reciprocal of the current heading
line. For example, if the presentation mode is Head Up
the heading line is at 000° and the stern line at 180°.

65900010 6-49
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Antenna Position
The antenna position may be displayed when own ship is in true scale only.
The antenna position is shown as a pair of small
crossed lines, between 1mm and 2mm long, centred at
the location on the display corresponding to the position
of the radar antenna. Note that the antenna position
may be in a different location to the CCRP, as shown in
the figure to the right. For information on setting the
antenna position and CCRP, see `Top Unit
Configuration' in Chapter 1, `Configuration' of the Ship's Manual (Volume
2).
Own Ship Vector Controls
Vector Tick Marks
Tick marks can displayed along the vector length at one minute intervals,
with every sixth tick mark is shown with double thickness, for more details
see Own Ship Symbols.
To turn vector tick marks on or off tick or untick the Display Vector Tick
Marks check box.
To change the default tick mark interval time from 1.0 minute, left click in
the interval field, the value figure changes to green (editable). Move the
trackball left to decrease the time (0.1 minute minimum), or right to
increase the time (60 minutes maximum). Left click again to accept the
value and exit the editing process.
Vector Arrow Head
When the Display Vector Arrowhead check box is ticked, the screen shows
the own ship's vector arrowhead (double arrowhead in ground stabilised
mode; single arrowhead in water stabilised mode).
Ground Stabilised Vectors
The default setting for ground stabilised vectors is Ownship vector
selected, see Own Ship Symbols. To turn predicted vector on tick the
Predicted Vector check box. When predicted vector is selected the
ownship vector check box is automatically de-selected.

The default presentation, set at commissioning, is not to allow

Ownship Vector and Predicted Vector to be displayed
simultaneously. Although the option of simultaneous display may
be selected from the Configuration tool, this setting is NOT in
accordance with IEC 62388.

6-50 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Predicted Vector
The Predicted vector tool is used to indicate where
own ship will go based on current speed, course,
and rate of turn. Predicted vector is NOT intended
to access risk of collision.
Predicted vector is a vector arc drawn from own
ship's CCRP with a radius based on the selected
Rate of Turn sensor and the current ground
stabilised course and speed. The vector may be
drawn as an arc, or a straight line, depending on
ship's current course. The vector is drawn up to six minutes long with a dot
indicating each minute, but is restricted by the time of the target vector.
Target vectors and own ship vectors can be water stabilised or ground
stabilised, but the predicted vector is always ground stabilised. If the
system is in water stabilised mode ship's vector is drawn along the heading
line, in addition to the predicted vector.
A warning `Predicted Vector Mismatch' is raised if the current speed is
water stabilised when the predicted vector is displayed.
To turn off predicted vector and return to ownship vector untick the
Predicted Vector check box.
Predicted Outlines
Predicted Ship
The predicted ship indicates a series of predicted
position and heading samples of own ship based
on current speed, course, and rate of turn.
Predicted ship is drawn as a series of true scale
own ship symbols, shown as thin orange outlines
displayed along the length of the ship vector. The
true scale outlines are drawn regardless of range
scale.
The spacing between each symbol is equal to the Vector Tick Marks
Interval setting. The number of ship symbols drawn is equal to the vector
time (see Vector Modes) divided by the tick mark interval setting, rounded
down to the nearest whole number.

If the vector tick marks are set too high, the predicted ship outline
will be spaced far apart and may not be visible on the display
depending on scale and ship speed.

65900010 6-51
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Predicted ship will be displayed regardless of whether the display setting is

in predicted vector, predicted path or COG vector. When predicted vector is
enabled the location of each predicted ship CCRP is shown as a small dot
on the vector line.
If the system is in water stabilised mode and predicted vector/path is
switched off, the predicted ship outlines continue to follow the ground
stabilised vector path.
Predicted Path
Predicted Path is used to indicate the area that the ship will pass through
based on current speed, course, and rate of turn.
The predicted path is two thick orange lines
originating at the inside fore corner and the
outside aft corner of own ship, if the ship is
turning the lines are shown as arced. A true
scale ship is drawn at the end of the
predicted path.

Fore and aft are relative to the direction that own ship is moving
and do not necessarily relate to bow and stern.

Predicted path is drawn to a maximum vector time of six minutes. The

predicted path is decreased from its maximum length if the vector time is
decreased below six minutes.
If the system is in water stabilised mode the predicted path continues to
follow the ground stabilised vector path.

6-52 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Next Turn EBL

The system supports the input of a Next Turn EBL sentence that transfers
data from a VMS, this data can then be represented graphically on screen.
In order to display Next Turn EBL graphics an input must have been
previously configured.
The Next Turn EBL is used while own ship is planning and executing a
turn.
To turn the EBL on or off tick the Next Turn
EBL check box.
A valid compass input is required to display
the Next Turn EBL graphics; if the heading is
unusable then the graphics will not be displayed.
The system uses the following VMS information to display the Next Turn
EBL:
 Bearing of initial line, degrees with respect to north
 Length of initial line (can be zero if initial line is not to be drawn)
 Radius of arc
 Bearing of final line, degrees with respect to north
 Display status of Next Turn EBL, on or off
 Position of origin of Next Turn EBL, fore/aft and port/ starboard,
with respect to the centre of the ship
The final line is always drawn to the edge of the chart window.

65900010 6-53
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Grid
A latitude/longitude (LAT/LON) grid can be displayed on the chart window.
The LAT/LON grid values are taken from the latest valid position of own
ship’s CCRP, as reported by the Position sensor.
The LAT/LON grid is only displayed when the presentation mode is N-UP.
The grid is removed from the display if the presentation mode is changed to
H-UP or C-UP.

The grid display will vary between two latitude and three longitude lines,
and four latitude and four longitude lines, based on the selected range
scale of the display.
The LAT/LON grid will not be displayed when
the chart orientation is 45° to 135° and from
225° to 315°
To turn the grid on or off tick the Display
Lat/Lon Grid check box.

6-54 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Anchoring
Anchoring Description
The Anchoring feature allows the operator to plan an anchorage, monitor
the anchoring status, control the display of the anchorage parameters, and
monitor the anchor drag after the ship is anchored.
The Anchoring function may be in Anchor Watch (anchor dropped), or
Anchor Approach.
During Anchoring Planning, the operator selects a location and head
bearing for the anchorage. A drop bearing object and a drop range object
may also be planned. Settings for anchor depth and chain scope are also
entered from the Planning tab.
During Anchor Approach, the Status tab provides information on ownship
position and bearing with respect to the planned anchorage parameters.
Anchoring Status is used to guide the ship to the planned anchorage
location. The goal is to approach the planned anchorage over the head
bearing track and use ship's bearing to anchorage, any drop bearing
objects, and the ship's range to a drop range object to determine whether
the ship's hawsepipe is over the planned anchorage location. Once the ship
is at the desired anchorage location, Drop Anchor is activated from the
Status tab to begin the Anchor Watch mode.
When anchor is dropped the Anchoring Feature On check box is
automatically switched on in the Status tab.
Anchoring Display includes diagrams of the display options for Anchor Drop
and Anchor Approach.

65900010 6-55
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Anchoring Planning
The Anchoring Planning tab enables a precise
anchorage location to be entered. The operator
should enter a head bearing to steer for
anchorage, and may also plan a single drop
bearing object, and/or a single drop range object.
Precision Anchoring
An anchor position may be selected, by entering
Lat/Long coordinate values or by selecting a
location on the chart display.
With anchoring on, either manually enter a
Lat/Lon position using the screen keypad; or, click
on the On Chart button, move the cursor to the
desired location on the display and left click.
When an anchorage location is selected, the
system draws an anchorage approach display,
centred on the location, see the figure below.

6-56 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Anchor Track
Anchor Track enables a true head bearing to the anchor point to be entered
or selected on the chart display out to a distance of 5000 yards. The head
bearing value is displayed on the chart at the start of the head bearing line.
The head bearing is the planned course to steer as the ship approaches
anchorage.
To enter a head bearing, either click in the Head Brg field and move the
trackball left or right to set the bearing angle.
Alternatively an object on the chart display may be selected as a head
bearing marker (HBM). To select a HBM click on the On Chart button,
move the cursor to the object or location on the display and left click.
The head bearing is drawn at the opposite bearing to the value entered,
e.g. if you enter a value of 90º the system draws an anchor track at 270º.
Range Rings
The range rings provide a quick visual indication of the distance from
ownship to the Anchor Point.
When anchor approach is displayed (see the figure in Display) the following
types of range rings are displayed:
 Inner range circles
 Outer range circles
The Inner Interval and Outer Interval values show the spacing interval in
metres between the circles. To change the spacing interval click in the field
and move the trackball left to decrease, or right to increase the value. The
inner interval range is from 1 to 100 metres in 1 unit increments; the outer
interval range is from 5 to 500 metres in 5 unit increments.
Drop Objects
Drop Objects are conspicuous landmarks that are used as aids to
navigation in approaching the Anchor Point.
There are two types of drop objects:
 Drop Range Object
 Drop Bearing Object

65900010 6-57
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Drop Bearing Object

A Drop Bearing object (DBO) is an object that can be observed at a
planned bearing when ownship is correctly positioned to drop anchor.
A DBO can be manually selected by specifying its Lat/Long coordinates, or
by clicking the On Chart button, positioning the cursor over the object and
left clicking. If no chart object is identified after a query, the selected cursor
position is used to calculate the drop bearing value.
If enabled in the Display options, the display shows an outline circle in
purple with the letters DB inside to visually indicate the current DBO
position.
The bearing value from the CCRP to the DBO is continuously updated on
the Status tab.
Drop Range Object
A Drop Range object (DRO) is an object that can be observed at a planned
range when ownship is correctly positioned to drop the anchor.
A DRO can be manually selected by specifying its Lat/Long coordinates, or
by clicking the On Chart button, positioning the cursor over the object and
left clicking. If no chart object is identified after a query, the selected cursor
position is used to calculate the drop range value.
If enabled in the Display options, the display shows an outline circle in
purple with the letters DR inside to visually indicate the current DRO
position.
The range value from the CCRP to the DRO is continuously updated on the
Status tab.
Watch Settings
The Watch Settings area allows the operator to enter values for anchor
depth and chain scope, which are used by the system to calculate the
values for chain length, drag circle radius and swing circle radius. These
values are used to generate an alert if an anchor drag is detected.
The figure below shows a diagram of the Anchor Settings parameters.

6-58 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Anchor Depth
The Anchor Depth is the water depth value at the Anchor Point.

The depth at the anchor point may be retrieved from the chart
soundings, when switched on in Chart Settings.

An anchor depth of between 1 and 100 metres may be entered when the
chain scope is set any value other than None. An alert is generated if a
sounding cannot be located within the distance from the anchorage to 10
percent of the current range scale.
Chain Length Scope
The chain length scope is a multiplier value used to calculate the chain
length. For example, if a scope of 6 is selected in a depth of 20 feet, the
chain length will be 120 feet.
The chain length scope may be one of the following values: None, 4, 5, 6 or
7.
Chain Length
The chain length is the distance from the hawsepipe to the anchor.
If a chain length scope has a value of 4, 5, 6, or 7, the system automatically
calculates the chain length as the product of the anchor depth and the
chain length scope. An anchor chain length may be entered from 1 and
1000 metres when the chain scope is set to None.
An alert is generated when the automatically calculated chain length is
greater than the configured maximum usable chain length.

65900010 6-59
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Drag Radius
The Drag Radius is used as a boundary where, if violated, triggers an alert
indicating that the anchor drag limit has been exceeded.
The drag circle radius is automatically calculated as equal to the chain
length plus the distance from the hawsepipe to the CCRP. The display of
the drag circle may be switched on or off at the Display tab. The drag circle
is not rendered if the diameter is less than 2 mm on the display.
An alert is generated if the distance from CCRP to the Anchor Point
exceeds the length of the drag circle radius.
Swing Radius
The Swing radius is a circle centred on the Anchor Point with a radius
automatically calculated as equal to the distance from the Anchor Point to
the ship’s stern. The display of the swing circle may be switched on or off at
the Display tab.

Display
The Display tab includes the following anchor
display options (the default setting is all display
options enabled).
 Anchor Symbol - when enabled an
anchor symbol is displayed in a purple
outline circle over the anchor position.
This symbol is displayed in both anchor
range display and anchor drop mode.
The following display options only apply when in
anchor drop mode:
 Drag Ring - the drag ring is a boundary
where, if violated, triggers an alert indicating that the anchor drag
limit has been exceeded. The drag ring is displayed when the
anchor is dropped.
Swing Ring - the swing ring is centred on the Anchor Point with a
radius equal to the distance from the Anchor Point to the ship’s
stern.
The figure below shows a diagram of the Anchor Drop display options.

6-60 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

The following display options only apply when in anchor approach display:
 Drop Bearing Object - a drop bearing object is an object that can
be observed at a planned bearing when ownship is correctly
positioned to drop anchor.
 Drop Range Object - a drop range object is an object that can be
observed at a planned range when ownship is correctly positioned
to drop the anchor.
 Head Bearing - the head bearing is the planned course to steer as
the ship approaches anchorage.
 Inner Range Rings - the inner range rings are rendered between
the letting go circle and the inner most outer range circle. The
spacing between the inner rings may be changed in the Range
Rings `Inner Interval' field, see Planning.
 Letting Go Circle - the letting go circle is represented as a dotted
line, centred at the Anchor Point, which provides a visual indication
of when to drop anchor. The radius of the letting go circle is equal
to the distance from the CCRP to the hawsepipe.
 Outer Range Rings - the outer range rings are rendered and
labelled at regular intervals from the letting go circle to the starting
position of the head bearing line. The spacing between the outer
rings may be changed in the Range Rings `Outer Interval' field, see
Planning.
Anchoring Planning includes an illustration of the anchor approach display.

65900010 6-61
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Status
The Status tab enables you to monitor the anchor drag after the ship is
anchored. All values in the Status tab are read-only, generated from values
entered at Planning.
Anchor Watch Mode
Click the Drop Anchor button to switch to
Anchor Watch mode, the anchor drop display is
drawn, set to ownship hawsepipe position. The
Anchoring Feature On check box in the
Anchorage area is automatically switched on
when Drop Anchor is activated.
During the Anchor Watch mode, the application
periodically monitors the ship's position to see if
the anchor is being dragged. An anchor drag
alert is generated if movement is detected in
relation to the Anchor Point.
A line is drawn from the hawsepipe to the anchor
location. This line is initially at zero length and
represents any movement own ship makes from
anchor position, based on wind, tide or current
(see the figure below). Any movement is
monitored on the Anchorage area of the Status
folder.

Suitable warnings are generated when own ship passes over the drag ring
(inner ring) and beyond the swing ring (outer ring). The warnings are
escalated to alarms when own ship sails beyond the drag and swing rings.
If the Anchoring Feature On check box is switched off, the Status tab
continues to show data based on the last placed anchorage position.
The following sub sections describe the values shown in the Anchoring
Status folder.

6-62 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Anchorage
The Anchorage area displays the following read-only data:
 Latitude/Longitude - Lat/Long of planned anchorage
 Range - ships range to anchorage
 TTG - estimated remaining time to anchorage
 Anchor Brg - hawsepipe's true bearing to planned anchorage (click
the bearing button to toggle between True and Relative).
 Head Brg - planned bearing to the anchorage (click the bearing
button to toggle between True and Relative).
 XTD - cross track distance to anchor track
Reference Drop Objects
The Reference Drop Objects area displays the following read-only data:
 Bearing - ships bearing from CCRP to drop bearing object (click the
bearing button to toggle between True and Relative).
 Drop Brg - bearing from Letting Go Position to drop bearing object
(click the bearing button to toggle between True and Relative).
 Range - range from CCRP to drop bearing object
 Drop Range - range from Letting Go Position to drop bearing object
Wind Velocity
The Wind Velocity area displays the following read-only data:
 Speed - wind speed (Relative or True)
 Direction - wind direction (Relative or True)

65900010 6-63
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Man Overboard
The Man Overboard (MOB) function enables management of a MOB
emergency. When MOB is active, a symbol is displayed on the chart
display representing `Oscar' – the person in the water.
A MOB operation may be immediately activated by clicking on
the top-level MOB (Oscar) button, situated below the Safety
check icon. The Oscar button is shown in orange whenever the
MOB event is active.
When there is no active MOB event the button is shown in the
standard background colour.
Upon activating the MOB event a symbol is dropped at own ship's CCRP.
The Oscar button is displayed with an orange background and the Man
Overboard window appears with the bearing, range and elapsed time
values. Elapsed time counts up, while range and bearing values update
automatically based on own ship movements. Oscar will drift from the initial
location based on the own ship set and drift at the time the event started.

CAUTION:

The position and heading data used by the system must be valid
and accurate to use the Man Overboard feature as described
below; otherwise erroneous information can be indicated. If this
is the case alternative methods should be used to assist with
search and rescue of the person who has gone overboard.

A MOB event may also be activated from the Man Overboard window from
the Nav Tools menu and clicking the Start button on this window.

Unlike clicking the Oscar button on the upper toolbar, accessing

the Man Overboard window does NOT immediately generate a
MOB operation. Therefore the preferred method to start an MOB
event is via the Oscar button below the Safety check icon.

6-64 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

When a MOB event has been activated, the Man

Overboard window displays the following read-
only data:
 Bearing (R) - the relative bearing from
CCRP to Oscar.
 Bearing (T) - the true bearing from CCRP
to Oscar.
 Range (nm) - the distance from CCRP to
Oscar.
 Elapsed Time - time since the MOB event started.
When an MOB operation is active the button at the bottom of the window
displays Cancel Oscar.
If the MOB event is being activated based on the suspicion that a person
has gone overboard sometime in the past the operator may manually
adjust the elapsed time value accordingly by clicking on the Manual Edit
button. If you manually edit the Elapsed Time value only, then Oscar is
automatically placed at a position based on own ship history data, with an
adjustment based on the Set and Drift value that was in effect at the
manually specified time. The bearing and range values will automatically
update to reflect the new location, which will be along the own ship history
track - offset from the track based on the applied Set and Drift.
The figure below shows the calculation of Oscar position for a MOB event
that occurred in the past along ship's track.

65900010 6-65
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The Manual Edit function can also be used to enter range and bearing
data, or select a position on the chart, but this should only be done if a
visual sighting allows the operator to improve the accuracy of the indicated
Oscar location.

When range and/or bearing values are manually edited the Oscar
location will NOT be based on elapsed time and history data. The
range and bearing data will be used instead.

To manually enter the MOB values do the following:

1. From the Man Overboard window, click
on the Manual Edit button. The Bearing,
Range and Elapsed Time values
become editable and additional buttons,
Done and Cancel Edit appear.
2. To edit the MOB position, enter values
in the relevant fields and click the Done
button. The Oscar symbol is re-drawn at
the revised location.
3. Or, to cancel the edit operation, click the
Cancel Edit button.

It is important to press Done or Cancel Edit after activating the

manual edit function. If the manual values are left in the menu this
will interfere with the immediate activation previously described.
Specifically the elapsed time will not count up until the operator
selects either button. The operator must ensure that the manually
entered values are accurate before selecting Done.

To select an MOB position on the chart do the following:

1. From the Man Overboard window, click on the Select A Position
On Chart button and move the cursor into the chart display. The
button changes to Cancel and the cursor displays the Oscar
symbol below the cross.
2. Click in the display area to position the
MOB. The Oscar symbol is dropped at
the selected position with the range and
bearing from the CCRP to the Oscar
displayed and the Start button at the
bottom of the window active.
Note that the MOB operation is not
active until the Start button is pressed.

6-66 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

3. If the MOB event was not started using the top-level button the
Start button at the bottom of the window will be active and must be
pressed to start the event.
To turn off the MOB event, click on the Cancel Oscar button. An Action
Required window appears prompting to confirm cancellation of the MOB
Event, click the Yes button to confirm. The Oscar symbol is removed from
the display, the top-level MOB button changes from orange to the standard
colour and the button in the Man Overboard menu changes from Cancel
Oscar to Start.

65900010 6-67
Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Navigation Marks
Navigation marks (Nav Marks) are generated by the operator to
indicate positions of interest.
The Nav Mark is displayed as an orange information note symbol
in a square box. When a Nav Mark is created and viewed in Chart
mode a vertical orange line with a dot at the end is displayed below the
symbol box. When a Nav Mark is created and viewed in Radar Maps mode
only the information note symbol in a square box is displayed.
Nav Marks can be created in both Standby and Transmit modes, all
presentation modes and range scales.
To create a Nav Mark do the following:
1. Right click anywhere within the video
circle, a semi-transparent window
appears at the position selected.
2. Select Create Nav Mark from the
window. A Nav mark is created at the
selected position.
To view data on the Nav Mark do the following:
1. Right click on the Nav Mark and select
Query Chart from the semi-transparent
window. The Chart Query window opens
on the display.
2. In the Results tab click on the Point +
box and then click on Navigation Mark
in the directory tree. The nav mark is
highlighted on the chart display with a
red circle and a red transparent
background fill. The
Description area of the
window shows Lat/Lon
position information and all
other data relevant to the
Nav Mark.
3. To de-select the nav mark click on the
Clear Query button. The highlight is
removed from the nav mark and the
data in the Description field is cleared.

6-68 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

For further information on Chart Query see Query Results and Query
Options in Chapter 12, Charts.
To delete a Nav Mark do the following:
1. Right click on the Nav Mark, a semi-
transparent window appears at the
position selected.
2. Select the Delete Navigation Mark
from the window. The Nav Mark is
deleted from the system without
confirmation.

65900010 6-69
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Chapter 7 Alerts
The alert management system generates
alerts related to displayed information or
equipment malfunction.
In addition, prompts (permanent and/or
temporary) are raised to communicate
information that does not necessarily require operator action.
The Alerts menu includes a Mute Settings facility, which enables the
operator to either change the length of time the alert buzzer is temporarily
muted, or mute the alert buzzer for an unlimited period of time.

Alerts
There are three types of alert priority:
 Alarms
 Warnings
 Cautions
Alarms and warnings are indicated visually and audibly, via the alert
buzzer. Cautions are only indicated visually.
The following conditions apply to the three different types of alerts:
1. Alarms are conditions that require immediate attention or user
action.
2. Warnings indicate changed conditions requiring attention for
reasons of precaution which are not immediately hazardous but
may become so if no decision or action is taken.
3. Cautions indicate a condition which does not warrant an alarm or
warning, but still require attention and consideration of the
condition.
Alerts are initially displayed on the Alert Status Indicator, from where they
can be acknowledged. An unacknowledged alert displays as a flashing
colour whereas an acknowledged, but still existing alert, displays a
constant colour, see Alert Status Indicator.
Alerts are raised until they are acknowledged, and the visual indications of
individual alerts remain until the fault has been corrected, when the alert
system automatically resets to normal operating condition. Alerts can only
be cancelled if the condition causing them has been dealt with successfully.
For some alerts, the system may provide the acknowledgement
automatically and clear the alert.

65900010 7-1
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

For a list of alerts (alarms, warnings and cautions) which can be raised by
VisionMaster and any remedial action to be taken, see List of Alarms,
Warnings and Cautions.
Alert Sources
There are two types of alert sources: internal and external. Internal alerts
are generated by the VisionMaster FT. External alerts are those relayed to
the Central Alert Management (CAM) by external sources.
Internal alerts are displayed and acknowledged through the display menu,
see Alert Display. External alerts are displayed and acknowledged through
the CAM watch mode, see Central Alert Management.

Prompts
Prompts appear directly underneath the Alerts field. A Prompts window
listing permanent and temporary prompts (when they appear) may be
accessed either by clicking on the Prompts field, or Prompts in the Alerts
menu, see Prompts.
In the event of a picture freeze the prompt field will freeze on a prompt or
system time, see Picture Freeze.

7-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Alert Status Indicator

The Alert Status Indicator displays the
current alert status of the system. The
display of alerts is prioritised; with active
alarms first, followed by warnings and then cautions.
The Alert Status Indicator's background colour is based on the state and
status of active alerts in the system. If no active alerts exist, the
background colour shows the system background colour and the message
No Alerts is displayed. If unacknowledged alerts exist, the background
colour changes to a flashing colour based on the highest unacknowledged
alert priority, these are:
 red for alarm
 yellow for warnings and cautions
You can acknowledge alerts in one of two ways:
1. either by clicking on the message in the Alert Status Indicator; or
2. by clicking on the ACK ALARM button on the control panel.
The alert is removed from the Alert Status Indicator and, if other
unacknowledged alerts exist, is replaced by the next in order of priority.
The alert remains listed (non flashing) in the Alerts Display list as long as
the condition exists.
When all alerts have been acknowledged but any are still active, the
background colour will be determined by the highest priority active alert
category.
To view details on alerts right click on the Alert Status Indicator, the Alert
Display menu appears.

65900010 7-3
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Alert Status
There are three types of alert status:
 Unacknowledged Alerts
When an alert is detected, that alert appears with a flashing
background colour in the Alert Status Indicator and the Alert
display. If more than one alert condition exists, the alert with the
highest priority is shown. The alert continues to be shown in the
indicator until it is either:
 acknowledged;
 automatically cleared; or
 replaced with either an alert of higher priority, or a more
recent alert of the same priority.
If the internal buzzer is enabled, the buzzer will only sound when
there are unacknowledged alarms or warnings.
 Acknowledged Alerts
If an alert has been acknowledged, but the fault has not been
corrected, the message Alarms Present or Warnings Present is
displayed in non-flashing red or yellow in the Alert Status Indicator.
The acknowledged alert remains listed with the text displayed in
coloured lettering in the Alerts Display area, unless the Hide
Acknowledged box has been ticked.
 No Alerts
If there are no alerts the caption No Alerts is displayed in the Alert
Status Indicator and the system background colour is shown.

7-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Alert Display
To view a list of all the currently active
alerts, including alerts acknowledged on
the status indicator, click on the Alerts in
the menu list, or right click on the Alert
Status Indicator.
The Alerts window shows the current alert
state and provides a description and a
means of acknowledging alerts.
Alerts are divided into Alarms, Warnings
and Cautions. Alarms are messages that require immediate attention or
user action, whereas Warnings and Cautions indicate less critical
conditions. The most recent alerts are shown at the top of the list.
You can acknowledge alerts either by clicking on the selected alert in the
list, or by clicking on the ACK ALARM button on the control panel.
The alerts list will change indication as follows:
 An unacknowledged Alarm whose condition is active will appear
with a flashing red background.
 An unacknowledged Warning or Caution whose condition is active
will appear with a flashing yellow background.
 An acknowledged alert whose condition is still active will remain
listed in the Alert Display window and will be displayed with
coloured lettering (red for Alarms, yellow for Warnings and
Cautions).
 An unacknowledged alert whose condition is no longer active will
appear with a flashing grey background.
 An acknowledged alert whose condition is no longer active is
removed from the Alert Display window.

65900010 7-5
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Viewing Alert Details

To view more information on a particular alert right click on the text. Details
of the alert, including activation date, time and description are shown below
the list.

Hide Acknowledged
To hide acknowledged alerts tick the Hide
Acknowledged check box. Acknowledged
alerts are hidden from the display, although if
the alert condition is still present the message
Alarms Present or Warnings Present is shown
in red in the message field. To show all
acknowledged alerts, untick the Hide
Acknowledged check box.

Sort by Group
To arrange alerts into groups tick the Sort by
Group check box.
The system lists alerts in their relevant group
(e.g. Targets, Routes etc.), with the exception of
emergency alerts, and prioritises the alerts
within each group as Distress, Primary and
Secondary (see List of Alarms, Warnings and
Cautions). System alerts are always shown as
the highest priority, regardless of the type of
alert in the system group.
In addition to acknowledging individual alerts the
operator can acknowledge an entire group by
clicking on the group title.

7-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Alert Buzzer
An alert buzzer is physically located in the LCD monitor.
The buzzer is connected to one of the following types of discrete
outputs to the LCD monitor:
 PCIO
 Basic Control Panel
 Labjack
 Serial Port
The buzzer will give a beep continuously when an unacknowledged Alarm
is active. The buzzer will sound three short beeps when an
unacknowledged Warning is active. An unacknowledged Caution will not
activate the buzzer.
The buzzer can be temporarily muted by clicking on the icon to the right of
the Alert Status Indicator. When the buzzer is muted a red diagonal line
appears through the icon. To re-enable the buzzer click on the icon again,
the red line is removed.
The length of time that the buzzer is muted is defined in Mute Settings and
can be set to between one minute and 999 minutes. The system will
automatically re-enable the buzzer once the mute length period has
elapsed. The mute length may also be set to Unlimited, if Unlimited is
selected the buzzer is permanently muted when the buzzer icon is clicked.

The mute does not prevent the buzzer sounding if an emergency

alarm is generated, e.g. Backup Navigator Alarm.

65900010 7-7
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Alerts on a Multi-node System

Alert management enables system features to designate alerts that they
generate as either `System' or `Local'.
In general, an alert generated on one node will be displayed and audibly
announced on all nodes in the system. These are known as system alerts.
When the operator acknowledges an alert on a node it is shown as
acknowledged on all nodes in the system.
Some alerts are displayed and audibly announced only on the node that
generated it (unless the alert is configured to be displayed on all nodes at
commissioning). These are known as local alerts and relate to conditions
that impact only the node that generated the alert. Examples of local alerts
include: display warnings, computer hardware problems,
authorization/licensing errors, database connection errors, transceiver and
video errors, target alerts, etc.

Alerts cannot be acknowledged if Station In Control (SIC) is

enabled and your node is assigned as `Never In Control', see
Appendix A `Station In Control’ in Chapter 3, Basic Operation of
Radar.

Alerts on a Client/Server Radar System

On a Client/Server Radar (CSR) system all alerts raised on a Server node
are defined as System alerts.
Alerts raised on Client nodes retain their Local/System definitions, as
described previously.
The table on page 7-31 `Client/Server Radar Alerts’ lists the alerts that are
generated due to failure conditions specific to a CSR . Some alerts listed in
this table are replicated on standard VisionMaster FT systems (see List of
Alarms, Warnings and Cautions) however the possible causes of the alerts
will be different and are described in the table.
CSR alerts are displayed on all Clients networked to the Server.

7-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Alert Behaviour specific to Radar

Alert management behaves slightly differently, dependent on whether your
VMFT is an exclusively ECDIS system13 or a Radar/Chart Radar system14
The following describes the alert behaviour for primary sensors on a
Radar/Chart Radar system (for a list of primary sensors applicable to a
radar system refer to `Primary Sensors on Radar Systems’ in Chapter 4
Sensor Management).
 If a primary sensor becomes unusable when the sensor is currently
selected the alert generated is a warning.
 If the primary sensor becomes unusable when the sensor is not
selected the alert generated is a caution.
 When a sensor that is not a primary sensor becomes unusable a
caution is generated.
If your VMFT is using a Track Control sub system then the following sensor
alerts will be generated as alarms if the sensor is currently in use:
 True Heading
 Speed Through Water
 Position

13
An ECDIS System is one in which none of the nodes on a Multi Node system permit a
Radar watch mode.
14
A Radar/Chart Radar system is one in which at least one node in a Multi Node system
or CSR system has been configured to permit a Radar or Chart Radar watch mode.

65900010 7-9
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Prompts
Prompts appear in the field directly underneath the Alert Status Indicator
and can be either temporary or permanent.

Permanent prompts
Permanent prompts denote a state or mode of operation, provide
instruction to the operator, or may display settings.

Under normal operation the permanent prompt field displays the current
system date and time in either UTC or Local (see Time Management) when
there are no other permanent prompts to display. If other permanent
prompts are to be displayed the permanent prompt field updates to display
each prompt, including the date and time, every few seconds.

Temporary Prompts
Temporary prompts are general system responses to a user interaction and
are displayed briefly for a commissioned time period, usually around 5
seconds. When a temporary prompt is active a pale coloured background
field appears below the permanent prompt field with the prompt message.

Prompts Window
A prompts window listing all the permanent
prompts and temporary prompts, as they occur.
The window is divided into Active Prompts and
Recent Prompts.
Active prompts list all permanent prompts on the
node, together with a hyperlink `Standard (or
Basic) Chart Display', which links to the
relevant page in the Help Guide.
Recent prompts list temporary prompts, with the
time, in parenthesis, that the prompt was
generated. These prompts are listing for
approximately 90 seconds and then removed
from the column.

7-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Mute Settings
The Mute Settings sub menu enables the operator to adjust the length of
time, in minutes, that the alert buzzer is temporarily muted. It also enables
the operator to mute the buzzer for an unlimited period of time.
To change the mute settings do the following:
1. To change the mute time uncheck the
Mute length unlimited check box (if
ticked) and click in the Mute Length:
field, the value changes to green
(editable).
2. Move the trackball left to decrease the time or right to increase the
time. The mute time range may be set between 1 minute and 999
minutes. The default is 5 minutes.
3. Left click in the field to accept the value.
4. To mute the buzzer for an unlimited
period of time tick the Mute length
unlimited check box. The Mute
Length field displays Unlimited as
read-only.

If the mute length is set higher than the default time, or the mute
length is set to Unlimited, a Long Mute Length Warning is
displayed in the Alerts field.

65900010 7-11
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Central Alert Management

If your VisionMaster FT (VMFT) is configured as a Total Watch, the option
for a node to be selected as a Central Alert Management (CAM) is
available. In this role, alerts from the bridge and other equipment are sent
to the VMFT internal alert system. This system acts as a functional alert
interface to any equipment relaying alerts, which enables the operator to
acknowledge and cancel the alerts centrally.

The CAM uses the VMFT alert output to forward unacknowledged alerts
(alarms, warnings and cautions) to all nodes on the system, and to other
locations of the ship as necessary.
The alarms and warnings are arranged in groups, as far as practicable,
except emergency alarms. The following types of alerts are not grouped:
 Faults requiring speed or power reduction
 Automatic shutdown of machinery
 Steering gear alerts.
A group of alerts may be acknowledged at the same time. Alert priorities
include Emergency Alarm. Alarm, Warning and Caution, as described in
List of Alarms, Warnings and Cautions. Alerts are sorted by these priorities
and by time within each priority group. The indication of alert status
(unacknowledged or acknowledged) is the same as described previously in
Alert Status and Alert Display.
The CAM displays a warning when NAVTEX messages are received via a
serial connection on the client node.
The CAM includes Shutdown function buttons (Shutdown or Restart
System) at the bottom of the window.

7-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Picture Freeze
A picture freeze represents a failure to update the User Interface on an
operational display. If a picture freeze occurs the permanent prompt field
will freeze on the currently displayed prompt, or the system data and time if
no prompts are displayed, see Prompts.
If the VisionMaster FT includes a PCIO, an alert beep will sound denoting
an internal error, in addition to the prompt freeze. If the system returns to
normal operation then the prompt field will continue to cycle between
prompts and system time, but an internal error alert will be generated.
In the event of a picture freeze it is advisable to create a system fault report
(for details see Report) and to then restart the system, see Shutdown.

65900010 7-13
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

List of Alarms, Warnings and Cautions

The Alerts which are raised by the system, and appear in the Alert Status
Indicator and in the Alerts Display, are given in three tables, see pages 7-
15 to 7-30. The tables list all alerts, separated as emergency alarm
(Backup Navigator), alarms, warnings and cautions.
Sensor data types that have been selected for primary navigation in the
CCRS 15 Alert Reporter of the Configuration tool and are currently selected
for navigation will always generate warnings if the data becomes
unusable. For information on the behaviour of other sensor alerts refer to
Alert Behaviour Specific to Radar.
Alerts raised on a Client/Server Radar (CSR) system may have different
sets of failure causes from a standard VisionMaster FT. For a list of CSR
alerts see pages 7-31 to 7-32.

15
Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) data includes the various types of data that
describe the state of the ship, and which are usually received via sensors. Many of these
types describe a characteristic of the ship itself (for example, the ship's heading, or the
geodetic position of the ship, etc.), while others describe a characteristic of something
associated with the ship, such as `Rudder Angle' or `Propeller Rpm and Pitch'.

7-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Alarm Description Owner

Backup Navigator
Description text set at runtime. System
(Emergency Alarm)
Communication with the AIS unit has failed. AIS targets are not
AIS Communication Failed Targets
available.
AIS Interface Error No AIS messages received Targets
Possible anchor drag detected. The ship is farther from the anchor drop
Anchor drag Anchoring
location than the specified anchor chain length allows.
Not all nodes are running the same version of the application, which
App Version Mismatch may cause unpredictable system behavior. Ensure that all nodes have System
the same version installed, and restart the system.
Approaching Route End Approaching the end of the route. Routes
Approaching Waypoint Approaching a waypoint on the external route. Routes
Authorization Failure The system is unauthorized System
Communication with the autopilot's master SCU has failed. The system
Autopilot Communication Failed Autopilot
may no longer be able to control the autopilot.
Autopilot Power Failure Power supplied to autopilot has failed. Autopilot
Autopilot Power Reduced Power level supplied to autopilot has been reduced. Autopilot
Blank sectors invalid Tracker - blank sectors failed to configure Radar
Bow Crossing Limit Target has infringed bow crossing limits. Targets
Chart Cautions Cautions found on the chart along the ship's present course. Charts
Chart Dangers Dangers found on the chart along the ship's present course. Charts
Chart Render Failure A chart render failure has been detected. Charts
Config File Mismatch Config File Mismatch System

65900010 7-15
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Alarm Description Owner

Config File Modified Config File Modified System
Control Panel Comms Communication with the control panel has failed. System
Course Criteria Violated A traffic monitored target violated course criteria for a zone Targets
Course Difference Difference limit between heading and route bearing exceeded. Routes
CPA/TCPA Limit Target has infringed CPA/TCPA limits. Targets
Critical Point Abeam Ship is abeam a Critical Point. Routes
Critical Point Approach Critical Point is now within the specified time or distance. Routes
Critical Point Off Route Critical point is too far off the route. Routes
Distribution Service Error Distribution service is not running System
Entry Criteria Violated A traffic monitored target violated entry criteria for a zone Targets
Difference limit between required turn rate and planned turn rate
Excessive Turn Rate Required Routes
exceeded.
Exit Criteria Violated A traffic monitored target violated exit criteria for a zone. Targets
External Targets Comms No external targets received on port. Targets
A potential global thread delay has been detected; verify this by
Global Thread Delay Detected System
checking the periodic thread delay log file.
Positions on this chart are inaccurate, because this chart does not
Inaccurate Chart Charts
provide a mapping to standard WGS-84 coordinates.
I/O Device Unavailable I/O Device Unavailable System
Incompatible PCIO firmware The PCIO firmware required is version 1.04 or later PCIO
Incorrect Compass Ratio. Configured compass ratio is incorrect for current board type. PCIO
An unrecoverable internal error has occurred, please restart the
Internal Error System
equipment

7-16 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Alarm Description Owner

Interswitch Comms The interswitch communications has failed Radar
Interswitch Model Conflict The interswitch model conflicts with the configured model Radar

Invalid Datum In Use Datum in use is not WGS84. Charts

Lost Connection Lost connection to Distribution Service System

Lost Echo Reference The Echo Reference Target is lost Targets
Multiple Master SCUs The autopilot has identified multiple master SCUs. Autopilot
Next Turn EBL Comms No messages received from external VMS system. Routes
There are no CAM supporting product types in the system that are in
No CAM Watch mode System
CAM watch mode.
Station In
No SIC There is no Station In Control
Control
No Station In Control for a period greater than the configured SIC Station In
No SIC Timeout
timeout Control
A mariner created object in view is not being displayed because its type
Object Type Not Found Display
cannot be found in the type library.
Off Track Off-track distance exceeds the route's limit. Routes
PCIO Reset The PCIO has rebooted PCIO
PCIO USB Comms The PCIO USB communications has failed PCIO
Playback Suspended Playback files failed to write to storage device Playback
This node is currently running as a stand-alone node due to network
connectivity problems. The Connection Status menu provides a 'Leave
Safe Mode Activated System
Safe Mode' button to restore normal network communication, after the
problem has been resolved.

65900010 7-17
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Alarm Description Owner

Sonar Communication Error Communications with the sonar system has failed Sonar
Sonar Returns Detected Sonar return detected within safety region and above safety depth Sonar
Sonar System Error The sonar system has reported an error Sonar
Target Anchor Drift Target out of the anchor watch limit circle. Targets
Targets Full The system cannot allocate any more target numbers. Targets
Track Control Stopped Track control stopped. Routes
Tracking Failure SC tracking data not present Targets
Tracking Unavailable The heading data used for tracking is either invalid or unavailable. Targets
Turn Not Acknowledged Course change indicator not acknowledged. Routes
Turning unit selection failed Tracker - turning unit selection failed Radar
Turn Radius Modified The ordered turn radius has been automatically changed. Autopilot
Vigilance Operator is not alert. System

7-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Warning Description Owner

3D Chart Suppressed 3D Chart not supported for this region Display
Active AIS Full Activated AIS Target Limit Reached (max 40) Targets
Actual Speed Value Error Actual Speed value is above the threshold value PBN
Actual Fuel usage Value
Actual Fuel usage value is above the threshold value PBN
Error
Track control is no longer computing a set and drift correction due to the
Adjust for Set and Drift
degraded state of one or more of the following data types: True Heading, Autopilot
Failure
Water Speed, Position, Rate of Turn.
AFC Mode Error The AFC mode of the transceiver is in conflict Radar
AIS Degraded AIS degraded because of dead reckoning. Targets
AIS disabled because Ownship position is being dead reckoned or Ownship
AIS Disabled Targets
heading data is unusable.
AIS Exceeds Capacity AIS Target Limit Reached (max 240) Targets
The maximum number of AIS targets and AIS objects has been reached
AIS Full Targets
(240).
AIS Unusable AIS interface integrity failure Targets
AIS: Integrity Error Alarm generated by AIS hardware Targets
Approaching Waypoint Approaching a waypoint on the external route. Routes
The system has detected that ARCS Skipper permits are installed. Only
ARCS Skipper Not Supported Charts
ARCS Navigator permits are supported for operation with ARCS RNC charts
The system cannot generate speed orders that will cause the ship to arrive at
Arrival Time Not Achievable Routes
the desired arrival time and are within the monitored route's speed limits.
Autopilot Interface Failure An interface to the autopilot has failed. Autopilot
AZ Entry Target has entered an Acquisition Zone Targets

65900010 7-19
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Warning Description Owner

AZ Full Acquisition Zone Full Targets
The number of azimuths per revolution has varied from its nominal value of
Azimuth Error Radar
4096
Bypassed Critical Point(s) One or more critical points have been bypassed by temp route. Routes
No chart displayed at the ship's position, but a chart is available for the ship's
Chart Available Charts
position.
Chart subscription service will expire in less than 60 days. Contact your chart
Chart permissions agent or distributor for a subscription renewal on your World database. Refer Charts
to Chart Permissions.
Chart permissions expiring Chart subscription service will expire. Charts
A problem was encountered during the activation of charts copied from a
Charts Activation Error remote node. To correct the problem, the copy operation must be performed Charts
again.
CMAP eToken Mismatch Insert Correct eToken And Restart The System Charts
Colors Not Approved The colors are potentially unsafe. Display
Course Over Ground
Sensor Course Over Ground integrity. Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Critical Point Abeam Ship is abeam a Critical Point. Routes
Critical Point Approach Critical Point is now within the specified time or distance. Routes
Critical Point Off Route Critical point is too far off the route. Routes
Data Log disabled Unable to log to DataLog database. System
Database Connection Database Connection Has Failed System
Database is initializing. During a brief initialization period updates to Routes,
Database Initializing PI Lines, GoTo locations, Radar maps, and Manual chart updates are System
temporarily disallowed.

7-20 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Warning Description Owner

The node(s) listed are switched off or not connected to the network. Any
changes made while nodes are not connected will result in their data being
Database Node Missing overwritten with the current database when they reconnect. This potentially System
affects Routes, PI Lines, GoTo locations, Radar maps, and Manual chart
updates.
Database server not found: changes made to local database may be lost
Database Server System
when reconnecting. Exporting a backup of changes is recommended.
Database synchronization has failed. Use Database Diagnostics to re-
Database Synchronization System
synchronize.
Some local changes lost when reconnecting. Changes may need to be
Database Updates System
imported from back-up.
Date and Time Degraded/
Sensor Date and Time Integrity Sensors
Unusable
Depth Below Keel
Sensor Depth Below Keel Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Depth Below Transducer
Sensor Depth Below Transducer Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Depth Below Waterline
Sensor Depth Below Waterline Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Dynamic Licensing Report The CMAP Dynamic Licensing report is almost due. Charts must be reported
Charts
Near Due by {0}.
Dynamic Licensing Report CMAP Dynamic Licensing has been disabled because the Dynamic Licensing
Charts
Expired report is past due
Dynamic Licensing CMAP Dynamic Licensing has been disabled because there are no chart
Charts
Insufficient Credits credits remaining
Dynamic Licensing Low
CMAP Dynamic Licensing has a low number of chart credits remaining Charts
Credits
Error Finding Dangers An error finding dangers on the chart has been detected. Charts
65900010 7-21
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Warning Description Owner

External Route Degraded/
External route data from the selected source is degraded. Routes
Unusable
Heading Joystick Interface
An interface to the heading joystick has failed Autopilot
Failure
Heading Marker Error A heading marker has not been received for at least 10 seconds Radar
Interswitch Request Failed The Interswitch has failed to respond to a request. Radar
Local Time Offset
Sensor Local Time Offset Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Long Mute Length The mute length setting is longer than recommended or is unlimited. System
Lost Target Target is lost Targets
Turn Rate Order lower than minimum recommended. Monitor steering closely.
Low Turn Rate Order Increase the turn rate order to improve steering effectiveness in this mode, Autopilot
especially if high winds are influencing the vessel.
Low Video Level The video level has dropped below the minimum threshold Radar
Magnetic Course Over
Sensor Magnetic Course Over Ground Integrity Sensors
Ground Degraded/Unusable
Magnetic Heading
Sensor Magnetic Heading Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Magnetic Sensor Heading
Sensor Magnetic Sensor Heading Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Maneuver Time Time to trial maneuver is less than 30sec. Targets
Mariner Object Database Is The mariner object database has corrupt data for one or more mariner objects
Display
Corrupt and these mariner objects are being ignored.
Mariner Objects Database Mariner objects are currently unavailable due to database operation(s) that
Alarms
Errors failed to execute

7-22 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Warning Description Owner

Bad Data: The LCD monitor failed to acknowledge a command. Use the
Monitor Data Display
external knob to manually adjust backlight brightness.
Multiple Interfaces On SCU A switched SCU is communicating over multiple interfaces Autopilot
Man Over Board is active with no valid set and drift data. Oscar's position is
No Set and Drift for MOB System
the drop location and will not be adjusted for set and drift
PBN System Error PBN Enterprise Server is not running PBN
Port Output Too Slow A given port cannot output the requested data fast enough System
Position Unusable Sensor Position Unusable Sensors
Position Uncorroborated Sensor Position Uncorroborated Sensors
Target vectors and own ship vectors are water stabilized but the predicted
Predicted Path Mismatch Targets
path is always ground stabilized.
Target vectors and own ship vectors are water stabilized but the predicted
Predicted Ship Mismatch Targets
ship is always ground stabilized.
Target vectors and own ship vectors are water stabilized but the predicted
Predicted Vector Mismatch Ownship
vector is always ground stabilized.
Pulse Length Error The pulse length state of the transceiver is in conflict Radar
Route Leg Skipped The ship has skipped one or more legs of the route plan. Routes
SC PCIO Comms The SC PCIO communications has failed Radar
Slave Only Display Conflict The interswitch and config file slave only displays are incompatible Radar
Slave Only Tx Conflict The interswitch and config file slave only transceivers are incompatible Radar
Speed Over Ground
Sensor Speed Over Ground Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Standby / Transmit Error The standby transmit state of the transceiver is in conflict Radar

65900010 7-23
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Warning Description Owner

The autopilot has transferred steering control to this system. Control of the
Steering Control Received heading command and the ability to activate track control is available at one or Autopilot
more stations.
This system has relinquished steering control. Autopilot or another device or
Steering Control Relinquished Autopilot
system will control steering until control is transferred back to this system.
System Tracks Full Tracking the system maximum number of targets Targets
Temporary Authorization System is only temporarily authorized System
Test targets failed Turning on/off moveable test targets failed Targets
Time Degraded/Unusable Sensor Time Integrity Sensors
TM Reset The system will reset the ship's plotted position momentarily. Display
There is a discrepancy between the number of top units configured on this
Top Unit Conflict Radar
node and the rest of the system
Track Control Stopped Track control stopped. Routes
Track control is providing heading orders based on manual water speed.
Track Control Using Man
Track keeping performance may be degraded if the entered speed does not Autopilot
STW
match the actual speed.
Tracks Full Tracking maximum number of targets Targets
Transceiver BITE There is an error reported by the transceiver BITE Radar
Transceiver Comms The communications from the selected transceiver have failed Radar
Transceiver Control Loss Mastership of the Transceiver was taken by another operator Radar
Trigger Error The trigger has dropped below the minimum threshold Radar
True Heading
Sensor True Heading Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable

7-24 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Warning Description Owner

Turning Unit speed not Optimal operation with turning unit speed faster than {0} RPM requires a
Radar
optimal hardware update of the scan converter card
Video Failed Radar video cannot be displayed. Radar
The system will not provide messages to indicate planned course changes
because 'Wheelover Notifications' is switched off on the 'Monitor Route' menu.
Wheelover Notifications Off Routes
On systems with track control available, the notifications are automatically
switched on whenever Track mode is engaged

65900010 7-25
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Caution Description Owner

Absolute Humidity
Sensor Absolute Humidity Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Aggregated Generic Data
Degraded/Unusable Sensor Aggregated Generic Data Integrity Sensors

Active AIS Almost Full Activated AIS Target Limit Almost Reached (95%) Targets
AIS Almost Full AIS Target Limit Almost Reached (95%) Targets
Aggregated Generic Data
Degraded/Unusable Sensor Aggregated Generic Data Integrity Sensors

AIS MMSI Mismatch Expected AIS transceiver MMSI {0}, actual VDO MMSI {1} Targets
Attitude Unusable Sensor Attitude Integrity Sensors
Bow Ground Speed
Sensor Bow Ground Speed Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Change in Distance
Sensor Change in Distance Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Datum Offset Degraded/Unusable Sensor Datum Offset Integrity Sensors
Dew Point Degraded/Unusable Sensor Dew Point Integrity Sensors
Distance To Quay Unusable Sensor Distance To Quay Integrity Sensors
Docking Speeds Unusable Sensor Speed And Distance Integrity Sensors
Engine Mass Based Fuel
Consumption Rate Sensor Engine Mass Based Fuel Consumption Rate Value Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Engine Power Degraded/Unusable Sensor Engine Power Integrity Sensors
Engine Propulsion Power
Sensor Engine Propulsion Power Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable

7-26 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Caution Description Owner

Engine RPM Degraded/Unusable Sensor Engine RPM Integrity Sensors
Engine Speed Degraded/Unusable Sensor Engine Speed Integrity Sensors
Engine Thrust Value
Sensor Engine Thrust Value Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Engine Torque Value
Sensor Engine Torque Value Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Engine Total Revolutions
Degraded/Unusable Sensor Engine Total Revolutions Value Integrity Sensors

Engine Total Energy Value

Sensor Engine Total Energy Value Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Equipment Malfunction Equipment malfunction detected on Alert Management Interface System
External Route
External route data from the selected source is degraded. Routes
Degraded/Unusable
Fuel Consumption Corrected
Sensor Fuel Consumption Corrected Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Fuel Consumption Observed
Sensor Fuel Consumption Observed Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Fuel Density Degraded/Unusable Sensor Fuel Density Integrity Sensors
Fuel Heat Value
Sensor Fuel Heat Value Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Fuel Temperature
Sensor Fuel Temperature Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Generic Data Degraded/Unusable Sensor Generic Data Integrity Sensors

65900010 7-27
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Caution Description Owner

Generic Data with Units
Sensor Generic Data with Units Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Magnetic Course Over Ground
Sensor Magnetic Course Over Ground Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Magnetic Deviation
Sensor Magnetic Deviation Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Magnetic Set and Drift
Sensor Magnetic Set and Drift Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Magnetic Variation
Sensor Magnetic Variation Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Due to maximum latitude being exceeded, system inaccuracies may
develop and functionality may be disabled. Inaccuracies generally
become more serious as own ship travels toward the pole after
Maximum Latitude Exceeded System
exceeding the maximum latitude. Do not rely on the system as the
primary means of navigation when operating beyond the maximum
latitude.
A low value for look-ahead time or distance has resulted in a small
safety region for detecting chart dangers on own ship's course. This
Minimal Safety Region Charts
may not provide adequate time to take action if a danger is detected.
Use the 'Chart Dangers' menu to increase look-ahead if necessary.
PBN Current License Expiration The PBN current license will expire in: X days PBN
PBN Weather License Expiration The PBN weather license will expire in: X days PBN
Pitch Degraded/Unusable Sensor Pitch Integrity Sensors
Pressure Ground
Sensor Pressure Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Propeller RPM and Pitch
Sensor Propeller RPM and Pitch Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable

7-28 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Caution Description Owner

Propulsion Equipment Data
Sensor Propulsion Equipment Data Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Rate of Turn Degraded/Unusable Sensor Rate of Turn Integrity Sensors
Relative Humidity
Sensor Relative Humidity Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Relative Wind With Relative
Sensor Relative Wind With Relative Direction Integrity Sensors
Direction Degraded/Unusable
Roll Degraded/Unusable Sensor Roll Integrity Sensors
Rudder Angle Degraded/Unusable Sensor Rudder Angle Integrity Sensors
Rudder Equipment Data Degraded
Sensor Rudder Equipment Data Integrity Sensors
Unusable
Safety Depth Shallow The chart's safety depth is set shallower than the ship's max draft Charts
Safety Height Low The chart's safety height is set lower than the ship's height. Charts
Some sensor data is unusable or degraded. See the Sensor Status
Sensor Data Fault Sensors
(under System, Diagnostics) for more details.
Sensor Data Fix Uncorroborated The data used to fix a sensor is not corroborated with external sensors Sensors
Set and Drift Degraded/Unusable Sensor Set and Drift Integrity Sensors
Ship Overall Efficiency Corrected
Sensor Ship Overall Efficiency Corrected Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Ship Overall Efficiency Observed
Sensor Ship Overall Efficiency Observed Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Ship Total Fuel Consumption Rate
Sensor Ship Total Fuel Consumption Rate Value Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable

65900010 7-29
Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Caution Description Owner

Ship Total Power
Sensor Ship Total Power Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Ship Total Propulsion Power
Sensor Ship Total Propulsion Power Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Specific Fuel Rate Corrected
Sensor Specific Fuel Rate Corrected Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Specific Fuel Rate Observed
Sensor Specific Fuel Rate Observed Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Stern Ground Speed
Sensor Stern Ground Speed Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
System Tracks Almost Full Tracking 95% of the system maximum number of targets Targets
Temperature Degraded/Unusable Sensor Temperature Integrity Sensors
Total Set and Drift
Sensor Total Set and Drift Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Tracks Almost Full Tracking 95% maximum number of targets
Transducer Data
Sensor Transducer Data Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
True Wind With Relative Direction
Sensor True Wind with relative direction integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
True Wind With True Direction
Sensor True Wind With True Direction Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable
Water Temperature
Sensor Water Temperature Integrity Sensors
Degraded/Unusable

7-30 65900010
 Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alerts

Client/Server Radar Alerts

Alarm Description Possible Causes
1. Client/Server channel connection unavailable.
The communications from the
Transceiver Comms 2. Server to PCIO cable disconnection.
selected transceiver have failed
3. Server to Transceiver comms disconnection.
The PCIO USB communications
PCIO USB Comms Server to PCIO USB cable disconnection.
has failed
The interswitch communications
Interswitch Comms Server Interswitch failure
has failed
The SC PCIO communications has
SC PCIO Comms Server to PCIO cable disconnection.
failed
The heading data used for tracking
Tracking Unavailable Server to PCIO cable disconnection.
is either invalid or unavailable.
The Transceiver is unavailable for
Transceiver Unavailable Client/Server channel connection unavailable.
selection from the Client node
Sensor Alarms Sensor alarms have been raised. PCIO serial port disconnection for sensor input.
Server Connection Communication with server has
Terminated been terminated. 1. Client/Server channel connection unavailable.
2. Server to PCIO cable disconnection.
The connection to the server has 3. Server to Transceiver comms disconnection.
Server Failure
been lost.

65900010 7-31
 Alerts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Warning Description Possible Causes

1. Client/Server channel connection unavailable.
A heading marker has not been
Heading Marker Error 2. Server to PCIO cable disconnection.
received for at least 10 seconds
3. Server to Transceiver comms disconnection.
A Client node has unsuccessfully attempted to change a
Client/Transceiver connection at the Interswitch menu.
Interswitch Request Failed The Interswitch request failed.
Usually because two or more Clients have requested
control of the same transceiver.
Low Video Level The video level has dropped below
1. Client/Server channel connection unavailable.
the minimum threshold
2. PCIO to Transceiver video cable disconnection.
Video Data Watchdog Video data not received for a time. 3. Server to PCIO cable disconnection.

1. Client/Server channel connection unavailable.

2. Server to PCIO cable disconnection.
The standby transmit state of the
Standby / Transmit Error 3. Server to Transceiver comms disconnection.
transceiver is in conflict
4. Client/Server/Transceiver Standby/Transmit
mismatch.
A Client node has selected control of a Transceiver at
Mastership of the Transceiver was
Transceiver Control Loss the Interswitch menu. The Client node that is currently
taken by another operator.
Master will be set to Slave.
The currently selected transceiver
A Client node has changed the Client/Transceiver
has been forcibly changed from
Transceiver Changed connection by selecting a different interswitch setting in
<master/slave><Tx X> to
the Interswitch menu.
<master/slave> <Tx Y>

7-32 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Chapter 8 Routes
This section describes route editing, monitoring,
display and storage. The following topics are
covered.
 A description of Routes.
 Creating and editing routes graphically
on screen, see Creating a Route.
 Editing a route from a menu, see Edit
Route.
 Monitoring a validated route, see
Monitoring a Route.
 Calculating the time, speed and distance
between waypoints on a monitored route, see ETA Calculator.
 Specify the speed for a current leg and future legs on a monitored
route, see Route ETA.
 Specify an arrival time on a monitored route, the system then
calculates the speed required to achieve this arrival time, see
Required Speed.
 Specify variable speeds to be used on remaining segments of a
monitored route, see Speed Planning.
 View and edit SAR pattern routes, see Search and Rescue.
 Importing, exporting or backing up a route, see Importing and
Exporting a Route.
 Displaying route information, see Route Display Settings.
To access the Route sub menus select Routes from the Main Menu list.
The Routes sub menu list includes the following:
 Monitor Route
 ETA Calculator
 Route ETA
 Required Speed
 Speed Planning
 Edit Route
 Temp Route
 Search and Rescue

65900010 8-1
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

 File Import / Export

 Route Display Settings

The Routes sub menu list will also include External Route,
depending on system configuration. Refer to Chapter 1
`Configuration' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster Ship's Manual.

To view abbreviated data on the currently monitored route left click on the
Routes tab in the lower right of the screen, see Monitoring a Route Plan.

8-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Routes
A route consists of a number of defined
waypoints and adjoining lines (legs).
Waypoints16 are marked by circles; legs are
displayed as straight lines between two
waypoints. If a waypoint has both an
approaching leg and a departing leg, the
system automatically generates a turn at the
waypoint to indicate the planned path of the
ship. Wheel-over 17marks are represented by
lines, in the same colour as the route, which
cross the route track at a relatively short
distance before the turn begins. The distance
is configurable to be appropriate for the ship’s turning characteristics.
Waypoint legs are represented as thin dashed lines. The route plan is
represented as a thicker dashed line.
There are three types of routes:
 Internal Routes - An internal route can be created and saved at a
single VisionMaster FT console, or it may have been created on
another ship’s VisionMaster FT system and copied using the file
Import/Export function.
 External Routes - These are routes created by and stored at an
external device, which can then be transmitted and distributed to all
nodes on a network for display and monitoring, see External Routes
 Temporary Routes - A temporary route is a route that starts at own
ship’s CCRP, and can be edited quickly on the video circle, see
Temporary Route. Temporary routes are intended for one-time
manoeuvres and deviations from pre-planned internal routes. On
ships installed with VisionMaster FT track control, temporarily routes
can also be used to steer the ship onto a planned internal route
When a route has been imported or created all the details of the route can
be viewed and edited from the Edit Route sub menu. The saved internal
route can be monitored from the Monitor Route sub menu.

16
A geographical Lat/Lon location on a route indicating a significant event on a vessel’s
planned route (for example, course alteration point, calling in point, etc.).
17
The geographic location, represented by a line where rudder movement should be activated
to accomplish a planned turn. The wheel-over (WO) line may be displayed perpendicular to
the approaching track or parallel to the departing track of each turn.

65900010 8-3
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

It is advisable that routes created by the operator should be backed

up to an external device (usually a USB memory stick). This is
done from the File Import/Export window.

Multi-node Support
On a multi-node system internal routes are saved and retrieved from a
database18.
Routes saved to the database can also be loaded for monitoring from any
node on the network; only one route may be monitored in a multi-node
system. The same route monitoring information and monitored track is
displayed on all nodes, regardless of which node the operator began
monitoring.
Unlike a monitored route, a route that is opened for editing from the Edit
Route sub menu may be edited independently on each node. In addition,
an external route that is displayed on a particular node may be specified
independently for each node.

18
Persistent data is stored in a standard relational database management system (RDBMS)
format.

8-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Creating a Route
To create waypoints, you must first select Edit
Route, by selecting the Routes menu.
When Edit Route is selected waypoints can be
created anywhere within the video circle.

Adding a Waypoint
There are two screen options initially available
when adding waypoints:
 Add Waypoint; or
 Add Waypoint to Beginning.
If the waypoint to be added is the first in the
route, then either waypoint option can be
selected.

You can select to annotate routes on

screen (with waypoint and wheel-over
numbers, planned leg speed and leg
bearing data) by selecting the display options from Route Display
Settings.

To add a waypoint do the following:

1. With Edit Route displayed, right click in the video circle at the point
where the waypoint is to be placed. A semi-transparent window
appears at the point where the selection
was made.
2. Click on either the Add Waypoint or Add
Waypoint to Beginning field from the
window.

65900010 8-5
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Add Waypoint
Add Waypoint is selected where the insertion of a new waypoint is to be
made after the last waypoint, e.g. if the last waypoint on the route was W5
then the appended waypoint will be W6.
To add a waypoint to a route, do the following:
1. Select Add Waypoint from the semi-transparent window. The
screen shows a coloured circle at the cursor point when the
waypoint selection was made. To view the waypoint LAT/LON
position select the waypoint and click on the Edit Routes Waypoints
tab, see Editing a Route.
2. To add an additional waypoint, position the cursor at the required
point and select Add Waypoint again. An additional waypoint is
created.
When two or more waypoints are created a straight route leg is drawn
between each waypoint.
When three or more waypoints are created the system displays the turn
radius at each waypoint (except first and last) using the system default
radius, or a radius value modified by the user, see Editing a Route.
Add Waypoint to Beginning
Add Waypoint to Beginning is selected where the insertion of a new
waypoint is to be numbered before the first waypoint in the route e.g. the
new waypoint becomes W1 and all other waypoint references are moved
up one digit accordingly.
To add a waypoint to the beginning of a route, do the following:
1. Select Add Waypoint to Beginning from the window. The screen
shows a coloured circle at the cursor point when the waypoint
selection was made. To view the waypoint details click on the Edit
Routes Waypoints tab, see Editing a Route.
2. To add another waypoint before the first waypoint, position the
cursor at the required point and select Add Waypoint to
Beginning again. The new waypoint becomes W1 and the first
waypoint changes to W2.

8-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Inserting a Waypoint
A new waypoint can be inserted at a selected point along the straight
segments of a route leg. A wheel-over line is automatically created with the
waypoint.
To insert a new waypoint, do the following:
Right click on the route leg where you want to
insert a waypoint and select Insert New
Waypoint from the semi-transparent window. A
new waypoint is created at the selected route
leg position, together with a wheel-over line.
The wheelover line is a short orange line drawn across the route leg
immediately preceding a planned turn. The wheelover line moves in
accordance with any changes made to the waypoint location.
The distance between the wheelover and the start of the turn depends on
ship turning characteristics as configured in the system. Wheelovers are
always bow referenced, i.e. own ship will start the turn when its bow
reaches the wheelover line, NOT the ship’s CCRP.
The new waypoint and its wheel-over are automatically numbered
depending on their position on the route, e.g. if the waypoint is created on
the leg between waypoints W3 and W4 then the new waypoint becomes
W4 and all subsequent waypoints on the route are re-numbered
accordingly.
The position of inserted waypoints can be modified as described in
`Changing a Waypoint's Position'.

Changing a Waypoint's Position

A waypoint's position can be changed directly on screen, or by entering a
Lat/Lon value in the Waypoints tab folder.
To change a waypoint's position on screen, do the following:
1. Move the cursor over the waypoint to be edited. The cross hair
cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator.
2. Left click on a waypoint to select. When a waypoint is selected the
waypoint circle, adjoining legs and turn radii change to an editable
colour.
3. Hold down the left key and use the trackball to move the waypoint
around the screen; the route's attributes change as the waypoint is
moved. Release the left key when the waypoint is at the desired
location.

65900010 8-7
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To numerically specify an exact LAT/LON position for the waypoint refer to

Editing a Route Plan.

Delete a Waypoint
A waypoint's position can be deleted either directly on screen, or in the
Waypoints tab folder, see Edit Route.
To delete a waypoint from a route, do the following:
1. Right click on the waypoint to be
deleted and select Delete Waypoint
from the semi-transparent window.

When a waypoint is deleted all

waypoint references are adjusted
accordingly.

Changing a Waypoint's Turn Radius

A waypoint's turn radius can be manually changed, either on screen or in
the Waypoints tab folder, see Edit Route.

When the turn is created, its turn radius is set to either the previous
turn’s radius, or, if this is the first turn, it is set to the default radius.

To change a turn radius do the following:

1. Click on the small dot at the centre of the radius.
The cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow
indicator.
2. With the dot highlighted hold down the left key
and use the trackball to drag the radius dot to
the desired position. The route and wheel-over
lines are redrawn as the turn radius is changed.
3. The route data shown in the Waypoints tab folder also changes to
reflect the revised co-ordinates. The radius can also be adjusted
numerically, or as a result of numeric adjustment of the turn rate,
see Editing a Route.

8-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Editing a Route
Edit Route
The Edit Route sub-menu includes the following tab folders:
 Route
 Wpts (Waypoints)
 CPs (Critical Points)
 Dngrs (Dangers)
Internal routes are opened, saved, validated and managed from the Route
tab folder.
The Waypoints tab folder enables all the route's attributes (waypoint, leg
and turn data) to be edited.
The Critical Points tab folder allows the operator to insert alerts, in the form
of alarms and warnings, along a route.
The Dangers tab folder lists objects and areas that could endanger the
safety of own ship on the route currently opened from the Route tab.

The Dangers tab will only appear if Safety Checking has been
selected in the system configuration. Refer to Chapter 1
`Configuration' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.

65900010 8-9
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Route Tab Folder

Routes are managed from the Route tab folder
of the Edit Route sub-menu. The folder is
divided into the following areas:
 Route
 Total Distance and Duration
 XTD Alarm Limit
 Description and Notes
Route
From the Route area of the folder you can
perform the following route management
functions:
 Save - save a newly created route, or
save changes to the route under the
same name, the previous version of the
route is overwritten and the revised
date for the route changes accordingly
as indicated in the list of available
routes (if displayed).
 No Errors/Errors - the system checks
the validity of the loaded route, if there
are no errors in the route the button
displays No Errors in the system background colour. If the route's
attributes do contain errors the route cannot be validated and the
button changes to display Errors with a yellow background.

A route can be saved even if it does contain errors. However the

route must have no errors before it can be loaded for monitoring.

 Save As - used when either creating a new route, or to rename an

existing route. The route name and current date are added to the
Load Route list.
 Open - load a previously saved route for editing.
 Clear/New - clear an existing route from the screen prompting the
user to save an unsaved route if necessary.
 Delete - delete a route from the list of previously saved routes.

8-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

 Editor Table - enables the operator to edit all waypoint and leg
attributes for the edited route via a separate movable window, see
Route Editor Table.
 Print - if a printer is connected to the system (either local or
network) a print of the currently loaded route can be made.
 Reverse - generate a new route that is a mirror image of the
original route.
To manage a route do the following:
To save a route:
1. If changes to a route have been made the route name shows an
asterisk after the name (e.g. Route 2*).To save a route click on the
Save button, or if the changes made to a route are to be saved
under a new name, click on the Save As button. A window appears
prompting to enter a name for the route.
2. Enter a name using the screen keypad and click on the keypad OK
button.
3. The route name is entered, the current time/date is listed in the
Open Route window and a temporary prompt appears confirming
that the route plan has been saved.
To check for errors on a route:
1. If changes to the route's attributes are not
validated by the system the No Errors
button changes to Errors with the
button's background colour and route's
name in yellow.
2. To check the error messages click on the
Errors button. A Route Validation Messages
window is displayed. Any errors on the route
appear in the messages field. Click the OK
button to confirm.
If the route has no errors the message {No
validation messages} appears. The route is
correctly validated and can be loaded for
monitoring when required.
The validation process only checks the
geometry of a route. To check the route
against dangers, refer to Edit Route - Dangers.

65900010 8-11
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To open a previously saved route:

1. Click on the Open button. The Open
Route window appears prompting to
select a route to open and displaying a list
of existing routes on the workstation with
the last modified date of each route.
Below the list the Description field
contains a description (if any) of the
selected route.
2. Select the route to be opened from the list,
scroll down the list if necessary, and with
the route selected click on the OK button.
The route data appears in the Route folder
and a graphic representation of the route
appears on screen, assuming the
displayed location contains the route.
To clear a route from the video circle:
1. With the selected route displayed click on the Clear/New button.
2. If unsaved changes have been made to the route, a Close
Confirmation window appears prompting to Save, Don't Save or
Cancel the closure.
3. Select the required option, the route is
cleared from the screen.
To delete a route from the route list:
1. Click on the Delete button. The Delete
Route window appears prompting to
select a route to delete and displaying a
list of existing routes on the workstation
with the last modified date of each route.
Below the list, the Description field
contains a description (if any) of the
selected route.
2. Select the route to be deleted from the list,
scroll down the list if necessary, and with
the route selected click on the OK button.
The screen prompts to confirm deletion of
the selected route.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm deletion. The route is deleted and
the file name removed from the list.

8-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

To reverse a route do the following:

1. Open the saved route you wish to reverse from the routes
database.
2. Click the Reverse button.
3. If you have made changes in the existing route an Action
Required message appears stating that the unsaved changes to
the existing route will be lost if you proceed.
i) To draw the reversed route to not include the changes made to
the current route click OK. The changes will not be saved to
the current route.
ii) Or, to first save the changes to the current route click Cancel
and then the Save button.
When a route has been reversed a temporary confirmation prompt
appears. The route is re-drawn as a mirror image of the current route with
the same number of waypoints, critical points and other attributes assigned
to that route. No name is assigned to the reversed route.
4. To save the reversed route click on the Save As button and enter a
name using the screen keypad.
Total Distance and Duration
The Total Distance and Duration area calculates the total route distance,
the total route duration in days (if needed), hours and minutes and the
average planned speed made by own ship over the entire route.
The Time Zone is displayed as UTC. If the current time is set to local and a
time zone offset has been applied in Time Management that time offset is
shown as a plus or minus figure after UTC.
The route distance, time, and average speed are read only values which
are recalculated as the route is changed. For example, if the speed for a
leg is increased, the total route time will decrease and the route's average
speed will increase accordingly.
The ETD displays the current date and time and the ETA displays the total
route time value added to the current date and time as the estimated time
of arrival. These values are updated each time the Clear/New button is
clicked.

65900010 8-13
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To change the ETD/ETA data do the following:

1. Click inside the ETD or ETA field on
the specific data to be changed. The
field data changes to green (editable)
and the specific data is highlighted. An
editing window appears directly below
the selected field.
2. To move the date or time back click on
the Down arrow, to move the date or
time forward click on the Up arrow. To move the highlight back or
forward (e.g. from Month to Year) click on the side arrows.
3. With the correct ETD/ETA data displayed click on the OK button.
XTD Alarm Limit
The XTD Alarm Limit enables a set of alert values to be applied for the left
and right side of a route. The value represents the limit of deviation from
the planned route at which activation of an automatic off-track error alert
occurs.
The settings in the Route tab will apply to all legs and turns on a route.
Different XTD alert limits for individual legs and turns may be made from
the Waypoint tab folder. The default value is 100 metres for the left and
right side.
To change the XTD Alarm Limit do the following:
1. Click in the Left and Right fields, the value changes to green
(editable).
2. Move the trackball left to decrease the value, or right to increase.
Left click again to accept the value.
3. When the XTD alarm limits have been changed an `Action
Required' prompt appears requesting confirmation of the limits
change. Click the OK button to confirm the change, or select
Cancel to reject the change.
The XTD alarm lines can be viewed along
the route, providing Show XTD Alarm Lines
is enabled in Route Display Settings. The
XTD alarm lines are shown as thin red lines
either side of the route line.

8-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Description and Notes

To add a description of the route or create notes do the following:
1. Move the cursor inside the respective field and left click. A screen
keypad appears from where you can enter text.
2. With the required text entered click on the keypad OK button. The
text is saved in the Description or Notes field.

Waypoints Tab Folder

The Waypoints tab folder displays all the
waypoint and leg attributes for the route being
edited. The folder is divided into the following
areas:
 Route
 Waypoint
 Approaching Leg
 Turn
 Departing Leg
Route
The Route area enables the currently monitored
route to be saved and validated. When a route
has been saved its name is displayed above the
Save/No Error buttons.
The Save and No Error/Error functions in the
Waypoints tab folder are the same as described
previously in the Edit Route - Route Tab.
Waypoint
The Waypoint area enables you to quickly
navigate between waypoints and includes the
following editing functions:
 create a new waypoint
 delete an existing waypoint
 enter a waypoint label
 change the LAT/LON position of a waypoint

65900010 8-15
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To edit the Waypoint data do the following:

The Waypoint area displays the waypoint currently selected (e.g. W3). To
select the previous waypoint in the route plan click the < button, to select
the next waypoint in the route plan click the > button. To select the first
waypoint in the route plan click the << button, or to select the last waypoint
in the route plan click the >> button.
To enter a label for the waypoint:
1. Left click in the blank field to the right of the currently selected
waypoint, the screen keypad appears.
2. Enter an identifying label using the keypad and click OK. The name
appears in the label field, and if the Waypoint Label tick box is
enabled in the Route Display Settings, also on the route plan.
To create a new waypoint:
1. Navigate to the location in the route where you want the new
waypoint created and left click on either the previous waypoint or
the next waypoint and then click the New button. The system
creates a new waypoint on the route leg midway between the
selected waypoint and next waypoint i.e. if W1 is selected then the
new waypoint becomes W2 and all subsequent waypoints are
automatically re-numbered.
2. Move the waypoint to the required position, either directly on
screen, or by specifying its LAT/LON position numerically, see
below.
To delete a waypoint:
Navigate to the waypoint to be deleted using the navigation buttons
and click the Delete button. The system deletes the selected
waypoint from the route, the route is re-drawn and all subsequent
waypoints are automatically re-numbered.

8-16 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

To specify a waypoint Lat/Lon position:

1. Select the waypoint by using the Waypoint navigation buttons.
2. To centre the display on the selected waypoint click the Goto
button.
3. To change the Lat/Lon position of the
waypoint click in the Lat/Lon data fields, the
text becomes editable (green) and a drop
down keypad appears.
There are a number of ways of defining the
Lat/Lon position for the selected waypoint.
i. Manually enter a Lat/Lon position by
using the numbers and navigation
buttons on the keypad and click OK. The
waypoint is moved to the entered
position.
ii. To place the waypoint at a specific
geographic object select Query. Move
the cursor to the display (a ? is added to
the cursor) and left click, a Chart Query window appears with
a list of objects in the immediate area (see Chart Query).
Select the object from the list, the waypoint is repositioned
over the chart object and a red circle filled with a red shaded
background is drawn around the waypoint. Click OK on the
Chart Query window to fix the waypoint at the chart object
position.
iii. To place the waypoint at own ship's CCRP select Ownship.
iv. To place the waypoint at a selected location on the chart
display video circle select Chart. Move the cursor to the
display (a ? is added to the cursor) and left click at the
required location, the waypoint is repositioned to that location.
v. To specify a range or bearing for the waypoint select Offset.
An Offset window appears where you can set a range and
bearing offset from the current position.

65900010 8-17
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Approaching Leg
The Approaching Leg area enables you to edit the following attributes of
the leg approaching the selected waypoint:
 Rhumb Line 19or Great Circle20
 Leg Speed - estimate average speed for the route leg (maximum
speed 99 Kn.)
 XTD Alarm - the distance in metres that the ship can stray from the
route leg’s track line before an off track error alarm occurs.
Different values may be entered for the left and right side of the
route leg's track line.
The following leg attributes are read-only which automatically change if the
route data is changed:
 Leg Distance - the leg distance between each waypoint.
 Leg Bearing - the bearing of the leg in degrees.
To edit the Approaching Leg data do the following:
1. To change the leg speed or off track limit click in the relevant field,
the text changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right
to change the values.
2. To change the departing or approaching leg from Rhumb Line to
Great Circle click on the drop down arrow to the right of the field
and make the desired selection.
3. To change the XTD alarm limit click in the L or R field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to
change the values and left click to accept. The values defined will
only apply to that leg.

19
A line on a sphere that cuts all meridians at the same angle; the path taken by a ship or
plane that maintains a constant compass direction.
20
A circle drawn around the Earth such that the centre of the circle is at the centre of the
Earth. Following such a circle plots the shortest distance between any two points on the
surface of the Earth.

8-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Turn
The Turn area enables you to edit the following turn attributes:
 Turn Rate - the maximum turn rate is 1200°/minute.
 Turn Radius - the maximum turn radius is 10 NM.
 Speed - speed of turn, the maximum speed is 99 Kn
 XTD Alarm - the cross track distance in metres that the ship can
stray from the route turn track line before an off track error alarm
occurs. Different values may be entered for the left and right side of
the route turn track line.
To change the turn rate, turn radius, speed of turn or XTD Alarm, click in
the relevant field, the text changes to green (editable). Move the trackball
left or right to change the values.
The turn rates for each turn must be less than or equal to the Own Ship’s
configured maximum turn rate.
The speed of turn is used to calculate the turn rate based on the displayed
turn radius data. However if the turn rate data is modified the turn speed is
used to calculate new turn radius data. Often the turn speed will be the
same as the approaching and/or departing leg. However, the system
provides the flexibility to enter different values. This is useful when it is
important to strictly adhere to a specific turn rate due to vessel type or
conditions.
The turn speed must be less than or equal to the Own Ship’s configured
maximum speed. If the turn speed is adjusted the read only value to the
right of the speed automatically adjusts (minus if the speed is less than the
leg speed, plus if the speed is more). If the turn of speed entered is greater
than own ship's speed a validation error is generated.

65900010 8-19
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Departing Leg
The Departing Leg area enables you to edit the following attributes of the
leg of the route, which departs from the selected waypoint:
 Rhumb Line or Great Circle
 Leg Speed - estimated average speed for the route leg. The
maximum speed is 99 Kn.
 XTD Alarm - as in Approaching Leg attributes
The following leg attributes are read-only values which automatically
change if the route data is changed:
 Leg distance - the leg distance between each waypoint.
 Leg Bearing - the measured angle of the leg in true degrees.
To edit the Departing Leg data do the following:
1. To change the leg speed or XTD limit click in the relevant field the
text changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to
change the values.
2. To change the departing or approaching leg from Rhumb Line to
Great Circle click on the drop down arrow to the right of the field.
Default Leg and Turn Attributes
The first leg of a route inherits planned speed and XTD limit attributes from
system configurable default values. Subsequent legs inherit attributes from
the preceding leg.
The first waypoint of a route inherits turn radius from a system configurable
default value, and turn speed from the preceding leg’s planned
speed. Subsequent waypoints inherit turn radius from the preceding
waypoint, and turn speed from the preceding leg. Turn rate is calculated
based on turn radius and turn speed, but turn rate may also be used to
adjust turn radius.

8-20 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Dangers
The Dangers tab folder enables the operator to
view objects and areas that could endanger the
safety of own ship on the edited route.
When a route is opened for editing or monitoring
the system continually searches the chart
database and mariner objects database for
objects and areas that intersect the route plan
safety region.
Route dangers are listed in a directory tree, with
the dangers separated into the number of leg and
turn segments on the route, the number being
dependent on the number of waypoints on the
route.
If the List Cautions check box is ticked the
directory tree will also include cautions related to
that segment.

WARNING!

TEMPORARY ROUTES ARE NOT SAFETY

CHECKED SEPARATELY. THE OPERATOR
MUST RELY ON OWN SHIP SAFETY REGION
FOR DETECTING DANGERS WHILE OWN
SHIP IS ON A TEMPORARY ROUTE.

To view dangers or cautions on the display do the following:

1. Navigate to the required route segment by clicking on the + box.
Each Leg or Turn segment is further divided into Dangers and
Cautions sub directories.
2. To view a route segment's dangers click on the Dangers + box.
Any dangers related to that segment are listed in the directory.
3. To view the dangers on the video circle click on each danger in the
list. A graphic representation of the danger is displayed across the
affected area of the route and a description of the danger, including
its LAT/LON position, appears in the Description field.

65900010 8-21
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

4. To navigate to the next danger in the list click the arrow. To

move up the list click the arrow. As each danger is highlighted
it is shown on the video circle.
5. To view cautions on the route repeat the procedure above.

Display Safety Regions

The Dangers tab folder also includes the option of displaying the route
safety region.
To display tick the Display Safety Regions check box, the safety region is
displayed along the length of the route.
The route safety region is divided into segments and is defined as follows:
Route safety region buffer = cross track error limit + ½ ship beam.
The width of the safety region buffer will reflect the left and right cross track
distances set in XTD Alarm limits in the Routes tab folder.

8-22 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Critical Points
The Critical Points tab folder enables the
operator to create specific LAT/LON positions
on a route which are defined as critical points.
An alarm or warning alert is generated when
own ship is in the proximity of each critical
point on the route (the alert can be triggered by
either a specified distance or time).
The Critical Points tab folder is divided into the
following areas:
 Route
 Critical Point
The Route area enables the currently
monitored route, displayed in the route name
field, to be saved and validated. For a
description of the Save and Error functions see
Edit Route - Route Tab.
Critical Point
To generate critical points on a previously saved route open the route plan
from the Route tab of the Edit Route sub menu. The selected route will
appear on screen.
To create critical points on a route do the following:
1. Move the cursor to the position on the
route where you want the first critical
point to be placed. As the cursor moves
over the route the letters ADD CRTP are
displayed below the cross hair.
2. Click on the required position, a blue
square is drawn at that position on the
route and the window shows the
abbreviation CP1 with its LAT/LON co-
ordinates. If the critical point label check
box is ticked in the Route Display Settings, the CP number is also
shown on screen.

65900010 8-23
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

3. To change a CP label from the default

CP1, CP2 etc. select the CP and click in
the field to the right of the label, the
screen keypad appears. Enter a label
name using the keypad and click the
keypad OK button. The label appears
next to the selected CP (if the label tick
box is enabled in the Route Display Settings).
4. To create more critical points continue to click on the required
positions on the route. As each CP is created the blue square of
the previous CP is displayed as a smaller orange square and the
Critical Points window shows each CP's label and LAT/LON
position.
5. To select a previous CP in the route click the < button, to select
the next CP click the > button. To select the first CP in the route
plan click the << button, or to select the last CP click the >> button.
To change a CP's position do one of the following:
1. Move the cursor over the CP in the route, hold down the left button
and move the trackball. The CP can be moved either up or down
the length of the route, or away from the route. When the required
CP position is shown on screen release the left button.
Or:
1. In the Critical Points tab navigate to the CP using the navigation
buttons, and with the required CP label shown click in the LAT/LON
fields, a drop down keypad appears enabling you to select a
position for the CP.
There are a number of ways of defining the LAT/LON position for
the selected CP. For a description of the position options available
refer to `How to edit waypoint data' in Edit Route - Waypoints Tab.
2. When a LAT/LON position for the CP has been selected click the
keypad OK button. The CP is moved to the new position.
If a CP is moved away from the route, its
colour changes from blue to turquoise and
the No Errors button changes to Errors.
Clicking the Goto button centres the video
circle on the selected CP.

8-24 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

To delete a critical point do the following:

1. In the Critical Points window navigate to the CP to be deleted using
the navigation buttons and click on the Delete button. The CP is
removed from the screen and list.
Or
1. Move the cursor over the CP to be deleted. As the cursor moves
over the CP the letters DEL CRTP are displayed below the cross
hair.
2. Right click on the CP and select Delete
Critical Point from the semi-
transparent window. The CP is
removed from the screen and list.

Although Critical points are associated

with a route they are not associated
with route track segments. When a
route track segment is moved or deleted, the critical points that
were on that route track segment remain in their original place.

The CP alert trigger defaults to distance, with the trigger being the proximity
of own ship to a CP, shown in metres. When own ship's proximity to a CP
is less than the distance shown an alert is raised.
To change the alert trigger to time, click on
the drop down arrow to the right of the field
and select Time. The Ownship proximity
changes to displaying the trigger value in
minutes. To change the proximity time click in the field and move the
trackball left (to decrease) or right (to increase).
Each CP can be assigned a type of alert (Alarm or Warning) with the
default alert set to Warning. To change the alert setting to a Alarm click on
the Generate Alarm radio button.
The operator can define the text to be displayed when an alert is raised
during route monitoring. To generate alert text click in the Description
field, a screen keypad is displayed. Using the keypad, enter the required
alert message and when finished click the OK button on the keypad.

65900010 8-25
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Editor Table
The route editor table enables the operator to edit aspects of a route that
has been opened from the Edit Route folder and is displayed on screen.
The Route Editor table is only available when the system is in Standby.
Click on the Editor Table button in the Route tab of the
Edit Route sub menu to open the route editor table.
The route editor table displays the name of the route and lists all the route's
waypoint attributes and leg attributes as fields in a spreadsheet.

The two check boxes at the top of the table enable the following display
options to be made:
 Waypoint Data - tick this box to only display columns containing
waypoint specific data
 Leg Data - tick this box to only display columns containing leg
specific data
The four buttons to the right of the check boxes enable the following route
editing actions:
 Add - adds a new waypoint to the end of the route.
 Insert - inserts a new waypoint between two existing waypoints
 Delete - deletes the selected waypoint from the route and redraws
the route
 Reset - resets selected waypoint data to default values
To edit waypoint or leg data directly on screen:
1. Click on a waypoint, the waypoint and its adjoining legs are
displayed in white. The rows displaying the data for the waypoint
and adjoining legs are highlighted in the table.
2. To move the waypoint hold down the left key and use the trackball
to drag the waypoint to the desired location.
3. To change the waypoint's turn radius click on the small dot at the
centre of the radius, hold down the left key and use the trackball to
increase or decrease the radius.

8-26 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

If changes to the route result in validation errors the No

Error button changes to displaying Errors with a yellow
background and the route name shown in an invalid colour (orange). Click
on the button to open a popup window that lists the validation errors, for
more information see Waypoints Tab Folder.
If changes to the edited route have been made the route
name shows an asterisk after the name (e.g. Route 2*). To
save any changes to the currently edited route click on the Save button, the
route is saved and the asterisk removed from the name.
If manual changes have been made to planned speeds over a route leg, or
changes to the ETA, clicking the Reset Min/Max Speeds button calculates
and resets the minimum and maximum speed values over each leg of the
route.

The following editable data for each leg/turn segment is displayed as read-
only in the Speed Planning Setup window:
 Planned Speed
 Minimum Speed
 Maximum Speed
Waypoint Data on Route Editor Table
The following waypoint data can be edited on the route editor table:
 Label - the name given to the waypoint
 Latitude/Longitude values
 Turn rate – the rate through wheelover, shown in degrees per
minute
 Turn radius of Wheelover
 Speed - planned ground speed of ownship along route leg.
 Min Speed – the minimum planned ground speed of own ship
along route leg.
 Max Speed – the maximum planned ground speed of own ship
along route leg.
 XTD Alarm (Left and Right) - the limit of deviation from the planned
route at which activation of an automatic off-track error alarm
occurs, shown in metre(s).
The following waypoint data is read-only on the route editor table:
 The estimated time of arrival (ETA) showing the date and time to
the wheel-over, if a wheel-over exists for the waypoint, otherwise
the ETA to the next waypoint.

65900010 8-27
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Leg Data on Route Editor Table

The following leg data can be edited on the route editor table:
 Speed - planned ground speed of ownship along route leg.
 Min Speed – the minimum planned ground speed of own ship
along route leg.
 Max Speed – the maximum planned ground speed of own ship
along route leg.
 XTD Alarm (Left and Right) - the limit of deviation from the planned
route at which activation of an automatic off-track error alarm
occurs, shown in metre(s).
 Leg Type - a rhumb line or great circle.
The following leg data is read-only on the route editor table:
 Distance - the leg distance between each waypoint
 Bearing - the bearing angle of each leg
 Leg Time - the estimated time for leg traversal (in days, hours and
minutes)
Editing Data on the Route Editor Table
To edit route data in the route editor table do the following:
To change the waypoint label:
1. Click in the label field for the selected waypoint, the text changes to
green (editable) and the screen keypad appears.
2. To clear the existing label, click the Clear button. Enter a label
name using the keypad and click the keypad OK button. The label
entered appears next to the selected waypoint
(if the Show waypoint labels tick box is enabled
in the Route Display Settings).
To change the waypoint LAT/LON position:
1. Click in the LAT/LON data field, the text
becomes editable (green) and a drop down
keypad appears. There are a number of ways of
defining the LAT/LON position.
i. Manually enter a Lat/Lon position by using
the numbers and navigation buttons on the
keypad and click OK.
ii. To place the waypoint at a specific
geographic object select Query. Move the
cursor to the display (a ? is added to the
cursor) and left click, a Chart Query window

8-28 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

appears with a list of objects in the immediate area (see Chart

Query). Select the object from the list, the waypoint is
repositioned over the chart object and a red circle filled with a
red shaded background is drawn around the waypoint.
iii. Click OK on the Chart Query window to fix the waypoint at the
chart object position.
iv. To place the waypoint at own ship's CCRP select Ownship.
v. To place the waypoint at a selected location on the chart display
video circle select Chart. Move the cursor to the display (a ? is
added to the cursor) and left click at the required location, the
waypoint is repositioned to that location.
To change the turn waypoint data, or speed and XTD leg data:
1. Click in the required field, the text changes to green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left or right to decrease or increase the value.
Left click in the field to set the revised value. The route will change
dependent on the values entered.
To change the leg type:
The leg type defaults to Rhumb Line, to change to Great Circle click on
the drop down arrow to the right of value and select from the list.
A Copy Value feature enables the user to copy a cell value and paste the
value into other cells in the same column, either above or below the copied
cell.
1. To copy the data from the lowest cell in a
column highlight the cells from the top of
the column, right click and select Copy
Value. The value in the last cell is copied to
all the selected cells. For example, in the
screen on the right the 8.3 kn value is
pasted into all cells.
2. To copy the value in the top cell in a column
highlight the cells from the bottom of the column,
right click and select Copy Value. The value in the
top cell (i.e. 7.4 kn in the screen on the right) is
copied to all the selected cells.

65900010 8-29
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Monitoring a Route
Monitor Route
The Monitor Route window enables you to monitor all aspects of a route
against own ship's course. The monitored route must be initially saved and
validated in the Edit Route sub menu.
The Monitor Route window contains the following tab folders:
 Route - displays read only data monitoring own ship's progress
against a route plan.
 Dngrs (Dangers) - lists dangerous objects and areas that intersect
the route plan safety region.
 CPs (Critical Points) - displays data on critical points that have
been added to a route.

8-30 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Route
The data shown in the Route tab folder is
calculated internally from the monitored route
and is read-only.
A summary of the active leg of the monitored
route is also shown on the Route tab in the
lower right area of the screen.

To monitor own ship's progress against a route,

the ship's COG must be within 110 degrees
toward the planned track and within 80 degrees
away from the planned track, this is referred to
as the `bearing criteria'. If the ship’s COG
deviates more than the bearing criteria, then
route monitoring will stop.
When a route is loaded for monitoring,
monitoring automatically starts on the leg closest
to the ship that is within the bearing criteria. If
none of the route’s legs meet the criteria, then route monitoring will
automatically start when the ship comes within the monitoring criteria of a
route leg.
In some cases the system may begin monitoring a leg that is not
the closest leg. This will normally occur when own ship
manoeuvres abruptly toward or away from the closest leg, so that,
temporarily, the bearing criteria are not met.
During route monitoring, the ship’s cross-track distance from the route is
displayed and whether the ship is to the right or left of the track.
Where monitoring values are not currently valid the field displays a series
of dashes.
The information displayed is as follows:

65900010 8-31
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Route Summary

 Name The name of the route currently monitored.

Ship State
 Ship State The state of ship on route e.g. 'Sailing To W2 (2/5)'
denotes next waypoint on route and total number of
waypoints.
 XTD Cross Track Distance is the distance to anchor track.
L = ship is left of track, R = ship is right of track.
 XTD Alarm An alarm is raised if the XTD exceeds the value shown.

Leg & Turn

 Leg Bearing The bearing of the currently monitored route leg.
 Leg DTG Distance to go along the leg to wheel-over.
 Leg TTG Time to go along the leg to wheel-over based on present
ship speed.
 Turn Radius Turn radius shown as NM
 Plan ROT Planned rate of turn in degrees per minute.
 Planned Spd Planned speed in kilometres
 Present Spd Present speed in kilometres
 Required ROT Required rate of turn based on present ship speed
 Spd Min/Max Minimum and maximum planned speed for upcoming
turn.
 ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at wheel-over
 Time Zone UTC, or UTC with a plus or minus figure if the current
time is set to local and a time zone offset has been
applied.
 Next Leg Brg Bearing angle of next leg of route.
 Next Leg Dist The distance to next leg in NM

8-32 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Overall
 Distance & Distance and time to go to the
Time To Go end of the route using distance
along legs with own ship SOG
for this leg and planned speeds
for future legs.

 ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at the

end of the route using own ship
SOG for this leg and planned
speeds for future legs.

 Time Zone Time zone UTC (if Local time is

selected the local offset is
shown as a + or - e.g. UTC +
02:00)

Route Summary Info

 Distance The total distance covered by this route

 Duration The total duration of the route at planned speed shown in hours
and minutes.

 Avg Speed The average speed of the vessel over the route.

 Modified The date and time that the route was last modified.

 Route If a description has been entered at Edit Route - Route Tab it will
Description appear in this column.

65900010 8-33
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Settings
 Wheelover Alerts will be displayed in
Notifications monitoring mode when the check
box is ticked. Note that wheelover
points are all bow referenced, NOT
referenced to the CCRP.
If an alert is not acknowledged after
a period of 30 seconds the Alert is
then escalated to an Alarm.

 Backup Backup navigator alarms are raised

Navigator if the wheelover notifications are not
Alarm acknowledged when the check box
is ticked.

 Course The maximum bearing angle that

Difference own ship may move from the route
Limit track defaults to 25.0º.

 Req ROT The maximum rate of turn angle

Difference that own ship may move from the
Limit route track defaults to 10.0 /min.

Alerts take the form of operator messages, which

appear, above the Show Menu button.
To change the Settings values left click in the
respective field and move the trackball left (to
decrease) or right (to increase), left click again to fix
the value.
To monitor a route do the following
1. Click on the Load Route button in the Route
Summary area. The Load Route window appears with a list of all
the previously saved routes, their name and last modification date.
2. Highlight the route to be monitored from the list and click on the OK
button. The route appears on screen and if the route meets the
monitoring criteria, the route data is displayed in the Monitor Route
sub menu.

8-34 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

To clear a route:
1. With the route details shown in Monitor Route, click on the Clear
Route button. The route and its data are removed from the screen
and Monitor Route tab folder.
Editing a currently monitored Route
When a route is being monitored the route is rendered in the non-editable
monitor colour (red). A currently monitored route can only be changed from
the Edit Route tab folder, saved and then reloaded from the Monitor Route
tab folder.
To change a currently monitored route, do the following:
1. To edit a currently monitored route, select Edit Route, and open the
currently monitored route from the Load Route window.
2. When you are monitoring a route and open the same route for
editing the system creates a duplicate route with the edit route
mode superimposed over the monitored route in the editable colour
(pink).
3. Make the required edits to the route, for details refer to Edit Route -
Waypoints Tab. As the route is changed the screen shows the
monitored route in the original position.

4. Save the changes made to the route. The system displays a

warning stating that the route being saved is the currently loaded
route for monitoring and that changes will not affect the monitored
route, click the OK button.
5. Click the Clear / New button to remove the route from the Edit
Route folder.
6. Navigate back to the Monitor Route tab folder and reload the
revised route, the monitored route on screen is replaced with the
new version.

65900010 8-35
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Dangers
The Dangers tab folder enables the operator to
view objects and areas that could endanger the
safety of own ship on the currently monitored
route.

WARNING!

TEMPORARY ROUTES ARE NOT

SEPARATELY SAFETY CHECKED. THE
OPERATOR MUST RELY ON OWN SHIP
SAFETY REGION FOR DETECTING
DANGERS WHILE OWN SHIP IS ON A
TEMPORARY ROUTE.

The Show Present Leg or Turn button enables

the operator to check for dangers and cautions at
the current leg or turn of the monitored route.
When the button is clicked the Leg or Turn at the
specific area where ownship is on the monitored
route expands. Any dangers and cautions related
to that segment can be accessed from the
navigation tree.
The information presented here is the same as the information in the
Dangers tab folder of the Edit Route sub menu. For a description of
dangers, cautions and route safety regions, see Edit Route - Dangers.
Settings
Display Safety Regions
The option of displaying the safety region for the monitored route can be
made by ticking the check box. For information on the route safety region,
refer to Edit Route - Dangers.
List Cautions
The option of listing cautions, in addition to dangers, for the monitored
route can be made by ticking the check box.

8-36 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Critical Points
The Critical Points tab folder enables you to
select and view position and alert trigger details
on critical points that have been generated in
the Critical Points tab folder of the Edit Route
menu.
Routes can be loaded for monitoring and
cleared in the same way as described for the
Route tab folder. When a route is loaded, the
Route area shows the name of the monitored
route.
No data is displayed when a route is first
loaded. To select the first CP on the route click
on the < button. The field to the right of the <
button will show the abbreviation CP1 (unless
the CP label has been changed from the
default, see Edit Route - Critical Points).
When a CP has been selected the folder shows
the point's LAT/LON position, its alert trigger
and own ship proximity trigger (distance or
time), the type of alert generated (Alarm or
Warning) and any CP description that has been
generated. The bottom of the folder displays the
selected CP DTG and TTG status.
To view position and alert trigger details on further CPs, click on the >
button. The next CP in the route is selected and its data shown in the
folder.

CPs are shown as red squares in Monitor mode. When

CPs are selected from the tab folder the screen symbol
changes from a square to a rounded triangle.

To centre the screen on the selected Critical Point, click on the Goto
button. Own ship, along with all other chart and target positions, are moved
in accordance.

65900010 8-37
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

ETA Calculator
The ETA Calculator window enables you to calculate the time, speed and
distance between waypoints on a monitored route.
With a route loaded for monitoring, click on the
ETA Calculator sub menu from the Routes
menu. The window includes Monitor Route:
 Distance - the distance own ship must
travel to the end of the monitored
route.
 Speed - the calculated average speed
to make the ETA indicated at end of
monitored route, or for the selected
waypoint.
 Time - the estimated time (in days, hours and minutes) to travel to
the end of the monitored route.
 ETA - represents the ETA (date and time) of own ship at end of
route.
If the ETA Calculator is opened when there is not a monitored route plan,
the following default values apply:
 Distance defaults to 1.0NM
 Speed is own ship's current SOG.
 Time is the time it takes to travel the Distance based on the speed.
 ETA is the date and UTC time own ship is expected to arrive at the
Distance based on the speed.
To select a different waypoint on the route:
1. Click on the WP... button, the following
Action Required window lists the
waypoints in the route and the current
distance of each waypoint from own ship.
2. Select a waypoint from the list and click the
OK button. The distance shown against the
selected waypoint appears in the Distance
field.

8-38 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

To change the ETA Calculator values do the following:

1. To change the Distance or Speed values click in the respective
fields, with the value shown as green move the trackball left, to
decrease, or right to increase the value. When the distance and
speed values are changed the Time and ETA values are
automatically updated.
2. To change the Time value click to the left of
the value, a numerical keypad appears below
the field. Enter in the required time values
using the keypad and click OK when
complete.
When the Time value is changed the Speed
and ETA values are automatically updated.
3. To change the ETA value click on the value to
be changed, a navigation keypad appears. Click on the left or right
arrows to navigate to the data to be changed and with the text in
highlight click on the up/down arrows to change the values. Click
OK when complete.
When the ETA value is changed the Speed and Time values are
automatically updated.

65900010 8-39
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Route ETA
The Route ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival)
enables the following settings to be changed or
selected on a monitored route:
 Waypoint selection - click on the drop down
arrow to select a waypoint on the monitored
route. The field to the right gives the
calculated distance (in nautical miles) from
own ship to the select waypoint.
 Speed - enables the speed for a route's
present leg (based on the waypoint
selection) and the speed for future legs to be
changed, either from the speed based on
own ship's SOG, or any planned speeds
given when the route was edited, see Edit
Route – Waypoints Tab. The planned
speeds show 10.0 kn if no changes were
made to the approaching and departing legs for each waypoint on the
route.
To change Route ETA settings do the following:
1. Manual speed defaults to 0.0 kn. To enter
a speed for the present leg or future legs
select the Manual radio button and click in
the Manual field, the text changes to
green (editable). Move the trackball right
to increase the value and left click again to accept the value.
2. To change the speed for the present leg or future legs to the
planned speed entered at the Edit Route menu select the Planned
radio button.
Each leg of a route may have different speed settings selected.
When speed values are entered, or planned speeds selected, the system
then calculates the ETA based on the selected speed values.
1. To hide the speed options click the Hide
options button. The button changes to
display the speeds for present leg and
future legs.
2. Click the button again to return to the full
Route ETA window.

8-40 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Required Speed
Required Speed enables the user to specify a
desired arrival time for any selected waypoint on
a monitored route. When a desired arrival time
is entered the system calculates own ship speed
required to the present leg, and speed required
for the remaining legs in order to achieve this
arrival time.
To change the desired ETA and required
speeds do the following:
1. To change the ETA:
i. Select the waypoint from where the
speed calculations are to be made.
ii. Click inside the Desired ETA field
on the specific data to be changed.
The field data changes to green
(editable), the selected data is
highlighted and an editing window
appears directly below the ETA field.
iii. To move the date or time back click
on the Down arrow, to move the date
or time forward click on the Up arrow.
To move the highlight back or
forward (e.g. from Month to Year) click on the side arrows.
iv. With the correct ETA data displayed click on the OK button.
2. When the desired arrival time is set the system calculates the
speed required on the present leg and remaining legs of the route
in order to achieve the specified ETA. The required speeds are
shown in the Calculated fields.
3. To specify a speed for the current leg and remaining legs select the
Manual radio buttons and click in the Manual fields, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball right to increase
the value and left click again to accept the value.
4. Click the Calculated radio button to see the speed required to
meet the desired ETA on the current leg and remaining legs based
on the manual speeds entered.

65900010 8-41
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Speed Planning
Speed Planning allows the operator to manually specify a plan for speeds
to be used on remaining segments of the monitored route, and see what
arrival times result from these plans. It also enables a desired arrival time
(for any given waypoint) to be specified, and see recommended
adjustments to planned speeds needed to achieve this arrival time.
Planned speeds or computed adjustments to these speeds may
subsequently be used to control the ship’s propulsion system. For
information on propulsion control, refer to Chapter 3 `Propulsion’ in the
Supplementary Features User Guide 65900014.
To activate Speed Planning on a monitored route:
1. Load the route to be monitored from the Monitor Route - Route
Tab.
2. From the Routes menu, open the Speed Planning window. Note
that before speed planning begins the window displays no data on
the currently monitored route.
3. Click on the Edit Speed Plan button at the bottom of the window.
The Speed Planning Setup window appears on the chart display.

Speed Planning Setup

Speed Planning Setup allows the operator to create a speed plan that can
be subsequently used to control the speed of the ship along the monitored
route to any desired ‘Arrival Waypoint’.

Own ship must be sailing on the monitored route before speed

planning can commence, as defined in `Ship State' on the Monitor
Route - Route Tab.

The Speed Planning Setup window includes the following areas:

 Arrival Time Planning - enables an arrival time for a waypoint to be
selected.
 Current Leg Speed Command - lets the operator to choose
whether the current ship’s speed should be assumed for the
current leg of the plan.
 Speed Command Setting - lets the operator choose whether speed
commands should be calculated (based on arrival time) or
manually adjusted.
 Initialize Manual Speed Command - when set to Manual, provides
a simple way to initialize all speed commands.

8-42 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

 Speed Table - shows planned speeds and limits for each leg and
turn of the route.
 Arrival Date/Time (UTC) and Arrival Time To Go - displays arrival
times for the various choices of speeds (planned speed, max
speed, etc.).

Arrival Time Planning

The Arrival Time Planning area includes selection of the arrival waypoint
and desired arrival date/time.
The Arrival Waypoint field defaults to displaying the last waypoint on the
route plan. To change the arrival waypoint click on the drop down arrow,
the list displays all the remaining waypoints along the monitored route. For
example, if own ship is sailing to D9 waypoint on the route, all waypoints
from D9 onwards will be available for selection.
When a waypoint is selected, the desired arrival date/time field is
calculated by assuming that ownship will complete the current leg at the
current speed and complete the remaining legs at the planned speed. The
system selects Assume current speed and Limited Required Speed
options, and the speed table is updated accordingly.

65900010 8-43
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The Desired Arrival Date/Time allows the operator to enter the date and
time that they wish to arrive at the arrival waypoint. This value is then used
to compute the Required Speed 21. Note that the Desired Arrival Date/Time
value only has an effect if Limited Required Speed is selected.
To the right of this field is the desired arrival Time To Go before own ship
reaches the end of the route.
1. To change the arrival date/time click in the
field. The text changes to green (editable)
and a navigation keypad appears.
2. Click on the left or right arrows to navigate
to the data to be changed and with the text
in highlight click on the up/down arrows to change the values.
3. Click OK when complete.
When the desired date/time data is changed, the system automatically
updates the calculated time to end of route, the required speed values in
the speed table, and possibly (depending on settings made in the Route
Editor Table) the speed command values in the speed table.
Current Leg Speed Command
The Current Leg Speed Command area allows the operator to select how
the speed of the current leg will be affected. It includes two settings:
Assume current speed and Allow speed change.
 Assume current speed forces the speed of the current leg to be
equal to ownship’s present ground speed.
Allow speed change enables values other than ship's current
ground speed to be used for the speed command on the current
leg. If the Speed Command Setting is Manual, then speed
commands may be edited for the current leg. If the setting is
Limited Required Speed, then the system may change the speed
command for the current leg to achieve the desired arrival time.
To change the leg speed command, click the radio button next to the
option.

21
Required Speed is the speed own ship needs to travel for a given route segment, such that
the desired arrival date/time is achieved.

8-44 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Speed Command Setting

The Speed Command Setting area allows the operator to select how the
speed commands are entered into the plan. It includes two settings:
Manual and Limited Required Speed.
 Manual allows the operator to manually enter a speed command
for each leg. When this option is selected the system will not
compute the speeds necessary to arrive at the `Arrival Waypoint’
as entered in Desired Arrival Date/Time’.
Once the Manual radio button has been selected, the Initialize
Manual Speed Command buttons become active and the
Leg/Turn values in the Speed Command column become editable.
 Limited Required Speed22.instructs the system to compute the
speed commands required to arrive at the ‘Arrival Waypoint’ based
on the Desired Arrival Date/Time.
To change the Manual Speed Command settings, do the following:
1. Click the Planned Speeds button to make all speed commands for
each segment match the planned speeds.
2. Click the Required Speeds button to make all speed commands
for each segment match the required speeds, limited to Ownship’s
max speed.
3. Click the Required Speeds, limited button to match the required
speeds, limited to the min and max speed for each segment.

22
Limited Required Speed is the required speed for each segment but limited to the minimum
and maximum speeds of each segment.

65900010 8-45
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To manually enter speed commands for each leg/turn segment:

1. Click in the required field of the Speed Command column for the
Leg/Turn, the text changes to green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left to decrease the value, or right to increase.
Left click again to exit edit mode.
If the speed command is outside the
Minimum/Maximum speed limits the value is
displayed in yellow.
If monitoring of the speed plan begins by clicking
the Begin Monitoring button while any manually
entered speed command is outside the limits, an
Action Required message appears. To accept the
entered speed click the OK button on the message;
to cancel the monitoring and edit the speed
command to be within the speed limits, click the
Cancel button.
Arrival Date/Time (UTC) and Arrival Time to Go
The Arrival Date/Time (UTC) and Arrival Time To Go fields show the
following data in their respective columns, based on speed values in the
Leg/Turn segments:
 Planned - based on leg/turn speeds in Planned Speed.
 Latest Possible - based on leg/turn speeds in Min Speed.
 Earliest Possible - based on leg/turn speeds in Max Speed.
 Desired - based on leg/turn speeds in Required Speed.
 Ordered - based on leg/turn speeds entered in Speed Command.

8-46 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Monitoring Speed Planning

When the required selections have been made to the speed plan click the
Begin Monitoring button, the plan is locked and the system begins
monitoring based on the speed plan.
The following read-only values, configured in the
speed planning setup window, are displayed in
the Speed Planning window:
 Speed Command Setting - the current
speed command as selected in Speed
Planning Setup.
 Arrival WPT - selected arrival waypoint,
or last waypoint on route.
 Intended Arrival Time - the arrival
date/time and TTG specified in the
Ordered column of Speed Planning
Setup.
 List of Leg/Turn segments and specified
Speed Commands
 Estimated Arrival Time - the arrival time
based on the speed commands
presented in this window.
To change the speed command values click the
Edit Speed Plan button, the Speed Planning
Setup window reappears.
When speed orders and/or arrival times are
changed in Speed Planning Setup the Begin Monitoring button must be
clicked again in order to enter the revised values in the Speed Planning
window.

65900010 8-47
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Temporary Route Plans

A temporary route (temp route) can be created
and displayed on screen, either independently, or
in addition to a currently displayed planned route.
The temp route is edited and monitored
independently of the planned route via the Temp
Route tab folder.
The Temp Route tab folder displays off track
limit, speed, turn statistics and waypoint DTG
default values. The speed value is taken from
own ships current SOG and the turn radius is a
system configurable default value.
All temp routes originate from own ship's CCRP
and is shown as a dotted line. A temp route may
be used to join and transition to a previously
planned route.

Creating and Editing a Temporary Route

To create and edit a temp route do the
following:
1. Select Temp Route from the Route menu and click on the
Create/Edit button. A short straight segment starting at the bow of
the ship and in the direction of the ship’s COG is drawn. The
segment is displayed as a magenta dotted line, underneath the
COG dashed line. The length of the line segment represents the
value shown in the Waypoint DTG field (default value 2000
metres). A waypoint circle is drawn at the end of the line segment
and is labelled as T0 (if Show waypoint labels is ticked in the
Route Display Settings).
2. To add waypoints to the temp route move the cursor into the video
circle, in Temp Route mode the letters TMP WYPT are shown just
beneath the cross hair.
3. Left click at the required position to create the next waypoint. A
waypoint circle is drawn at the selected point and is labelled T1. A
turn radius representing the value in the Turn Radius field is drawn
between the waypoints. Further waypoints can be created in the
same way.

8-48 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

4. The Overall, Selected Turn or Waypoint DTG default values may

be changed by clicking in the relevant fields and moving the
trackball left or right to increase or decrease the values. The
Wheelover DTG is changed by adjusting the Waypoint DTG. When
own ship has passed the wheelover DTG the field changes to
displaying Past on a red background.

Temp routes are not normally the recommended means to make

urgent manoeuvres, therefore increasing the waypoint DTG is the
preferred option when the temp route is to be used to make a
significant course change.

Monitoring a Temporary Route

The temp route must pass route validation before it can be monitored. If a
temp route is invalid, a temporary prompt appears and validation errors
must be repaired in Create/Edit mode before monitoring.
To monitor a temp route do the following:
1. With a temp route created and validated, click on the Start button
in the Monitoring Controls. The temp route now becomes the
monitored route, the colour of the route changes to red and the
Monitor Route window opens on the Route tab folder with
Temporary Route in the monitored route field.
2. Own ship begins sailing along the first leg of the route towards T1.
The Monitor Route tab folder displays the same monitoring values
for a temp route as shown for planned routes, see Monitoring
Routes.
3. To clear a non-monitored temp route from the chart window and
Temp Route folder click on the Clear button. If there is a planned
route loaded, the monitoring window will revert to displaying the
ship’s status against the planned route.

65900010 8-49
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Transitioning a Temporary Route to a Monitored Route

A temp route may be used to transition own ship's course to a monitored
route.
To transition a temp route to a monitored route do the following:
1. Load the route to be monitored from the Route tab folder of the
Monitor Route window, see Monitor Route - Route Tab.
2. Create a temp route as described above. In Temp Route mode,
move the cursor to the monitored route, the letters under the cursor
change from TMP WYPT to ADD RTP.
3. Click on any point on the monitored route. The system creates an
additional waypoint which smoothly transitions the temp route to
the monitored route.

4. Click Start to begin monitoring the Temp Route. The Monitor

Route, Route tab folder and the Routes button show the route
monitoring status, e.g. `Temp Route to Route 1'. When own ship
has sailed past the temp route the monitoring status changes to
show the monitored route only.

8-50 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Search and Rescue

Search and Rescue (SAR) patterns are specialized routes that can be used
to patrol a given area.
The following SAR search patterns are supported (see descriptions and
figure below):
 Parallel Line - formed from a series of parallel legs, moving out
from left or right of the initial heading.
 Creeping Line - formed from a series of parallel lines at right
angles to the initial heading, placed forward in the same direction
as the initial heading.
 Expanding Box - formed from a series of expanding squares
centred upon the start point of the search. The size of the square is
increased every four legs.
 Sector Search - formed from a series of three equilateral triangles
centred on the initial start position of the pattern.

65900010 8-51
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Creating SAR Patterns

To create and edit SAR patterns click on Search
and Rescue in the Routes menu.
The last SAR pattern selected will appear on the
video circle and the following default values are
applied to each SAR pattern at the time the Search
and Rescue menu is displayed:
 Heading - based on ownship's current
heading.
 Speed - set to 10 knots.
 ETD - set to the current time.
 Start Position - based on ownship's current
position.
The SAR pattern is changed on the display by
clicking on the SAR button that identifies the current
pattern. The button pages through the pattern
options described above.
To change the SAR default values the following:
The total distance and the time it would take to sail
the SAR pattern depends on the route properties
and pattern parameters.
1. To change the heading and speed left click
in the field and move the trackball left to
decrease the value, or right to increase. Left click again to accept
the value.
2. To change the ETD, either:
i. Change the current date only by clicking on the drop down
button to the right of the ETD field; a popup calendar appears
with the current date highlighted. Navigate in the calendar to
select the required start date.
Or:
ii. Click inside the ETD field, the data
changes to green (for editable day time
setting) and an editing window appears
directly below the field.

8-52 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

iii. To move the date or time back click on the Down arrow, to
move the date or time forward click on the Up arrow. To move
the highlight back or forward (e.g. from Month to Year) click on
the side arrows.
iv. With the correct ETD data displayed click the OK button.
3. To change the start position of the SAR
pattern click in the LAT/LON data fields, the
text becomes editable (green) and a drop
down keypad appears. There are a number
of ways of defining the start position.
i. Manually enter a LAT/LON position by
using the numbers and navigation
buttons on the keypad and click OK.
The first waypoint is moved to the
entered position.
ii. To place the first waypoint at a specific
geographic object select Query. Move
the cursor to the display (a ? is added to
the cursor) and left click; a Chart Query
window appears with a list of objects in
the immediate area (see Chart Query).
Select the object from the list, the waypoint is repositioned
over the chart object and a red circle filled with a red shaded
background is drawn around the waypoint. Click OK on the
Chart Query window to fix the waypoint at the chart object
position.
iii. To place the first waypoint at own ship's CCRP select
Ownship.
iv. To place the first waypoint at a selected location on the video
circle select From Chart. Move the cursor to the display (a ?
is added to the cursor) and left click at the required location,
the waypoint is repositioned to that location.
v. To specify a range or bearing for the first waypoint select
Offset. An Offset window appears where you can set a range
and bearing offset from the current position.

65900010 8-53
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The following parameter default values apply to each SAR pattern:

Parameter Default Pattern

Length 5 NM Creeping Line, Parallel Line
Width 2 NM Creeping Line, Parallel Line,
Expanding Box
Separation 1 NM Creeping Line, Parallel Line
Expanding Box
Sector Width 5 NM Sector Search

4. To change the pattern parameters refer to step 1 above.

5. To change the orientation of the SAR pattern click the Port or
Starboard radio button.
6. To change the leg type from the default Rhumb Line click on the
drop down button and select Great Circle.
7. To restore the setting values to the default parameters click the
Reset button.
8. To clear a SAR pattern from the display click the Clear button.
9. To save changes made to a SAR pattern click the Save button and
enter a name for the SAR pattern route.

When a SAR pattern is saved the system creates a route. This route can
then be opened for monitoring and editing in the same way as other routes,
see Monitor Route and Edit Route.
The route will also generate errors and warnings.
If a SAR pattern route generates validation errors
the No Errors button changes to Errors with a
yellow background. Validation errors are rectified in the same way as
described in Edit Route – Route Tab.
To clear a SAR pattern from the display click the Clear button. Any edits
that have been made to the pattern will remain on the SAR window.
To display an edited SAR pattern that has been
cleared either close and re-open the SAR window;
or right click on the SAR pattern button, select
another pattern and then re-select the edited
pattern.

8-54 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

External Routes
The VisionMaster FT system can be configured to accept external routes
from up to five external sources (for example, a GPS23 system), providing
they are transmitted to the system in an acceptable format.
External Route Validation
The external route is considered invalid if any of the following apply:
 The latitude of any waypoint is within one degree of a pole.
 There are fewer than two waypoints in the route.
All external routes are subjected to route validation. If an external route is
considered invalid, it is not displayed and a warning is raised notifying the
operator of an attempt to import an invalid external route.
Default Attributes
If the waypoint or leg attributes of an external route are not specified, then
system default values are used.
All attributes of external routes are read-only, with the exception of leg type
and off-track alarm limit.
Monitoring External Routes
The External Routes menu is used to select the source of the external
route, and to monitor the route. Only one external route can be displayed
and monitored at a time. The following external route attributes are
displayed on the External Routes menu:
 the ship’s cross-track distance from the route and whether the ship
is to the right or left of the track.
 the estimated amount of time and distance before reaching the TO-
waypoint based on the current ground speed of the ship.
 the name of the TO-waypoint 24 while route monitoring.
The following functions are not provided for external routes:
 track control
 return to planned route25
 saving route

23
Global Positioning System. A system by which receivers anywhere on earth can obtain
accurate position data.
24
The waypoint to which the ship is approaching.
25
A return to planned route is a leg that joins a temporary route with a planned route.

65900010 8-55
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The system is designed to display the “working” portion of the route

received from an external source. This means that only a subset of
the total number of legs and waypoints in the actual route will be
displayed. This normally includes the route leg from the most
recently passed waypoint, to a maximum of 9 subsequent route
legs with their associated waypoints. The system automatically
scrolls ahead in the route each time a new waypoint is reached.

Multi-node Support
External routes and associated source selection are distributed to all nodes
on the network. Each node is able to display an external route
independently.

8-56 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Importing and Exporting a Route

The Import/Export sub menu enables you to import or export routes that
have been created on a VisionMaster FT. Routes not currently on a
console can be imported from an external drive (usually a USB memory
stick), and existing routes can be exported to an external drive.

The import/export facility is usually done when operating from a

single node. On a multi-node system a route saved on one node
can be accessed and edited on any node on the network.

Importing Routes
To import routes do the following:
1. If the external drive containing the route (or routes) to be imported
is a USB memory stick connect the device to a USB port at the
front of the VisionMaster PC.
2. From the Route Import/Export window
click the Import tab. A navigation tree
for the external device will be displayed
in the field below.
3. Navigate to the folder on the external
device where the route resides. The
field below the navigation tree will show
any valid route object files contained in
the selected device.
4. Highlight the route file to select for
import. Note that this file may contain
multiple routes.
5. Click the Import button to import the selected route file to your
Workstation, if successful a temporary confirmation prompt
appears. The imported route will be available for monitoring and
editing from the Monitor/Edit Route tab.

65900010 8-57
Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Exporting Routes
To export routes do the following:
1. If the external drive where the route(s)
are to be exported to is a USB
memory stick connect the device to a
USB port at the front of the
VisionMaster PC.
2. From the Route Import/Export window
click the Export tab. A navigation tree
listing the routes that are on the
workstation and available for export
are displayed.
3. Select one or more routes for export
by ticking the check boxes. Or to
export all routes click the Select All
button.
4. The navigation tree below the Format
field enables you to navigate to the
required folder on the external device
where the route files are to be
exported to.
5. Enter a file name for the routes in the
Filename field.
6. Click the Export button to export the
selected routes from your Workstation
to the external device; if successful a
temporary confirmation prompt appears.
7. Click the Eject button and remove the external device from the
workstation.

8-58 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes

Route Display Settings

The Route Display Settings sub-menu enables
you to select the graphic display of labels
associated with the displayed route.
The following display settings are available:
 Display Monitored Route - displays the
route currently being monitored,
defaults to ticked.
 Critical Point labels - displays a label for
each critical point (CP1 etc.)
 Leg bearings - displays bearing data of
each route leg in degrees
 Planned speeds - displays own ship's
planned speed between each waypoint.
 Waypoint labels - displays a label for each waypoint (W1 etc.)
 Wheel-over labels - displays a numerical label for each wheel-over
(WO(2) etc.)
 XTD Alarm Lines - displays a series of XTD lines on the safety
region lines.
When all display options are ticked the route is displayed as shown below.

The Wheel-over type section of the folder determines how the wheel-over
lines are drawn and includes the following radio buttons:
 Parallel to next leg - the wheel-over line is drawn parallel to the
next leg in the route.
 Perpendicular to leg - the wheel-over line is drawn at right angles to
the route leg that approaches the associated turn.
The bottom of the Route Display Settings window shows a description of
the settings as the cursor moves over each setting text.

65900010 8-59
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Chapter 9 Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Electronic Range and Bearing Lines (ERBLs)
Two electronic bearing lines (EBLs) and two variable range markers
(VRMs) are available in both Standby and Transmit modes and can be
displayed simultaneously or separately on the video circle. An ERBL is
used to describe the combination of an EBL and a VRM.

EBLs display distance and bearing between objects and are shown as a
dashed white line drawn on the video circle with its origin initially from the
CCRP or another selected origin point.
VRMs are used to display a range ring, initially centred on CCRP, or
another selected origin point.
Each VRM is a ring of long dashes. The first and second VRMs have
different mark/space ratio of line dashes.
If an EBL is turned On while its associated VRM is turned Off, then a small
cross appears on the EBL where the VRM intersects.
When an EBL is switched on the EBL bearing value (degrees) and VRM
range value (nautical miles) associated with the EBL are displayed to the
right of the button.

Each EBL and its associated VRM are identified by having the
same mark/space ratio for the line and ring.

65900010 9-1
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Off-Centring, Carrying and Dropping an ERBL

The default position for EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/VRM2 is centred on own
ship's CCRP. When centred the ERBL can be offset, dropped, or its end
point dropped. After being offset, the ERBL is carried at a constant relative
bearing and range from the CCRP. When dropped, the ERBL remains at a
fixed position on the ground, regardless of the current stabilization mode
(ground or water referenced).
The initial options available by right clicking on the EBL/VRM buttons are:
 Offset Origin - moves the ERBL to a location anywhere on the
chart window, when the offset position is fixed the ERBL is in Carry
mode.
 Drop Origin - drops the ERBL in a fixed location. As own ship's
course and speed progresses the ERBL remains stationary at a
fixed point on the video circle.
 Drop End Point -drops the ERBL's intersection point at a fixed
location, but carries the origin with own ship.
 The range and bearing to the end point update every second.
After Offset Origin or Drop Origin has been applied the following option
becomes available:
 Centre Origin - moves the ERBL back to the position centred on
own ship's CCRP.
After Drop origin only has been applied the following option becomes
available:
 Carry Origin - the ERBL moves relative to own ship from the
location selected in Drop Origin.

9-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)

Each EBL can be turned on or off independently. Previous settings are
remembered when they are switched off.
To turn on an EBL from the ERBL window, do the following:
1. Left click on the EBL caption button.
The EBL button is highlighted, the
lettering appears bold and the last
bearing value entered is displayed. On
the video circle the EBL is displayed as
a dashed line at a bearing angle dictated by the EBL readout.
Alternatively, turn the EBL rotary control on the control panel to switch
on EBL1.

When an EBL is switched on the value of its associated VRM is

also shown, although the VRM is switched off. A cross hair is
shown at the point where the VRM intersects the EBL.

2. To turn the EBL off, left click on the EBL button. The EBL lettering
and button return to normal, the bearing value and the VRM range
value are replaced by the Off caption, and the EBL is removed
from the video circle.

Changing the EBL Bearing

The EBL bearing angles may be true or relative, denoted by the letter T to
indicate true bearing, or the letter R for relative bearing.
There are two ways of changing the bearing of an EBL. Either enter the
values directly in the EBL field or manually drag the line to the selected
position using the trackball.
To change the bearing of an EBL do the following:
To change the EBL bearing angle using the trackball:
1. Position the screen cursor over the EBL, the cursor changes to the
following graphic
2. Click on any point of the EBL and hold the left key down.
3. Move the trackball left or right to change the EBL's bearing. The
readout changes in the EBL field and the reciprocal bearing
automatically changes.
4. With the bearing angle correctly set release the left key to accept.

65900010 9-3
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To change the EBL bearing from the readout:

1. Left click in the readout field. The readout text becomes editable
(green).
2. Move the trackball left or right until the required readout is
displayed.
3. Left click to accept new readout and exit edit mode.
To change the EBL bearing from the Control Panel:
1. Turn the EBL rotary control clockwise to increase the EBL bearing
angle, or anti-clockwise to decrease the EBL bearing angle.

If both EBLs are switched off, turning the EBL rotary will
automatically switch on EBL1. If EBL1 is switched off but EBL2 is
on then turning the rotary will adjust the EBL2 bearing.

Changing the EBL Position

To change the origination of an EBL do the following:
There are two methods of moving an EBL to an off-centre position:
1. With the EBL switched on right click
on the caption button. A floating
window appears with the options:
Offset Origin, Drop Origin (D) and
Drop End Point (E). For a
description of these options see
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines (ERBLs).
Or:
2. Right click on the origin of the EBL on
the video circle. A semi-transparent
window appears on the screen with the
options Offset EBL / VRM and Drop
EBL / VRM.
Where Offset Origin or Offset EBL / VRM is
selected:
1. The cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator and the EBL
and its associated VRM caption displays the suffix (C).

9-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

2. When Offset is selected, the EBL is immediately positioned

wherever the cursor is on the video circle. Using the trackball,
move the EBL to the required offset location. When the EBL is
offset, the origin of the EBL is indicated by a white dot.
3. Left click to position, the EBL is now in Carry mode and moves
relative to own ship. Or right click to cancel and return EBL to the
CCRP.
Where Drop Origin (D) or Drop EBL / VRM is selected:
1. A white dot is displayed at the origin of the EBL and the EBL and its
associated VRM caption are shown with the suffix (D). Unlike
Offset, the EBL does not move when the cursor moves. When the
cursor is positioned over the EBL origin it changes to a bidirectional
arrow indicator.
2. To move, left click and hold on the EBL origin. With the left button
held down, use the trackball to move the EBL to the required
location and release the left button to drop the EBL. The EBL
remains stationary in the selected location.
To re-position the EBL back to own ship's CCRP
either right click on the EBL caption and select
Centre Origin from the drop down window, or
right click on the EBL dot and select Centre EBL
/ VRM from the semi-transparent window.
When Drop End Point (E) is selected from the EBL readout:
1. The EBL and VRM captions are shown with the suffix (E). As the
ship moves, the EBL/VRM range and bearing are continually
updated to the dropped intersection point.
2. To cancel Drop End Point right click on the readout and select
Carry End Point.
3. Or to drop the EBL/VRM at the current position select Drop Origin
(D) from the drop down window, or right click on the EBL origin and
select Drop EBL / VRM.

65900010 9-5
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Variable Range Marker (VRM)

Each VRM can be turned on or off independently. Previous settings are
remembered when they are switched off. The default range value for VRM
1 is 2.5 NM; the default range value for VRM 2 is 4.5 NM.
To turn on a VRM do the following:
1. Left click on the VRM caption button.
The VRM button is highlighted, the
lettering appears bold and the range
value is displayed. On the video circle,
the VRM is displayed as a dashed
circle centred on the CCRP. The size of the circle is dictated by the
VRM range readout.
2. To turn the VRM off left click on the VRM caption button. The VRM
is removed from the video circle, and the range value is replaced
by the Off caption.

Changing the VRM and EBL range

There are a number of ways to change the VRM range. Either enter the
values in the VRM field or manually change the VRM diameter on the video
circle.
The VRM range can also be changed in conjunction with the EBL bearing.
To change the range of a VRM do the following:
To manually change the VRM range:
1. Position the screen cursor anywhere over the VRM circle line, the
screen cursor changes to the following graphic .
2. Left click on any point of the circle line and hold the left key down.
3. Move the trackball left or right to change the size of the circle. The
range readout automatically changes in the VRM field.
4. When the range is correctly set left click to accept.
To change the VRM range from the readout:
1. Left click in the readout field. The readout text becomes editable
(green).
2. Move the trackball left or right until the required readout is
displayed.
3. Left click to accept new readout and exit edit mode.

9-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Changing the size of the VRM does not change the EBL bearing.
As the VRM size changes the EBL origin remains constant.

To change the VRM range from the Control Panel:

1. Turn the VRM rotary control clockwise to increase the VRM range,
or anti-clockwise to decrease the VRM range.

If both VRMs are switched off, turning the VRM rotary control will
automatically switch on VRM1. If VRM1 is switched off but VRM2 is
on then turning the rotary control will adjust the VRM2 range.

To change both the VRM range and its EBL bearing:

1. Move the cursor to the intersection position of the VRM and EBL,
the screen cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator.
2. Hold down the left key and move the trackball left or right to change
the VRM range and EBL bearing. The bearing and range readout
values automatically update as the VRM / EBL is moved.
3. Release the left key to fix the VRM range and EBL bearing
location.

Changing the VRM and EBL position

To change the position of a VRM and its EBL do the following:
There are two methods of moving a VRM and EBL to an off-centre position
these are:
1. With the VRM switched on right click on
the caption button. A floating window
appears with the options: Offset Origin,
Drop Origin (D) and Drop End Point
(E). For a description of these options
see `Off-Centring, Carrying and
Dropping an ERBL’ at the beginning of this chapter.
Or:
2. Right click on the centre of the VRM on
the video circle. A semi-transparent
window appears on the screen with the
options Offset EBL / VRM and Drop
EBL / VRM.
Where Offset Origin or Offset EBL / VRM is selected:
1. The cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator and the VRM
and its associated EBL caption displays the suffix (C).

65900010 9-7
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

2. When Offset is selected the VRM is immediately positioned

wherever the cursor is on the video circle. Using the trackball move
the VRM to the required offset location. When the VRM is offset the
centre of the VRM is indicated by a white dot.
3. Left click to position, the VRM is now in Carry mode and moves
relative to own ship. Or right click to cancel and return VRM to own
ship's CCRP.
Where Drop Origin (D) or Drop EBL / VRM is selected:
1. A white dot is displayed at the centre of the VRM and the VRM and
its associated caption are shown with the suffix (D). Unlike Offset,
the VRM does not move when the cursor moves. When the cursor
is positioned over the VRM origin it changes to a bidirectional arrow
indicator.
2. To move, left click and hold on the VRM origin. With the left button
held down, use the trackball to move the VRM to the required
location and release the left button to drop the VRM. The VRM
remains stationary in the selected location.
To re-position the VRM back to own ship's CCRP
either right click on the VRM caption and select
Centre Origin from the drop down window, or
right click on the VRM origin and select Centre
EBL / VRM from the semi-transparent window.
Where Drop End Point (E) is selected from the VRM readout:
1. The EBL and VRM captions are shown with the suffix (E). As the
ship moves the ERBL range and bearing are continually updated to
the dropped intersection point.

In Drop End Point mode, the EBL/VRM readouts are greyed out.
The only way to change the EBL/VRM values or move the ERBL
intersection point is on the video circle.

2. To cancel Drop End Point right click on the

readout and select Carry End Point (C)
from the drop down.
3. Or to drop the ERBL at the current position
select Drop Origin (D) from the drop down
window, or right click on the VRM origin and select Drop EBL /
VRM.

9-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Chapter 10 Targets
The Targets facility provides information and
management of all targets, including locally
tracked targets and AIS targets26.
To open the menu left click on the Targets
button in the main menu list. The Targets sub-
menu list is displayed with the following
selection options:
 Selected Target, which includes Target
Data and AIS Info
 Multiple Targets
 Target Display
 AIS Display
 Acquisition Zones
 Own Ship AIS
 Limits and Settings
 Test Targets
 PAD (Predicted Area of Danger) – if configured
This chapter also includes information on the tracking and monitoring of
targets, selecting a target for echo reference and target repair.
If your VisionMaster system is a stationary installation, the option to select
a target for anchor watch will also be included. For information on this
facility, see `Target Anchor Watch’ in Annex B `Static Site'.

26
Automatic Identification System. A system capability which enables ships and shore stations
to obtain identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea, using an automated
transponder.

65900010 10-1
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Tracking Targets
You can manually acquire individual local targets to be tracked, providing
the targets are within the tracking range of 0.25 NM to 40 NM. The
maximum number of targets that can be tracked by the system is 100.
Local targets can also be tracked automatically when they enter auto
acquisition zones, see Acquisition Zones.
Tracked targets can be cancelled, providing they are in the cancellation
range up to 40 NM, see Cancelling Tracked Targets.
To track a target do the following
1. Left click on the target to be tracked. A green broken
line circle initially appears centred on the target’s
estimated position. A number is automatically
assigned to the target if enabled in the Identification
area of Target Display.

If good plot data is not extracted (i.e. if acquisition is attempted

over an area containing no radar video) then the target is declared
lost and the Lost Target icon (red cross) is displayed, see Target
Monitoring.

2. When the target is established the broken line

circle is replaced by a green dot and a motion
trend vector indicating the target’s estimated
velocity originated from the target's position. The
length of the vector is determined by the target’s
velocity and the currently selected vector time, see Vector Modes.
If AIS is configured then the target's motion trend vector is shown
as a dotted line, if AIS is not configured then the vector is shown as
a solid line.

3. To view data on the tracked target left click on the

target dot. A green broken line box appears around
the dot and the target details appear in the Target
Data tab folder of Selected Target sub menu.

4. Tracked targets may be named in the Target

Data tab folder (providing Both is selected in
Target Display). When a target is named the
name entered appears above the assigned
number.

10-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Target Data received from TLB Sentence

If target data is being received from legacy radar equipment (for example, a
BridgeMaster E [BME] or other radar hardware) via a port on the PCIO
used for TLB communications, then target names may also be prefixed with
the contents of the TLB message's label field in parentheses, with a space
between this TLB name and the name assigned internally.
If this option has been configured (as described in section 8.9.1 `Target
Rename Input' in Chapter 1 `Configuration' of the VMFT Ships Manual
Volume 2) then the operator is still able to change the last part of the name
as long as the correlated target does not have an AIS target associated
with it.
Tracking Targets on a Multi-Node System
On a multi-node system one node is responsible for correlating targets at
any one time. The correlation information is distributed to ensure target
numbering across all nodes is identical. Also, a target name that has been
entered on a node is distributed to all other nodes on the system.
Only local tracked targets, acquired by the operator on a Radar or Chart
Radar node are displayed. These tracked targets will not appear on other
nodes unless the operator manually acquires the same target.
When a target, previously acquired on another node is selected to be
tracked the system may initially assign the latest target number to it,
depending on the proximity of the selection made to the targets actual
position (see Target Association values in Limits and Settings). This
number will change to the correlated number once the target is tracked,
(i.e. the number assigned to the target when it was first acquired.)
Where a target is correlated with a tracked target from an external input,
such as a BME, AIS and local tracked targets take priority over the external
input target, regardless of the display priority selected.

Tracking Targets on a Dual Radar System

On dual radar, targets are acquired as described for a single system,
providing the targets are within the tracking range (0.25NM to 40NM) for
both transceivers.
Video from both transceivers is used to track targets, with a single vector
displayed at the target position. The system displays the better of the target
information obtained, based on a combination of reported accuracy
information from the tracker, along with consideration of the number of
times video has been seen or not seen for the target.

65900010 10-3
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

If the target passes into a blind arc of one radar but is still visible on the
other, the target will continue to be tracked as normal without any alerts
being raised. The same limits on maximum number of targets tracked
apply as for a single radar system.

Tracked Targets Capacity

Single Node
The tracked target capacity for a single node is dependent on the
Radar/Chart Radar product type being used, (see `Product Types’ in
Chapter 1 Overview).
If the Radar/Chart Radar product type is a CAT 1 or Enhanced CAT 2 the
maximum number of targets that can be tracked on a single node is 100.
If the product type is a CAT 2 Radar the maximum number of targets that
can be tracked on a single node is 60.
If the number of tracked targets is near the maximum allowed (95%
capacity) a caution is given; Tracks Almost Full. If the number of targets
reaches the maximum and the user attempts to acquire an additional target
a local Tracks Full warning is raised and no further targets may be tracked
on the node.
The warnings and cautions raised for tracked target capacity are
independent of how targets are actually acquired; whether manually,
through AIS activation, or automatically via an acquisition zone.
Multi- Node
The maximum number of targets that can be tracked on a multi-node
system is 200.
If the number of tracked targets reaches 95% of the system maximum a
caution is given; System Tracks Almost Full. If the number of targets
reaches the maximum and the user attempts to acquire an additional target
a System Tracks Full warning is raised and no further targets may be
tracked on the nodes.
On a three node system each node may track up to 100 targets
individually; but if the first node is tracking 50 targets and the second node
75 targets, the third node may only track up to 75 targets. In this case, the
System Tracks Full warning would be raised when an attempt is made to
acquire the 201st target, but the local Tracks Full warning would not be
raised since none of the nodes have reached their maximum.

10-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

AIS Targets
AIS Rendering Conditions
AIS targets are only rendered when the following conditions apply:
 There is a valid position and heading for own ship
 Enable Input is checked in AIS Display
 AIS target messages are being received and are valid.
 The Sleeping Target filter setting is checked in AIS Display.
 Own ship's position in WGS84 27datum is known.
When AIS targets are not being rendered, received AIS transmissions
continue to be stored so that known targets can be rendered quickly when
conditions indicate rendering should proceed.
For information on enabling AIS input and setting AIS filter settings,
including AIS objects, refer to AIS Display.

AIS Target States

AIS targets 28 are usually displayed on the video circle as triangles (unless
the AIS is a scaled ship symbol) and may be shown in one of the following
states:
Sleeping A sleeping target is slightly smaller in size
than an activated target and is not
displayed with heading line or vectors.

Activated An activated target is displayed with

heading and speed/course vector. The
speed/course vector is a dashed line
originating from the centre of the triangle,
the length of line being proportional to the
vector time.
If heading data is missing or invalid the
course vector is shown in place of the
heading line.
If neither heading nor COG data is
available the triangle is oriented toward the
top of the display area.

27
World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) is a chart datum model used by chart makers to
map the earth’s surface.
28
If the target has an AIS target associated with it and the AIS target has a name assigned,
this name will be used and may not be changed. Names assigned to targets will be distributed
across all nodes in the system.

65900010 10-5
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Activated When an activated target is selected a

and Selected dashed square outline appears centred on
the target origin and information on the
target is shown in the AIS Info window.

When an activated AIS target’s length and

beam exceed the standard AIS symbol
triangle, the AIS triangle is drawn with the
ship’s outline around it. The ships outline
symbol is not displayed if any of the
following apply:
 When the reference point of the
reported position is unavailable.
 When the dimensions of the ship are
unavailable.
 When the beam of the outline is less
than 7.5mm.
 When the targets heading is not
reported
When the AIS ship's outline is selected to
display target tote information, the dashed
square outline appears centred on the
target origin and information on the target
is shown in the AIS window.
An AIS ship's outline is NOT
considered for CPA/TCPA
infringements. These calculations will
be taken from the AIS triangle symbol.

Not used in The AIS symbol is rendered as a dotted

collision line with no vector when not used in
avoidance collision avoidance calculations when SOG
and/or COG are not available. Or when
the Activate on CPA/TCPA/BCR setting is
disabled in AIS Display.
The default state for a newly acquired target is sleeping.
The following criteria will cause a sleeping target to become activated:
 When manually selected by the operator (see below).
 When the target infringes the CPA/TCPA/BCR limits shown on the
Target Data tab folder of the Selected Target sub menu.
This is providing the Activate on CPA/TCPA/BCR setting is
enabled in the AIS Display window.

10-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

 When the target enters an auto acquisition zone, see Acquisition

Zones.
To manually activate an AIS target do the following
1. Left click on the AIS target, an activated AIS
target will display a heading and
speed/course vector. An AIS reference and
automatically assigned target number will
also be displayed, if enabled in the
Identification area of Target Display.
2. To view data on an activated AIS target left click on the target
again. A dotted green square appears around the target and the
AIS details are displayed in the Target Data tab folder of Selected
Target sub menu.
Changing an Activated Target to Sleeping
An activated, or activated and selected target can be manually set to
sleeping, providing it doesn't infringe the criteria listed above.
To set a target to sleeping do the following:
1. Right click on the AIS target.
2. A semi-transparent window appears, left
click on Set to Sleeping
3. The target is deactivated and its heading,
speed/course data and identification data
is removed from the screen. If the target
was activated and selected the selection
box remains around the target.
4. To reactivate a sleeping target left click on the target again, all
previous target data is restored.
All AIS targets can be set to sleeping with one command from the AIS
Display window, see `Set All AIS Targets to Sleeping' in AIS Display.

AIS Target Display Capacity

The target processing capacity for rendering AIS targets and other AIS Nav
symbols, such as Aid to Navigation (ATON), SAR and Base Station at any
one time is 240.
If the number of AIS targets and AIS nav symbols is near the maximum
allowed (95%) an AIS Almost Full caution is raised.
An AIS Exceeds Capacity warning is raised when there are more than 240
AIS targets and AIS nav symbols being reported to the system.

65900010 10-7
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

In the event of AIS display capacity being exceeded, only the closest 240
AIS targets to own ship are displayed and used for CPA/TCPA. AIS targets
further away will not be rendered until the maximum capacity has receded.

Active AIS Target Capacity

The maximum number of active AIS targets on a single node or multi-node
is 40.
If the number of active AIS targets is near the maximum allowed (95%) an
Active AIS Almost Full caution is raised.
An Active AIS Full warning is raised when an attempt is made to activate a
target (by any means) when the number of active AIS targets has reached
the maximum. In this case one or more AIS targets must be set to sleeping
before further AIS targets can be activated.
Activating AIS Targets when Capacity is Reached
VisionMaster allows for the activation of AIS targets (and associated
tracking of any underlying radar target) even when the activated capacity
has been reached (i.e. 40 activated AIS targets).
This is done by the system selecting the least navigationally significant
target and automatically setting it to sleeping (with any underlying tracked
target being cancelled).
When a sleeping AIS target is selected for activation whilst at capacity the
system will determine which active AIS target is least significant and
automatically set that target to sleeping. This will happen providing the
target is not infringing CPA/TCPA or BCR/BCT alarm criteria, designated a
target of interest by virtue of being selected for display in a target tote, or is
currently in an auto-acquisition zone.
The following criteria are used for determining the least navigationally
significant target:
1. First the system looks for targets that are 1 minute or more past
TCPA, and within this group will drop the target at the greatest
range from own ship.
2. If no active AIS targets are at least 1 minute past TCPA then the
AIS target most distant from own ship will be set to sleeping.
AIS targets can also be automatically dropped by the operator adjusting the
Autodrop range lower than the default of 10 NM. For details, refer to
`AutoDrop Targets’ in the Target Display section.

10-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Target Alert States

The following alert states apply to any AIS target in any state, (with the
exception that sleeping targets do not raise the Lost alert):
 CPA/TCPA/BCR or Acquisition Zone infringement
 Lost
CPA/TCPA/BCR When an AIS target infringes the
or Acquisition CPA/TCPA /BCR criteria, or when it
zone enters an Acquisition zone, the target
infringement symbol and its heading/vector are
rendered in flashing red.
When the AIS scaled ship symbol is used
the ship outline is also rendered in
flashing red.

Lost Activated targets that are deemed lost

are rendered with a red cross through the
AIS symbol. The target maintains its last
heading and COG/SOG and will continue
to be dead reckoned until the Lost
Target alert is acknowledged. The cross
symbol flashes while the alert is
unacknowledged.
Note that lost AIS targets do not generate
CPA/TCPA alerts.

AIS targets in an Acquisition Zone will remain flashing red until the AZ
Entry alert is acknowledged (see Alert Status Indicator). When the alert
has been acknowledged the AIS symbol will revert to its normal (green)
state, even when the target remains in the Acquisition Zone.
When CPA/TCPA Limit and Bow Crossing Limit alerts have been
acknowledged the AIS symbol stops flashing, but the symbol remains in
red until the CPA/TCPA and Bow Crossing infringement limits no longer
apply.

65900010 10-9
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

AIS Safety Messages

Safety messages can be sent from own ship to
selected AIS targets. The safety message is sent
using an AIS minimum Keyboard & Display (MKD)
which can be accessed by either right clicking on
the AIS target, or from the AIS Info tab folder in the
Selected Target sub menu.
For information on using the MKD to send safety
messages, see AIS Info.

Multi-Node Support for AIS Targets

In a multi-node system, one or more nodes may be responsible for
interfacing with the device that provides AIS target and own ship AIS data.
The system will make one node (with an interface to an AIS device)
responsible for distributing the AIS target and own ship data to all other
nodes.

WARNING!

IF A LOCAL NODE LOOSES COMMUNICATION WITH THE AIS

DISTRIBUTING NODE, ALL AIS TARGETS ARE REMOVED FROM
THE LOCAL NODE DISPLAY.

10-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Classes and Types of AIS

There are two classes of AIS target, Class A and Class B, as well as
different types of AIS used for shore stations (Base Stations), Aids to
Navigation (AtoN), AIS on search and rescue (SAR) aircraft and AIS
Search and Rescue Transmitters (SART).
The table below describes the classes and types of AIS.
Class and Type Description
Class A Under the Safety Of Life At Sea (SOLAS) convention, all
the following vessel types are required to install a Class A
AIS transponder:
 Upwards of 300 gross tonnage engaged on
international voyages.
 All passenger vessels engaged on international
voyages.
 Upwards of 500 gross tonnage not engaged on
international voyages
Class B Class B is intended for non-SOLAS commercial and
recreational vessels.
Base Station Base Stations enable the ship to shore / shore to ship
transmission of information to be provided. Networked AIS
Base Stations can assist in providing overall maritime
domain awareness.
Aids to Navigation AtoN enables the position and status of buoys and lights
(AtoN) to be transmitted.
In some cases, such as marking a wreck until a physical
buoy can be deployed, a virtual ATON is created. A
shore-based AIS system is configured to transmit AIS
messages indicating the existence of an ATON at a
specified location.
Search and Rescue Search and Rescue Aircraft may use AIS to assist in their
(SAR) Aircraft operations.
SART Search and Rescue Transmitters using AIS can be used
to assist in determining the location of a vessel in distress.
The AIS Display window allows the operator to filter the display of Class A
and Class B AIS targets and also the types of AIS.

65900010 10-11
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Target Monitoring
All targets are monitored for Lost Target. Established tracked targets and
AIS targets (both activated and sleeping) are monitored for CPA/TCPA
using own ship’s CCRP for reference and BCR/BCT infringements, using
own ship's bow for reference.

Lost Target
If the system loses track of a target then a Lost Target alert (warning) is
raised for that target and an appropriate flashing alarm symbol placed over
the target’s symbol, see Target Monitoring Symbols.
Lost Target alerts can be raised on all nodes and a lost target range limit
may be set, so that only lost targets within a specified limit from own ship
will raise a Lost Target alert. For details refer to Limits and Settings.
On dual radar a Lost Target alert is raised if neither transceiver has seen
video in the last six scans.
Any flashing Lost Target alert symbols stop flashing when acknowledged
but the alert symbol remains centred over the lost target(s).
The alert symbol is automatically cleared if:
 the target ceases to report itself as lost; or
 the target is cancelled or dropped.
The Lost Target alert automatically clears when there are no lost targets.

CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT Infringement Conditions

The conditions for a target to generate an infringement are:
 Both CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values are positive (i.e. target has
not yet reached the closest point but will do so).
 Both CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values are less than or equal to the
limits entered.
If an infringement is detected an alert is raised and an appropriate symbol
displayed flashing at the target's position.
Once the alert is acknowledged, any flashing alert symbols stop flashing
but remain over the target(s) infringing the limits.
The alert symbol, flashing or not flashing, is removed when:
 The target no longer infringes the defined limits, for definition of
limits see Limits and Settings.
 The target is cancelled or dropped.
The alert is cleared when there are no targets infringing the defined limits.

10-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

The CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values for a target are shown on the Target
Data tab folder of the Selected Target sub menu.

Target Monitoring Symbols

The system shows the following alarm monitoring symbols used for targets.
CPA/TCPA and BCR Solid circle
infringements see Limits Unacknowledged alert - flashing red
and Settings Acknowledged alert - solid red
Dashed circle.- target manually selected
Acquisition Zone in Zone
infringement - acquiring Flashing red until Acquisition Zone
infringement is established.

Acquisition Zone Small solid circle

infringement -established Unacknowledged alert – flashing red

AZ zone infringement - Small solid dot

established and Acknowledged alert – solid green
acknowledged
Crossed flashing red lines centred on
Lost Target the current target symbol.

Only one alert symbol appears on a target at any one time. The order of
precedence is:
1. CPA/TCPA/ BCR
2. Lost Target
3. Acquisition Zone infringement
Although the audible alert may be temporarily or permanently muted
(dependent on commissioning) the visual alert symbol will always apply,
unless tracking has ceased, or the alert condition no longer applies.

65900010 10-13
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Multi-Node Support
The same target monitoring limits (CPA/TCPA, bow crossing) are applied
on all nodes in the system. These values are calculated on individual
displays so that a target may, for example, have a different CPA/TCPA on
each display, depending on the results from the target tracker.
Each node evaluates the alert conditions on the targets that have been
processed by that node. Whenever a target alert is acknowledged on a
node, all targets of the same number on other nodes will have their alert
condition acknowledged. If other nodes have alerts for targets not present
on the acknowledging node, the alert condition for these targets remain
unchanged.

10-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Echo Reference Target

Echo reference is a method for generating a ground stabilised own ship’s
velocity by using a tracked target that is known to be stationary as a
reference point.
Any tracked target can be selected as an echo reference, providing the
target is established (i.e. has a vector), has not been declared lost, and AIS
input is off. Once selected its velocity is assumed to be zero and own ship's
speed is calculated on this assumption.

WARNING!

ECHO REFERENCE TARGETS MUST ONLY BE USED FOR THE

CALCULATION OF TRUE SPEED. USING REFERENCE TARGETS
TO CALCULATE RELATIVE SPEED CAN BE DANGEROUS. IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT AN ALTERNATIVE SPEED SENSOR IS
SELECTED FOR COLLISION AVOIDANCE PURPOSES.
THE LOSS OF AN ECHO REFERENCE TARGET MAY HAVE A
MAJOR IMPACT ON THE ACCURACY OF THE TRUE SPEED AND
TRUE COURSE VALUES OF TRACKED TARGETS. THE VALUES
FOR OWN SHIP’S SPEED WILL ALSO BE DEGRADED.

When a target has been selected as an echo reference, own ship’s velocity
source is automatically selected to be ground based using the echo
reference generated velocity.

Only one target can be designated as the echo reference target at any one
time.

65900010 10-15
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To select a target for echo reference, do the following:

1. Left click on AIS On button, and from the AIS Display window
uncheck Enable Input
2. Right click on the target to be selected
as an echo reference and left click on
Select for Echo Reference from the
semi-transparent window. R is
displayed adjacent to the reference
target, the target has its true vector
removed, and its speed is set to zero.
The ground stabilised sensor indicators
(COG and SOG ) at the top left of the
screen show the source as REF, see
Sensors Menu for information on sensor sources.
3. To change the echo reference to another target right click on the
target and highlight Select for Echo Reference again. The echo
reference is moved to the other target.
To cancel an echo referenced target:
1. Right click on either the COG or SOG
ground stabilised sensor indicator and
select the sensor source. The sensor
source window opens with the selected
source folder displayed and the current
sensor source (REF) in highlight.
2. Change back to the original sensor
source (e.g. GPS) by clicking its radio
button. A confirmation window appears; click the Yes button to
confirm the data change.

10-16 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

3. An Action Required window appears

requesting confirmation of which other
data types should be received from the
selected source i.e. if SOG data type
has been changed then the system
prompts to change the COG data type
from echo reference to the sensor
source selected for SOG.
4. Click on the Apply button, the echo
reference data source is removed from
the selected target.
The echo reference target velocity is set to
unusable when the following apply:
 the system is set to standby;
 the target goes beyond the maximum
tracking range;
 the echo referenced target is lost.
The echo reference target will be dropped when the following apply:
 the system is set to standby;
 the target goes beyond the maximum tracking range;
 the target is lost for more than 60 seconds.
A Lost Echo Reference alert will be raised if the system is switched to
Standby in echo reference mode.

65900010 10-17
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Selected Target Functions

Selected Target
The Selected Target sub menu is the default opening window in the
features area of the screen. The sub menu enables real time data on a
selected target to be displayed.
When a target has been selected it is tracked and identified on screen with
a green broken line box centred on the target origin for tracked targets and
AIS targets.
For details on acquiring and tracking targets, see Tracking Targets.
For details on activating and tracking AIS targets, see AIS Targets.
The Selected Target sub menu divides into the following tab folders:
 Target Data
 AIS Info
Targets are identified by number, name or both, depending on the
identification parameters selected in Target Display.
A valid heading must be provided in order for the system to track targets. If
a valid heading is not available for more than 60 seconds all tracked targets
are dropped from the Selected Target menu. Tracking is restored if the
heading becomes valid within 60 seconds.

10-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Target Data
The Target Data tab folder shows the following
tracking data on a selected target:
 Range - the distance of the target from
own ship's CCRP.
 True Bearing - the true bearing of the
target from own ship's CCRP.
 CPA -the CPA of the target from own
ship's CCRP
 TCPA - the TCPA of the target from
own ship's CCRP
 BCR - the BCR of the target from own
ship's bow
 BCT - the BCT of the target from own ship's bow
If the system is in water stabilised mode (see Sensor Data Display) the
following two fields are shown:
 CSE - the true CSE of target
 STW - the true STW of target
If the system is in ground stabilised mode the following two fields are
shown:
 COG - the true COG of target
 SOG - the true SOG of target
If a tracked target is not established only the target number or name, range
and true bearing are displayed.
If the target approach point has passed, the CPA field continues to show
the actual CPA value and the passing point is indicated by a TCPA with a
minus value.
The BCR and BCT are only shown if both the crossing time and the
distance are positive, i.e. a target is projected to cross own ship's bow but
has not yet done so. If the target is NOT projected to cross own ship's bow
then both fields are shown as dashed (--.-).
If a target is lost or if a valid heading or speed for own ship is not available
then any invalid target data, except the target number/name and its type, is
shown in an orange warning colour. If the target is subsequently found or
heading/speed becomes valid, the data reverts to its normal system colour.

65900010 10-19
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Tracked targets can be named from the Target Data folder. To name a
target:
1. Click in the target name field below the target identifier. The on
screen keypad appears.
2. Enter a name for the target using the keypad, when finished click
on the keypad OK button. The name entered appears in the Target
name field, and if either Name or Both is selected in the
Identification area of Target Display the name appears alongside
the target, or above the target number on the video circle.
Target Data AIS
Where the selected target is AIS the Target
Data folder includes the target's current
heading as additional data.
An activated AIS target in the Target Data tab
folder will also include a Show Tracked Data
button. To display tracked data on the AIS
click on the button and hold down the trackball
left key; release the left key to return to AIS
data.

10-20 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

AIS Info
The AIS Info tab folder displays alphanumeric
information for an activated AIS target.
AIS targets are only shown in Transmit mode
shown when there is a valid position and
heading for own ship and AIS Input is enabled
in the AIS Display window.
If a target is set to sleeping (see AIS Targets),
its data is automatically removed from AIS
Info.
When AIS targets are not shown, received AIS
transmissions continue to be stored so that
known targets can be rendered quickly when
conditions indicate rendering should proceed.
When an AIS target has been selected the tab
folder includes the following information:
 Target number assigned
 Name of target vessel (if known)
 Class A or B (targets prioritised in order
of importance, see `Classes and Types of
AIS’)
 Vessel MMSI
The button at the bottom of the AIS Info tab folder enables AIS safety
messages to be sent to selected AIS vessels.
The AIS Info folder also includes the following tabs containing additional
AIS information:
 Dynamic
 Voyage
 Static

65900010 10-21
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Dynamic Data
The following dynamic data is displayed:
 Lat/Lon position of target
 RAIM 29 in Use Indication
 Position Accuracy
 Time30
 COG – the target’s course bearing
 SOG – the target’s speed over ground
 Heading
 Navigational Status - e.g. Underway or Fishing
 Rate Of Turn (in degrees per minute)
Class B targets will not have Navigational Status and ROT information.
Voyage Data
The following voyage data is displayed (if no
voyage data is available then Missing,
Unknown or Not Available is displayed):

Draught - maximum draught of vessel in
metres.
 Haz. Cargo - information on any hazardous
materials the vessel may be carrying.
 Destination (data not available for Class B
targets)
 ETA - estimated time of arrival to
destination.
 Special Maneuver - options are Not
Available (default), Not engaged in Special Manoeuvre, and Engaged
in Special Manoeuvre.
Voyage data may initially be missing as it is transmitted less frequently than
dynamic information.

29
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) provides integrity monitoring of GPS
signals.
30
The time, in seconds, that message data was acquired from the AIS. The time will increment
up to a maximum of 60 seconds, before resetting to 0 or 1. The time incremental speed is
dependent on the speed of the AIS target.

10-22 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Static Data
The following static data is displayed (if no static
data is available then Missing or Unknown is
displayed):
 IMO number.
 Call Sign - vessel identification name (data
not available for Class B targets).
 Length (in metres)
 Beam (in metres)
 Vessel Type - e.g. Cargo or Tanker
 Location of antenna: Bow - configured
offset distance from antenna to vessel bow in metres.
 Location of antenna: Centre Line - configured offset distance from
antenna to centre line of vessel in metres.
Static data may initially be missing as it is transmitted less frequently than
dynamic information.

65900010 10-23
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

AIS Safety Messages

The AIS Info tab includes the ability to send safety related messages from
own ship to a selected AIS vessel.
Safety messages that have been sent from own ship are stored in the
`Message Tx’ folder of Own Ship AIS sub menu.
To send a safety message, do the following:
1. From the chart display select the AIS vessel where you want the
message sent to. Details of the selected AIS appear in the AIS Info
folder.
2. Click the Send Safety Message button at
the bottom of the tab folder. An Action
Required window appears with the vessel
MMSI above the message field.
3. Move the screen cursor into the message
field and left click, the AIS Minimum
Keyboard & Display (MKD) appears
below the field.
4. Enter a message using the MKD, note
that the MKD only supports the input of
uppercase format messages.
5. The MKD will be removed from the screen
after a short period of inactivity. To re-
enable the MKD left click in the message
field again.
6. To clear a message press the Clear
button, to cancel the send action press
Cancel.
7. When you have compiled a message click
the OK button, the MKD is removed from
the screen, to return the MKD click in the
message field again.
8. To send the message click the Send button. When the message
has been successfully sent to the AIS vessel a temporary prompt
`Message Sent’ appears in the Prompts field.

10-24 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Multiple Targets
The Multiple Targets menu can display
information on up to eight activated AIS and
tracked targets. The following summary data for
each target, based on distance and time from
own ship, is displayed:
 Target number (ID)
 CPA of target
 TCPA of target
If the target is AIS, the left hand column displays an AIS triangle symbol
adjacent to the target number.
The Multiple Targets menu is divided into three tab folders:
 CPA
 Range
 User
CPA tab folder displays only targets that have positive CPA/TCPA values,
targets with negative CPA/TCPA values are excluded from the sorted list.
The targets in the Range tab folder are sorted on the target range from own
ship.
The User tab folder lists the targets manually
acquired or AIS targets activated and selected
by the operator.
Targets are automatically removed from the tote
if they are dropped or cancelled by the operator.
A sleeping AIS target selected for the tote is
automatically set to activated.

65900010 10-25
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Automatic Sorting of Targets

Targets can be automatically sorted from the nearest to the furthest away
from own ship by the following criteria:
 CPA (default)
 TCPA
 Range
To sort the targets by CPA click on the triangle symbol in the CPA button.
To sort by TCPA click on the TCPA button to activate and then click the
triangle symbol in the TCPA button.

Selecting Targets for the User Folder

Any target manually selected from the video
circle is listed in the User folder, including
targets which are not established. In this case
the CPA and TCPA information displayed for
the target is shown as dashed until a vector is
established.
Targets are automatically removed from the list
if they are dropped or cancelled by the operator.
Or, to remove a target from the User list right click on the target line and
select Remove from the window fly out.

Viewing Target Data from Multiple Targets

Any target in the multiple target menu can be selected for display in the
target data window.
To select a target click on the target ID (from any of the three tab folders),
the Target Data folder from the Selected Target sub-menu is displayed with
the target's information.

10-26 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Target Display
The Target Display window shows the display
parameters for all targets.
Targets are only displayed when the system is in
Transmit. If the system is switched to Standby then
all targets are dropped.
Targets can be tracked either manually or
automatically by auto acquisition, see Acquisition
Zones. The tracking option is available in all
presentation modes and motion modes.
The Target Display window is divided into the
following areas:
 Target Display (selection of Display
Priority)
 Identification
 Past Position Dots
 Auto Drop Targets
 Other (Vector Timeout)
 Number of Targets

Target Display
The Display Targets check box controls the viewing of all targets on the
display. Tick the check box to view all targets (default), or untick to remove
the targets from the display.
The display priority between AIS targets and tracked targets may be
selected. The default selection is AIS Priority. To change the display
priority to tracked targets click the Tracked Priority radio button. Any AIS
targets currently displayed on the video circle will continue to be shown
without the AIS symbol.
The target display priority can also be changed from
the main screen. The Display Priority button at the top
right of the screen shows the current setting, either AIS Priority or TT
Priority. Left click on the button to toggle between the two display
priorities.

65900010 10-27
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Identification
The target identification is displayed adjacent to each target’s vector origin
and remains visible as long as the target origin is visible. You can select
the target identification to display one of the following:
 Num Target numbers only
 Name31 Target names only (the number will be displayed if no
name has been allocated).
 Both Target numbers and names (the name will be left blank if
none has been allocated).
 Off No identification

Past Position Dots

This area enables the display and editing of past position dots for all
targets, for information see Past Position Dots.

Auto Drop Targets

This area enables auto drop targets to be enabled and the auto drop range
to be adjusted, for information see `Auto Drop Targets’.

Other
The Vector Timeout check box should be ticked to ensure that the vector
True/Relative setting matches the Trails mode after the vector timeout of 30
seconds, see Vector Modes.

Cancel All Targets

The Cancel All Targets button enables all tracked targets on a node to be
cancelled, for information, see Cancelling Tracked Targets

Number of Targets
The Number of Targets area includes data:
 System Targets - this number represents all correlated targets
processed on the node (locally tracked and AIS).
 Local Tracked - this number represents the total number of
tracked targets only on the node.
 Total Tracked - appears on a multi-node system only. This number
represents all the tracked targets on all nodes of the system.

31
If the target has an AIS target associated with it and the AIS target has a name assigned,
this name will be used and may not be changed. Names assigned to targets will be distributed
across all nodes in the system.

10-28 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Tracking Parameters
The basic tracking parameters are shown in the following table.
Parameter Value
Tracking Range 0.25 to 40 NM
Acquisition Range 0.25 to 40 NM
Cancellation range 0.0 to 40 NM
Max number of tracked targets 100
Max tracking velocity 150 knots true32
Time to display motion trend vector 12 good plots

Past Position Dots

When past position dots are switched on, dots are
displayed on the screen indicating the past positions
of all targets (with the exception of sleeping AIS
targets).

As soon as a tracked target is acquired, or when an AIS target is activated,

the past position data starts to build up. The number of dots displayed, up
to a maximum of 4, is determined by the length of time the target has been
tracked and the time interval selected.
Past position dots are available in all presentation and motion modes
providing the system has a working compass. Dots always match the trail
mode, not the motion mode.
To turn past position dots on tick the Display Past Positions check box.

32
The system limits the tracking velocity of targets to 150 knots. Any target moving at a
velocity faster than this will continue to display 150 knots in the Target Data tab folder of the
Selected Target menu.
A target with a velocity of > 150 knots will not generate tracks when the target is in an
acquisition zone, see the Warning in Acquisition Zones.

65900010 10-29
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

A thin dotted line connecting the target and its associated dots may be
selected to be drawn. To turn the line on or off tick the Connecting Line
check box.
To change the past position time interval:
1. With the Display Past Positions check
box enabled click on the drop down arrow
next to the Interval time. The intervals are
displayed ranging from 15 seconds to 16
minutes.
2. Select the time interval from the drop
down list (the default time is 1 minute).
The system changes to displaying the position dots in the selected
time interval.

Auto Drop Targets

The operator can enable an auto-drop mode in which individual AIS or
tracked targets deemed not to be a threat to own ship are automatically
dropped by the tracker (or set to sleeping for AIS) without an alarm being
raised.
The system default for auto-drop mode is enabled and the setting stored
when altered and restored at power on.
The auto drop range can also be adjusted
between 3 NM and 99 NM. Reducing the auto
drop range from the default of 10 NM enables
the system to drop targets of less navigational
significance more quickly than the default 10 NM auto drop.
1. To enable Auto Drop tick the Enable check box.
2. To change the auto drop range click in the Range field and move
the trackball left (to decrease) or right (to increase).

WARNING!

IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT THE SELECTED AUTO DROP

RANGE VALUE NEEDS TO BE CONSISTENT WITH MAINTAINING
APPROPRIATE ANTI-COLLISION AND SITUATIONAL
AWARENESS.

10-30 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Tracked targets are dropped automatically if they meet all of the following
criteria:
 The target is not in an auto-acquisition zone.
 The target is not currently selected for display in the Target tote.
 It does not infringe the CPA/TCPA or BCR/BCT alarm criteria.
 It is fully established i.e. it has a motion trend vector displayed.
 The TCPA is more than 3 minutes ago.
 The target is astern of own ship.
 The target’s range is more than the defined auto drop range from
own ship.
 The target has not been selected as echo reference.
In addition to the auto-drop mode, tracked targets are always dropped
without an alarm being raised if they meet any of the following criteria:
 The target’s range is greater than the maximum tracking range.
 No good video data has been extracted for the target for the last 60
scans.
 The system has been switched to Standby.

Target Auto Drop on Dual Radar

On dual radar, targets are auto dropped if they meet the following criteria
(in addition to the criteria listed on the previous page):
 The target is astern of the transceiver connected to channel 1
 The range is more than the defined auto drop range from the
transceiver connected to channel 1
In addition, tracked targets on dual radar are always dropped without an
alarm being raised if they meet any of the following criteria:
 The range is more than 40.0 NM from all transceivers in transmit.
 No good video data has been extracted by either channel for the
last 60 scans.
 Both radar channels have been switched to Standby.

65900010 10-31
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Cancelling Tracked Targets

Tracked targets can be cancelled individually or collectively. When a target
is cancelled all alerts relating to the target are automatically cleared. If
local tracked targets are being displayed then the tracked target is
cancelled on the current node only.
On a multi-node system a target that has been tracked on a Radar node,
and is cancelled on the Radar node, will also be cancelled on an ECDIS
node, see Tracking Targets, `Cancelling Tracked Targets on a Multi-node
System'.
To cancel an individual tracked target, do the following:
1. Position the cursor over the target and
right click. A semi-transparent window
appears next to the selected target with
Cancel Target in highlight.
2. Left click on Cancel Target. The
selected target is removed from the
video circle and all details relating to the
target in the Target Data window are
removed.
To cancel all tracked targets do the following:
1. From the Target Display window click
on the Cancel All Targets button. The
screen prompts to confirm cancellation
of all tracked targets.
2. Select OK to proceed with the cancellation. All tracked targets, with
the exception of an echo reference target, are dropped and
removed from the screen. If an echo reference target is selected a
prompt will be displayed to indicate that the echo reference target
may not be cancelled.
When Cancel All Targets is selected all AIS targets are set to sleeping
unless they meet the following criteria:
 They are in an auto acquisition zone;
 They are infringing the CPA/TCPA or Bow Crossing limits.

10-32 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Target Repair
The Target Repair facility enables tracked targets to be repositioned if they
become separated from their target video. This is done by the operator
moving the tracked target origin to a new position.
Target Repair can only be made to tracked targets; it is not available to AIS
targets, or if the target has been selected as echo reference.
On a multi-node system, a target cannot be repaired on an ECDIS node if
the target or any targets correlated with it, fulfils the following conditions:
 The target is being tracked or is active on a Radar node.
 A tracked target from an external input, such as a BridgeMaster E.
 The target is selected in the target tote on another node.
 The target is currently in an acquisition zone on another node.
To repair a target, do the following:
1. Right click on the target to be repaired and
select Repair Target from the semi-
transparent window. The target's motion
trend vector may be moved around the
screen by moving the trackball. The target's
dot, ID number and name (if assigned)
remain in the original location.
2. To abort the target repair operation, right
click again and select Abort Repair from
the semi-transparent window. The target's vector reverts back to its
initial position.
3. Left click on the screen to fix the target at the desired location. The
target's dot and other identifying data are reassigned to the target
vector at the new position and a temporary prompt `Target Repair
Successful' appears.
If the new position of the target is outside the maximum tracking range
or inside the minimum tracking range then the target position remains
unaltered and a temporary prompt `Target Repair Aborted' appears.

65900010 10-33
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

AIS Display
The AIS Display window includes the following
areas:
 Settings All Nodes
 Filter Settings
 Other
 Target Count All Nodes
The AIS Display window may be quickly accessed
from the main screen by left
clicking on the AIS On button at the
top right of the screen.

Settings All Nodes

AIS Input
AIS input and the display of AIS targets is turned
on or off on all nodes by ticking the Enable Input
check box.

AIS Input can only be enabled when valid

sensor data is being transmitted.

Activate on CPA/TCPA/BCR
When this check box is enabled (default mode) a sleeping AIS target is
automatically activated when the target infringes its CPA/TCPA or BCR
limits shown in the Target Data tab folder.
If this setting is disabled all sleeping AIS targets are rendered as dotted
lines (see `AIS Rendering Conditions’ in AIS Targets) and are not activated
when target data limits are infringed.

WARNING!

THIS SETTING SHOULD NORMALLY BE ENABLED.

DISABLING AUTO-ACTIVATION FOR COLLISION AVOIDENCE
WILL MEAN THAT POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS TARGETS WILL
NOT RAISE AN ALERT.

10-34 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Filter Settings
Filter Settings enables different types of AIS targets and AIS Nav symbols
to be displayed (ticked) or not displayed (unticked).
The system prioritises AIS targets into class A and class B vessels. The
distinction is made based on the type of message received via the AIS
transponder33 installed on the originating vessel. For a description of Class
A and Class B targets see `Classes and Types of AIS ’.
 Class A - only class A targets are displayed (default setting).
 Class B - only class B targets are displayed.
Filter settings will only remove sleeping targets from the screen. Selected
and activated class A and B targets will continue to be displayed.
Filter settings also enables the display of the following AIS Nav symbols (if
enabled in the system):
 AtoN - will display Aid to Navigation objects
 AtoN Virtual – will display virtual AtoNs with GPS co-ordinates
 SAR Craft - will display Search and Rescue Craft
 Base Station - will display Base Station objects
For a more detailed description of the AIS types listed above refer to
`Classes and Types of AIS’.
If the operator attempts to untick the Class A
or Class B check boxes when the Activate on
CPA/TCPA/BCR setting is disabled an `Action
Required’ prompt appears informing that
filtering out the deselected class will
automatically enable Auto-Activation.
To proceed with target filtering click the Yes
button. The sleeping targets for the selected
filter class are removed from the screen and
Activate on CPA/TCPA/BCR is enabled.

33
An AIS transponder is a short range data radio unit which automatically transmits and
receives vessel information.

65900010 10-35
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

AIS Nav Symbols

The icons used for AIS Nav symbols appear blue on the video circle when
the symbol is in the `on position'. See the table below.

AtoN
AtoN SART
Virtual

Base
SAR
Station

If an AIS AtoN symbol is in an `off position' (floating), the colour of the

symbol and text changes from blue to red.
To view data on AIS symbols left click on the symbol, the selected object is
identified on screen with a blue broken line box centred on the
object and the Target Data tab folder of the Selected Target
window appears showing tracked data on the object.

Other
When the Display Turn Indicators check box is ticked the turn indicator
for all activated AIS targets are displayed. This setting will apply to all
nodes on a multi-node system.

Set All AIS Targets to Sleeping

The Set All to Sleeping button allows you to set all AIS targets to sleeping
based on the following criteria:
1. On a multi-node system, all AIS targets are set to sleeping on the
Radar node that the command was made. The same AIS targets that
may be activated on another Radar node will not be set to sleeping.
2. If the current watch mode is ECDIS then all AIS targets are set to
sleeping on the node that the command was made, and on all other
ECDIS nodes, providing that the target was activated on an ECDIS
node, and that the target is not currently active on a Radar node.

Target Count All Nodes

The target count lists sleeping AIS targets and activated AIS targets, this
target count includes all nodes on a multi-node system.

10-36 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Test Targets
The Test Target facility provides a simulation that allows data to be entered
for a test target that can then be tracked by the system. The tracked data
can be used to compare with the test target data to assess the
performance of the tracking system.
Test targets include fixed test pattern targets
and a number of moveable test targets. The
facility is available in all presentation and
motion modes, providing the system has a
working compass and is in Transmit mode.
Test targets can be displayed and tracked in
exactly the same manner as live targets,
although the system differentiates between
test targets and tracked real targets.
Both fixed and moveable test targets are
displayed on the screen as flashing green
crosses. When test targets are on a large
stationary letter X is displayed near the bottom
of the video circle.

The Test Targets window is divided into the

following areas:
 Fixed Test Targets
 Moveable Test Targets

Fixed Test Targets

The Fixed Test Targets area includes a Display check box. When this
check box is ticked, test targets, which are stationary relative to own ship,
are displayed on the video circle.
The targets are generated every 45 degrees starting at 0 degrees relative
to own ship’s heading and increasing in 2 NM increments to 40 NM. The
targets are a fixed size in both azimuth and range.

65900010 10-37
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Moveable Test Targets

The number of user definable test targets is determined by the type of
radar interface board installed in your VisionMaster system.
The table below defines the number of targets each interface board
supports.
Number of
Interface Board Test Targets
Defined Targets
SC2 2 1 to 2
SC3 5 1 to 5

The current moveable test target is shown in a field below the Switch All
Targets On/Off buttons, and defaults to Test Target 1. To select the next
moveable test target, click the > button. If your system only includes two
test targets, as defined in the table above, the > button will be greyed out
when Test Target 2 is selected.
Before the Moveable Test Targets are activated, initial position and velocity
data may be defined for each test target. When movable test targets are
active, the velocity and current position data may be defined.
The table below defines the Range, True Bearing, Speed and True Course
default values and range.

Test Display Range True Bearing Speed True Course

Target (0.3 to 40 NM) (0º to 359.9º ) (0 to 75 kn) (0 to 359.9 )
3.0 NM from
1 36° 15 kn 270°
turning unit
3.0 NM from
2 108° 15 kn 180°
turning unit
3.0 NM from
3 180° 15 kn 25°
turning unit
3.0 NM from
4 252° 15 kn 90°
turning unit
3.0 NM from
5 324° 15 kn 135°
turning unit

10-38 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Using Test Targets

To switch Fixed Test Targets on, tick the Display check box. A fixed test
target pattern is displayed flashing on the video circle.
To switch on all moveable test targets, click the On button.
The Target Active check box is automatically ticked and all
moveable test targets are displayed on the video circle with
decaying video trails, showing the history of the targets'
movement.
To display only the moveable test target selected in the target field (e.g.
Test Target 1) untick the Target Active check box. Other moveable test
targets are removed from the screen, although their video trails remain.
To switch off all moveable test targets click the Off button.
Changing Moveable Test Target Parameters
When a moveable test target is inactive (Target Active box unticked), its
initial position (range and true bearing) may be changed from the default
parameters.
When a moveable test target is active (Target Active box ticked), its initial
position remains the same while its current position updates. When active
the target's velocity and current position may be changed from the default
parameters.
To change any enabled test target parameters click in the field, the value
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to change to the
required value, left click in the field to set the new value and exit edit mode.
The three buttons at the bottom of the Test Targets window have the
following functionality:
 Reset - resets the currently selected test target to it's initial
position.
 Reset All - resets all moveable test targets to their initial positions.
 Reset All To Defaults - resets all moveable target parameters
back to their default values.

65900010 10-39
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Using Test Targets as a Training Exercise

The following training exercise using movable test targets may be
undertaken.
1. In order to make the CPA/TCPA
calculations easier to visualize, it is
advisable to make own ship stationary.
To do this, right click on STW on the
Sensor Data Display, and click Select
STW Source from the drop down list.
In the STW window select Man sensor
data source, fixed at 0.0.kn, and confirm selection.
2. Select Test Targets from the Targets menu and ensure the Fixed
Test Targets Display check box is unticked.
3. In Moveable Test Targets select Test Target 1and tick the Target
Active check box.
4. Adjust the speed and true course of Test Target 1 so that it is
heading in an approximate direction towards own ship.
5. Select the test target on the screen by
clicking on the beginning of its video
trail. Click on the selected target again
to display the Target Data tab for the
selected test target.
6. Note the target's range and other
attributes. Apart from Range and True
Bearing all other target data will be
displayed in amber. If the TCPA shows
as a negative value, go back to the
Test Targets window and re-adjust the
target's true course accordingly.
7. As the test target moves closer to own ship and the TCPA moves
towards zero, note how the range comes to match the calculated
CPA.

10-40 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Test Targets on Dual Radar

On dual radar, test targets can be displayed and tracked separately for
each channel, or selected for display and tracking on both channels.
The Test Targets window for dual radar
includes all the functionality described
previously for single radar systems, but with
the addition or three tab buttons: Channel 1,
Channel 2 and Both.
To enable test targets on a specific channel
click the required Channel 1 or Channel 2
button and define the test target values as
described previously.
When test targets are displayed on a specific
channel the channel’s number appears next
to the large stationary X at the bottom of the video circle.
To enable test targets on both channels click
the Both button, the window enables all test
targets, fixed test targets and moveable
targets for both channels to be switched on
and off and Reset All, Reset All To Defaults
to be made.
When test targets are displayed on both
channels the numbers 1 and 2 appear next to
the large stationary X at the bottom of the
video circle.

65900010 10-41
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Test Targets on Client/Server Radar

On a Client/Server Radar (CSR) the same test targets are applied to all
Servers and therefore appear at all Clients on the system.
For example; If Client 1 is connected to Server 1, turning the display of
moving test targets on at Client 1 will also turn the display on at Client 2,
connected to Server 2, with the same settings.
If any Client node edits test target settings, the changes are immediately
applied to all Servers and all other Clients displaying test targets.
On a CSR system the radar interface board (NFE card) in the Server
processes the same number of definable test targets as a standard SC3
board, i.e. a maximum of 2.

10-42 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Acquisition Zones
An acquisition zone is a defined annular or polygonal area of the display.
When the system is in Transmit mode, targets that enter the area are
automatically acquired and tracked. AIS targets are activated when
entering an acquisition zone in both Transmit and Standby mode.

There are two annular and two polygonal acquisition zones available,
which can be turned on and off. The annular zone parameters are edited
from the Acquisition Zones window, or on the display; the polygonal zone
parameters are created and edited only on the display. When an
acquisition zone is active the zone parameters are shown on the display as
a solid green line. When an acquisition zone is being edited its line colour
changes from green to light purple.
Any targets found in an auto acquisition zone are marked by a flashing
acquisition zone symbol (see Target Monitoring Symbols in Target
Monitoring, or AIS Target Alarm States in AIS Targets) and an AZ Entry
warning is raised. Targets that the system decides are not existing targets
are automatically acquired. The acquisition zone symbol is turned off when
the AZ entry warning is acknowledged, or the zone is turned off. The
acquisition zone symbol is temporarily turned off if the zone is being edited.

WARNING!

A TARGET IN AN ACQUISITION ZONE MOVING AT A SPEED > 150

KNOTS WILL NOT GENERATE TRACKS. FOR INFORMATION SEE
FOOTNOTE ON PAGE 10-29.

65900010 10-43
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

There is a limit on the number of trackable targets within all active zones.
An AZ Full warning is raised when the next trackable target enters the zone
after the limit has been reached. The AZ Full warning is cleared when the
number of trackable targets falls below the limit.

Annular Acquisition Zones

The initial annular acquisition zone definitions are as follows:
The initial system zone definitions are as follows:
 Zone 1 4 to 5 NM long distance units and 270° to 90°
 Zone 2 12 to 14 NM long distance units and 270° to 90°
An annular acquisition zone can be edited by changing its radial position
and depth, and by changing its start bearing and end bearing within the
limits defined below.
Acquisition Zone Limits
Parameter Min Max
End Range (in long distance units) 1.0 40.0
Start Depth (in long distance units) 0.4 2.0
Bearing 6° 354°
To create acquisition zone parameters from the Acquisition Zones
window do the following:
With the Acquisition Zones window opened and
the zone active (On) click on the Edit button of
the zone to be edited (Zone 1 or Zone 2). You
can edit both the Bearing (the radial angle of the
zone) and the Range (the depth of the zone).
To edit the zone bearing:
1. Click inside the Start field. The start
degree number changes from white to
green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left (to decrease the
numerical degree) or right (to increase). If
the zone is switched off (inactive) the
zone appears on the display when the
parameters are changed.
3. To change the End bearing repeat the
procedure above.

10-44 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

To edit the zone range:

1. Click inside the Start field. The start degree number changes from
white to green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left to decrease the range of the zone from
ownship, or right to increase the range from own ship. As the Start
range is changed the End range numerical degree changes
proportionally.
3. To shorten or widen the zone range click in the End field and
change the range as described above.
To create acquisition zone parameters directly on the video circle do
the following:
1. Click on the Edit button of the zone to be edited (Zone 1 or Zone
2).
2. Move the cursor into the display and left click to create the first start
point of the acquisition zone.
3. Move the cursor to the required end point of the zone, diagonally
opposite the first point, which defines the bearing and range.

65900010 10-45
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Polygonal Acquisition Zones

A polygonal acquisition zone is a randomly shaped zone constructed from
operator defined zone points (maximum of 10), which are entered directly
on to the chart display.
Polygonal lines may be drawn up to a maximum distance of 40 NM from
own ship.
To create or edit a polygonal acquisition zone, do the following:
To create a polygonal zone:
1. Click on the New button of Zone 1 or Zone 2 and move the cursor
to the desired location in the chart display. The cursor is shown
with the letters `Add' below the cross hair and the `New' button
changes to Cancel, the Active and Edit buttons are disabled.
2. Left click in the display, the first zone point is created and is shown
on the screen as a small purple circle.
3. Move the cursor and left click again, a
second zone point is created and the two
circles are joined with a straight purple line.
To create the polygonal shape continue the
process, the last zone point (maximum of 10)
must be entered at the first point.
When the last zone point has been entered
the polygonal shape is created. The zone
point circles are removed, the zone line changes to green and the
zone is auto activated.
To edit a polygonal zone:
1. Click the Edit Off button of the polygonal zone to be edited, the
button changes to Submit. In edit mode all acquisition zones are
displayed on the screen, with the zone to be edited shown in purple
(edit mode) with all zone points displayed.
2. Move the cursor to the first point, the
cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow
indicator. Left click on the point, hold
down the left button and use the trackball
to drag the point to the required location
on the screen. Repeat the process for all
other zone points. Note that targets in an
edited zone are not activated.
3. When the zone is changed to the required shape and position click
the Submit button. The zone is activated (shown with a green line)
and the Edit is switched off.

10-46 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Own Ship AIS

The Own Ship AIS window includes the
following three tab folders:
 Own Ship
 Message Rx
 Message Tx
The following describes data available on the
Own Ship tab folder. For information on AIS
safety messages that have been sent and
received refer to Own Ship AIS Messages.
Own Ship
The Own Ship tab folder displays the
following read only AIS data for own ship:
 Name of vessel
 Class (A or B)
 Vessel MMSI
Own Ship tab folder also includes the
following tabs:
 Dynamic
 Voyage
 Static
All Own Ship AIS features shown in the tab folders will display
read-only data if the `Enable AIS MKD Control' is set to No (default
setting) in the Configuration tool. If Own Ship AIS features have
been enabled for operator selection the features that can be
changed are described in the following sub sections.
Dynamic
The Dynamic tab includes the following data for own ship:
 Latitude position
 Longitude position
 Heading (HDG) bearing
 COG
 SOG

65900010 10-47
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

 Status34 - the navigational status of own ship includes the following

states:
 Underway
 At anchor
 Not under command
 Restricted manvre
 Constrain draught
 Moored
 Aground
 Fishing
 Sailing
If one of these states does not apply the Status field displays:
Unknown.
Voyage
The Voyage tab includes the following data for own
ship:
 Draught
 Cargo
 Destination
 POB
 ETA calculator, (for information on using
the ETA calculator refer to `ETA Calculator’ in the Routes menu)
 Date & Time (UTC or Local)
All Voyage settings (apart from Cargo) are editable if AIS MKD Control
is enabled.
Static
The Static tab includes the following data for own
ship:
 IMO number
 Call (i.e. name of own ship)
 Type32 (the vessel type can be selected
from a drop down list)
.

34
Editable setting if AIS MKD Control is enabled.

10-48 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Own Ship AIS Messages

The Own Ship AIS function includes tab folders for messages sent from
own ship (Message Tx) and messages received from other vessels
(Message Rx).
Message Tx
The Message Tx tab folder lists up to 50 safety
messages that have been generated by own ship
and sent to AIS vessels.
The Sent Messages field defines the number of
messages in brackets and shows the first line of
each message. Sent messages that have not
been selected in Message Tx are shown in
yellow.
The Message Info field shows the message
recipient, the time the message was sent and the
full message content.
The following function buttons are included at the
bottom of the tab folder:
 Send Additional Message
 Send Broadcast Message
Safety messages can also be created and sent in
the AIS Info tab of Selected Target.
To send additional safety messages do the
following:
1. Click the Send Additional Message button. A message popup
window appears.
2. Click on the drop down arrow and select the
message recipient from the list of AIS
vessels.
3. Click in the message field and compose a
message using the AIS MKD, for information
refer to `AIS Safety Messages' in AIS Info.
4. When the message is complete click the
Send button. A temporary prompt `Message
Sent' appears and the message is listed in
the Sent Messages field.

65900010 10-49
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To send broadcast messages do the following:

1. To broadcast a message to all AIS vessels included in the
message recipient list click the Send Broadcast Message button.
A message popup window appears.
2. Click in the message field and compose a message using the AIS
MKD, for information refer to `AIS Safety Messages' in AIS Info.
3. When the message is complete click the Send button. A temporary
prompt `Message Sent' appears, the message is sent to all AIS
vessels and is listed in the Sent Messages field.
When a message sent to a specific vessel is selected from the Sent
messages list the following additional function buttons are enabled:
 Select Target
 Delete
1. To select the recipient of a safety message highlight the message
in the Sent messages list, the Select Target button becomes
enabled (note that this button is disabled if the message selected is
a broadcast message).
2. Click the Select Target button, the AIS target is selected on the
chart display and the Target Data tab folder of Selected Target
appears showing tracking data for the AIS.
3. To delete a message from the Sent message list highlight the
message and click the Delete button. The selected message is
removed from the list.

10-50 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Message Rx
The Messages tab folder displays messages that have been generated
from an external device. The messages may for example have been sent
from another ship in the area.
AIS messages are used to convey to the operator information
that requires attention. When a message has been received the
Message icon is displayed in amber, an audible indicator is given and the
message is shown in the Message Rx tab.
Left click to view information on the message. The
MMSI number of the vessel that sent the
message, the time the message was received
and the message detail are displayed in the
Message Info window. When all messages have
been selected the message icon returns to the
standard system colour.
The function buttons at the bottom of the
Message Rx tab folder work in the same way as
described for Message Tx.

65900010 10-51
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Limits and Settings

The Limits and Settings window defines the
following:
 CPA/TCPA limits
 Bow crossing (BCR/BCT) limits
 Target Association settings and limits
 Lost Target Alert enablement and lost
target range limit setting
A target is considered dangerous if it infringes the
defined limits set in this window. When this
happens an alert is raised, the alert is cleared
automatically when there are no targets infringing
the defined limits.
To change the infringement limits do the
following.
1. Click inside the field to be changed. The
value changes from white to green
(editable).
2. Move the trackball left (to decrease the limit) or right (to
increase). When the limit has been correctly defined left click to
enter value and exit edit mode.

Closest Point of Approach & Bow Crossing Limits

The system default values and the minimum/maximum infringement limits
for CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT are shown in the table below.

Parameter CPA/BCR TCPA/BCT

System default value 0.2 NM 10 minutes
Range of values 0.1 to 20.0 NM 1 to 99 minutes

10-52 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

Target Association
Target association enables the system to decide if a target tracked or
activated on one node is the same as a target tracked or activated on other
nodes.
The difference in the target's range, bearing and velocity values must be
less than the association limits for a target to be considered the same. If
targets do associate then they will be shown with the same ID on all nodes.
If targets change course, such that any of the values becomes greater than
the limits, the target association will split and each target will then have a
unique ID.
There are two defined settings for target association: Standard and Loose.
The default values for Standard and Loose settings and the
minimum/maximum limits for Target Association are shown in the table
below.
Target Association
Parameter Distance Angle Speed
Standard Setting 0.06 NM 1.0 ° 5.0 kn

Loose Setting 0.18 NM 2.0 ° 5.0 kn

Range of values 0.01 NM to 0.18 NM 0.1° to 3.6° 1.5 kn to 10 kn

If target association settings are changed the settings defined in the table
above may be re-applied by ticking the Standard Setting or Loose
Setting check boxes.
Note that setting these values too high may result in targets which are
separate being considered the same target; whilst setting the values too
low may mean that targets that are the same are not correlated, leading to
multiple targets being displayed in the same position.

Lost Target Alerts

This area enables Lost Target alerts to be raised on all nodes and a lost
target alert range limit set, so that any lost targets within a specified
maximum limit from own ship will raise an alert. For a description of Lost
Targets and the symbology used, see Target Monitoring.
The default maximum range limit distance is 10 NM. The
minimum/maximum values are 0.1 NM to 100 NM.

65900010 10-53
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Collision Avoidance Criteria

Collision avoidance must be carried out in strict compliance with the
COLREG (Convention of the International Regulations for the Preventing of
Collisions at Sea).
Relative velocity is fundamental to the activity of collision avoidance.
VisionMaster calculates relative velocity in both ground and sea
stabilisation modes and presents individual target CPA/TCPA data. This
same data is used when evaluating whether a target is infringing the
operator selected CPA/TCPA and bow crossing limits. VisionMaster is
designed in such a way as to minimise errors in the collision avoidance
calculations which result from the sensors selected for stabilisation. In
practice, however, different sensors may contribute to the possibility of
errors in calculation and caution should be used when interpreting the data,
particularly when ground stabilisation is selected.

10-54 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

PADs
Predicted Areas of Danger (PAD) ) is an optional
feature where outlines are drawn on the video circle
to mark an area that needs to be avoided in order to
prevent a CPA violation to own ship by an
established tracked target or active AIS target.
The size and location of a PAD depends on own
ship's CPA limit (see Limits and Settings) and
speed, plus the target's position course and speed.
For information on accessing data on targets refer to
Selected Target.
The boundary of a PAD associated with a target is
drawn such that, if ownship were to change its course to move toward any
given point on the boundary and the target were to continue with its current
velocity, the target would be at the CPA limit when own ship reaches the
PAD boundary.
PADs are only displayed for a target when the system can calculate the
CPA of that target. If the CPA limit is changed, the shapes of PADs adjust
accordingly. If own ship's CCRP crosses over a PAD boundary, the display
of the PAD is disabled until the CCRP is no longer within its boundaries.
To select display options for PADs do the following.
1. Open the PAD sub menu. The window
displays the current CPA limit for targets to
own ship and enables the following display
options to be selected:
 Predicted Areas of Danger (PADs)
 Predicted Points of Collision (PPCs)
 Intercept Lines
2. To change a target's CPA limit click the
Target Limits and Settings button, the Limits and Settings opens
from where you can adjust the CPA limit.
If all three display options have selected from the PAD menu the video
circle chart display will display the following features additional to the PAD
(see the figure below):
 PPCs - these are located within the boundaries of its associated
PAD and are shown as a round dot marked on the target’s course
vector where own ship's CCRP may intercept the target.

65900010 10-55
Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

 Intercept Lines - these are lines that connect ownship's CCRP to

the PPC. This line represents the course of ownship, based on
present speed, to intercept with the target at the PPC.

If a target associated with a PAD goes into an alarm state (i.e. the target
and its vector flash red) the PAD and intercept lines will also flash red in
sequence with the target. The shape of the PAD may also change as
ownship and target approach each other, see below.

If ownship speed is greater or equal to target speed, then only one PAD is
generated. If ownship speed is less than the target speed, then one of the
following is generated:
 Two distinct PADs
 A merged PAD with two PPCs
 A donut-shaped PAD
 No PAD

10-56 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets

When a target is manually selected (i.e. the target appears in the User tab
of the Multiple Targets menu) a cross hatch will appear within the
boundaries of the target's PAD.

65900010 10-57
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar

Chapter 11 Radar
The Radar menu provides access to the
following radar/video functions:
 Transceiver - enables switching the
system between standby and
transmit mode, pulse length
selection and radar fine tuning to be made.
 Video - enables video processing controls and trails mode selection
to be made.
 Interswitch –provides selection and information on transceivers
connected to an Interswitch.
This chapter also describes the effect on the video display when a
transceiver has been configured with blank sectors active, see Sector
Blanking.

65900010 11-1
Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Transceiver
The Transceiver window displays the selected
transceiver's alpha identity (A to F if a six-way
Interswitch is connected, see Interswitch), its
status (Master or Slave) and the scanner unit
the transceiver is connected to (X-band or S-
band).
The following controls are available when
operating as a Master display:
 switching the operational mode between
standby and transmit
 changing the pulse length
 changing between AFC and manual
tuning
If the Transceiver has been selected as a Slave
at the Interswitch window the Pulse Length and
Tune functions are unavailable.

Operational Mode
The system can be in one of two operational
modes: Standby and Transmit. In addition,
when the system is in standby following power up it may also be warming
up35.

A slave display can only be switched to Transmit if its associated

master display is in Transmit mode. If Transmit is selected on a
slave display when its master is still in Standby (NOT transmitting),
a prompt is displayed and the slave remains in Standby.

To switch between operational modes, click the radio button adjacent to the
mode. When the system is switched to transmit the message Radar
Standby disappears from the video circle, the Standby/Transmit toggle
button displays Transmit and the transceiver starts transmitting radar
pulses. See Transmit and Standby Modes.

When a display is connected to a transceiver that is in warm up, either because of

interswitching or from power-on, a textual status and a count appears in the Transceiver sub
menu. The count starts at 0 and increment each second up to a maximum of 999. Only when
the transceiver informs the connected display(s) that the warm up period has ended is the text
and count removed and the normal standby text displayed. Transmit can be selected only
when the warm up period has ended.

11-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar

Pulse Length
The current pulse length selection in the Transceiver sub menu is reflected
in the pulse length toggle button below the transceiver identity field. For
information on pulse lengths, see Radar Transmission Pulse Length.

Tune
The radar fine tuning adjustment and tuning control selection in the
Transceiver sub menu is reflected in the Tune field, below the Video
Processing Controls. For information on adjusting the radar tuning, see
Radar Fine Tuning.

Dual Radar - Transceiver

On a dual radar system the Transceiver
window includes separate tabs for Channel 1
and Channel 2 where specific selections of
Standby/Transmit mode, Pulse Length and
Tune adjustment can be made for each
channel.
If either transceiver is set to Standby a
confirmation prompt is generated.

65900010 11-3
Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Video
The Video sub-menu enables the following
settings and mode selections to be made:
 Video Processing Controls - enables
adjustment of the Gain setting and the
anti-clutter (Rain and Sea) settings.
 Auto Anti-Clutter and Enhance Video
mode
 Vector Mode - Relative or True
 Trails - selection of trail type.
For a description of setting the video processing
levels, see Video Processing Controls.
For a description of the vector modes, see
Vector Modes.
For a description of the trails mode, see Trails
Mode in Chapter 5.

Dual Radar – Video

On a dual radar system the Video window
includes separate tabs for Channel 1 and
Channel 2 where specific selections of controls
and Gain/anti-clutter adjustments can be made
for each channel.

11-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar

Interswitch
On a conventional radar system the Interswitch
sub-menu is divided into the following areas:
Request for Display and Status.
On a Dual Radar system or Client/Server Radar
system the Interswitch sub menu will show
slightly different information, see Interswitch on
Dual Radar and Interswitch on Client/Server
Radar for details.

Request for Display

The Request for Display area lists the
Transceivers fitted to the system with their alpha
identifier. The transceivers available for selection
are highlighted; transceivers that are unavailable
for selection are greyed out.
Up to six transceivers can be connected to up to
six displays. The number of transceivers that
may be set up is dependent on the interswitch
status as follows:
When no interswitch is fitted to the system:
 the Master/Slave selection is fixed at
commissioning with the system defaulting to
Master.
 the transceiver identification is fixed at A.
When an interswitch is fitted to the system:
 the master/slave display, display identifier and transceiver
identification are determined from the interswitch.
 if the interswitch is two-way then only transceivers A and B may be set
up.
 if the interswitch is six-way then all transceivers A, B, C, D, E and F
may be set up.
To request Master or Slave status of the available transceiver, click the
relevant radio button.
Status
The Status area displays the current transceiver settings for each node
(e.g. Display (B) etc.). Nodes that are not communicating with the
Interswitch are greyed out, but their connection details are displayed.

65900010 11-5
Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Interswitch on Dual Radar

If your system is dual radar with an Interswitch,
the Interswitch window enables each display
radar channel to be associated with any one of
the transceivers in the system. A transceiver
can be selected from its associated channel as
a Master for controlling that scanner unit, or as
a Slave, if the other channel has selected the
same transceiver as the Master.
If different transceivers are selected for each
channel (e.g. TxRx (A) for Channel 1 and TxRx
(B) for Channel 2) then both Transceivers may
be set to Master. If the same transceiver is
selected for both channels, then one channel
must be set to Slave. For example, if Master is
selected on TxRx (B) for Channel 2 where the
same selection has been made for Channel 1,
then Channel 1 will automatically switch to
Slave.
The Status area displays the node identity with
Dual Radar in brackets. The current
Transceiver selection and Master/Slave status for each display are
displayed below the node identity.

11-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar

Interswitch on Client/Server Radar

On a Client/Server Radar (CSR) system the
Interswitch window shows the Master/Slave
status of the particular Client node, and
enables a request for control of available
transceivers to be made. Each transceiver will
be connected to the system via a Server.
The Status area of the window lists the
connection status of all the Clients networked
to the system.
To request control of a transceiver, click its
Master radio button. If another Client is
currently in control of the transceiver that
Client’s status will change from Master to
Slave. The change of transceiver control will be
shown on the Interswitch window of all Client
nodes in the system.
If two or more Clients request control of one
transceiver at the same time, the issue of
which node controls the transceiver is resolved
by the Server connected to the transceiver.
Each Server can supply data to a maximum of
eight Clients. If a ninth Client requests a connection to the same
transceiver an existing Client of the transceiver will be disconnected,
providing the Client is a Slave and in Standby. If all eight Clients are in
Transmit, a ninth Client will not be permitted to connect to the transceiver
until one of the other Clients is set to Standby or disconnected.

Disconnecting and Reconnecting a Client

A disconnected Client has no connection to a transceiver via a Server.
Whereas a Client in Standby can be immediately placed in Transmit, a
disconnected Client must first be connected to a transceiver before it can
be considered in Standby.
To disconnect a Client from its selected Transceiver click the Disconnect
button. The status of the Client changes to Disconnected and the message
TxRx Disconnected appears on the video circle.
To reconnect, select Master/Slave for the required transceiver. The status
of the Client will change to Standby and, if Master is selected, the
Transceiver will also be set to Standby.

65900010 11-7
Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Radar Alerts
The following series of radar alerts may be raised by the system.

Video Alerts
Low Video Level
The signal level of the video received from the transceiver is monitored at
regular intervals when the display is in transmit. If the level falls below an
optimal video level a low video alert is raised. The alert is cleared when:
 the monitored video level is greater than or equal to an optimum
video level; or
 the radar is in standby.
Video Failed
A Video Failed alert is raised under the following conditions:
 If there is a detectable fault with the scan converter card such that
it prevents the radar picture from being updated.

If there is a detectable fault with the presentation of the radar video
on the screen. (e.g. Texture Loss)
Video Failed is displayed in red in the video circle when this alert is active.

Communications Alerts
Transceiver Communications
A TX comms alert is raised if a valid message has not been received from
the transceiver for more than 4 seconds. The alert is raised regardless of
the display’s standby/transmit status.
PCIO Communications with Processor
A PCIO USB comms alert is raised within 30 seconds if the physical
connection between the PCIO unit and Processor is broken.
PCIO Communications with SC board
An SC PCIO comms alert is raised within 10 seconds if the connection
between the board and the PCIO unit is broken.
Interswitch Communications
An Interswitch comms alert is raised if the Interswitch is no longer
communicating with the Processor.

11-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar

Transceiver Alerts
Trigger Error
A trigger error alert is raised when the transceiver is in transmit and there
are fewer valid triggers than expected.
Azimuth Error
An azimuth error alert is raised when the transceiver is in transmit and
either:
 the number of azimuth pulses between heading markers is greater
or less than a margin of error of 5 pulses centred on a nominal
value of 4096 pulses. Or;
 the number of pulses per revolution is within the margin of error,
but a small error persists for a period of time (e.g. 4095 pulses per
rev are received continually). This will cause a picture clear.
Heading Marker Error
When the transceiver is in transmit an error alert is raised if a heading
marker has not been received for more than 10 seconds. If a heading
marker has not been received for more than 30 seconds the Master Display
automatically switches the connected transceiver to standby.
Pulse Length Error
An error alert is raised if, after a delay no greater than 4 seconds, the
display’s requested pulse length does not match the pulse length of its
connected transceiver.
Standby/Transmit Error
A Standby/Transmit error alert is raised if the state of the transceiver is
different to that requested by the display.
Transceiver BITE
A Transceiver BITE alert is raised when there are failed BITE parameters.
If the spark gap parameter fails, the Master display automatically switches
the connected transceiver to Standby. This indicates a fault in the
Transceiver which will require contacting your supplier or local dealer.
AFC Mode Error
An AFC Mode error alert is raised if the AFC mode of the transceiver does
not match that of the displays.

65900010 11-9
Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Sector Blanking
A top unit may have one or two blanking sectors active. When sector
blanking is configured for a particular transceiver, that transceiver will not
transmit in any active blanked sector defined for it and the video in that
sector is blanked.
Blank sectors do not overlap and do not blank more than 340 degrees of
the radar picture. For example, blank sector 2 start angle cannot start
before blank sector 1 stop angle finishes.
If a transceiver has blank sectors active, i.e.
the start and end angles are not the same, an
arc line is drawn at the relevant angles around
the outside of the video circle bearing scale,
indicating the arc that is being blanked.

Sector Blanking on Dual Radar

On a dual radar system both top units may have different blanking sectors
active. Sector blanking for channel 1 top unit may have the same start and
stop angles as channel 2 top unit, or a different set of start/stop angles.
When sector blanking is active on dual radar and both top units have the
same start and stop angles, a double arc line is drawn for each sector. The
outer arc line defines the channel 2 blanking sector, and the inner line
defines channel 1 blanking sector.
If the blanking sectors for channel 1 and channel 2 do not overlap the
angles will be drawn relative to the radar channel’s video origin, with the
outer/inner arc line positions retained.

11-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chapter 12 Charts
This section covers all aspects of chart
information. The following topics are covered.
 A description of charts, including chart
types, chart rendering, factors that
may affect chart accuracy and
indications of chart overscale, see
About Charts.
 Match the chart with the radar video,
display update summaries, install
charts from an installer utility, and
display chart permissions, see Chart
Tools.
 Configure the display settings for the
chart, see Chart Settings.
 A description of the chart projection types, see Chart Projections.
 Change default chart contour and depth settings, see Chart
Depths/Heights.
 Specify the order in which charts engines are used for rendering, or
disable configured chart engines, see Chart Databases.
 View detailed read-only information about the chart currently
displayed, see Chart Legend.
 Manage manual updates to charts, see Manual Chart Update.
 Highlight and view information on specific chart areas and
geographic objects, see Chart Query.
 View and mark a list of potential chart dangers that own ship is
headed towards on present course, see Chart Dangers.
 Access to the Chart One Presentation Library, which contains an
index of chart symbols, as used on vector charts, and Color
Diagram.
To turn the charts on or off left click on the Charts button in the top right
area of the screen. To change the chart presentation mode (filled or
unfilled) or change the chart database (e.g. SevenCs - S-57 to C-MAP -
ENC) right click on the Charts button and select from the drop down
options.

Appendix A lists Chart Data with their identification codes.

65900010 12-1
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

About Charts
Chart Types
The system allows vector charts to be displayed within the video circle in
either Standby or Transmit mode.

The Charts facility will only be available if the system has been
configured for Chart Radar.

Vector charts are electronic chart data stored in a database. The chart is
drawn on screen based on processing of the various stored data elements.
Vector chart types include SevenCs S57 (ENC), NAVTOR ENC and C-
MAP charts.

Only vector format charts are available on Chart Radar. Raster

charts are not permitted.

For a detailed description of the chart databases available from the

SevenCs and C-MAP chart engines refer to `Chart Databases’.
When S57 charts are installed, the ENC data undergoes a conversion
process. The result of this conversion is the creation of the System
Electronic Nautical Chart (SENC) database. It is this database that is
accessed and displayed by ECDIS and Chart Radar.
For information on installing all chart types, refer to Chart Tools.

Chart Data on a Radar Display

Chart information uses the same reference and coordinates criteria as the
radar and AIS, including datum, scale orientation, CCRP and azimuth
stabilisation mode.
Radar information has priority over chart information. Charts are displayed
such that the radar is not substantially masked, obscured or degraded.
If the heading becomes invalid, chart information is removed automatically
from the screen within one minute.
In order to reduce clutter, chart features are suppressed at a range scale of
96 NM. The chart features are restored when the range scale is reduced.

12-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Rendering
The rendering of Chart data adheres to the z-order 36guidelines, allowing
for radar video to be inserted in the proper z-order such that `suppressed'
chart objects appear below the radar video, and `over radar' chart objects
appear above the radar video.

Factors affecting Chart Accuracy

A position plotted on a navigational chart is only as good as the accuracy of
the chart. Therefore it is important to understand the factors which may limit
the accuracy of vector charts. These factors are detailed below.
Survey Data
Vector charts are generally based on recent hydrographic survey data.
However, the level of detail provided by different types of chart data may
vary greatly depending upon the geographic location; these charts may
sometimes use old survey data where more recent surveys do not exist.
Chart Datum
The chart datum is the mathematical model used by a chart maker to map
the earth’s surface. VisionMaster FT uses the datum known as World
Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) Ellipsoid Earth model. Charts and all
chart objects are displayed using the WGS-84 datum whenever possible.
While WGS-84 is the present standard for accurate mapping and display of
position information, there are hundreds of data in use, and each makes
different assumptions about the exact size and shape of the earth. This
means that a given latitude and longitude can correspond to different
locations when plotted on charts that are derived from different data. It is
therefore important to be aware of the datum of the displayed chart.
If a chart is based on another datum, the system offsets the chart to WGS-
84, if the offset to WGS-84 is known and provided in the chart file. Offset
correction values used for the chart are computed as average values for
the entire chart. These correction values may not be perfectly accurate
throughout the geographical area covered by the chart. Datum
discrepancies become more important when using larger-scale charts.

36
The term `Z-order' refers to the order of objects along the Z-axis. In coordinate geometry, X
typically refers to the horizontal axis (left to right), Y to the vertical axis (up and down), and Z
to the axis perpendicular to the other two (forward or backward). One can think of the windows
in a display as a series of planes parallel to the surface of the monitor. The windows are
therefore stacked along the Z-axis, and the Z-order information thus specifies the front-to-back
ordering of the windows on the screen.

65900010 12-3
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

When displaying a chart that was created using a datum other than WGS-
84, a warning displays information about the chart’s datum. The Chart
Legend window also shows the datum of the displayed chart, see Legend
Detail.
Codes used to identify various known chart data are listed in Appendix A –
Chart Datum Codes.
Compilation Scale
Chart data is compiled at a specific scale, based upon the hydrographic
data from which the chart was created. This scale is called the chart’s
compilation scale, indicating the level of detail that is available on the chart.
When charts are first selected for display, they are displayed at their
compilation scale.
A chart's compilation scale is shown in the Detail tab folder of the Chart
Legend menu, under Chart Usage/Scale, and Chart Index, which shows
the scale and other details of all charts in a selected chart database.
When the range scale is selected at a larger scale than the chart's
compilation scale a permanent prompt appears with the message `Chart
Overscale', see Chart Overscale.
Navigational Purpose
In addition to the compilation scale, the level of detail and expected
accuracy available on a chart is also related to its navigational purpose. For
example, Harbour, Approach, Coastal or General. A chart's navigational
purpose is shown in the Detail tab folder of the Legend menu under Chart
Usage/Scale, and under Chart Index.

Chart Overscale
There are two ways in which the system indicates that chart data is being
displayed at a larger scale than its compilation scale: the overscale prompt
and the overscale pattern. For more details on chart prompts, see Prompts
in Chapter 7, Alerts.

12-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Display Overscale Prompt

The display overscale prompt appears as Primary Display Overscale when
any of the following conditions are met:

 The largest scale chart at the centre of the display is overscaled, in

most cases the display is covered by several charts.
 An overscaled vector chart from the most detailed usage level is
displayed.
A chart is considered to be overscaled if the range scale of the display is
larger than the compilation scale of the chart at the screen centre. The
scale of each chart can be viewed in the Chart Index window, see Chart
Tools.
Overscale Pattern
The overscale pattern is displayed over charts if the
scale ratio of the display is more than double the
compilation scale of any charts in the display. The
overscale pattern is a series of closely aligned
dotted vertical lines across the whole of the chart
display.

Larger Scale Available Prompt

The Larger Scale Chart Available at Ship prompt is shown when the
largest scale chart under the ships position, considering ALL enabled chart
databases, is not displayed.
Chart Safety Information
Chart data suppliers such as UKHO may provide additional safety-related
information about supplied ENC chart sets. This information comes in the
form of a ReadMe.txt file which is accessed from the ChartHandler screen.
For information on accessing this file refer to Chart Installation, SevenCs
Charts.

65900010 12-5
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Tools
Chart Tools is the opening sub-menu on the
Charts menu. From Chart Tools you can
select the following functions:
 Chart Match - correct the display of any
discrepancies between the radar video
and the chart, see Chart Match.
 Chart Updates Summary - display a
chart updates summary in a separate
window, see Chart Updates Summary.
 Chart Installation
 C-Map37 - enables C-Map charts to
be installed onto a VMFT node from a
separate C-Map Chart installer utility.
 ARCS/ENC – opens a Chart
Installation window from where ARCS
and ENC (SevenCs S-57/S-63 and
NAVTOR) chart databases can
installed via the ChartHandler utility
without requiring the VMFT to be
shutdown. Chart permit files and S-63
certificates can also be installed or
removed via the Chart Installation
window.
 Chart Copy - enables charts installed on one node to be copied
to other nodes on a multi-node system, see Chart Copy.
 Permissions/User Permits - displays chart license and permit
expiration on installed charts, and enables an S-63 permit file or a 7Cs
hardware ID to be exported to an external drive. Also enables C-Map
chart licence and expiration date to be viewed, see Permissions/User
Permits.
 Chart Index - displays details of all charts for a selected chart
database, see Chart Index.

37
Specific chart installation buttons will only be available if the chart engine has been selected
in the configuration tool.

12-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Match
The Chart Match facility allows the operator to correct a discrepancy
between the radar video and the video circle. By selecting the radar object
and the chart object to be matched, an offset can be created that is applied
to the video circle. This offset persists until the chart match is cancelled, or
until all the charts displayed on the screen at the time of the selection are
no longer on the screen.
Chart Match includes the capability to specify a range and bearing
adjustment to be applied to any loaded chart in order to alter the chart’s
relative position to the own ship’s CCRP plotted position.
The operator specifies the range and bearing adjustment by selecting two
points on the video circle.
To reposition the chart do the following:
1. Click on the Select Points button in
the Chart Match area. The fields
below prompt to click on a chart
object and the Select Points button
changes to Cancel Selection.
2. To cancel the chart match click on
the button, or to proceed move the
cursor into the video circle, the cursor
displays CM below the cross hair.
3. Click on the required chart object.
The lower field in Chart Match
prompts to click on a Radar Object.
4. Click on the radar object (return). The
Chart Match fields change to
displaying the position (nautical miles
and bearing) of the chart object and
the Chart Match Applied tick box
becomes active.
5. Tick the Chart Match Applied check box. The chart is shifted so
that the radar return and the chart object are displayed at the same
location on the display.
6. To return to the previous chart position untick the Chart Match
Applied box.

65900010 12-7
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Updates Summary

The Chart Updates Summary enables update
information on SevenCs chart databases, and
updates made by the operator using manual
chart update to be displayed in a secondary
window when the system is in Standby mode.
To access the window click the Show Summary button. A Charts Update
Summary window appears displaying details (if any) of chart updates on
the currently loaded chart database. Click on the drop down list to select
another database.

The information shown in the summary report for each of the update files is
dependent on the chart database selected. For example, a SevenCs S-57
or C-MAP database shows the following columns:
 Reference for the chart (`Chart' for C-Map, `Name' for SevenCs)
 Issuing Authority
 Chart issue date
 Application date and time
 Chart edition number
 Chart update number
 Number of actions associated with a chart update
 Chart update type (Manual or Automatic)
 Status of the update (Applied, Rejected, or Deleted)
 Chart errors detected (SevenCs only).

12-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

If a chart update has failed the Chart Update Summary displays Rejected in
the Status column and the reason for the rejection is shown in the Error
column of the table. For a list of chart update error messages with
explanations and recommended actions, refer to `Chart Update Error
Messages’.
To sort the list into required priorities click on a column button. For
example, to sort by issue date click on the Issue Date button, all chart
updates are displayed from either the earliest or latest date.
Click the Refresh Updates button to update the list to include in the list
chart updates made on other nodes. While updating the table shows the
message `Updates Data Loading Please Wait..'
Viewing Manual Chart Updates

To view a summary of chart updates made by the operator, select Manual

Chart Update from the drop down list. The subsequent window shows the
following columns:
 Chart Name
 Chart Edition
 Update Date
 Update Type
 Update Action
 Status
 User Comments
C-MAP Updates
For C-MAP charts, the system provides automatic registration of the
databases and a record of updates is kept in the C-MAP database.
C-Map Installation Actions provides a record of C-Map chart installation,
including Database (e.g. ENC), Application Date (date and time of action),
Status (Error or Success) and a brief summary of action or error.

65900010 12-9
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Update Error Messages

A list and explanation of chart update errors and messages that may be
generated in the Chart Update Summary table is given below.
To avoid update errors it is advisable to ensure the most up-to-date charts
are installed from the latest set of Base CDs, followed by the most recent
Update CD (this must be more recent than the Base CD). Once the
Base/Update installs are complete, view the charts in the Chart Update
Summary, sort by the Application Date, and check to see if any failures
occurred during the installation operation.
For information on installing charts from the SevenCs database (ENC
charts) refer to Chart Installation.
For information on installing C-Map charts, refer to Chapter 1 `Chart
Installation’ in the VisionMaster FT Supplementary Features User Guide,
65900014.

Update Errors
1. Could not verify signature for file
Each ENC chart is delivered with a signature file that verifies the data
was created by a proper authority (official hydrographic office).
According to the IHO S-63 specification, the ECDIS must reject the
chart if a problem is encountered when verifying the signature. This
type of error can occur if the signature file was created incorrectly by
the chart producer. Also, if the wrong certificate file (IHO.CRT or
PRIMAR.CRT) is specified by the operator prior to chart import.

2. Application of update failed

This indicates the update could not be applied because it contains
invalid or inconsistent data. This error may be caused when data does
not comply with the chart validation rules in IHO S-58.

3. Could not decrypt file

This error occurs when the decryption of an encrypted ENC file fails.
The chart files contain validation mechanisms (e.g. checksum) to
ensure that the decryption is successful. If those validation
mechanisms fail, then the chart is rejected. This error may also occur if
the operator mistakenly selects S-57 (unencrypted) in the Sperry
Chart Installer for encrypted ENCs. S-63 should be selected for AVCS /
Primar charts.

12-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

4. No Base Cell for Update

This indicates that the import of an update failed because the
corresponding base edition for that chart was not present. Often this
error can be ignored in the case that the failed updates correspond to a
cancelled chart (sometimes update applications are attempted by the
ChartHandler tool after a cancellation operation). Another explanation
for this error would be that the Update CD was applied before installing
the corresponding Base CD.

5. Update belongs to a previous edition

This indicates that the update application failed because the update
corresponds to a newer chart edition than the one currently installed.
When this occurs, it usually indicates that a new Base CD has been
released and should be installed prior to the latest Update CD.

6. Update belongs to a newer edition

This indicates that the update application failed because the update
corresponds to an older chart edition than the one currently installed.
This usually occurs because an old Update CD is applied after a newer
chart edition was installed from a Base CD.

7. Update has wrong update number

This error can indicate that update number information in an update file
does not match the expected value from the catalog. This is often an
issue with the way the charts were produced.

Update Messages

1. Dataset Cancelled
This message indicates that the chart was discontinued by the
hydrographic office and replaced by a chart with a different name.

65900010 12-11
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Installation
C-Map Charts
To install C-Map charts click on the C-Map button in the Chart Installation
area of the Chart Tools window. An `Action Required’ popup window
appears informing the operator that the VisionMaster system will close.

CAUTION:

Switching to C-Map Chart Installation requires shutting down

VisionMaster. For information on installing C-Map charts see
Chapter 1 `C-Map Chart Installation' in the Supplementary Features
User Guide, 65900014.

SevenCs Charts
SevenCs provides two chart databases: ENC (includes S-57, S-64 and
DirectENC) and ARCS. Both databases are installed from within the
VisionMaster FT application without requiring the system to be shutdown.

CAUTION:

When charts are installed in this way the database that is being
installed will be unavailable to the system. The chart database will
become available again once the chart installation has completed.

To install SevenC charts from the Chart Handler do the following:

1. Click on the ARCS/ENC button (depending on the system
configuration this button may be labelled differently, e.g. ENC or
ARCS/ENC). A Chart Installation popup window appears showing
the last modification made to SevenCs chart databases.

The Chart Installation window allows selected chart databases and

ENC permits to be installed or deleted.

12-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

2. To select a database tick the ENC check box (ARCS charts are not
applicable to a Chart Radar) and click the Launch ChartHandler
button.

If the selected chart database is the

currently active database the charts will be
unavailable for navigation while the
ChartHandler is running and an `Action
Required’ popup window appears prompting
to confirm the deactivation of the charts.

3. Click the OK button to confirm. The system

deactivates the active database, the charts
are removed from the display and the
ChartHandler application opens.
Using the SevenCs ChartHandler
When the ChartHandler is opened the window can be hidden on the screen
by clicking the Hide ChartHandler button, to return the window to the
screen click the Show ChartHandler button.

The ChartHandler will initially search for installed SevenCs charts. If there
are any previously installed SevenCs charts these will be listed with the
Chart Type and View Installed Mode radio buttons in highlight.

To install SevenCs charts:

1. Install the external device (memory stick, CD or DVD) containing
the charts to be installed into the VMFT PC
2. From the Chart Type box select the chart format or product (S-
57/S-63 Charts or DirectENC).
3. From the Select Mode box select View Importable...Sets (the set
type is dependent on the chart type previously selected). Tick the
Show Chart Coverages check box to open an overview chart
displaying rectangles showing the coverage area of the charts from
the supplied source directory.

65900010 12-13
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

4. To install charts from a different data source, click the Browse

button and navigate to the root directory that contains the chart
data. A Browse For Folder window opens from where you can
navigate to the external drive (CD, DVD or USB memory stick)
and/or source directory where the chart files reside.
5. Select the chart source directory and click the OK button. The
Browse For Folder window is removed, the chart files appear in the
list and the Action buttons on the ChartHandler become active.
6. To install all the chart files in the list, click the Install All button. Or,
to install selected chart files from the list highlight the files and click
the Install Charts button. When charts are being installed a
Converting Files window appears over the ChartHandler screen
showing the progress of the installation as a percentage figure.

For further instructions on installing SevenCs charts and operating the

ChartHandler either click the Help icons in various locations on the screen,
or to access the complete Help Guide click the `Help’ button at the bottom
right of the screen. The Chart Handler User’s Guide appears as an Acrobat
pdf file.
Chart data suppliers such as UKHO may provide additional safety-related
information about supplied ENC chart sets on each Admiralty Vector Chart
Service (AVCS) CD/DVD. This information comes in the form of a
ReadMe.txt file, which is accessed from the Msg. Column.

12-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

NGSM recommends that the user carefully reads all the information
provided by the chart data supplier. This applies particularly to chart sets
used where the vessel sails near shoals or high traffic areas.
When you have installed all the SevenCs charts required, exit the
ChartHandler by clicking the Close ChartHandler button on the Chart
Installation window.
The database for the installed charts will automatically index after you quit
ChartHandler.
Deleting SevenCs Charts
To delete SevenCs ENC charts:
1. Select the chart database to delete and
click the Delete Charts button. An
`Action Required’ popup window
appears prompting to confirm the
deletion.
2. To delete the selected database click the
Delete All button. Or to cancel the
delete operation click the Cancel button.

65900010 12-15
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

NAVTOR Charts
Encrypted ENC charts (S-63) are provided by NAVTOR on CD, DVD or
USB memory stick (NavStick). The chart loading process uses the installed
cell permits to decrypt chart cells, verify the cells against the S-57 standard,
and compile them into SENC format used in the VisionMaster system.
NAVTOR charts and the NAVTOR security certificate must first be installed
onto the NavSync USB memory stick via a PC with Internet access. This
procedure is detailed in `Appendix A - NAVTOR ENC Chart Service',
Chapter 1 `Chart Installation' in the Supplementary Features User Guide,
65900014.
Installing NAVTOR ENC chart files and chart permits is a procedure that
should be carried out on a weekly basis and is described below.

Installing NAVTOR Chart Permits

If you are receiving your NAVTOR ENC Charts on CD/DVD, the ENC cell
permits are included on the “ENC PERMITS” CD.
If you are using NAVTOR NavSync (NavStick) to update your ENC Charts
over the internet, the permit file(s) are located in
`<NavStick>:\INFO\NAVTOR\PERMITS\’.
Both the CD and NavStick include separate folders for each system you
have ordered ENCs for. These folders are named ‘ECDIS 1’, ‘ECDIS 2’,
‘UNIT 3’, ‘UNIT 4’ and ‘UNIT 5’. For example, if you have two ECDIS and
one Chart Radar, the folders ‘ECDIS 1’, ‘ECDIS 2’ and ‘UNIT 3’ will be on
the CD/NavStick.

CAUTION!

Do NOT install any other NAVTOR software that is on the NAVTOR

NavStick onto the VisionMaster nodes. This could have a
detrimental effect on your VMFT system.

To install NAVTOR chart permits do the following:

1. Insert the ENC PERMITS CD into the CD drive, or the NavStick
into a USB drive on your ‘ECDIS 1’ PC.
2. Click on the ARCS/ENC button in the Chart Installation area of
Chart Tools (see Chart Installation).
3. From the Chart Database window select the ENC tick box and click
the Permits button.

12-16 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

4. From the S-63 Permits window verify that PRIMAR.CRT38 is

selected under S-63 Certificate with a valid expiration date
5. If S-63 chart permits are listed remove the existing permits by
clicking the Clear All Permits button.
6. With all previous S-63 permits removed, click the Install New
Permit File button and browse to the `PERMIT.TXT' file in the
`ECDIS 1’ folder on the CD/NavStick.
7. Click the Open button to install the permits from this file.
8. After the permit file has been processed by the system, an
information dialog is displayed that includes the total number of
permits processed, the number of new permits found and the
number of updated permits found. Click OK to close the S-63.
Permits window and return to the Chart Installation window.

Installing NAVTOR Charts

NAVTOR supplies two types of CD/DVD media; BASE 39and UPDATE40 If
both are provided in the same delivery or if chart loading is to be performed
for the first time, the BASE media MUST be loaded first and the UPDATE
media second. If you are using NavSync, both BASE and UPDATE charts
are contained on the NavStick.

To install NAVTOR charts do the following:

The chart installation process described below is identical for BASE,
UPDATE and USB media.
1. Insert the ENC chart CD/DVD or NavStick into your `ECDIS 1’ PC.
2. Verify that the required chart permits are installed and that the
certificate file is correct from the `Chart Permits’ screen as
described previously.

38
If an S63 certificate file has expired, and a new certificate has been issued, the certificate
file used for installation of S-63 charts from NAVTOR is found within the root directory of the
BASE/UPDATE CD/DVD or NavStick. For installation details refer to Error! Reference
source not found..
39
If you have ordered ENC Charts to be delivered on CD, you will receive a total of 8 Base
Discs labelled with the containing countries. The ENC Base DVD contains all countries on a
single disc. The ENC Base disc(s) are periodically re-issued to free up space on the ENC
Update CD, this currently happens about 5 times a year.
40
The ENC Update CD contains all new ENCs, new editions of ENCs and ENC updates
issued since the last ENC Base disc(s) where issued. The CD is cumulative so the user only
has to load the latest week number.

65900010 12-17
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

3. On the Chart Installation window tick the ENC check box and click
the Launch ChartHandler button. An `Action Required' popup
window appears requesting confirmation of chart deactivation. Click
the OK button to confirm.
4. If the active chart database is ENC the chart is removed from the
display and the Charthandler application opens (if ARCS is the
active database the ARCS charts remain on the screen).
5. From the ChartHandler screen select S-57/S-63 Exchange Sets in
`Select Chart Type’ area and View Importable S-57/S63 Charts in
`Select Mode’ area. If the source directory was set correctly in the
previous step, the system will automatically start to list all charts
that are available for installation. (This operation might take a while,
depending on the amount of charts that require installation).
6. If the system does not automatically start to list charts, click the
Browse button and select the root directory of the inserted
NAVTOR ENC BASE CD/DVD or NavStick and then click OK. The
chart files will appear in the chart list and the buttons in the
`Actions’ area of ChartHandler become active.
7. Click the Install Charts button to install all the charts in the list. Or,
to install selected chart files from the list highlight the files and click
the Install Charts button. When charts are being installed a
Converting Files window appears over the ChartHandler screen
showing the progress of the installation as a percentage figure.
8. When you have installed all the charts required, exit the
ChartHandler by clicking the Quit button in the lower right corner.
The database for the installed charts will be automatically indexed
and the ENC charts will be available for selection.

12-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Permits
The Permits window (accessed by clicking on the Permits button in Chart
Installation window) displays a list of the currently installed S-63 chart
permits. The window includes the following columns:
 Chart Name – the reference of each chart in the database
 Data Server – if charts are installed from different chart providers
(e.g. UKHO or NAVTOR) this column provides a reference for the
provider. Note that some charts may have the same reference
name but are installed from different data servers.
 Expiration Date – the date when the chart permit expires.

The S-63 Permits window allows the following actions to be taken with
regards to the selected chart:
 Install a new permit file
 Remove selected permits
 Clear all permits
 Install an S-63 certificate
To install a new S-63 permit file:
1. Click the Install New Permit File... button and browse to the
PERMIT.TXT file provided by your S-63 chart provider.
If you receive your cell permit file on a 3 ½” floppy disk, or by e-
mail, you must first transfer the file to a USB memory stick before
following the cell update procedure below.

65900010 12-19
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

2. With the PERMIT.TXT file selected in the Browse dialog, click the
Open button to install the permits from this file. After the permits
from the file have been processed by the system, an information
dialog is displayed that includes the total number of permits
processed, the number of new permits found, and the number of
updated permits found.

The most recent PERMIT.TXT file from your S-63 chart provider
should be installed before each S-63 chart installation operation.
To remove selected permits, highlight the permits to be removed in the
permit listing and click the Remove Selected Permits button.
To clear all permits previously installed on the system, click the Clear All
Permits button.

CAUTION:

Do NOT remove the USB memory stick containing the permit file
until you have exited the Chart Installer.

The S-63 Certificate section of the S-63 Chart Installation screen enables
selection of the certificate file for the installation operation. The certificate
file provides an authenticated public key for the S-63 scheme administrator
which is required for decryption of charts.
The drop down box displays the certificates that are currently installed on
the system (PRIMAR.CRT or IHO.CRT). The expiration date for the
currently selected certificate is also displayed.
The selection of the certificate type is dependent on which scheme
administrator your S-63 chart provider operates under. Charts obtained
from UKHO or PRIMAR will require the PRIMAR.CRT. Consult with your
chart provider if you are unsure which certificate is appropriate for their
charts.
S-63 chart installation will not be permitted to continue if the selected
certificate file has expired. If it has expired, a replacement certificate will
need to be installed.
To install a new certificate file click on the Install Certificate... button and
browse to the.CRT file you wish to install. When the file is selected, click
the Open button, and confirm you wish to overwrite the existing certificate if
necessary.

12-20 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Important Note: The only circumstances where a new certificate should

be installed when an existing certificate has expired, or when the key
information of the scheme administrator has been compromised and
subsequently a new certificate issued. The certificate file that should be
used for installation of S-63 charts from a particular provider is often found
within the root directory of the media on which the charts are distributed.
For example, UKHO provides a valid PRIMAR.CRT file in the root directory
of their Base CDs and Update CDs.

Chart Copy
The Chart Copy feature allows you to copy charts installed locally to other
nodes in a multi-node system.
Chart copy operations can be performed while VisionMaster is running on
all nodes, and charts will continue to be displayed during the copy process.
When a copy operation is performed, the charts are placed in a staging
area on the remote node, separate from any charts already installed on that
node. After a copy operation has completed successfully, the node needs
to be restarted to activate the copied charts.

A C-Map database must be initially installed and registered locally

at each node before Chart Copy for C-Map charts is started.

To copy a chart database to other nodes, do the following:

1. To select the chart type to be copied click on the Chart Copy
button. The subsequent screen enables the chart type to be
selected from a drop down list.
The Charts at Local Node area provides information about locally installed
charts for the selected chart type. The information provided depends on the
chart type. For S-57, ARCS, or VPF charts a Last Modification date and
time is provided to indicate when the charts were last updated. For C-Map
charts, an Issue Number, Issue Date, and Update Date are provided.

65900010 12-21
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The Charts at Remote Nodes table provides the latest available

information about charts installed at remote nodes. The same chart time,
date and update information is provided for charts on remote nodes as is
provided for the local node.
The Status column provides an indication of whether the charts on the
remote node match the locally installed charts. If the charts do match, then
Matches Local Charts is displayed in green. Otherwise, Does Not Match
Local Charts is displayed in yellow. The Status column also provides
current progress information once a copy operation is started. The buttons
in the Action column enables you to start or cancel chart copy operations
for individual nodes.
The Copy Local Charts to All Nodes button allows you to copy the local
charts to all nodes, while the Cancel All Copy Operations cancels all
active copy operations.
2. To start a copy operation to specific nodes on the system (i.e. the
nodes displaying Does Not Match Local Charts) click on the
Copy Local Charts to this Node button in the Action column.
3. Or, to copy the selected chart database to all remote nodes on the
system, click the Copy Local Charts to All Nodes button.
4. When the copy process is started the Status column provides
current information about the progress of each active copy
operation. If a copy operation fails for any reason (e.g. remote
nodes becomes unavailable), the reason for the copy error is
displayed in the Status column. Once the copy operation is started,
the Action column button will change to Cancel Copy Operation.

12-22 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

5. To cancel the copy operation click the Cancel Copy Operation

button while the copy is in progress, the copy will be cancelled and
any partially set of copied files will be removed from the remote
node.
Once the copy operation is complete, the Status column will display a
Copy Complete, Reboot Node message in yellow. This indicates that the
newly copied charts can be activated by restarting the remote node. After
the node is restarted, the chart information displayed for that node will be
automatically refreshed to match the newly activated charts.
When a C-Map database is copied to a remote node, any existing licenses
installed on that node are automatically applied to the replacement charts
when they are activated on reboot.
If a problem is encountered during the activation of copied charts on
restart, a Charts Activation Error warning is raised, with a description on
the reason for the failed activation.

65900010 12-23
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Permissions / User Permits

The Permissions/User Permits area includes the following access buttons:
 Export S-63 Permit
 Export 7Cs Hardware ID
 Export ARCS User Permit
 C-Map Permissions

The Export ARCS User Permit selection is only valid if your

system is configured as a Total Watch and a presentation option of
the Total Watch includes an ECDIS. For details on this function
refer to the ECDIS User’s Guide (65900012).

When a chart license or permit is about to expire a warning is generated. If

the CMAP license has expired (see C-Map Permissions) the system stops
displaying the respective charts. The system will accept new licenses and
cell permits using electronic media. For details on installing license files
and/or cell permits see Chapter 1, `Chart Installation' in Supplementary
Features User Guide, 65900014.
Export S-63 Permit
A SevenCs S-63 is a piece of information that is intended to provide
additional system protection and authorization for the chart database. The
operator is required to send the permit file to UKHO in order to activate an
S-63 account. The permit number is based on the Security block PIN.
To export an S-63 permit file do the following:
1. Insert an external device, such as a USB
memory stick, into a port at the rear of the
VisionMaster PC.
2. Click on the Export S-63 Permit button.
The subsequent window displays the
external disk drive and prompts to choose
the location to export the S-63 permit.
3. Navigate to the location where you want
the permit exported to by clicking on the
+ button to the left of the directory folder.
4. To enter a filename for the permit click in
the Filename field and enter a name
using the screen keypad.

12-24 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

5. With the export location highlighted and a name entered click the
Export button, the S-63 permit is exported to the location as a .txt
file. If successful a temporary prompt is displayed confirming that
the permit has been exported with the selected location detailed in
the prompt.
6. To cancel the export operation, click the Cancel button. The Tools
menu re-appears.
7. When the file has been exported, select the route directory (i.e.
E:\), click the Eject button and remove the external device from the
PC.
Once installed S-63 charts will be displayed even if cell permits have
expired.
Export 7Cs Hardware ID
To export a 7Cs Hardware ID file do the following:
1. Insert an external device, such as a USB memory stick, into a port
at the rear of the VisionMaster PC.
2. Click on the Export 7Cs Hardware ID
button. The subsequent window displays
the external disk drive and prompts to
choose the location to export the
hardware ID file.
3. Navigate to the location where you want
the file exported to by clicking on the +
button to the left of the directory folder.
4. To enter a name for the ID file click in the
Filename field and enter a name using
the screen keypad.
5. With the export location highlighted and a
name entered click the Export button,
hardware ID file is exported to the location
as a .txt file. If successful a temporary
prompt is displayed confirming that the file
has been exported with the selected
location detailed in the prompt.
6. To cancel the export operation, click the Cancel button. The Tools
menu re-appears.
7. When the file has been exported, select the route directory (i.e.
E:\), click the Eject button and remove the external device from the
PC.

65900010 12-25
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

C-Map Permissions
When in Standby, information on the C-Map charts, including product
(ENC), region covered and permit expiration date can be viewed by clicking
on the C-Map Permissions button. A tabular window appears over the
video circle.

12-26 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Index
Chart Index catalogues each chart for all loaded chart databases. The
Index facility includes a number of display filtering options, the display of
chart outlines within the current display area and the option to move the
display location to a selected chart.
To access the Chart Index, click on the Show Index button. A tabular chart
index window appears over the video circle when in Standby.

When the Chart Index table is first opened the charts are listed with the
chart names (based on their ENC alphanumeric code) in alphabetical
order.
How the data is displayed may be changed by clicking on the column
headings. For example, clicking on the Scale heading will list charts
starting from the lowest compilation scale (see Chart Facility), or clicking on
the Issue Date column will list charts from the earliest date of issue.
Clicking on the column headings again will reverse the list to show the
highest scale or latest issue at the top of the column.

65900010 12-27
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Filtering Options

The chart Index table includes the following filter options: Usage Level and
Database.
All charts are defined with a usage level (e.g.
Harbour or Coastal) with each usage level
displayed in a particular colour. All the usage
types are listed in a Usage Level drop down
list, which defaults to displaying all. To display
only the charts with a specific type of usage
level select the level from the drop down list, the
table is re-drawn showing only those charts that conform to that usage
level.
To display only the charts from a specific database click on the Database
drop down arrow and select from the list. The table is re-drawn showing
only those charts assigned to that database.
Chart Outlines
To display chart outlines, tick the Draw Chart
Outlines check box. The display will show the
coverage of the charts within the current display
area as a series of coloured chart boundary
rectangles, the colour of the chart boundary is
dependent on the chart usage level.
Chart Selection
Individual charts may be located and identified on
the video circle. To select a chart tick the Chart Selection Cursor check
box and move the cursor to the video circle, the letters SEL are added to
the cursor. Note that the chart selection cursor is temporary, after a period
of 10 to 15 seconds the cursor reverts to normal and the check box goes
back to unticked.
Click in an area of the video circle. The outline of
the chart is drawn and its area displayed in
colour (the colour of the outline and area is
dependent on the chart's usage level). The chart
is also highlighted in the Index list.

12-28 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Go To Chart
The Go to Selected Chart button pans the display to the centre of a
selected chart from the Chart Index window.
To pan to a particular chart, select the chart by clicking anywhere within the
chart row, and with the selected chart highlighted click the Go To Selected
Chart button. The display is re-drawn to the centre of the chart boundary
box, TM limits are switched off and a temporary prompt displays TM Limits
Off.
When using the Go to Selected Chart function the following notes should
be taken into consideration:

The function only changes the displayed location. It will not

necessarily display the selected chart if its database is not currently
enabled. If a different chart database is enabled, the operator will
need to select the desired chart from the Chart button drop down list.

The function does not change the range scales to ensure the chart is
displayed. It is also possible that the centre of the chart boundary
box does not actually fall into a coverage area of the chart depending
on the chart shape (for example, an L-shape boundary).

TM limits are re-enabled and the navigation chart displayed when the
Centre button is clicked.

65900010 12-29
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Settings
The Chart Settings sub menu includes two tab
folders:
 Features
 Symbology
The Features folder enables you to choose a
chart display mode and enable/disable custom display settings from a list of
chart format features, additional to those displayed on the currently
selected mode.
The Symbology folder enables you to customise display settings for all
chart databases and display settings for specific charts (e.g. C-MAP or S-
57 chart databases) from a list of available settings.
The currently selected chart display mode (i.e. `Base Chart Display' or
`Standard Chart Display') is shown as a permanent prompt, see Prompts.

Chart Display Suppression

The selection of chart sets and the application of custom features are
governed by the current range scale and presentation mode.
The display of charts is suppressed if the presentation mode is Head Up
(either Stabilised or Unstabilised) and the current range scale is greater
than 3 nautical miles.
When North Up or Course Up presentation modes are selected all sets are
available and custom features can be applied at range scales of 12 NM and
below, whereas at higher range scales chart sets and functions are
disabled as follows:
 at 96 NM Base chart only is available;
 at 48 NM Base and Standard charts are available;
 at 24 NM Base, Standard, Other and Custom charts are available.

12-30 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Features
The selection of the display mode defines the
behaviour used by the chart engine when
rendering chart data.
VisionMaster FT includes the following four
types of chart display modes:
 Base
 Standard
 Other - includes all Standard and Other
display settings listed in the Custom Display
Settings list
 Custom - enables a customized selection of
display settings to be defined from the
Standard and Other settings lists.
The currently selected chart display mode (i.e.
`Base Chart Display' or `Standard Chart
Display') is shown as a permanent prompt, see
Prompts.
Base
The Base display mode is the minimum chart
content that cannot be removed from the
display. It is not intended to be sufficient for safe
navigation. Base display settings consist of:
 Coastline (high water)
 Own ship's safety contour, see Safety Checking
 Isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour
which lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour
 Isolated dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety
contour such as fixed structures, overhead wires, etc.
 Chart scale boundaries
 Scale, range and north arrow
 Units of depth and height
 Display mode

65900010 12-31
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Standard
The Standard display mode includes all features defined by Base, plus the
additional features listed in the Standard display features list. This display
mode is intended to be used as a minimum during route planning and route
monitoring.
Other
The Other display mode includes Standard features, plus all remaining
chart features as listed in the Other settings list.
Custom
A custom feature set allows the operator to customize the chart display by
enabling or disabling specific settings from the Other and Standard lists,
see below. By default, all the Standard settings are enabled for the Custom
feature set.
Customizing Display Settings
The custom display settings list allows chart settings to be enabled or
disabled when the display mode is in Custom.
There are three buttons available for selection: All, None and Default.
 All - selects and displays all the chart settings in the Standard and
Other lists.
 None - deselects all the chart settings in the Standard and Other lists.
 Default - selects and displays the Standard default chart settings only.
To enable or disable individual chart settings in Custom mode tick the
check box for the required function. A description of each function is given
below the custom settings list when the cursor moves over the function.

12-32 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Symbology
The Symbology folder lists the display settings
available for all chart types and all other
configured chart databases (as listed in Chart
Databases).
The All, None and Default buttons work in the
same way as described previously in the
Features section.

Chart Symbology Display Settings

The chart symbology display settings listed in
the following pages are, when selected,
displayed on all chart databases.

65900010 12-33
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Setting Name Setting Description Default

Value
Chart Scale Displays a boundary around the largest scale On
Boundary chart data in view
Data Quality Pattern Pattern indicating the quality of chart data Off

Ignore Time Display chart objects regardless of their S-57 Off

Attributes41 date and time dependency attributes
(PERSTA, PERENC, DATSTA, DATEND)
Information Tags Displays information tags on chart objects that Off
provide descriptive text when queried.
Official Boundary Boundary between official and unofficial data. On

Overscale Pattern Overscale pattern displayed on charts that are On

shown at a more detailed scale level than their
compilation scale.
Scamin Filtering42 Suppresses chart symbols based on their On
SCAMIN attribute.
Shallow Pattern Shallow pattern displayed on waters shallower Off
than the safety contour.
Simplified Symbols Simplified symbols from the presentation Off
library used.
Two Shade Depths Controls whether two or four water depths Off
shades are used.

41
Date-dependent objects, such as seasonal buoys, are only displayed over a certain period
(defined as IHO S-57 parameters PERSTA to PEREND). Other objects, such as a traffic
separation scheme, may have a date on which they are introduced (DATSTA) and/or
discontinued (DATEND). The system defaults to not displaying any ENC object with one of
these attributes outside its effective date/time.
To display all ENC objects outside their date/time dependency, tick the Ignore Time
Attributes check box. When this setting is switched on, the ENC chart objects are displayed
and a permanent prompt `Chart Ignores Date and Time’ appears informing the user that ENC
information displayed may be incorrect for the present real date and time.
42
SCAMIN is an attribute (defined by the IHO S-57 standard) that can be used to tag ENC
chart features to be suppressed above a certain display scale.
The primary function of SCAMIN is to declutter the chart display, enabling the operator to
focus on the most useful navigational information for the current display scale. As the chart
display is decluttered, SCAMIN also helps increase the chart re-draw performance.
The application of the SCAMIN attribute by the producer of the ENC data is optional; some
chart providers may not apply SCAMIN. Also, it may not be available consistently across
different ENC charts.

12-34 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

The chart symbology display settings below are available for the ENC (S-
57) chart database.

Setting Name Setting Description Default

Value
AIO43 Display Admiralty Information Overlay data On
Light Distinction Provides non-standard symbology for fixed Off
lights so they can be easily distinguished
from floating lights.
Light Sector Areas44 Light sector highlighting. Off

Lights Description Lights textual description. Off

Text

Scamin Filter Displays a warning if any chart object has On

Warning been suppressed due to its SCAMIN
attributes.
Symbol Filtering Suppresses overlapping chart symbols of Off
the same size, shape, and colour to reduce
clutter of the display.
Text (Important) Display text information important for On
navigation
Text (Other) Other textual information (e.g. object Off
names).
Text Outline Outline around text symbols to provide On
contrast.
Text Scale Factor Scaling factor that defines the size of text 2.0
displayed on the chart.

43
The UKHO Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) product provides Temporary and
Preliminary Notice to Mariners (T&P NMs). T&P NMs contain information about recent
changes to ENCs and paper chart changes that have not yet been incorporated into ENCs.
The AIO overlay comes in the form of a single ENC cell (GB800001) that covers the whole
world and is delivered in S-63 format..AIO can only be used in conjunction with ENC charts
and permits from the UKHO AVCS product. Each AIO object (e.g. Temporary Notice) is
associated with one or more ENC charts as specified in its attributes.
Note that no chart dangers can be raised by AIO objects, see Warning in Dangers.
For information on accessing AIO data on the chart display, refer to Chart Query on AIO Data.
44
The light sector will be shown only if the actual light source is visible on the chart display.
For example, on a higher scale ratio range scale where the coastline is visible, the light
sectors emanating from coastal lighthouses will be shown on screen; at lower ranges where
the light source is not shown on the chart display the light sector will not be visible.

65900010 12-35
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The chart symbology display settings below are available for C-Map chart
databases.

Setting Name Setting Description Default

Value
Coverage Boundaries indicating chart coverage. Off
Boundaries
Danger Symbol Danger symbol displayed for dangers in On
waters shallower than the safety contour.
Lights Leg Real light leg lengths. Off
Lengths
Lights Description Lights textual description. Off
Text
Light Sector Lights textual description. None
Areas
Low Accuracy Tags marking low accuracy chart objects. Off
Tags
Plain Area Plain, non-symbolized area boundaries. Off
Boundaries
Text (Generic) Generic textual information. Off
Text (Important) Text important for navigation. On
Text (Other) Other textual information (e.g. chart object Off
names)

12-36 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Projections
There are two primary projection types supported
by the VisionMaster system:
 Mercator45
 Polar Stereographic 46
Mercator is the default chart projection, used to
display geographic areas between 0 degrees and
80 degrees latitude north or south. The exception
to that is with non-navigational scales
(1:1,000,000 or above) where Mercator can view
regions up to 85 degrees North/South.
The Polar Stereographic projection can be used to display any region of the
earth, including the north and south poles (up to 90 degrees north or
south).
The Chart Projection menu allows the operator to specify which of the two
projection types they prefer to use for display. The preferred projection is
local to each node and is persisted.
Whenever the displayed region changes (due to scale change, panning,
TM reset or Goto) the system attempts to the use the preferred projection
to render the chart and all other synthetics.
If preferred projection is unavailable in the displayed region, then the
system will select an `Active Projection' from the available projections that
are supported by the current chart engine. For example, if the preferred
location is Mercator but the chart is displaying a high latitude region the
Active Projection will automatically change to Polar Stereographic to render
the chart display.

45
A Mercator projection is a method of showing a map of the globe on a flat surface. On a
globe, the lines of longitude (measuring east-west position) converge at the poles and the
lines of latitudes (measuring north-south position) are equal distance apart. In a Mercator
projection, the lines of longitude are straight vertical lines equal distance apart at all latitudes,
and horizontal distances are stretched above and below the equator, this stretching is
exaggerated near the poles.
46
In a Polar Stereographic projection the lines of longitude emanate from either the north or
south pole (depending on which hemisphere is being displayed), and lines of latitude are
displayed as concentric circles around the pole.

65900010 12-37
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

SevenCs vector based charts are displayed in all chart projections,

whereas CMAP is only displayed in Mercator projection. At high latitude
regions, using Polar Stereographic projection, CMAP charts are
suppressed and a permanent prompt Chart Suppressed at High Latitude
appears. CMAP charts are restored when the chart enters a geographic
region where Mercator is allowed.

Chart Depths/Heights
The chart depths/heights window enables you
to change the default settings of own ship's
safety depth/height and shallow/deep shading
contours.
On a multi- node system any changes made in
Chart Depths/Heights are distributed and
persisted across all nodes.

Safety Depth and Height

The safety depth is the minimum depth required by an underwater object
for own ship to pass over safely. The minimum depth is the distance from
the water surface to bottom of own ship's keel, plus a safety buffer against
variations in the water level from the time the water was charted to the
present time.
The defined safety depth value is reflected in the Chart Legend Detail tab
folder.
The safety height is the minimum distance required by an overhead
obstruction for own ship to pass under safely. The minimum height is the
distance from the surface of the charted water to the lowest point of the
overhead obstruction.
The default values for Safety Depth and Height are 30 metres.
If the safety depth is set at a value less than the configured value of own
ship's maximum draft a Safety Depth Shallow Caution is displayed.
If the safety height is set at a value less than the configured value of own
ship's height a Safety Height Low Caution is displayed.

12-38 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Shallow and Deep Contours

The Deep Contour and Shallow Contour areas are highlighted on the Video
circle by colour shading, with the shallow water areas indicated by lighter
shades. Contours, prohibited areas, and areas with special conditions are
considered dangerous if their depth is less than own ship’s safety depth or
no depth is defined for that object.
WARNING!

THE CHART SHADING BASED ON THE DEFINED CONTOURS

MAY NOT ALWAYS BE ACCURATE DUE TO THE GEOMETRY OF
THE DEPTH CONTOURS IN THE AREA, AS WELL AS
LIMITATIONS IN THE SYSTEM CHART DATA AT ANY GIVEN TIME.
THESE LIMITATIONS MAY INCLUDE NON-AVAILABILITY OF
USER-SPECIFIED DEPTH CONTOURS, VARIANCES BETWEEN
DATA CONTENT ON OVERLAPPING CHARTS, AND OTHER DATA
ISSUES. THE OPERATOR MUST TAKE THESE FACTORS INTO
ACCOUNT AND USE ALL AVAILABLE SOURCES OF
INFORMATION REGARDING DEPTH, AS APPROPRIATE TO THE
NAVIGATION AREA.

For an illustration of deep and shallow contour areas on a chart display,

refer to the Detail tab in Chart Legend sub menu.
The default value for shallow contour is 2 metres
(maximum value = Safety Depth).
The default value for deep contour is 30 metres
(minimum value = Safety Depth).
When own ship's safety depth is changed the deep/shallow contour colours
may change although the contour outlines will remain on the video circle.

Changing Chart Depth/Height Values

To change the default values click in the required field and move the
trackball left to decrease the value or right to increase. Click the left key
again to set the value.
The contour and depth values set for the selected chart are also shown in
the Detail tab in Chart Legend sub menu.

65900010 12-39
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Databases
The Chart Databases window lists all chart
databases available to the system and allows
databases to be enabled or disabled.
When the system is in its initial state, i.e. the
first time the system is run; all chart databases
that have been configured for the system are
listed as enabled.

Enabling and Disabling Chart Databases

The chart databases are listed in the Enabled
field in the order in which they will be used for
rendering chart data. The databases with the
highest priority are listed at the top of the
Enabled field and the lowest priority at the
bottom. The higher a chart database appears in
the enabled list the sooner it will be selected for
rendering.
To change the chart database priority, or to disable or enable a chart
database do the following:
To change the chart database order of priority:
1. Click on a chart database in the Enabled list, if the database is
neither at the top or bottom of the list then both the Up button and
Down button to the right of the list become available.
2. Click on the Up or Down button to move the position of the chart
database within the list.
To disable or enable a chart database:
1. To disable, click on the chart database in the Enabled list and click
the Down button between the Enabled and Disabled fields. The
selected chart database is moved to the Disabled field, and will not
be rendered or available for selection from the Chart and Radar
Maps button.
2. To enable a previously disabled chart database click on the
database in the disablement list and click the Up button between
the Enabled and Disabled fields. The database is moved to the
Enabled list.

12-40 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Supported Chart Engines and Databases

The VisionMaster system supports CMAP and SevenCs chart engines.
The CMAP chart engine supports the following chart databases:
 C-MAP Professional (CD version)47
 C-MAP ENC48
 C-MAP Professional+ (Upgraded DVD)49
 C-MAP JeppesenPrimar50
The SevenCs chart engine supports the following chart databases:
 S63 (encrypted S-57)51
 S-5752
 World Map53 (ENC)
C-MAP and SevenCs presentation libraries are supported.

47
CMAP's proprietary and unofficial chart format.
48
Official S-57 charts converted to CMAP's proprietary chart database format.
49
Professional+ is an extended version of CM93v3 charts supplied on DVD.
50
The C-Map JeppesenPrimar database consists of official ENC data from Primar and
unofficial C-Map chart data where official data is not present
51
Encrypted official chart format, implementation is based on IMO S63 standard.
52
Unencrypted official chart format, implementation based on IHO S57 standard.
53
The World Map database is delivered with the SevenCs Chart Engine and is based on the
NGA World Vector Shoreline 1:250,000 charts. The structure of the data is defined by the IHO
S-57 specification. Note that this database is only suitable for small scale viewing. It is not
official format and therefore not safety checked.

65900010 12-41
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Official and Unofficial Chart Data

Chart databases may be classified as Official or Unofficial chart data.
Official chart data is known as Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) data. All
official ENC chart data must comply with data standards set by members of
the International Hydrographic Organisation (IHO) and published in their
document S-57, Edition 3.
An unofficial chart database is data which does not comply with the S-57
Edition 3 document.
An Unofficial Data permanent prompt is shown whenever chart data from
an unofficial source is displayed (for example, SevenCs World Map charts).
Unofficial data is not certified for safe navigational and the operator should
refer to paper charts for unofficial data regions.
SevenCs supports both official and unofficial data. The official boundary
line is always displayed to distinguish official and unofficial data, unless it
has been explicitly disabled by the operator using the `Official Boundary'
custom chart setting for the SevenCs engine, see Settings.
Certain C-Map chart databases include a combination of official and
unofficial chart data (see footnotes on the previous page). While all types
are used for safety checking, only official ENC data can satisfy the ECDIS
requirements that may in some cases allow a vessel to navigate without
reliance on up-to-date paper charts.

Even when official ENC data is used the operator should be mindful
of the quality of data, and is encouraged to view the data quality
symbol at appropriate intervals and understand the meaning of these
symbols.

12-42 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Legend
The Chart Legend sub menu enables you to
view read only information on every chart
currently visible on the screen.
The Chart Legend window is divided into three
tab folders:
 Select
 Detail
 Updates

Legend Select
The Select folder displays the names of all the
charts currently displayed on the screen. From
this folder you can choose the chart whose legend
information will be displayed in the Detail folder,
see Legend Detail.
The available charts are listed in Chart engine (C-
MAP or SevenCs) folders.
The set of charts displayed in the Select folder will
automatically update itself to match the cells most
recently displayed on the screen.
To view available charts click on the + button for
each chart database.
All the listed charts include a numerical value in
brackets. This value is the ratio of the current
display scale to the chart’s compilation scale, as shown on the Detail tab.
For example, if a chart has a compilation scale of 7500 and the current
range scale is 12 NM, the ratio of these values is 7500 divided by 1200
equals 0.6x, with the value rounded off to the nearest decimal point.
Charts displayed in bold are currently under ownship's position. Charts not
in bold are covering a portion of the display not under ownship’s position.
Show Chart Coverage
The Select tab includes the option to display coverage of a selected chart
on the screen. To show chart coverage select a chart from the list and tick
the Highlight Coverage of Selection check box. The chart outline is
shown and the chart area filled in.

65900010 12-43
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Legend Detail
The Detail folder displays all the chart legend
information on the chart selected from the
Select folder.
The information displayed in the Detail folder is
divided into the following sections:
 Chart Usage/Scale
 Contours/Depths
 Format/Date/Provider
 Geodesy
 Units
To view the read-only information on each section click on the + box.
If there is no chart data available for the geographical region being viewed,
all component fields show No Chart Available.
Chart Usage / Scale
The chart usage scale displays the navigational
purpose (e.g. Harbour) and scale of the
selected chart (see Compilation Scale in Chart
Facility).
Contours / Depths
The Contours/Depths information includes
depth and contour values for the selected chart
based on the requested values from the Chart
Depths/Heights window.
The contours of the chart will always increase
to a higher value than the minimum values set
in Chart Depths/Heights. For example, if the
Deep Contour value is increased from the
default of 30 metres to a value ranging from 31
to 50 metres then the Deep Contour read-only
value will display 50.

12-44 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Deep Contour and Shallow Contour

All vector charts contain information about the contour and shape of the
sea floor at a particular depth, this information is called Depth Contour.
Each chart contains depth contour information with varying levels of detail
based on the survey that was originally performed to create the chart. One
chart may have a set of contours for 3 metre, 5 metre, 8 metre, 10 metre,
and 15 metre depths. A less detailed chart might only have contour
information for 5 metre and 30 metre depths.
The deep and shallow contour values are only applicable when four depth
shades are enabled in Setting Custom Chart Features (i.e. Two Shade
Depths is unchecked in Custom Features). When four depth shades are
used there are different shades for `very shallow' waters and `very deep'
waters. The deep contour and shallow contour define where the shading
on the chart image will change.
Safety Contour
The safety contour value defines which of the depth contours available in
the chart will be selected as the actual safety contour that is displayed in
the chart legend. This safety contour is displayed on the chart with a
bold/emphasized line; this line defines the area that the ship can never
safely cross. For further emphasis the water that is deeper than the actual
safety contour is displayed in a different colour to the water shallower than
the actual safety contour.
The safety contour value is defined by the operator selected safety depth
value in Chart Depths/Heights. The actual safety contour value is always
greater than or equal to the requested safety depth value. If the defined
safety depth value is not available in the chart, the next deeper contour is
selected. If no contour is available in the chart that is equal to or deeper
than the requested safety depth, there is effectively is no applicable safety
contour for that chart and the legend shows No Contour Available.

65900010 12-45
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Safety Depth
The safety depth is the depth threshold at which spot soundings should be
displayed with or without emphasis. The Safety Depth value set in Chart
Depth/Heights is reflected in the Safety Depth field.
The illustration below shows a typical chart annotated with contour areas
and safety depth areas.

Format / Date / Provider

The Format / Date /Provider displays data on the chart's data format, data
provider, edition and update information.
Geodesy
The Geodesy section provides datum information (WGS84) and WGS84
shift Lat/Long data.
Units
Units show the chart depth and height units (defaults to metres).

12-46 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Legend Updates
The Update folder displays the following data
on updates applied to the selected chart.
 time and date the update was applied
 date that the update was issued
 action taken i.e. Add, Modify or Delete
 Lat/Lon position of update
Chart updates can be selected by clicking on
the Update + box, respective update actions
will be shown in the update tree.
Details for a particular chart update action can
be viewed by selecting it in the navigation tree.
The data listed above is displayed at the
bottom of the window.
Panning to Update
To view specific updates select the chart
update from the navigation tree click and the
Pan to Selected Update box. The screen pans
to the geographic position of the selected
update (see Off Centre, Pan and Goto) and the
TM limits are switched off.
When the Highlight Selected Update check
box is ticked the update object is highlighted on
the display with a graphic dependent on the
updated object selected, see Query Results.
Click the Centre button to return the screen to own ship centred on the
display.

65900010 12-47
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Manual Chart Update

The manual chart update facility enables the
operator to add chart objects to the currently
enabled chart.
Added chart objects are displayed using the
same symbology as ENC chart data but with a
manual update symbol superimposed.
An example of a manual update symbol on a
chart object is shown below.

The Manual Chart Update sub-menu includes

the following tab folders:
 Display - enables the selection of
chart update types and layers to be
displayed.
 Edit - enables you to Create a Chart Update and Modify a Chart
Update.
 Layers - enables the management of layers used for grouping
manual chart updates.
 I/O (import/export) - enables importing or exporting of chart
updates.

Multi-node Support
On a multi-node system manual chart updates are saved and retrieved
from a database and may be distributed and available among all system
nodes.

12-48 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Manual Chart Update Functions

Chart Layers
The Layers tab enables you to create, edit, and delete layers. Layers
provide a way to group sets of related manual chart updates, see Create
Chart Update. Groupings may be made based on different criteria such as
geographic region, time period, navigational mode, or danger classification.
The display of chart updates within layers can be controlled from the
Display folder, see Displayed Chart Updates.
Chart updates can also be imported or exported based on their layer
grouping, see Importing or Exporting Chart Updates.
To create, rename or delete a chart layer do the following:
To create a new layer:
1. Click in the Layer Name: field, the screen keypad appears.
2. Using the keypad enter a name for the
layer and click the Add New Layer
button. The layer name appears in the
Layers list. If more than one layer is
created the field lists the layers alpha-
numerically.
3. To enter a description of the layer
click in the Layer Description field
and enter a description using the
screen keypad.
To delete a layer:
1. Select the layer from the list and click
the Delete Selected Layer button, a
delete confirmation window appears.
2. To confirm layer deletion click the Yes
button, or to cancel the deletion click
the No button. The layer is removed
from the list when deleted.
To rename a layer:
1. Select the layer from the list enter the new name in the Layer
Name: field as described above, and click the Rename Selected
Layer button, a rename confirmation window appears.
2. To confirm the layer rename click the Yes button, or to cancel click
the No button. The selected layer is renamed in the list.

65900010 12-49
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Edit Chart Update

The Edit tab folder is divided into two areas:
Create Chart Update and Modify Chart Update.
The Create Chart Update area includes the
following links:
 Create New object
 Add Annotation Mark
 Add Deletion Mark
The Modify Chart Update area includes the
following links:
 View/Edit Chart Update
 Delete Chart Update

Create Chart Update

The Create Chart Update area of the Edit tab
folder enables you to do the following:
 Create New Object - creates a new chart
object on an existing chart.
 Add Annotation Mark - adds an
annotation mark to an ENC chart object.
 Add Deletion Mark - adds a deletion mark to an ENC chart object.
Create New Object
To create a new chart object onto an existing chart do the following:
1. Click on the Create New Object button. The following screen
allows you to specify the layer, object type and symbol.
2. To create the chart object on a specific
chart layer click on the Layer drop down
arrow and select from the list. If no layers
have been created the update will
associate to the default layer.

12-50 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

3. To select the object type, click on the

Type drop down arrow and select from
the list.
The following object types are assigned:
 Areas
 Beacons
 Buoys
 Danger Points
 Geo Shapes
 Lines
 Nav Marks
 Other Points
4. With the object type selected click on
the Symbol/Description drop down list
and select the object symbol. The field
directly underneath the
Symbol/Description drop down list
includes a brief description of the
selected symbol.
5. Move the cursor into the chart display,
the screen cursor displays MO EDIT.
6. Click in the area where you want the
object positioned. The object appears
with a white highlighting. Objects with point geometry are
highlighted with a white box, line or area objects are highlighted
with small white circles at their individual points. When the object is
created, more editable fields will become available in the window
such as Position and Notes.
7. To change the object's parameters click in the respective fields.
8. To create the same object, or to add points to a line or area object,
move the cursor to another area of the screen and left click. Each
left click results in a new object of the selected type being created,
or points added to the line or area.
9. If the object type created was an area or a line the window includes
the option of starting a new area or line by clicking on the Start
New Area/Line button.
10. To create a new object with a manually
specified position, click on the Manually
Create... button. The screen prompts for
a LAT / LON position.

65900010 12-51
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The Manually Create… button can also be used to manually

specify the position of additional points for a line or area objects.
11. Click in the LAT/LON fields, enter a position using the screen
keypad, and click the OK button. A symbol is created in the
position specified.
12. To exit Create New Object click the Done button, the objects
created are fixed in position and the view returns to the Manual
Chart Update menu.

The list of chart objects in the Type drop down list is the same as
the list of Radar Maps. For details on creating mapping objects
refer to Creating Radar Maps in the Navigation Tools chapter.

When an object has been created, the

window shows the object's Lat/Lon position
and includes the option to associate the
object with the current chart by ticking the
Associate with Chart check box.
The Notes and Labels tab enables you to
enter notes on an object. If applicable to a
particular object, other editable files such as
Rotation, Time Label, and Display Label will
be available in this tab. Enter or edit values
using the screen keypad.

12-52 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Add Annotation Mark

The Add Annotation Mark feature allows you to highlight an object (an area,
line or point) on the chart display and add a note to the annotated chart
object.
To annotate a chart object do the following:
1. Click on the Add Annotation Mark button, the screen prompts to
select the chart object to annotate.
2. Click the ENC chart object you want to annotate. If the
object is a point (for example, a buoy or navigation
marker) or an area the object or area is highlighted in a
transparent red background with a red outline. If the object
is a line (e.g. depth contour) the line is displayed in red.
3. With the required object selected click the OK button. The method
of highlighting is dependent on the object selected:
a. If the object is an area the background colour changes to a
small dotted background with a dotted outline.
b. If the object is a point a white box appears around the chart
object with an i symbol next to the object.
c. If the object is a line the red colour changes to a dotted line
annotation mark.
The Chart Update View/Edit window confirms the annotated symbol status.
The object data shown is the same as shown previously in the Create New
Object section.
4. To exit Add Annotation Mark click the Done button. The
white box around the object is removed but the i symbol
remains, and the view returns to the Edit Chart Update
menu.
Add Deletion Mark
The Add Deletion Mark facility operates in the same way as Add
Annotation Mark. The difference being that the deletion mark is
symbolized with a diagonal orange line through the object.

65900010 12-53
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Modify Chart Update

The Modify Chart Update area of the Edit tab
folder enables you to do the following:
 View or Edit a chart update
 Delete a chart update
Viewing or Editing a Chart Update
To view or edit a chart update, do the following:
1. Click on the View/Edit Chart Update button. The window prompts
to left click on the object to view/edit.
2. Navigate to the chart object, as the cursor moves over the object it
changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator.
3. Click on the chart object to be viewed or edited. The subsequent
window lists the selected object type, symbol description and its
current position.
To edit the object's attributes:
1. To associate the chart update with the current chart, tick the
Associate with Chart check box.
2. To move the object to another layer click on the Layer drop down
arrow and select from the list of layers.
3. To change the group type click on the Type drop down arrow and
select from the following:
 Beacons
 Buoys
 Danger Points
 Nav Marks
 Other points
As the type is changed its graphic symbol also changes in the
symbol/description field and on the display.
4. To change the symbol click on the drop down arrow and select
from the list. The field directly underneath the Symbol/Description
field includes a brief description of the selected symbol.

12-54 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

5. To change the object's position either:

a. Click in the LAT/LON fields and enter a position using the
screen keypad;
Or:
b. Move the cursor over the object, hold down the left key and
use the trackball to drag the object to the required position.
When editing a line or area object, select the specific point to
be edited by moving the cursor over the point and left
clicking. The currently selected point is distinguished by a
red highlight circle.
6. If required, enter notes in the Notes and Labels tab using the
screen keypad.
7. If applicable, other editable fields such as Rotation, Time Label,
and Display Label will be available on this tab. Edit these values
by clicking in the desired field.
8. With all object editing complete click on the Done button. The chart
object is updated.
Deleting a Chart Update
To delete a chart update, do the following:
1. Click on the Delete Chart Update
button. The folder prompts to select the
object you wish to delete with a Confirm
on Delete check box. To receive system
prompts to confirm deletion before any
object is deleted tick the check box. If
the box is unticked then objects are
deleted without confirmation.
2. The cursor displays DEL when moved into the video circle. Move
the cursor over the object to be deleted, the cursor lines change
from horizontal and vertical cross hairs to diagonal cross hairs,
indicating a delete action can now be performed.
3. Click on the object to delete it. If the Confirm On Delete check box
is ticked then the screen will prompt you to confirm the deletion. If
the Confirm check box is unticked the object is immediately deleted
from the screen.
4. Click the Done button to return to the Manual Chart Update Edit
sub menu.

65900010 12-55
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Display Chart Updates

The Display tab enables you to select the layers
and object types to be displayed on the
currently enabled chart. Each layer and type
currently displayed will have their check box
ticked.
The Displayed Layers area lists the default
layer and all the operator defined layers created
in Layers.

Objects that were not associated with a

created layer are automatically associated
with the Default layer.

The Displayed Types lists all the object types

that can be selected from the Type drop down
list in the Chart Update Creation window, see
Create Chart Update.
All manual chart updates will be displayed when
all check boxes are ticked. To suppress the display of a manual chart
update for a particular layer or type untick the respective check box.
To select all chart layers and types for display click the Select All buttons,
to deselect all for display click the Deselect All buttons.

12-56 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Importing or Exporting Chart Updates

The I/O (Import/Export) tab folder enables you to import or export manual
chart updates to and from VisionMaster workstations.
Chart updates not currently on a workstation can be imported from an
external drive such as a USB memory stick. Manual chart updates that
have been produced on a workstation can be exported to other
workstations via the external drive.
Importing Chart Updates
To import chart updates do the following:
1. Insert the external device containing the chart updates into the PC.
If no external device has been inserted the window prompts to
`insert removable media’.
2. Navigate to the directory where the
chart updates reside. The field below
the directory tree will show any valid
object files in the selected folder.
3. Click on the file to import. The file
identity appears in the Filename field.
4. Click the Import button to import the
selected file's contents to your
Workstation. If successful a temporary
prompt appears confirming the import.
The selected chart updates are
imported into the Manual Chart Update
menu. If the chart updates are included
on a layer, that layer is imported with the objects and the layer
defaults to selected in the Display folder.
5. Remove the memory stick from the PC.

65900010 12-57
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Exporting Chart Updates

To export chart updates do the following:
1. Select the external drive where the update is to be exported to.
2. Select the export option required by
clicking on the drop arrow in the Export
field, the export options available are:
 All Objects - all manually created
chart update objects on your
workstation.
 Objects in Area - manually created chart update objects within
a specified geographic area.
 Objects in Layer - all manually created chart update objects
on a specific layer.
3. If Objects in Area is selected, the
LAT/LON fields for Southwest corner
and Northeast corner appear with all
values defaulting to zero. Define the
geographic area you want to export
from by clicking in the LAT/LON
position fields and entering values from
the screen keypad.
4. If Objects in Layer is selected, a layer field with a drop down list
appears, select the layer to be exported
from the list.
5. When the required export options have
been selected name the file to be
exported in the Filename field and click
the Export button. If successful a temporary prompt appears
confirming the export.
6. When complete remove the external device from the PC.

12-58 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Query
The Chart Query facility enables the operator
to highlight and view detailed information on
specific chart areas and geographic objects in
the video circle.
A chart query can be activated from the Chart
Query Results folder, or by right clicking on a chart object in the video circle
and selecting Query Chart from the semi-transparent window. When
Query Chart is activated in this way the query is performed at the right click
position, based on the current set of filter options, see Query Options. The
Chart Query Results folder will automatically display the object information
when Query Chart is activated.
When a query is activated the selected object, line or area is highlighted
with a suitable graphic. For a description of the different object types see
Query Results.
The Chart Query sub menu includes the following controls:
 display the results of the query and navigate to the next object
 start a new query or clear an old query
 set the query options.
With AIO enabled in Chart Settings Symbology AIO objects such as
temporary and preliminary notices relevant to the current chart display can
be rendered from the Chart Query window. For information on AIO objects
refer to Chart Query on AIO Data.

65900010 12-59
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Query Features
Query Results
The Query Results folder includes an objects list,
information panel, and navigation controls.
Objects List
The objects list displays a tree view of all the
chart objects. The objects are divided into the
following groups:
 Point - Point - includes buoys, beacons,
point dangers, lights, etc.
 Area - includes depth areas, land areas,
prohibited areas, anchorage areas, fishery
zones, etc.
 Line - includes depth contours, coastlines,
submarine cables, etc.
 Cluster - includes echo sounding spots
To display a listing of all the objects assigned to
each group click on the object group box in the
list.
Information Panel
The information area contains detailed read-only information for the
currently selected object. This includes a description of the type of chart
object selected, its chart position, and its Dataset reference number (the
chart displayed at the query position).
The information changes as other objects are selected from the Objects
list.
Selecting an Object for Query
To select a chart object for query, do the following:
1. Right click in the video circle and select Query Chart, the chart
object groups appear in the Results folder with the group the object
is assigned to in highlight.
2. To open the highlighted group list click on the down navigation
arrow.
To navigate from group to group, or within the group list click on the
up/down navigation arrows.
3. The object selected in the Results folder is highlighted on the video
circle with a graphic dependent on the group type selected.

12-60 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

a. For Points and Clusters a red circle filled with a red

shaded background is drawn around the selected
object.
b. Areas are outlined in red and filled with a red
shaded background
c. Lines are displayed in red.

At the bottom of the menu, two controls are

provided to control the display of query results and
highlighting. The Query Off button toggles
between On and Off, when activated the screen
cursor changes to a ? below the cross, the next
left click enables you to query objects directly on the screen.
After approximately 15 seconds of inactivity, the Query On cursor
times out and reverts to Query Off.
4. To clear all query results from the query menu and also clear any
highlighting from the video circle click the Clear Query button.
Query results and objects highlighted will be cleared automatically
if the range scale is changed, or another function is selected.
Show File
If the selected chart object has an embedded text file or picture file the
Show File button becomes enabled. To view the file click on Show File, the
text file or picture file appears in a separate window on the chart display.
The screen below shows an example of a text viewer window and a picture
viewer window.

65900010 12-61
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Query Options
The Chart Query Options control allows you to set
the following query options:
 Filter - search by geometry type (points,
lines, areas, arcs and/or 3D and cluster
points)
 Area Size - search area as a factor of
scale (small, medium, large)
To include the basic geometry types in chart
queries tick their check box. At least one check
box must be ticked in order to receive query
results.
The Query Area Size control allows you to select
from three different sizes of query region, all three
of which are based on the current selected range scale of the video circle.
The default values for query area size are as follows:
 Small = 10% of the range scale
 Medium = 20% of the range scale
 Large = 30% of the range scale
Chart Query on AIO Data
When the AIO checkbox is ticked in Chart Settings Symbology, AIO objects
that are associated with one or more AVCS ENC chart in the current
display will be rendered when accessed from Chart Query. Chart filtering
modes will not affect the display of AIO objects.
AIO data is provided as temporary notices, preliminary notices or No
Information objects. Details of AIO data may be displayed in either a
secondary window, either as text or pictorial representation.
Displayed AIO data is listed in the Update tab of Chart Legend, providing
detail about the AIO objects that were added and removed during each
weekly update.
To display AIO data objects, do the following:
1. From the Chart Query window select the area on the chart where the
AIO data object resides. Preliminary Notice and Temporary Notice
AIO area objects are rendered with a solid red boundary line and red
dotted pattern fill. No Information AIO area object are rendered with
a solid grey boundary line and a grey dotted pattern fill.
2. When the AIO object is selected in the Results tab of Chart Query
the Show File button becomes enabled.

12-62 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

3. Click the Show File button. A secondary window opens showing

details of the notice, either as a chart text viewer or where there is
pictorial representation, a chart picture viewer.

A Chart Picture Viewer displaying a graphic image will include a button to

automatically scale the picture file to fit the viewer window.
4. To scale the picture to fit the chart picture viewer window tick the
Auto-Size Image to Fit check box. The graphic file is re-sized.

65900010 12-63
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Dangers
A safety checking feature continuously searches the chart database and
mariner objects database for objects that could endanger the safety of own
ship. For a description of this feature, see Safety Checking.
Safety Checking must be configured as an optional feature in system
configuration before the operator can view chart dangers, see Chapter 1
`Configuration' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.

WARNING!

SAFETY CHECKING WILL NOT BE APPLIED TO AN AREA OF AIO

DATA (FOR INFORMATION ON AIO REFER TO CHART
SYMBOLOGY ON PAGE 12-35). NORMAL SAFETY CHECKING
WILL CONTINUE TO APPLY TO THE ENC CHARTS THAT THE AIO
IS ASSOCIATED WITH.

When safety checking detects a dangerous object a red flashing `Chart

Dangers' alarm appears in the Alert Status Indicator and the Dangers icon
to the right of the Alert Status Indicator is displayed with a red background.

A list of dangerous objects is shown in the

Dangers window, which can be accessed by either
left clicking on the Dangers icon in the upper
toolbar, or by clicking on Dangers in the Charts
sub menu list.
The list of dangerous objects is divided into
Dangers and Cautions. The objects are displayed
in order of age, with the most recently to least
recently discovered.
Dangerous objects in the list can be viewed in a
number of ways, either:
1. Click on the individual items within the list;
2. Navigate up and down the list using the
up/down arrows;
3. To mark all listed objects as viewed click
on the Mark All As Viewed button.
As each object item is highlighted its red
background is removed, a detailed description is

12-64 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

given below the list and the danger object is highlighted in the video circle.

When all dangerous objects have been acknowledged in the Dangers

window the red background is removed from the Dangers icon, although
the objects will remain listed. The system will remove objects from the
Dangers list if it has been 120 seconds or more since own ship's safety
region and a particular dangerous object last overlapped.

Chart Dangers Information

The chart dangers information area at the
bottom of the window gives detailed information
on each dangerous object selected. This
information will include the following:
 Object Type - e.g. Depth Area, Caution
Area
 Latitude/Longitude position of object
 Database - the chart database, e.g. SevenCs S-57.
 Chart - the reference number of the nearest chart to the dangerous
object.
Depth area information will additionally include the following data:
 Depth Range Value 1:
 Depth Range Value 2:
The figure shown with Value 1: usually represents the minimum depth in
metres of the Depth Area. This value may be 0 or a negative value if the
depth area represents height above water (e.g., land mass or a harbour
wall).
The figure shown with Value 2: usually represents the maximum depth in
metres of the Depth Area.

65900010 12-65
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Danger Settings
The following Danger settings can be enabled, or the default values
adjusted:
 Look-Ahead Range
 Added Breadth
 Alarm on Cautions
 Display Safety Region
To change the Danger settings do the following:
The Look-Ahead range controls how far in advance
an alert is given before a specified range limit is
reached. This range may be defined either as time
(minutes), or distance (nautical miles). The Look-
Ahead range controls the safety region, which is
indicated as a rectangular box around own ship
(shown as white in all Day/Night modes except
Day Bright, when is it shown as black). The Look-
Ahead rectangle follows the COG from own ship.
The length of the safety region represents the time,
or distance, own ship will travel, based on current SOG.
On a multi- node system the look-ahead range is distributed and persisted
across all nodes.

CAUTION:

Profiles that adjust look-ahead time, but not look ahead distance
will have no immediate effect on the size of the safety checking
region if look-ahead distance is currently selected. Profiles
created in versions before the look-ahead distance parameter was
available may be edited so that the look-ahead distance
parameter is taken into account.

1. To change the look-ahead time or distance click on the respective

radio button, the active field toggles depending on the selection
made. To change the time or distance, click in the field and move
the trackball right to increase the value up to 60 minutes or 10 NM,
or decrease to a minimum of 0 minutes or 0.0NM, see below. As
the look-ahead value is increased or decreased the safety region
lengthens or shortens and the area the system checks for dangers
is adjusted.

12-66 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

In some circumstances it may be desirable for the operator to select a zero

value for Look-Ahead time or distance, for example, when ownship is in a
crowded harbour area. If a zero value is selected a `Minimal Safety
Region' caution is generated. The caution is removed from the Alerts list if
the time is increased to at least 1 minute, or the distance to at least 0.3 NM.

Safety region alerts in the Dangers window are suppressed when

zero Look-Ahead time/distance is selected.

As the safety checking is done periodically there is a delay of a few

minutes for dangers in the dangers list to time out after the look
ahead range has been adjusted. This prevents the same dangers
from being added or removed from the list, and re-alarming due to
fluctuations in the ship's course.

Added Breadth enables a safety region width to be added to either side of

own ship’s beam. The value defines the safety breadth from ship's beam in
metres that the system checks for dangerous objects (for example,
underwater obstructions) that are shallower than the Shallow Contour
specified in Chart Depths/Heights.
If no added breath is defined (i.e. the value is set at 0)
then safety checking is to the beam of the ship. Unlike
Look Ahead range no caution is generated when
added breadth is at 0.
2. To change the value click in the Added Breadth field and move
the trackball left or right. As the safety breadth is changed the width
of the safety region either side of the ship’s beam changes
accordingly.
3. The default setting for the generation of Caution alerts is off. To
display alarms for cautions tick the Alarm On Cautions check box.
4. To display the safety region tick the Show Safety Region check
box. If the Look-Ahead value or added breadth is changed, the
length and width of the safety region adjust accordingly. As own
ship moves across the screen, the line is redrawn every 30
seconds.
When there is a difference between the COG
and the Heading the safety region will display a
dog legged rectangle, this being the calculated
safety region taking into account the different
COG and HDG values. If the COG and HDG
bearings are the same the safety region
rectangle is drawn as straight lines.

65900010 12-67
Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart 1
The Chart 1 facility provides access to the
SevenCs and C-Map Chart 1 catalog and the
SENC color diagram.
The Chart 1 Catalogs and Color Diagram
windows are only available when the system is
in Standby.

Chart 1 Catalog
This feature provides a Chart 1 symbol catalog for SevenCs and C-Map
Presentation Library.
The catalog acts as a legend so the mariner can look up specific
information, such as names and descriptions, about symbols on the chart.
To access the Chart 1 catalog, do the following:
1. Click on either the SevenCs Chart 1 Catalog button or C-Map
Chart 1 Catalog button. The Chart 1 Catalog appears as a
moveable window, which can be resized to occupy as much of the
screen as required.
2. The catalog is alphabetically divided into symbol categories. To
access the categories click on the arrow to the right of the Chart 1
Category field and select from the drop down list.
3. To view information on a particular symbol click on the chart
symbol. Information for that symbol appears in the Symbol
Information field.

12-68 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Color Diagram
The color diagram ensures that any adjustments made to the brightness
and contrast settings on the VisionMaster monitor will enable the SENC
data, such as coastlines, safety contour and other objects to be adequately
displayed.
To access, click on the Color Diagram button.
For a description and additional access to the color diagram, see Chart
Symbols in Chapter 13, Brilliance.

65900010 12-69
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Datum Code

Appendix A Chart Datum Codes

The table below lists Chart Data with their identification codes.

Code Description
ABI Abidjan, Ivory Coast
ACC Leigon Pillar (GCS No 121), Accra, Ghana
ADI Adindan (30th Meridian), Sudan
AFG Afgooye, Somalia
AIN Ain el Abd 1970, Saudi Arabia
AMM M36 Astro 1975 adjustment, Montserrat
ANT DOS Astro A14 1977 adjustment, Antigua
ANU A4 Astro 1956, Anguilla
ARF ARC 1950, Africa
ARS ARC 1960, Africa (1960 adjustment of ARC 1950 datum)
ASC Ascension Island 1958
ASM Astro 1958, Montserrat
ASQ Astronomical Station 1952, Marcus Island
ASX Astro Secor 1966, Tarawa and Gilbert Islands
ATB Athens, Greece
ATF Astro Beacon E 1945, IWO-JIMA, Bonin Islands
AUA Australian Geodetic 1966
AUG Australian Geodetic 1984
AUS Australian National
BAT Batavia (Djakarta), Java, Indonesia
BBE Bathurst Base East End Datum, Gambia
BEQ Bermuda 1943, Bermuda Islands
BER Bermuda 1957, Bermuda Islands
BID Bissau Base North West End Pillar, Portugese Guinea
BOO Bogota Observatorio, Colombia
BUR Bukit Rimpah, Bangka Island, Indonesia
CAC Cape Canaveral, USA
CAI Campo Inchauspe 1969, Argentina

65900010 Appendix A - 1
Chart Datum Codes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Code Description
CAJ Castello Di Sao Jorge, Lisboa, Portugal (Bessel)
CAO Canton Island Astro 1966
CAP Cape Datum, South Africa
CAZ Camp Area Astro 1961-62, Antarctica
CDF Castania Delle Furie, Sicily
CGE Carthage, Tunisia
CHI Chatham Island Astro 1971, Chatham Island, New Zealand
CHU Chua Astro, Paraguay
COA Corrego Alegre, Brazil
CRA Cruz Astro 1947, Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands
CZX DOS 66 CZX6, Santa Cruz (DOS 1966-72)
DAK Dakar, Senegal
DCL DCS-3 Astro 1973 adjustment, St Lucia
DJA Djakarta New, Indonesia
DOB DOS Astro Gux1, Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands
DOM M12 Astro 1983 adjustment, Dominica, Lesser Antilles
EAS Easter Island 1967
EGT Egypt 1907
EGY Egypt 1930
ENW Eniwetok-Wake 1960, Marshall Islands
EUR European 1950
EUS European 1979
FAH Fahud, Oman (Also known as PD Oman)
FIN Final 1958, Iran
FJD Fiji 1986
FJI Fiji 1956
FLO Observatorio 1939 (Also known as Flores Astro 1939)
FOT Fort Thomas 1955, St Kitts-Nevis, Lesser Antilles
FTO Fort Thomas 1975 Adjustment, St Kitts-Nevis
GAA Gan 1970, Addu Atoll
GCA GCI Astro (IAGS 1959), Grand Cayman

Appendix A - 2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Datum Codes

Code Description
GDA German
GEN Genoa, 1908, Italy
GEO Geodetic Datum 1949, New Zealand
GIZ DOS 1968, Gizo Island, New Georgia
GOE Goenoeng Dempo, Sumatra, Indonesia
GRA Graciosa Base SW 1948
GSE Goenoeng Segara (P5) 1933, Kalimantan E
GTA Grand Turk Astro 1943
GUA Guam 1963
HEL Helsinki, Kallio Church, Finland
HER Hermannskogel, Austria
HITO XVIII Astro, Chile (Also known as Provisional South Chilean
HIT
1963)
HIU HITO XXV
HJO Hjorsey 1955, Iceland
HKD Hong Kong 1963
HKE Hong Kong 1980
HTN Hu-Tzu-Shan, Taiwan
IGB IGN (North Block, Bellevue)
IGN IGN72 Nouvelle Caledonie
IND Indian (Survey of India)
INF Indian 1954
INH Indian 1975, Thailand
IRL Ireland 1965
IST ISTS 073 Astro 1969, Diego Garcia
ITA Itarare N Base, Itajuba-Santa, Catarina
JEU British Honduras 1922
JOH Johnstone Island 1961
KAN Kandawala 1933, Lanka
KEA Revised Kertau
KEG Kerguelen Island 1949
KUS Kusaie Astro Station 3, 1951, Kusaie Island, Caroline Islands

65900010 Appendix A - 3
Chart Datum Codes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Code Description
LAP Le Pouce, Mauritius
LAT Latvia
LCA LC5 Astro 1961, Little Cayman and Cayman Brac
LIB Liberia 1964 (Roberts Field Astro)
LIS Lisboa (Castelo Di Sao Jorge), Portugal (International spheroid)
LUZ Luzon (1911), Philippines
MAS Massoua (Eritrea), Ethiopia
MDD Madrid 1853, Spain
MER Merchich, Morocco
MET Mercury Datum (Satellite Reference System Only)
MID Midway Astro 1961
MIN Minna, Nigeria
MOB Monte Mario 1875, Rome (Also known as Rome 1875)
MOD Monte Mario 1940, Rome (Also known as Rome 1940)
MOG Mogadishu, Somalia
MOZ Madzansua (Zumbo), Mozambique
MVS Monavatu 1916, Viti Levu Island, Fiji Islands
NAG Revised Nahrwan
NAH Nahrwan, Iraq
NAN Nanking 1960, China
NAP Naparima 1955, Trinidad and Tobago
NAR North American Datum 1983 (NAD83)
NAS North American Datum 1927 (NAD27)
NUM Vanua Levu, Fiji
OEG Old Egyptian, Egypt
OGB Ordnance Survey of Great Britain 1936
OGC OSGB 1970 (Scientific Network)
OGD OSGB 1980 adjustment (Scientific Network)
OHA Old Hawaiian, Hawaiian Islands
OSI Ordnance survey of Ireland (WOFO Grid)
OSL Oslo Observatory (Old), Norway

Appendix A - 4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Datum Codes

Code Description
OSN Norwegian (New)
PAC Panama Colon, Panama
PHA Ayabelle Lighthouse (Phare D'Ayabelle), Djibouti
PIT Pitcairn Astro 1967
PLN Pico de la Nieves, Gran Canaria, Canary Islands
POE Port Etienne, Mauritania
POS New Porto Santo
POT Potsdam, Germany
PRI Principe, Sinal Domorro Do Papagaio
PRP Provisional South American 1956 PSAD56
PUR Puerto Rico 1927, Puerto Rico, Greater Antilles
QAT Qatar National
QUO Qomoq, Greenland
REU Reunion
REY Reykjavik, Iceland
SAG Sainte Anne-Island IGN 1951-52, Guadeloupe, Lesser Antilles
SAN South American 1969
SAO Sao Braz, Sao Miguel and Santa Maria, Azores
SAP Sapper Hill 1943, Falkland Islands
SCK Schwarzeck, Namibia
SEG Segura, Borneo
SEI South East Island, Seychelles
SFO San Fernando Observatory, Spain
SGA ISTS 061 Astro 1968, S Georgia
SGM Selvagem Grande 1938, Madeira
Service Hydrographique et Oceanographic de la Marine 1984 (SHOM
SHO
1984), Martinique
SIL Sierra Leone 1960
SMG GS8 Astro 1953, Grenada, Lesser Antilles
SOA South Asia
SOO Sao Tome
STO Stockholm, Sweden

65900010 Appendix A - 5
Chart Datum Codes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Code Description
SWA South West Africa
TAN Tananarive Observatory 1925, Malagasy Rebublic
TEC Tete, Mozambique
TIL Timbalai 1948 (datum point), Sabah (Bessel 1841)
TIV Timbalai 1948 (datum point), Sarawak + Brunei (Everest)
TOK Tokyo, Japan
TOY Tokyo Astronomical Observatory (Old) 1918
VAR Varesmae (System 1937), Estonia
VID HMS Vidal 1967 Astro
VIN Vienna (Hermanskogel)
IGN 1957 (South Block, Tanna), Vanuatu (Also known as Tanna Astro
VLE
1957)
VOA Fort Charlotte, St Vincent
WAK Wake Island Astro 1952
WGC World Geodetic System 1972 (WGS 1972)
WGD World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 1984)
YAC Yacare, Uruguay
YED Astro Yendegaia
XXX OSI & OGB
YYY IRL & OGB. These codes are used where a chart has been compiled
by fitting information on more than one datum directly to the chart
graticule without making adjustments for the shift between the datums.
They indicate that, at the scale of the chart, such differences are not
plottable, and the chart may be regarded as being on either datum.
UND Undetermined Code. UND is used where it cannot be stated with any
degree of certainty that positions read from the chart can be related to
any one horizontal datum. Where it is possible to separately identify
the datums to which different parts of the chart are referred, then the
chart will be subdivided for geographic referencing purposes. In
practice, there are large parts of the world where insufficient data
exists to relate a chart to any specific horizontal datum.

Appendix A - 6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Brilliance

Chapter 13 Brilliance
Brilliance Menu
The Brilliance menu provides access to the
following functions:
 Day Night Modes
 Brilliance Groups
 Chart Symbols
 Brightness Check

65900010 13-1
Brilliance Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Day and Night Modes

The Day / Night modes function enables you
to select the correct colour setting for optimum
display purposes in various lighting conditions.
The colour modes include two daylight
settings, one dusk and two night time settings.
The current setting is shown with its radio
button highlighted.
To select a different setting click on the radio
button to the left of the setting, the screen
colours change relevant to the day, dusk or
night mode selected.
Alternatively, click on the Up/Down BRILL buttons on the Control Panel to
brighten or darken the colour setting.
When the colour setting is changed the Brightness Check window is
activated, prompting to adjust the monitor's brightness control for optimal
setting.
If the colour setting is changed from Day Bright/Black or Dusk to Night or
Night Red the system displays a warning requesting confirmation of the
change in setting. To confirm click the Yes button on the Warning window,
or click the No button to cancel. If no confirmation is given within 10
seconds the system reverts to the previous colour setting.

Multi-node Settings
On a multi-node system changes to the day/night settings on one node are
applied to all other nodes on the system.
The commissioning engineer may configure a node not to be affected or
capable of making a global day/night setting change, and in this case the
setting will be applied to the local node only

13-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Brilliance

Brilliance Groups
This feature enables you to independently
adjust the brilliance of the following predefined
groups:
 Chart Symbols
 Mariner Objects (Nav Tools)
 Alarms / Warnings
 Routes
 ARPA / AIS data (to extinction)
 Tools (includes PI lines, rotating cursor,
constant turn radius, etc.)
 Range Rings
 Own Ship (heading line)
 EBL / VRM
 Control Panel
To adjust an individual group or all groups
do the following:
1. Position the screen cursor over the
control you wish to change.
2. Left click to make control bar active.
The bar colour will appear blue.
3. Move the trackball left or right to move
the bar to the level required.
4. Left click to set the level and de-activate
the bar adjustment. The bar will return
to its previous shaded state and display the new level.
To reset an individual brilliance group back to the default setting click on
the group's Reset button. To collectively reset all previously edited groups
click the Reset All button at the bottom of the window.

65900010 13-3
Brilliance Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Symbols
The Chart Symbols window enables access to
a colour diagram, which ensures that any
adjustments made to the brightness and
contrast settings on the VisionMaster monitor
will enable the SENC data, such as coastlines, safety contour and other
objects to be adequately displayed.

The Colour Diagram will only be available if the system is

configured for Chart Radar and the system is in Standby.

1. To adjust click on the Color Diagram button, a window appears

over the screen with 20 different background colour options and a
coloured diagonal line across each background colour.
2. While making any necessary brightness adjustments view the
visibility of the diagonal line against the background colour. If the
line becomes difficult to see the brightness/contrast setting is
inadequate for SENC data to be displayed.

13-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Brilliance

Brightness Check
The Brightness Check is a method of
accurately setting the monitor's brightness
control to an optimal setting.
The brightness check window contains a grey
box within a black rectangle. When a
brightness check is performed the operator
adjusts the monitor controls while observing
the grey box.
The LCD monitors used in the VisionMaster
system have a single brightness control. A white index line, indicating the
setting calibrated at system installation, is marked on the brightness
control.
To perform the brightness check do the following:
1. Turn the brightness control so that the white index line is at the top
position.
2. Turn the brightness control down (anti-clockwise) and observe the
grey box in the centre of the window.
3. If the box is not visible, increase the brightness setting until it can
be just distinguished in the window; or
4. If the box is clearly visible, leave the brightness control at the
indexed setting.
After the brightness check adjustments have been made, the `black level'
of the monitor is correctly set. Use the brightness control only if further
adjustment is required for visibility.

65900010 13-5
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Chapter 14 System
The System menu provides access to the
following system facilities:
 User Profiles
 Standard Settings
 Options
 Diagnostics
 Commissioning
 Time Management
 Shutdown
If selected in configuration, the System menu will also include NAVTEX,
Weather Fax and Third Party Applications.
For a description of these optional features, refer to Chapter 7 `System
Features’ in the Supplementary Features User Guide, 65900014.

65900010 14-1
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

User Profiles
The User Profiles sub-menu enables you to
create, delete, apply, save, view and update
profiles that contain node specific chart, route,
and other display settings. Saved profiles are
maintained by the system and are available after
a system restart.
Previously created and saved profiles can be
selected in the Available Profiles selection
drop down list. If no profiles have been created
this field is blank.
If no new user profiles have been created the
Apply, Delete and View/Edit buttons are greyed
out.
New profiles can be created either from the currently active display settings
or from the default system settings. A profile name must be entered in the
Create New Profile field prior to creating a new profile.

Multi-Node Functionality
The collection of available user profiles is saved and retrieved in a
database, shared between all nodes within a multi-node system. When a
profile is applied, it is generally only applied to that particular node.
Most changes made to a user profile will only effect the profile on that
node, the exceptions to this rule are changes to the following:
 Safety Depth
 Deep Contour
 Shallow Contour.
If you change any of the above values to an applied profile on one node,
this edited profile will be applied on all nodes. For information on changing
a User Profile, see `View/Edit Profiles’.

14-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Create New Profile

When creating a new user profile, you have the option of selecting values
for the various settings, and also the option of choosing whether or not a
given setting is included in your profile. For example, a profile may be
created that only contains display settings for routes, or one that only
contains settings for charts. By default, all available settings are included
in the profile.
To create a new profile do the following
1. Left click in the Create New Profile field. The screen keypad
appears.
2. Enter a profile name, use the trackball to navigate to the relevant
alpha-numeric keys and left click. When a profile name has been
entered click the OK button on the keypad. The keypad is removed
and the name entered in the Create New Profile field.
3. To create the new profile from system default settings click the
From Default Settings button. The settings list appears with all
chart and map features ticked in the Selection folder (see
View/Edit Profiles).
Or:
4. To create the new profile based on the currently selected setting
click the From Current Settings..button. The current settings for
the profile selected in the Available Profiles list appear.
5. To edit the settings refer to View/Edit Profiles.

65900010 14-3
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Available Profiles
Saved profiles in the Available Profiles list are viewed and edited in the
same way as described in View/Edit Profiles.
When a settings profile is applied, the system updates the corresponding
features with the setting values stored in the profile only on the node where
the profile was applied.
To apply a user profile do the following:
1. Select a previously created user profile
from the Available Profiles list.
2. Click the Apply button. . A temporary
prompt appears confirming that the
profile has been applied.
To delete a profile click the Delete button.
When a profile is to be deleted the system prompts to confirm, select OK to
confirm the profile deletion.
To restore all settings affected by a profile to their default values on an
individual node click the Restore Defaults button. If successful a
temporary prompt appears confirming default settings have been restored.

14-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

View/Edit Profiles
To change a Profile's settings, with a Profile created and displayed in the
Available Profiles field, click the View/Edit button. Two tab folders are
available; Editing and Selection.

View/Edit Profile – Selection

The Selection tab folder lists all the profile groups that can be selected,
once selected the group is listed in the Editing folder where user profile
settings can be defined. A default user profile will have only the first five
groups selected.
 All Chart Types - lists features
applicable to all types of chart
databases, see Chart Settings -
Symbology.
 Chart Dangers - enables selection of
an alert on chart cautions to be
generated, and look-ahead and
proximity buffer size adjustments to
be made.
 Chart Settings – enables Other (as
shown in the `Other’ display mode of
Chart Settings) or Standard (as shown
in the `Standard' display mode of Chart Settings) to be selected.
 Charting - Common - defines depth, height, contour values and IMO
display options, see Chart Depth/Heights.
 Pos/Scale/Orientation Indicators - enables selection of a Lat/Lon
grid.
 Presentation Settings – enables vector length (in minutes) to be
defined and vector type (true or relative) to be selected.
 Range Rings – enables display of range rings.
 Routes - enables selection of monitored route display settings.
 S-57 - enables selection of S-57 chart features, see Chart Settings –
Symbology.
 Target Settings – enables various target settings to be selected.

65900010 14-5
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To change profile selections do the following:

All features listed in the Profile Selection groups
are selected by default. Features may be
deselected, although once deselected in the
Selection tab those features will not be available
to edit in the Editing tab.
To deselect profile features:
1. To deselect individual profile features
open the navigation tree by ticking the
group sub menu check box and untick
the check boxes of the individual
features that are not required.
2. To select all the features in the
Selection list click the Select All
button, or to deselect all the features,
including the selected profile settings,
click the Deselect All button.
3. Click the Save button to confirm
selection changes, or click the Cancel
button to return to the previous screen.

14-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

View/Edit Profile – Editing

The features selected in the Selection tab folder will be available for editing
in the Editing tab folder. Note that if a feature has been deselected in
Selection it will not appear in the Editing folder.
To edit a user profile, do the following:
1. To select or deselect a profile feature tick
(or untick) the feature’s check box.
2. To change a value (for example, distance
or time):
a. Click in the required field, the text
becomes green (editable).
b. Move the trackball left to decrease the
value or right to increase the value, with
the required value entered left click to
exit edit mode.
3. To select from a number of feature options
(for example, Distance and Time, or Vector
type) select the radio button.
4. When custom settings have been made click on the Save button. The
settings are saved and the menu returns with the edited profile
highlighted in the Available Profiles list.
5. To cancel any profile setting changes click the Cancel button.

65900010 14-7
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Standard Settings
The Standard Settings facility lists a set of
collision avoidance settings that the operator
can select to be applied when in Radar or
Chart Radar watch mode.

On a Multi-node system the Standard

Settings facility is not available on ECDIS
nodes, or on Server nodes that are part
of a Client/Server Radar (CSR) system.

The collision avoidance settings, their

function, standard value and applicability
(system wide or local node only) are listed in
the table below.
To apply the standard control settings click the
Confirm button. A temporary prompt will
appear confirming that the standard collision
avoidance settings have been successfully
applied.
To hide the table of settings click the Hide
Settings button. The table is removed and the
button changes to Show Settings.

14-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Setting Function Standard Applicable

Value

Off centring Centre or Max view Max

Motion True motion (TM) or Relative motion TM54
mode (RM)
Presentation Display mode: North Up, Course N UP55
Mode Up, Head Up (Stabilised and
Unstabilised)
Range Range scales: 0.125 NM to 96 NM 6 NM56
Node
EBL2 Electronic Bearing Line (2 of 2) Off
VRM2 Adjustable Variable Range Marker Off
(2 of 2)
EBL1 Electronic Bearing Line (1 of 2) On
VRM1 Adjustable Variable Range Marker 0.25 N
(1 of 2)
Range rings Off or On Off
AIS Auto- Activate when CPA/TCPA/BCR On
activation limits infringed System
AIS input Display and input of AIS targets: On On57 wide
or Off
Past Display past position dots: On or Off Off
positions
Target View all targets: On or Off On Node
Display
Acquisition Acquisition zones: On or Off Off
Lost target Raise a Lost Target alert: On or Off Off
alerts System
TCPA Time of Closest Point of Approach 12 min wide
limit to own ship

54
True Motion applied only if heading is usable and presentation stabilised. Panning is turned
off in TM.
55
North Up applied only if heading is usable. May result in Motion mode change for
compatible setting.
56
Range scale change may affect transceiver pulse length if display is a Master.
57
Applied only when not set for manual sensor or echo reference.

65900010 14-9
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Setting Function Standard Applicable

Value

CPA Closest Point of Approach limit to 2 NM System

own ship wide
Vector Time Determines length of vectors 6 min
Vector True or Relative Relative
mode
Stabilisation Ground or Water based mode Ground58
Chart Chart Filled, Unfilled, Radar Maps Off59
Display or Off
Node
Tuning Radar tuning modes: AFC or AFC60
Manual
Trails length Short, Long, Permanent or Off Long
Trails type Video trails: Relative, True Relative
Sea, rain Anti clutter settings, Auto or Manual Auto
Gain Video gain settings, Auto or Manual Auto

58
Ground referenced only applied if COG and SOG are usable.
59
Applies to Chart Radar watch mode only.
60
Will only apply when display is a Master.

14-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Options
The Options window displays a selection of
common units which are displayed when the
system is running, (e.g. metres, knots, degrees
etc.)
If the selection of units has not been enabled
for the operator at commissioning (which is the
default mode), then the Options window
displays the units as read-only information.

65900010 14-11
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Diagnostic Functions
Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menu includes the
following which have functionality for a non-
logged on user:
 PM (Performance Monitor) - can be
enabled to monitor the performance of
the system (default mode), or monitor
the receiver.
 Report - enables reports to be generated and exported to an external
device.
 DataLog - enables individual datalog files to be viewed and a datalog
zip file to be generated and exported to an external device.
 Sensor Status - displays the state of the data from the currently
selected data source, as shown on the Sensor Data Display.
 Connection Status - displays the connection status of all nodes on a
multi-node system.
 Buzzer - enables the Alarm buzzer to be tested.
 Database – this tab appears on Multi-Node and Client/Server Radar
systems only and enables synchronization to the node assigned to
include the master copy of the database.
The following diagnostic functions contain read-only information for the
non-logged on user. For a description of these functions refer to Chapter 2
`Diagnostics, Commissioning and Service Mode' in Volume 2 of the
VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.
 Time - displays transmission time and total persisted runtime data.
 Tx/Rx Config - displays configuration data on the currently selected
transceiver.
 Tx/Rx Data - displays pulse data, antenna RPM and heading marker
data on the currently selected transceiver.
 Tx/Rx BITE - displays test results from the transceiver BITE (when
connected to a BridgeMaster (BM) E or BM II transceiver).
 Version - displays version information on system components.

14-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

When a user has logged in by entering a user name and password the
following additional diagnostic features are available:
 S/W - displays version information of all operational system
software, including charting data.

Performance Monitor
The Performance Monitor folder displays the current operational
Transceiver (Tx/Rx); selected from the Radar menu, see Interswitch
Control.
Before using the Performance Monitor (PM) select the following operating
parameters:
 Master Display (Interswitch systems)
 Transmit mode
 Range scale of 12 NM
 Long Pulse (LP) transmission pulse rate
 Manual clutter selection with A/C Rain and A/C Sea set to minimum
 Radar tuning mode to AFC on
 Gain setting at optimum level (if the setting is too low or too high
the four tuning arcs may not be visible).
Performance Monitor Operation
A non-logged on user can operate the PM and adjust the monitor mode
(Receiver or System) tune levels to determine if there has been a drop in
performance.
In a multi-node system the PM monitor tuning settings are distributed and
used by other nodes on the system.
To turn on the performance monitor (PM) tick the check box next to On.
In Operator mode the PM switches off automatically after 10
seconds.
If sector blanking is active the system displays a warning prompt informing
the operator that sector blanking is inhibited while the PM is switched on.
When the PM is operational and the monitoring mode tuning level is being
adjusted, four arcs are shown on the video circle. These arcs are
approximately 0.3NM apart and start at a range of between 6NM to
10NM. The arcs extend from 290° to 320° (S Band) or from 155° to 185°
(X Band), with respect to the heading line, see the figure below.

65900010 14-13
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

The precise bearing value will alter depending on the Heading line offset
value.

To adjust the Performance Monitor, do the following:

1. Select Receiver monitoring mode by clicking the Receiver radio
button. The current tuning level is shown as a green bar.
2. Left click in the Tune bar to activate the
control and move the trackball to the left
to set the tune bar to minimum. While
adjustment is in progress the tuning bar
colour changes to blue.
3. Slowly move the trackball to the right to
display maximum presentation of the four
PM arcs that should be visible in the
following video sectors: 290° to 320° for
S -band and 155° to 185° for X-band. The number of arcs
displayed shows the current performance.
4. Select System monitoring mode and repeat steps 1 to 3.

The arcs are spaced at 5dB intervals. If during operation

performance decreases below the second arc, it shows a 10dB
drop in performance.

14-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Report
The Report folder enables you to export a system fault report to an external
device such as a USB memory stick.
You can quickly access the Reports folder by right clicking on the iHelp
button on the lower popup toolbar.

Right clicking on the iHelp button also captures a screenshot of the

current display, which is used to form part of the export option, see
below. If the Report folder is not accessed via iHelp, a screenshot of
the display is also made when the Export button is clicked.

There are four types of export options

available for reports, accessed by clicking on
the Report Options drop down arrow:
 Concise - this option will generate a
smaller report than verbose, making it
easier to transfer over slow internet
connections.
 Verbose - this default option contains
the same information as the concise
report, however more detail is
included, making the report file larger.
 Complete - this option contains all
verbose information, with the addition
of log files, over a 24 hour period.
 1 Minute Movie - this option creates
120 screenshot files, taken every half
second which comprise the 1 minute movie, the movie is then run
from an .exe file which is created with the report.

As the 1 Minute Movie option creates a file that will be larger

than 10Mb, this option should only be selected when the fault
can best be described by a series of images.

 Diagnostic Log Files - this option enables you to select one or

more diagnostic log files. To export these files refer to the
instructions below.

65900010 14-15
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

All fault report options are generated as single compressed file, with the file
extension .rpt to distinguish it as a report file. In order to access the files
within the report the file extension should be changed to .zip on the service
desktop, or on a separate PC.
The system automatically generates a default filename for the report,
based on the current date e.g. Report(2008-09-23).
To export a fault report do the following:
1. Insert an external device into the PC and select the Report tab
folder.
2. The external drive will be listed in the first navigation window, this
will typically be E:\. If any previous report files are on the device
they will be listed in the window below the device navigation tree as
.rpt files.
3. To change the file name from the default of Report (date) click in
the Filename field and, using the on-screen keypad, enter a name
for the report. The name would typically be related to the fault, i.e.
‘track fault’ or ‘video error 3’.
4. Select the report type from the three options listed above.
5. If required, enter a description of the report in the Description field.
6. Click on the Export button to generate the report. While the export
is in progress the Export button changes to display Wait... If
successful a temporary prompt will appear confirming the export.
7. When complete click the Eject button before removing the external
device.

14-16 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

To export diagnostic log files do the following:

1. Follow steps 1 to 3 in the previous procedure.
2. Select the Diagnostic Log Files radio button.
3. If required, enter a description of the log
files in the Description field.
4. Click on the Export button. An Action
Required window appears listing all the
available diagnostic log files.
5. Either select individual files by ticking their
check boxes, or select all files by clicking
the Select All button.
6. Click the OK button. While the export is in
progress the Export button changes to
display Wait... and is disabled. When the
report is successfully exported a
temporary prompt will appear confirming
the export.

DataLog
The system automatically logs all voyage data to a
single relational database management system
(RDBMS) located on the ship’s network.
The following voyage data is logged to the
database at a periodic default rate of 5 seconds:
 Sensor Information
 Own Ship Information
 Target Information
 Chart Information
 Node State
The following voyage data is logged to the
database on an event-driven basis:
 Routes Information
 Announcements Information
A copy of the configuration file is logged to the
database on Node start up. On subsequent
startups a copy of the configuration file is logged only if the file has
changed.

65900010 14-17
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

View DataLog
Individual log files can be selected from a list and their contents viewed in
table format via the Data Log Viewer.
To view datalog files do the following:
1. Click on the View Data Log button. The Data Log Viewer window
appears on the video circle (in Standby mode only).
2. To view data on a specific log file click on the Log File arrow and
select from the drop down list of xml files.

The Data Log Viewer window may include the following datalog types,
listed as tabs:
 Announcement (alarms or warnings generated)
 CCRS
 AIS Tx Safety Messages
 Chart (with the VMFT system name in brackets)
 Position Sensor
 LOP fix
 Man overboard
 Man Overboard User Modified Data
 Node selection
 Own Ship History Log
 Prompt (list of prompts relevant to the named VMFT system)
 VisionMaster Track Control (if enabled).
3. To view log data on a specific type, click on the tab. The data
displayed will include a timestamp and other information relevant to
the datalog type selected.

14-18 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Export DataLog
A copy of the datalog file can be exported to an external device, such as a
USB memory stick.
To export a datalog file do the following:
1. Insert an external device into the PC and click on the DataLog tab
folder.
2. Select the log type to be exported, this may be specific voyage
data as listed above, or All Logs, which includes all available
voyage data.
3. The time period that the export will cover defaults to 3 months back
from the current date. To change the date and time period select
the date/time values in the From and To fields and click on the
up/down arrows to move the date/time forward or back.
4. Navigate to the external device sub directory where the datalog is
to be exported to. If any previous datalog or report files are on the
device they will be listed in the field below the device navigation
tree as .zip files.
5. Enter a name for the datalog file in the Filename field.
6. Click the Export button. The system exports the datalog as a zip
file, while the export is in progress the Export button changes to
display Wait... If successful a temporary prompt will appear
confirming the export.
This process may take a long time if all logs are being exported
over an extensive period.
7. When the process is complete the Wait... button returns to display
Export and the zip file name appears in the window above the
buttons. Click the Eject button before removing the external device.

65900010 14-19
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Sensor Status
The system determines the status for received
sensor data for each of the four data types
(HDG, STW, COG and SOG) in the Sensor Data
Display.
If a multi-sensor interface is used to receive data
from other sensors, in addition to a data type,
then these sensors will also be shown in the
table. For example, one Interface may be used to
receive COG, SOG, Depth and Wind sensor data.
Sensor Data States
The data state for each sensor is shown as a table in the Sensor Status tab
folder. If the data is good the Data State column is shown as a green bar
adjacent to the sensor.
If the data associated with one or more sensors
becomes `not recently sampled' (a degraded
state resulting in the Cursor and/or Position
displays showing this data in amber) the Data
State bar also displays as amber after
approximately 15 seconds.
If the data associated with the sensor becomes
not available (an unusable state resulting in the
displays showing this data in red) the Data State
bar also displays as red after approximately 50
seconds.
The data state is restored to green when the
sensor data becomes valid.
View Sensor Status Details
To view details on the sensor status click the Details button at the bottom
of the window. A separate window displays the following sensor status
details:
 Sensor abbreviation and its description, e.g. DBT (Depth)
 Interfaces, including port ID, used to receive the sensor data
 Type of data received by the sensor (e.g. Heading data from a Gyro)
 Current status of the sensor data, i.e. Good, Nearly Available, Dead-
Reckoned or Unavailable.

14-20 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

 Unacknowledged Faults - any unacknowledged faults on the sensor

data, e.g. Uncompensated, Unaligned etc. See `Description of Sensor
Data States' for a description of all fault conditions.
 Acknowledge button (Ack), which enables faults relevant to that sensor
to be acknowledged.
 Acknowledge All Faults button. Click this button to acknowledge all
outstanding sensor faults on the system.

Description of Sensor Data States

The Sensor Status Details window also includes the option to view an
explanation for all types of data states. To use this feature click the
Condition to explain drop down button and select a data state from the
list. The window parallel to the list gives an explanation of the selected data
state.
The following table lists all data states and a description.
Data State Description
A long period of time has passed since an actual
measurement of the data was received. Since that time,
the data has been adjusted to make it correct for the
Dead Reckoned current time. However, this adjustment (performed using
a dead reckoning or estimation algorithm) may not be
very accurate. When data is dead-reckoned, it is
considered usable, but degraded.
The data is not within reasonable limits or it is changing
Implausible at an unreasonable rate. When this applies, the data is
considered unusable.

65900010 14-21
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

There is a possibility that the data is not accurate, based

on some of the information being supplied by the
sensor. For example, if position data is supplied in a
Inaccurate datum other than WGS84, and the sensor does not
supply the offset needed to adjust it to WGS84, the data
will be considered inaccurate. When this applies, the
data is considered usable, but degraded.

The sensor providing the data is indicating that the data

Invalid is not valid. When this applies, the data is considered
unusable.

The data was manually entered. When this applies, the

Manual
data is considered usable, but degraded.

The source of this data is indicating "Invalid" for some of

the samples it is providing. If a higher percentage of
samples are received with the "invalid" indication, then
Nearly Valid
the data may be indicated as absolutely invalid, in which
case it will be considered unusable. When "Nearly
Invalid", data is considered usable, but degraded.

The system has received fewer than the expected

number of samples over a recent timespan. If even
fewer samples are received, the data may become
Nearly Unavailable
"Unavailable", in which case it will be considered
unusable. When "Nearly Unavailable", data is
considered usable, but degraded.

Position sensors can be configured for a maximum

figure of merit. If a position sensor indicates that its
Over the FOM position data has a figure of merit greater than the
Limit configured maximum figure of merit, then the system will
indicate that the data is "over the FOM limit", which
results in the data being considered degraded.

There is a possibility that the data is not valid, usually

because no mechanism is being applied to ensure that
the data was not corrupted during transmission. For
Questionable example, this may be indicated if the NMEA messages
providing the data have no checksum (if the system is
configured to allow such messages). Questionable data
is considered usable, but degraded.

14-22 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

The data is received in a form that requires alignment,

and this alignment has not been performed yet. This
Unaligned would typically apply to heading data received via a
synchro or stepper interface. When this applies, the
data is considered unusable.

No data is being received from the source or too few

Unavailable samples have been received recently. When this
applies, the data is considered unusable.

The system could not adjust the data to be valid at the

consistent common reference point (CCRP) for the ship.
This adjustment is often referred to as a lever arm
correction. This is easiest to understand as it applies to
position data. When the system receives position data
from a GPS, the position applies to the position of the
Uncompensated
GPS antenna, and must be adjusted to apply to the
CCRP. If the system has no heading data, it cannot
perform this adjustment. Compensation can also apply
to course over ground and speed over ground. When
data is Uncompensated, it is considered usable, but
degraded.
The data does not match the data received via other
sensors that provide the same type of data. When half
or more than half of all sensors providing a given data
type disagree with the data from one sensor, then that
sensor is considered to be "not corroborated". For
example, if we have 2 GPS sensors, and GPS1
Uncorroborated
disagrees with GPS2, then both will be "not
corroborated". If we have 3 GPS sensors, and GPS2
and GPS3 agree with each other, but disagree with
GPS1, then just GPS 1 will be "not corroborated". When
data is Uncorroborated, it is considered usable, but
degraded.

65900010 14-23
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Connection Status on a Multi-Node System

The Connection Status folder determines the connection of each node on a
multi-node system.
The connection state for all nodes on the
system is shown as a table in the Connection
Status tab folder. If a node is connected to the
network the Status column is shown as a
green bar adjacent to the node.
If a node is switched off, or disconnected from
the network, the Status bar adjacent to the
node is displayed in red.
When the node is switched on or reconnected its status bar changes to
green.

CAUTION:

The table shows the node connection status from the point of
view of the node accessed, and therefore may not be a true
indication of the current status. For example, if Connection Status
is accessed from a node that is switched off or disconnected the
table will show the other nodes with red status, even though
these nodes may well have a valid connection.

14-24 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Safe Mode
If your node has been configured to operate in Safe Mode, the node will
automatically disconnect from the network and operate as a standalone
node if it detects conditions on the network that prevent it from operating
reliably.
The operator may also manually enter Safe Mode
by clicking on the Enter Safe Mode button at the
bottom of the Connection Status tab.
This button only appears on nodes
configured for Safe Mode.
When Safe Mode is entered the node will
disconnect from the network and run as
standalone, a permanent Alarm `Safe Mode
Activated’ is generated and the button at the
bottom of the tab changes to Leave Safe Mode.
To restore normal network communications click on the button. The Safe
Mode Activated alarm is removed from the list of Alerts.

Connection Status on a Client/Server Radar System

On a Client/Server Radar (CSR) the Connection
Status folder lists all the Clients and Servers on
the system.
The status bar adjacent to the Client and Server
displays its connection status in the same way as
described previously for a Multi-Node system.

65900010 14-25
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Buzzer
The Buzzer folder enables the user to test the
operation of the buzzer, (the buzzer is located
in the Console Monitor).
To test click on the Test Buzzer button. The
alarm buzzer should sound.
If there are any problems with the alarm buzzer refer to section 7.7
`Announcements' in Chapter 1 `Configuration' of the VisionMaster FT
Ship's Manual, Volume 2.

Database
In a Multi-Node system or Client/Server
Radar system, one node is designated to
hold the master copy of a database. This
database is used to record and share
information around nodes and includes
routes, PI lines, GoTo locations, radar maps,
manual chart updates and User profiles.
If a node has been switched off or
disconnected from the system, or you are getting inconsistencies across
nodes, then nodes should be synchronised to the master node holding the
database.
This function should only be used providing the disconnected node
is NOT the node that the database is assigned to.
The tab displays the identity of the master node, to synchronize to this
node click the Synchronize to Master button.
During synchronization a Database Initializing warning is displayed
informing the operator that updates to various functions listed in Database
Synchronization are not allowed during the initialization progress.
For information on Database Synchronization see Appendix A -
`Operational Functions specific to Multi-node and Client/Server Systems’ in
Chapter 3 `Basic Operation of Radar’.

14-26 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Dual Radar – Diagnostic Functions

On dual radar the following diagnostic functions contain read-only data for
each channel:
 PM (Performance Monitor)
 TxRx Config
 TxRx Data
 TxRx BITE
To view the data for each channel click on
either Channel 1 or Channel 2 tab buttons.
In PM (Performance Monitor) the monitoring
mode (Receiver or System) tune levels may be
separately adjusted for each transceiver
channel.

65900010 14-27
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Commissioning
The Commissioning menu includes the
following functions:
 Login - enables a suitably qualified
user to access locked system
processes by entering a user name
and password.
 Tx/Rx - displays a group of settings for all the transceivers which
the display can operate.
 Video - displays the video enablement settings and read only data
transmitted by the transceiver.
 Config Update - enables your system configuration to be exported
to a external device, and a modified configuration imported back to
the system.
 Authorization - displays authorization information and product
type for the node.
 Characteristics - displays persistent static data relating to own
ship that has been entered in system configuration.
 Service - displays Communications and PCIO service information
on the system.
When a user has logged in by entering a user name and password the
following additional commissioning features are available:
 Security - enables a logged on user to create a group of members
(e.g. field engineer, ship admin or seaman).
 Additional Service diagnostic information, including diagnostic
forms for CCRS, Sensors and Time Management.
For a description of the following Commissioning functions refer to Chapter
2 `Diagnostics, Commissioning & Service Mode' in Volume 2 of the
VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.
 Login
 TxRx
 Video
 Security
 Service (additional diagnostics)

14-28 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Authorization
The Authorization tab folder displays the current
authorization status of the display.
If the authorization state is valid the following
message is displayed at the top of the tab folder:
The system is fully authorized.
The authorization folder displays a five digit
system PIN, which is encrypted when the
system is initially commissioned. The PIN is
contained on the Sperry Security Block, which is
provided and installed when the system is
commissioned.
The Sperry Security Block also contains the
product type identifier for the node, (e.g. Total
Watch or Chart Radar). This is shown in the
Product Type of This Node field.
For a multi-node system, in addition to the
security block, a security string is placed on all
nodes in the system. The security string
contains an encryption of the following:
 the System PIN
 the product types in the system and number
of nodes for each product type (e.g. 2
Radars and 1 ECDIS).
 the list of features that have been
purchased. Any features purchased from the system provider are
shown in the Purchased Features field.
Once a feature is purchased, it will be available on all nodes which are of a
compatible product type.

65900010 14-29
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Unauthorized System
If the system is not authorized the tab folder
states that the system is unauthorized and will
revert to a degraded state of functionality,
counting down from 7 days after the
authorization initially failed.
When the system is in a degraded state,
the display becomes unstabilised (Head
Up mode). In this mode there is no
target tracking or chart data available.
A temporary password can be supplied by your
VisionMaster supplier on request. The password
will contain:
 System PIN
 Product type identifier
 Expiration date (typically 30 days from the
time it is requested).
Enter the password in the Temporary
Authorisation Password field and click the
Submit button. The system verifies the
password and, if correct, the node is temporarily
authorized and a PIN is displayed.
When a password has been entered and its expiry date has not yet been
reached, the system will run as fully authorized.
When the node is running on a temporary password, a warning is given,
repeated once per day, indicating when the password will expire. After the
password expiry date has been reached, the node reverts to an
unauthorized state.
If a security block authorization fails on any node, and this is not remedied
by entry of a password the system will do the following:
 produce a warning every 15 minutes.
 run normally on that node until 7 days (calendar time) have passed
since the authorization initially failed.
 operate in a state of degraded functionality after the 7-day period
expires.

14-30 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Config Update
The Config Update feature enables the operator to export a copy of their
system configuration to an external USB memory stick. When exported, the
configuration is saved as a compressed file which can then be forwarded
as an email attachment to your system supplier, or to Northrop Grumman
Sperry Marine (NGSM) service control.
A modified configuration file can be imported to your system through the
Config Update feature.

CAUTION:

The import or export of a system configuration file should only be

implemented when requested to do so by your system supplier,
or by NGSM service control. Also, a configuration from another
VisionMaster system must NEVER be imported to your system.

Exporting a Configuration
To export a configuration do the following
1. Connect a USB memory stick to a USB
port at the front of the VisionMaster PC.
The device name appears in the Import
Configuration File field.
2. Select the device name and click the
Export button. A compressed file of the
system configuration is exported to the
device, and when complete a temporary
prompt appears confirming that the file
has been exported.
3. Click the Eject button and remove the
memory stick from the VisionMaster PC.
The configuration file is saved as `config.cfz'
which can be forward to the relevant authority.
Note that the compressed file is a standard zip
file but the file extension is non-standard in order
to bypass common email filters.

65900010 14-31
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Importing a Configuration
To import a configuration do the following
1. Connect a USB memory stick to a USB
port at the front of the VisionMaster PC.
The device name appears in the Import
Configuration File field.
2. Select the device. Any compressed
configuration file that has been copied to
the device will be displayed in the field
below, i.e. config.cfz.
3. Highlight the file. The file will be shown in
the Filename field.
4. Click the Import button. The system
proceeds to import the configuration file to
all nodes on the system. While the import process is taking place
Import, Export and Eject are disabled and the Import button
changes to Wait.. Note that the import process may take a long
period of time.
5. When the import is complete a temporary prompt appears
confirming that the file has been copied to all nodes on the system
and the Import, Export and Eject buttons are re-enabled.
6. Click the Eject button and remove the memory stick from the
VisionMaster PC.
Applying the Config Update
When a modified configuration has been imported, all the nodes on the
system will require a re-start in order to apply the modified configuration,
see Shutdown.
Note that if an exception is raised during start-up after importing a modified
configuration, the system will automatically revert to the previous
configuration at the next re-start.

14-32 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Characteristics
The Characteristics tab folder displays persistent
static data relating to own ship that has been
entered in the system configuration.
The read only data includes own ship length,
beam, height and maximum draft in metres,
design speed, maximum speed in knots and
maximum rate of turn in degrees per minute.
If more than one ship loading state has been
configured, these will be selectable from the
Loading State drop down list.
Alternate Bow in Use
If an alternate bow in use menu has been
selected in the Configuration tool the Alternate
Bow in Use check box is enabled.
Note that this feature is disabled if an external discrete signal has been
configured. For information on the alternate bow in use feature, see
Alternate Bow in the `Basic Operation’ chapter.
When the alternate bow in use is selected the following changes take
place:
 The system uses the alternate bow position as the reference point
for all data relative to ownship. This includes, for example, the
cursor readout and all position readouts.
 The heading marker offset for all top units is automatically adjusted
by 180°.
 The radar remains in transmit without adverse effects, excluding re-
building trails and re-acquiring targets.

65900010 14-33
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Service
The Service tab folder displays the following
navigation tree items:
 Communications
 Port Monitor
 Port Logging
 PCIO
 PCIO diagnostic form
The Communications sub menu enables the following data to be viewed:
 Port Monitor - view data received from a selected port and data
sent from the display to the port. Available for display to a non-
logged on user.
 Port Logging - enables data sent and received from a specified
port to be captured and timestamped. Logged data can then be
saved to an external device. Available for display to a non-logged
on user.
Port Monitor
1. To view Port Monitor data click on the Communications + button,
highlight Port Monitor in the tree menu and click on the Display
Selected button at the bottom of the tab folder. A Port Monitor
communications window is displayed which can be moved and
scaled to suit.
2. The I/O/ Port Type defaults to viewing diagnostic data on all
configured ports. To test the diagnostics on the control port only
select PCIO Control Port from the drop down list. To test the
diagnostics on all the serial ports on the PCIO select PCIO Serial
Port. The Configured Port list will display the configured port or
port types as selected in the I/O Port Type.
3. To select a port to monitor other than the currently displayed port
click on the Port drop down arrow and select from the list of
configured ports.
4. The Port Monitor window view options default to separate Received
and Sent data fields and data viewed as ASCII. To change these
default options click in the Combined button to view all data in the
same field and click in the Binary button to view data as binary
code.

14-34 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

5. With all required settings made click on the Start button. The Port
Monitor window displays real time received and sent data for the
selected port and the Start button changes to Stop.
6. To halt the port monitor process click on the Stop button. The port
monitor stops its updating based on data being sent or received. To
clear the data from the Port Monitor window click on the Clear
button.

65900010 14-35
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Port Logging
The Port Logging window lists all the currently configured ports on the
system and provides the option to capture data for the specified port.
1. To access Port Logging click on the Communications + button,
highlight Port Logging in the tree menu and click on the Display
Selected button at the bottom of the tab folder. The Port Logging
window is displayed which can be moved and scaled to suit.
2. Click the radio button as appropriate for the data used on that port.
The options are data sent from the port to the display, data
received from the display to the port and combined data
(interweaved in both directions). A timestamp is prepended to each
data message.
3. The data defaults to ASCII, to change the data to Binary click on
the radio button.
4. Logged data may be saved to an external device (memory stick)
via the Report tab folder in the Diagnostics menu.

14-36 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

PCIO Diagnostic Form

The PCIO diagnostics form records the error rate on received data from
serial input ports TSCA, TSCD and TCSE (Serial Ports 1, 2 and 3) on the
PCIO. If any data errors are received on these PCIO serial inputs the
number of error messages over a selected time period appears against the
serial input line. Any PCIO data errors are listed in a log file, which is
included in a fault report. The PCIO Diagnostic Form is available for display
to a non-logged on user.
1. To access, click on the PCIO + button, highlight PCIO diagnostic
form in the tree menu and click on the Display Selected button at
the bottom of the tab folder. A Serial Input Error Level Diagnostic
Form is displayed. The form is a table with each line representing
the PCIO serial inputs listed above.
2. The number of errors received in the default time of one second will
appear on the serial input line. To change the time period over
which the errors are received, click on the drop down arrow and
select from 1 second, 10 seconds or 60 seconds.

Dual Radar – Commissioning Functions

On dual radar the following commissioning functions contain read-only data
for each channel:
 TxRx
The Video tab folder includes separate enablement settings and read-only
data for SC Board 1 and SC Board 2.

65900010 14-37
System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Time Management
The Time Management facility enables the
operator to select local date and time and set a
time zone offset from GMT .The window also
displays the sensor (e.g. GPS) used as the time
source.
The Time Management window is divided into
three areas:
 System Time - enables the selection of
or local time, (local time represents
time offset applied, if no time offset has
been applied then both UTC and local
time will be the same). The time current
time selected (UTC or Local) is
displayed in the Position tab at the
lower right of the screen.
 Local Offset - enables the input of a
local time offset from GMT in either an
East direction (offset before GMT) or a
West direction (offset after GMT).
 Time Sync Source - shows the selected time sensor used by the
system to synchronize the date and time of all nodes, valid data is
shown in green. The Select Source button enables selection of
other time sources, if configured.

Local Offset
To set a local time offset do the following
1. Select the direction of the local time offset by clicking on the East
or West radio buttons.
2. Enter the required time offset by clicking in the Hours and Minutes
fields and moving the trackball to the right, left click again to exit the
edit mode.
3. With the correct offset displayed click the Apply button. The Local
time is adjusted to the time offset applied and the Position tab
shows the local offset time.

14-38 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System

Shutdown
The Shutdown facility enables the operator to
shut down or restart a single node, or all nodes
on the system.

In Operator mode, the Service Mode

and Service Mode All buttons will be
greyed out. They will only be available
if the current operator is logged on as
a Service Engineer.

Restart System is selected if for whatever

reason the operator requires to restart their
particular node on the system. The node will
first power down and then restart. Other nodes
on the system will not be affected.
Shutdown System is only selected when the operator requires to shut
down their particular node on the system for a prolonged period of time.
Other nodes on the system will not be affected.
Restart All Systems is selected if for whatever reason the operator
requires to restart all the nodes on the system.
When Restart All Systems is selected an
Action Required message appears prompting
to enter CONFIRM in the box below. To
proceed enter CONFIRM (not case dependent)
and click the OK button. All nodes on the
system will first power down and then restart.
Shutdown All Systems is selected if for
whatever reason the operator requires to shut
down all the nodes on the system for a
prolonged period of time.
When Shutdown All Systems is selected the Action Required message
appears. Enter the same password as described above.
For information on fully shutting down the system, see System Shutdown.

65900010 14-39
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex A - SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer
Detection on X-Band Radar

Annex A SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer

Detection on X-Band Radar
WARNING!

THE FOLLOWING DEVICES WILL ONLY BE DETECTED BY X-

BAND (3CM) RADAR; THEY WILL NOT BE SEEN ON S-BAND
(10CM) RADAR.

Search and Rescue Detection

Introduction
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) is a self contained, waterproof
radar transponder intended for emergency use at sea. These devices may
be either a radar-SART, or a GPS-based AIS-SART61 (Search and Rescue
Transmitter). The following sub sections describe the radar SART.
A SART may be triggered by any X-Band (3cm) radar within a range of
approximately 8 NM. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a
response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency
band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µsec) through the
band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 µsec) through the band
back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of
twelve complete cycles. At some point in the sweep, the SART frequency
will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the
radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during
each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display,
thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 NM will be shown.

61
The AIS-SART is a self contained radio device used to locate a survival craft or distressed
vessel by sending updated position reports using a standard AIS class A position report.
The AIS-SART derives position and time synchronization from a built in GNSS receiver and
transmits its position with an update rate of one minute.

65900010 A-1
Annex A - SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
Detection on X-Band Radar

When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 NM, the radar display
may also show the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These
additional dot responses, which are also equally spaced by 0.64 NM, will
be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly
weaker and smaller than the original dots.

Radar Range Scale

When looking for a SART, it is preferable to use either the 6 or 12 NM
range scale, see Range Scales. This is because the total displayed length
of the SART response of 12 (or 24) dots may extend approximately 9.5nm
beyond the position of the SART and it is necessary to see a number of
response dots to distinguish the SART from other responses.

SART Range Errors

When responses from only 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the
SART is at a range greater than about 1 NM), the position at which the first
dot is displayed may be as much as 0.64 NM beyond the true position of
the SART. When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are
seen also, the first of these dots will be no more than 150 meters beyond
the true position.

A-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex A - SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer
Detection on X-Band Radar

Radar Bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulse length and is usually switched
with the range scale and the associated pulse length. Narrow bandwidth of
3-5 MHz are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide
bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges.
A radar bandwidth of less than 5MHz will attenuate the SART signal
slightly, so it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum
detection of the SART, see Radar Transmission Pulse Length.

Radar Side Lobes

As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show
the SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be
removed by the use of the anti-clutter sea control although it may be
operationally useful to observe the side lobes as they may be easier to
detect in clutter conditions and also they will confirm that the SART is near
to own ship.

Detuning the Radar

To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter
conditions, the radar may be manually detuned
to reduce the clutter without reducing the SART
response. For information on manual tuning adjustment see Radar, Radar
Fine Tuning.

CAUTION:

Care should be taken in operating the radar in a detuned

condition as other wanted navigational and anti-collision
information may be removed. The tuning should be returned to
normal operation as soon as possible.

65900010 A-3
Annex A - SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
Detection on X-Band Radar

Video Gain
For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range
detection should be used, i.e. with a light background noise speckle visible,
see Video Processing Controls.

Anti-Clutter Sea Control

For optimum range SART detection this control should be set to the
minimum. Care should be exercised as wanted targets in sea clutter may
be obscured.
Note that in clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response may
not be detectable, irrespective of the setting of the anti-clutter sea
control. In this case, the position of the SART may be estimated by
measuring 9.5 NM from the furthest dot back towards own ship.
Because of the way in which the automatic sea control functions, it is
advisable to use manual control initially until the SART has been
detected. The effect of the auto sea control on the SART response can
then be compared with manual control. For information on manually
adjusting sea anti-clutter control see Video Processing Controls.

Anti-clutter Rain Control

This should be used normally (i.e. to break up areas of rain) when trying to
detect a SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by
the action of the anti-clutter rain circuitry.
Because of the way in which the automatic rain control functions, it is
advisable to use manual control initially until the SART has been
detected. The effect of the auto rain control on the SART response can
then be compared with manual control. For information on manually
adjusting rain anti-clutter control see Video Processing Controls.

A-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex A - SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer
Detection on X-Band Radar

Radar Beacons
Radar Beacons (RACONS) are receiver/transmitter devices operating in
the radar frequency bands 9 and 3 Ghz. RACONS are used to enhance the
detection and identification of certain radar targets. RACONS are used
primarily in the following areas:
1. ranging and identification of locations on inconspicuous coastlines
2. identification of aids to navigation, both seaborne and land based
3. landfall identification
4. indicating centre and turning point in precautionary areas
5. marking hazards
6. indicating navigable spans under bridges
Upon receiving a pulse signal from an X-Band radar, the RACON transmits
back a Morse-coded signal at the same transmission frequency of the X-
Band radar, and leaves a signal on the ships radar display indicating its
own position.
RACON transmissions, which are often in the form of long signals, will be
affected by the use of anti-clutter rain control.

65900010 A-5
Annex A - SARTs, Beacons & Target Enhancer Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
Detection on X-Band Radar

Target Enhancer Detection

A Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) is designed to respond to X-Band radar by
receiving a transmitted pulse, amplifying the pulse and re-transmitting the
pulse back to the radar at the same frequency.
The RTE is primarily intended for small vessels up to 25 metres in length
with no radar fitted and typically should enhance the vessel's RCS (radar
cross section). For small craft, improvements will start to be seen at around
1 to 2 miles, extending to 8 to 10 miles or more depending on prevailing
conditions. The response of the RTE will vary according to range, RTE and
radar height above sea level, radar power and condition. Poor weather, sea
state and precipitation will greatly reduce the response.

A-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex B – Static Site

Annex B Static Site

Static Site Description
Static Site is an optional facility that allows for a stationary installation. This
is intended for small single node installations (for example, an oil rig) and
larger multi-node, land based Vessel Traffic Services (VTS) installations.
When configured, a Static Site system will apply to all nodes in a multi-
node system.
A Static Site may operate without a live compass or position input. Any
alerts that are generated for non-static site systems will not apply to Static
Site systems.
The following topics are covered in this Annex:
 Static Site Features - includes a table of features specific to Static
Sites and a table of features not available to Static Sites.
 Static Heading - how to manually enter a static heading bearing.
 Static Position - how to enter a position value manually, or
automatically update to a GPS position.
 Target Anchor Watch - enables an anchor watch to be assigned to
a target.
 Target Based Range and Bearing - enables a displayed target's
position to be taken as the EBL/VRM position.

65900010 B-1
Annex B – Static Site Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Static Site Features

Features specific to a Static Site
The following table lists features specific to a Static Site facility.

Feature Additional details

Verifies that vessels at anchor are not drifting by

Target Anchor Watch
assigning an anchor watch to a target.

Target Based Range and A displayed target's position is taken as the

Bearing EBL/VRM origin.

Features not available to a Static Site

The following table lists the features which are available in a standard
radar/chart radar installation, but not available to a Static Site facility.

Feature Additional details

Motion Mode Motion mode is always RM True Trails
The stabilisation mode is fixed at Ground
Stabilisation Mode
Stabilised.
No unstabilised presentation mode. North Up, or
Presentation Mode a user defined Course Up presentation mode are
available.
The only sensor data type available is Static
Sensor Data Display Heading, which defaults to 000.0. Speed/course
and set and drift values are unavailable.
Route menu and route tab unavailable in the
Routes
Status area.
Trial Manoeuvre tab unavailable in the Status
Trial Manoeuvre
area.
Ownship synthetics data and Next Turn EBL data
Display Settings unavailable. Only Lat/Lon grid available in
Display Settings.

B-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex B – Static Site

The following navigation tools are unavailable:

 Lines Of Position
Navigation Tools  History Tracks
 Anchoring
 Man Overboard
Static position only. Own ship dead reckoning
Position Data
and position offset unavailable.
Target Autodrop or Echo Reference selection
Target Display Functions
unavailable.
Target Limits and Settings Bow Crossing limits and settings unavailable.
Own Ship AIS Own ship AIS data unavailable
Other watch modes (ECDIS, CID, CAM,
Watch Modes Playback) not available, although CID pages are
available on a wide screen static site display.

65900010 B-3
Annex B – Static Site Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Static Heading
On start up, the static heading value
defaults to 000.0. As a Static Site may
operate without compass input, the heading
value is always displayed as green (valid).

To obtain correct orientation of a static site picture in North Up the true

bearing at which the heading line is pointing needs to be entered.
Any heading marker offset for a transceiver will also affect this
setting and will consequently also need adjusting. For details see
Chapter 2 `Diagnostics, Commissioning and Service Mode’ section
3.3 `Tx/Rx Settings’, in the VisionMaster Ships Manual, Vol 2
To enter a heading bearing:
1. Right click on the HDG Sensor Data Display in the top left of the
screen and tick Select HDG Source. The Heading Sensor Source
window appears.
2. Click on the Static heading button, which
shows the current value in white. An
`Action Required’ window opens.
3. The `Action Required' window prompts to
enter a bearing. Either move the trackball
left or right to scroll to the correct value and
then left click. Or, enter the bearing value
using the drop down keypad, click OK
when complete.
The manually entered heading is saved in
system memory and will persist when the
system is re-started.

Heading Line
A heading line representing the bearing can be temporarily
displayed by clicking and holding down on the HL button at the
top right of the screen (left of the Alert Status Indicator). The
heading line is removed from the screen when the button (left
or right) is released.

B-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex B – Static Site

Static Position
At start up, the static position LAT/LON values
default to 00º North and 000º East. As a Static
Site may operate without position input, the
position value is always displayed as green
(valid).
A position value may be entered manually, or
automatically connect to a GPS sensor, if
available, to obtain an initial position.
To enter a position bearing:
1. Navigate to the Position Sensor Data Display in the Sensors menu
The Position folder appears.
2. To update the static site position to the
values defined by a GPS sensor click the
Update to GPS button. The GPS
LAT/LON values are entered.
3. To manually enter LAT/LON values click
in the Static fields. The text becomes
editable (green) and the numeric keypad
appears.
4. Enter the required LAT/LON position from the
keypad and click the keypad OK key. The values
appear in the Static LAT/LON fields and the
keypad is removed.
The manually entered position is saved in system memory
and will persist when the system is re-started.

65900010 B-5
Annex B – Static Site Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Target Anchor Watch

Target anchor watch enables the operator to verify that vessels at anchor
are not drifting by assigning an anchor watch to a target.
An anchor watch comprises a dotted line circle centred on the target's
anchor position, and a small anchor symbol next to the target's symbol.
Any targets may be selected for anchor watch. If a sleeping AIS target is
selected, the AIS target is made active.
To create a target anchor watch, do the following:
1. Right click on the target to be selected for
anchor watch. From the semi-transparent
context window click Select Anchor
Watch. An anchor watch circle is drawn,
centred on the target's position.

The anchor watch circle radius defaults to 0.20 NM. To change the radius
for each target independently:
1. Select the target and navigate to the Target Data folder of the
Selected Target sub menu. When Anchor Watch is enabled, this
folder shows additional Target Anchor Watch data at the bottom of
the window.
2. To change the radius left click in the
Circle Radius field, hold down the left
key and move the trackball left to
decrease the circle size, or right to
increase. The range is from 0.05 to 1.0
NM.
If a target exits its anchor watch area, the watch circle, anchor symbol and
target bearing line change to a flashing red colour and a
Target Anchor Drift alarm is raised. When the Target
Anchor Drift alarm has been acknowledged, the symbol
and lines stop flashing but continue to be shown in red.

To remove an individual anchor watch on a target right click on the target

symbol and select Remove Anchor Watch from the semi-transparent
context window.

B-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex B – Static Site

To remove all anchor watch selections, navigate to

Multiple Targets and select the Anchor tab. The
anchor folder lists the ID number of all targets with
an anchor watch, the radius of the watch circle and
the target drift in percentage terms. Targets
showing >100% drift in orange are outside the
anchor watch area.
Click the Remove All Selections button at the
bottom of the folder to remove all anchor watch
selections from the Multiple Targets list and chart
display.
Any Target Anchor Drift alarms associated with a
target are cleared when the anchor watch selection is removed.

Target Based Range and Bearing

An ERBL may be dropped on a selected target. The target's position is then
taken as the ERBL origin.
To drop an ERBL on a target:
1. Right click on the required target, this may
be a tracked target or an activated AIS
target, and select Adjust EBL/VRM1 from
the context menu. An ERBL is created with
its origin at the centre of the target.
2. To adjust the range and bearing of the
ERBL move the trackball, left click to select
the values. The ERBL origin continues to
update with the target position, both while the range & bearing
adjustment is taking place and also after the range & bearing
values have been selected.
The range & bearing values of the ERBL remain constant after they are
selected. The values of the ERBL may be re-adjusted at the EBL/VRM
readout. For details, refer to Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) and Variable
Range Marker (VRM) in Chapter 9.
If the selected target is dropped or cancelled, the ERBL reverts back to
normally offset and is dropped at the last target position.

65900010 B-7
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary

Glossary
A
Activated Target: A symbol representing the automatic or manual
activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional
graphically presented information including: a vector (speed and
course over ground); the heading; and ROT or direction of turn
indication (if available) to display actually initiated course changes.
AFC: Automatic Frequency Control (fine tuning)
AIS: Automatic Identification System. A system capability which enables
ships and shore stations to obtain identifying and navigation
information about other ships at sea, using an automated
transponder.
Antenna: Slotted waveguide array for transmitting and receiving
microwave signals. 10cm S-band (9 or 12ft aperture) or 3cm X-
band (4, 6 or 8 ft aperture).
Anti-clutter: Removal of unwanted reflections on the radar screen caused
by rain, sleet etc. (see Clutter).
ARCS: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A service of British Admiralty,
suppliers of electronic charts with world coverage, in the HCRF
data format.
ARPA: Automatic Radar Plotting Aid – a system wherein radar targets are
automatically acquired and tracked and collision situations
computer assessed and warnings given.
ATON: Aid To Navigation (AIS nav symbol).
AZ: Acquisition Zone
Azimuth (AZ): The number of degrees from North (or other reference
direction) that a line runs, measured clockwise.

65900010 Glossary-1
Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

B
BA: British Admiralty.
Backup Navigator Alarm: The Backup Navigator Alarm is affected by
activating a commissioned PCIO relay output by way of an active
alarm.
BCR: Bow Crossing Range
BCT: Bow Crossing Time
BIST: Built-In Self-Test
BITE: Built in Test Equipment
Bulkhead Transceiver: Transmitter/Receiver mounted below decks with
microwave or co-axial connection to the Turning Unit.

C
CAM: Central Alert Management watch mode
CCTV: Closed Circuit TV, used for real-time streaming video to be
displayed.
Chart Database: Structured collection of chart data sufficient for safe and
efficient navigation on an ECDIS or Chart Radar system.
Chart Format: The industry standard the defines the structure of a
chart database (e.g. the ENC chart database uses the S-57
format).
CID: Conning Information Display watch mode
CMAP: CMap Cartographic Service. Commercial supplier of vector-format
navigational charts, which are not fully compliant with ECDIS
standards as defined by IMO.
CMAP dongle: Used to represent a license for CMAP charts and the
CMAP chart engine.
C UP: Course-up
CCRP: The Consistent Common Reference Point is a location on own ship,
to which all horizontal measurements such as target range,
bearing, relative course, relative speed, closest point of approach

Glossary-2 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary

(CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA) are referenced.

Typically the CCRP is the conning position of the ship’s bridge.
CD ROM: Compact Disk Read-Only Memory.
Checksum: A numeric value used to verify the integrity of a block of data.
When data is transmitted from point to point in a packet, the
sending computer counts the bytes and adds a check digit at the
end of the packet. The receiving computer calculates the bytes
received and compares the sender's count with the receiver's count
to determine if there is any change that might indicate tampering
with the information.
CHS: Canadian Hydrographic Service
Clutter: Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, commonly from rain,
snow or sleet.
CM93v3: CMAP's proprietary and unofficial chart format.
COG: Course Over Ground
COLREG: Convention of the International Regulations for the Preventing
of Collisions at Sea.
Course-up (C UP): Stabilised display – the ship’s bearing is shown at the
top of the chart display with the North arrow pointing in the direction
of true north.
CP: Critical Points on a route.
CPA: Closest Point of Approach [to own ship]
CRT: Constant Radius Turn
CSE: CourSE [through water]

D
Datum: Any point, line, or surface used as a reference for a measurement
of another quantity.
DC: Digitized Chart. A data format for electronic charts that are made
using a digitizer device with paper navigational charts. On ships
equipped to make digitized charts, these charts can be used for
operating in areas for which electronic charts from official or

65900010 Glossary-3
Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

commercial sources are not available. Digitized charts do not

conform to any standards for chart display.
DGPS: Differential GPS (see also GPS). Position sensor intended for
precise commercial navigation in coastal waters. The DGPS
employs an additional receiver for the reception of correction
signals from a land-based transmitter to be applied to the satellite-
based GPS position information.
Display Unit: The Display Monitor, Processing Unit and Controls.
DnV: Det norske Veritas. Independent maritime organization performing
classification, certification, quality-assurance and in-service
inspection of ships and mobile offshore units with the objective of
safeguarding life, property and the environment.
Dongle: A small hardware device that, when plugged into a computer,
enables a specific program to run on that computer. The program
is disabled, or operates in a degraded mode if the device is not
present.
DR: Dead Reckoning – A method of estimating the position of a ship
without astronomical observations, as by applying to a previously
determined position the course and distance traveled since.
DTG: Distance To Go. Distance to next action, such as a turn, while
running a Route Plan.
Dual Radar: A dual radar system can connect to two scanner units at the
same time, enabling the overlay of radar video from both scanners
to form a composite display. Each radar video source is known as
a `Channel’.

E
EBL: Electronic Bearing Line. An EBL control is used to show the relative
or true bearing of a target on the display. The EBL is moved with
the cursor, and the bearing is read of the screen in degrees. One
end is always anchored, either at the centre of the screen or at a
operator-defined point on the display.
ECDIS: Electronic Chart Display and Information System. A standard of the
International Maritime Organization (IMO), governing electronic
navigational systems.

Glossary-4 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary

ECS: Electronic Charting System. A chart display system that does not
comply fully with the ECDIS standard as defined by IMO.
ENC: Electronic Nautical Chart. Chart data conforming to specification
published in IHO Special Publication No. 57 (S57). Charts
complying with this specification are available from various
suppliers.
ENC (C-MAP): Official S-57 encrypted charts converted to CMAP's
proprietary chart database format.
ERBL: Electronic Range and Bearing Line
ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD: Estimated Time of Departure

F
FPD: Flat Panel Display

G
Gain: The ratio of the signal output of a system to the signal input of the
system expressed in dB. A gain of 10 would imply that the signal
power had increased by a factor of 10. There are two general
usages of the term in radar: (a) antenna gain (or gain factor) is the
ratio of the power transmitted along the beam axis to that of an
isotropic radiator transmitting the same total power; and (b)
receiver gain (or video gain) is the amplification given a signal by
the receiver.
GGA: NMEA sentence which provides the GPS current fix data.
GMT: Greenwich Mean Time. The international time standard, based on
local standard time at longitude 0º 0' 0" (in Greenwich, England).
Also called Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
GNSS: The Global Maritime Distress Safety System is an internationally
agreed set of safety procedures, types of equipment, and
communication protocols used to increase safety and make it
easier to rescue distressed ships, boats and aircraft.

65900010 Glossary-5
Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

GPS: Global Positioning System. A system by which receivers anywhere

on earth can obtain accurate position data. The term "GPS" is also
used to refer to the receiver device.
Great Circle (GC): A circle drawn around the Earth such that the centre of
the circle is at the centre of the Earth. Following such a circle plots
the shortest distance between any two points on the surface of the
Earth.
GZ: Guard Zone

H
H UP: Head-up
Hawsepipe: A metal pipe on the ship through which an anchor rope
passes.
HCRF: Hydrographic Chart Raster Format. Electronic format used for BA-
ARCS charts.
HDG: Heading
Head-up (H UP): Unstabilised display – the ship’s heading marker is
always shown vertically upwards indicating straight ahead
movement.
Heading Line: Line that projects forward showing where own ship is
headed relative to the targets seen on the video circle.
Heading Marker: A heading marker on the display provides an important
reference to direction. When the antenna is pointing ahead, it
sends a pulse to the radar display that causes a line to show on the
screen that represents the vessel's head. You can refer echoes
displayed on the screen to your vessel's head and get the relative
bearing of the echo. If the heading marker is not pointing exactly
ahead, relative bearings will be wrong. You can quickly check for
any such mistake by heading toward a small prominent visible
object and see if the radar echo appears under the heading
marker.
HL: Heading Line
HM: Heading Marker
HO: Hydrographic Office. Refers to any national hydrographic office.

Glossary-6 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary

HSC: Heading-to-Steer Command. Heading order sent to an autopilot

from an external electronic navigation aid, such as the ECDIS.

I
IHO: International Hydrographic Office. IHO has developed an ENC
product specification as the standard for ECDIS data, and has
published this specification in its Special Publication No. 57 (S-57).
IMO: International Maritime Organisation
Integral Transceiver: Transmitter/Receiver housed in the Turning Unit.
Interswitch Unit: Enables radar systems to be connected together so that
any Display Unit may be connected to any Scanner Unit.
I/O Interface: The collection of components that define the hardware,
protocols, and formats used to communicate with an interfaced
device. This will include a set of I/O Ports (in most cases, this will
be a set of one).
I/O Port: A logical channel through which data is transferred, which may
handle protocols needed to pass the data, but functions with no
cognizance of the meaning of the data involved. A common
example is a serial (RS-232) communications port.

K
Km: Kilometre (1000 metres)
Kn: Knot (one nautical mile per hour – 1.15 mph)

L
LAN: Local-Area Network
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display
Local Time Offset: Offset between local time and UTC.
Look-Ahead range: Controls how far in advance an alert is given before a
specified range limit is reached.
LOPs: Lines Of Position, used to determine the geographic location of
own ship.

65900010 Glossary-7
Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Lost Target: A target representing the last valid position of a target before
its data was lost. The target is displayed by a “lost target” symbol.
LP: Long Pulse (available from 3 NM and upwards)

M
m: Metre
Magnetron: Device that is comprised of an electric circuit inside a strong
but variable magnetic field, designed to generate coherent
microwaves.
Master Display: A Master Display has complete control over a
Transceiver. A Transceiver can only have one Master Display. A
Master Display can only have one Transceiver.
Mercator: Default chart projection, used to display geographic areas
between 0 degrees and 80 degrees latitude north or south.
MMSI: Maritime Mobile Service Identity
MOB: Man overboard
Monitor: The viewing unit, a Flat Panel Monitor (also known as FPD or
LCD).
MP: Medium Pulse (available in range of 0.5 NM to 24 NM).
Multi-node system: A number of workstations, linked by a LAN,
which have been configured as specific product types.
Multi-target Tote: A display panel showing details of multiple acquired
targets.

N
N UP: North-up
Navline Interface: Interface to Navline Maps facility.
NAVTEX: A Client/Server application running externally to VisionMaster
which is used to broadcast marine safety information to ships with
a NAVTEX receiver.

Glossary-8 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary

NIMA: National Imagery and Mapping Agency. An agency of the United

States government, supplying navigational charts to the United
States Navy.
NM: Nautical mile – The nautical mile is closely related to the
geographical mile which is defined as the length of one minute of
arc on the earth's equator. By international agreement, the nautical
mile is now defined as 1852 meters (1.15 standard miles).
NMEA: National Marine Electronics Association. An association of
manufacturers that has published widely used standards for
navigation and other marine sensor communication. Their
published standards include NMEA 0183, Standard for Interfacing
Marine Electronic Navigational Devices, Version 1.5, December
1987, and Version 2.0, January 1992. This standard is commonly
referred to as simply "NMEA 0183." The ECDIS is designed to use
messages from any navigation, weather, or machinery sensor that
conforms to this standard.
NOAA: National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. Agency of the
US government, supplying navigational charts. NOAA charts are
available in S-57 format.
North-up (N UP): Stabilised display – the bearing scale shows 000° at the
top of the chart display (assumed to be True North). The ship’s
heading marker is shown at the appropriate bearing.

P
PAD: Predicted Area of Danger
Parallel Index Lines (PI): A set of parallel lines placed on the video circle
to aid navigation.
Parity: An error-checking procedure in which the number of 1s must
always be the same – either even or odd – for each group of bits
transmitted without error.
Past Position Dots: Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked
or reported target and own ship. The co-ordinates used to display
past positions may be either relative or true.
PCB: Printed Circuit Board
PCIO: PC Input/Output

65900010 Glossary-9
Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

PM: Performance Monitor

Polar Stereographic: Chart projection used to display any region of the
earth, including the north and south poles (up to 90 degrees north
or south).
POS: Position
PPI: Plan Position Indicator
PRF: Pulse Repetition Frequency – the number of radar pulses
transmitted each second. The pulse transmission rate is
automatically lengthened for longer ranges.
Product types: A small set of defined products, any one of which the
VisionMaster application can function as. Product types apply to
individual nodes.
Proximity Limit: The proximity limit defines the safety breadth from own
ship's path that the system checks for dangerous objects.
PSU: Power Supply Unit

R
RADAR: Radio Detection and Ranging
RAIM: Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
RAM: Random Access Memory. Memory used in computer systems.
RAM is volatile memory, which does not hold data when the power
is turned off.
Range Rings: A set of concentric circles labelled by distance from the
central point, useful for judging distance (especially from own ship).
Relative Motion – Relative Trails: Own ship is shown at a fixed point on
the display (normally the centre). All target trails are shown relative
to own ship’s movement. This means stationary targets will have
trails if own ship is moving.
Relative Motion – True Trails: Own ship is shown at a fixed point on the
display (usually the centre). Target trails show their direction.
Stationary targets do not produce trails
RF: Radio Frequency

Glossary-10 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary

Rhumb Line (RHL): A line on a sphere that cuts all meridians at the same
angle; the path taken by a ship or plane that maintains a constant
compass direction
RM(R): Relative Motion – Relative Trails
RM(T): Relative Motion – True Trails
ROT: Rate of Turn
Route: A set of waypoints that define the intended path of travel.
RR: Range Rings

S
S-band: The S-band, or 10 cm radar short-band, is the part of the
microwave band of the electromagnetic spectrum ranging roughly
from 1.55 to 5.2 GHz.
S57: Internationally accepted standard for electronic charts in the ENC
vector-format. ENC data is standardized according to ECDIS
specifications published in IHO Special Publication No. 57. Charts
complying with this specification are available from various
suppliers.
S57 PIN: Is used to generate a 16-character string which represents the
encrypted hardware ID portion of the S-57 User Permit.
S63 Chart permit file: A file generated by the data manufacturer that
is used, in conjunction with an S63 permit code to decrypt chart
data for a particular set of ARCS charts or S57 cells.
S63 permit code: A code that identifies a license for using S57 charts.
This is sometimes referred to as the S57 User Permit.
SAR: Search and Rescue craft (AIS nav symbol).
SART: Search and Rescue Transponder
SCAMIN: An attribute (defined by the IHO S-57 standard) that can be used
to tag ENC chart features to be suppressed above a certain display
scale.
Scanner Control Unit: A unit which switches power to the S-band Turning
Unit, under the control of the Display.
Scanner Unit: Comprises the Antenna and Turning Unit.

65900010 Glossary-11
Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

SCU: Scanner Control Unit

SENC: System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC) means a database
resulting from the transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for
appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and
other data added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually
accessed by ECDIS for the display generation and other
navigational functions, and is the equivalent to an up-to-date paper
chart. The SENC may also contain information from other sources.
Sentence: a self contained line of data
SevenCs: chart engine format
Slave Display: Display that is used to observe a radar image. It has limited
functionality.
Sleeping Target: A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation
of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. No additional
information is presented until activated thus avoiding information
overload.
SM: Statute mile – A mile as measured on land, 5,280 feet or 1.6
kilometres. Distances at sea are measured in nautical miles.
SOG: Speed Over the Ground. Actual measured speed of advance of a
vessel over the surface of the earth.
SOLAS: Safety of Life At Sea. A set of conventions adopted by the IMO
and all of its signatory countries in 1974. These conventions
regulate many of the features of ships used in international trade,
including navigation equipment and its functionality.
SP: Short Pulse (available in scale ratio of 1:32 and below)
Sperry security block: A dongle used to identify a VM system
(through a PIN), and identify permits for charts that are licensed on
a system-by-system basis.
STBD: Starboard
STD: Standard Display. The standard set of chart objects (buoy
information, conspicuous landmarks, etc.) specified for ECDIS
display, in compliance with IMO standards.
STW: Speed Through Water. Ship's speed, as measured relative to the
water.

Glossary-12 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary

System PIN: Personal Identification Number that uniquely identifies a

system.

T
T BRG: Target Bearing/True Bearing
Target: Object of interest on a radar display. Targets can be labelled
(acquired) and tracked.
TCPA: Time to Closest Point of Approach [to own ship]
TM: True Motion
TO-Waypoint: The waypoint to which the ship is approaching
TO-Wheel-over: The wheel-over to which the ship is approaching
Total Watch: A Total Watch system will have access to additional product
types from the Watch Mode button.
Trial Manoeuvre: Facility used to assist the operator to perform a
proposed manoeuvre for navigation and collision avoidance
purposes, by displaying the predicted future status of all tracked
and AIS targets as a result of own ship’s simulated manoeuvres.
Trigger PCB: A control board housed in the Transceiver. It controls the
Modulator, Magnetron and sends signals to the Display to indicate
when the magnetron has fired a pulse.
TRP: Temporary Route Plan
TRServer: Transceiver/Server (Client/Server Radar)
True Motion: Own ship moves across the video circle. Stationary targets
do not produce trails.
TTG: Time To Go. Time to next action, such as a turn, while running a
Voyage Plan.
TTMG: Track To Make Good. In the context of the ECDIS, TTMG denotes
a temporary plan which may be activated at any time, and which by
default consists of a 500 nm track line on present heading.
Turning Unit: Contains the Antenna rotation motor, the microwave rotary
joint, and may contain an integral Transceiver.
TX BIST: Transceiver Built-In Self Test

65900010 Glossary-13
Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

TX COMMS: Transceiver Communications

TxRx: Transceiver

U
UTC: Universal Time Coordinated – the international standard of time,
kept by atomic clocks around the world. Formerly known as
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), local time at zero degrees longitude
at the Greenwich Observatory, England. UTC uses a 24-hour
clock.

V
Variable Range Marker (VRM): An adjustable range ring used to measure
the distance to a target. When the VRM is adjusted over the
leading edge of a return with the cursor control, the distance to the
object is shown on the screen.
Vector: Direct connection between two points, either given as two sets of
coordinates (points), by direction and distance from one given set
of coordinates (True Vector), or a point in a vector space defined
by one set of coordinates relative to the origin of a coordinate
system (Relative Vector).
Vigilance Alarm: A system alert generated when the operator fails to give
evidence of fitness.
VPF: Vector Product Format charts (SevenCs chart format)

W
Watch Alarm: The purpose of a watch alarm system is to monitor bridge
activity and detect operator disability which could lead to marine
accidents. The system monitors the awareness of the Officer of the
Watch (OOW) and automatically alerts the Master or another
qualified OOW if for any reason the OOW becomes incapable of
performing the OOW's duties. This is achieved by a series of
indications and alarms to alert first the OOW and, if no response,
then to alert the Master or another qualified OOW. Additionally, the
watch alarm may provide the OOW with a means of calling for
immediate assistance if required.

Glossary-14 65900010
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary

The watch alarm should be operational whenever the ship's

heading or track control system is engaged, unless inhibited by the
Master.
Watch Mode: See Total Watch.
Waypoint: A geographical location (for example, latitude and longitude) on
a route indicating a significant event on a vessel’s planned route
(for example, course alteration point, calling in point, etc.).
Weather Fax: An external device that receives weather images and
navigational data from a built in radio receiver and displays the
information on a web page.
WGS-84: World Geodetic System 1984. Chart datum specified in
accordance with the IMO ECDIS standard.
Wheel-over: The geographic location, represented by a line where
rudder movement should be activated to accomplish a planned
turn. The wheel-over line may be displayed perpendicular to the
approaching track or parallel to the departing track of each turn.
Wobbulation: Low frequency modulation of the Pulse Repetition
Frequency (PRF) to help suppress interference.

X
X-band: The X-band (3 cm band) of the microwave band of the
electromagnetic spectrum roughly ranges from 5.2–10.9 GHz. The
relative short wavelength at X-band frequencies makes possible
high-resolution imaging radars for target identification and target
discrimination.
XTD: Cross Track Distance is the distance to anchor track.
XTE: Cross-Track Error. The distance by which the ship's actual position
deviates left or right from the Route Plan track.

Z
Z-order: Refers to the order of objects along the Z-axis.

65900010 Glossary-15